Be Eie 2015

B.E.
(Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering)

2015 Regulations, Curriculum & Syllabi
BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai
Approved by AICTE - Accredited by NBA New Delhi, NAAC with A Grade and ISO 9001:2008 Certified)
SATHYAMANGALAM 638 401 Erode District Tamil Nadu
Phone : 04295 226000 Fax : 04295 226666
Web:www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail : stayahead@bitsathy.ac.in
CONTENTS
Page No.
Regulations i
PEOs xxiii
POs xxiv
Mapping of PEOs and POs xxv
Connectivity Chart xxvi
Curriculum 2015 1
Syllabi (I VIII Semesters) 9
Electives 143
B.E. / B.Tech. Rules and Regulations 2015
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 i
REGULATIONS 2015
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
(Common to all B.E./B.Tech. Degree Programmes)
Regulation 2015 has been prepared in accordance with the guidelines given by the University
Grants Commission, All India Council for Technical Education and affiliating University
incorporating the features of the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS). The Regulation 2015
is applicable to the candidates admitted to the Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of
Technology (B.Tech.) Degree Programmes of the Institution in the academic year 2015-2016
for Regular admission (Academic year 2016-2017 for Lateral Entry) and subsequently.
The regulations hereunder are subjected to amendments as may be decided by the Academic
Council of the Institution from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective
from such date and to such batches of students (including those already in the middle of the
programme) as may be decided by the Academic Council.
1. ADMISSION
Candidate, seeking admission to the B.E./B.Tech. Programme, shall satisfy the conditions
of admission prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education and Anna University,
Chennai as given below.
1.1 Regular Admission
Candidates, for admission to the first semester of the eight semesters B.E./B.Tech.
Degree Programmes, shall be required to have passed:
Higher Secondary Examination (10 +2) of Curriculum (Regular Academic
Stream) prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu with Mathematics,
Physics, and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of the study prescribed
under Part-III or any other examinations of any Board or University or
authority accepted by the Syndicate of the University / Directorate of
Technical Education (DoTE), Chennai as equivalent thereto.
(or)
Should have passed Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational Stream
(Engineering/Technology), prescribed by the Government of Tamil Nadu.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 ii
1.2 Lateral Entry Admission

1.2.1 The candidates who possess Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Tamil Nadu or its
equivalent are eligible to apply for Lateral Entry admission to the third semester
of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes in the branch of study as per the eligibility
criteria prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education from time to time.
(or)
1.2.2 The candidates who possess the Bachelor Degree in Science (B.Sc.) (10+2+3
stream) with Mathematics as a subject in B.Sc. is eligible to apply for Lateral
Entry admission to the third semester of B.E./B.Tech. Programmes, as per the
eligibility criteria prescribed by the Directorate of Technical Education from
time to time. Such candidates shall undergo two additional Engineering
subject(s) one each in third and fourth semesters, as bridge courses.
2. PROGRAMMES OFFERED
A candidate may be offered admission to any one of the programmes offered by the
Institution for the candidates specified in Clause 1.1 and as per the eligibility criteria of
DoTE for the candidates under Clause 1.2 from the list given below:
B. E. Programmes
i. Aeronautical Engineering
ii. Agricultural Engineering
iii. Automobile Engineering
iv. Civil Engineering
v. Computer Science and Engineering
vi. Electrical and Electronics Engineering
vii. Electronics and Communication Engineering
viii. Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
ix. Mechanical Engineering
x. Mechatronics
B. Tech. Programmes
i. Biotechnology
ii. Fashion Technology
iii. Information Technology
iv. Textile Technology
v. Food Technology
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 iii
3. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME

3.1 Every programme shall have a distinct curriculum with syllabi consisting of theory,
laboratory, mini-project, life-skills and personality development courses, as
prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies, broadly categorized under:
(i) Basic Science courses including Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and further
specialization in these subjects
(ii) Basic Engineering courses including Engineering Graphics, Workshop
Practices, Basics of Electrical, Electronics, Civil, Mechanical Engineering,
Engineering Mechanics and Computer Programming.
(iii) Humanities and Social Science courses including Language Courses,
Management Courses, Life Skills and Professional Ethics.
(iv) Professional Courses include Discipline Core Courses, Professional Electives,
Core Electives and Open Electives.
(v) Employability Enhancement Courses (EEC) include Project Work and /or
Internship, Seminar, Industrial /Practical Training, Value Added and Certificate
Courses.
The assortment of different courses shall be designed that the student, at the end of
the programme, would be able to be trained not only in his / her relevant
professional field but also as a socially mindful human being.
The medium of instruction is English for all the Courses, Examinations, Seminar
Presentation, Projects and any other courses that a student registers for.
3.2 Each course is normally assigned a certain number of credits, with 1 credit per
lecture period per week, 1 credit for 2 periods of tutorial, 1 credit for 2 periods of
laboratory courses, and 1 credit for 2 periods of seminar/project work per week.
3.3 A Diagnostic Test will be administered to all the B.E. / B.Tech. students after the
admission to assess the proficiency in English and based on the score they will be
brought under two streams namely, Stream A and Stream B. Students under Stream
A will study Communicative English I and Stream B will study Basic English I
under Language Elective I in the First Semester. In the Second Semester, Stream A
will be further divided into two categories based on their English language
proficiency assessed in the Continuous Assessment, while the upper segment can
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 iv
enroll and study German / Japanese / French / Chinese / Hindi and the remaining
students of that Stream will study Communicative English II. The students under
Stream B will study Basic English II or may opt for Communicative English II
based on the assessment carried out at the end of the semester I.
3.4 Every student shall be required to opt for Nine electives from the list of electives.
Students can opt for the electives (Core / Professional / Open Elective) from any
branch of B.E/B.Tech. Programmes, besides his / her own discipline courses, during
V to VIII Semesters, if he/she satisfies the prerequisite for that particular course.
3.5 However, out of nine electives, every student shall be required to opt for, a
minimum of three electives as open electives from the list of open electives of the
branch / branches other than his / her branch of specialisation. There shall be no
pre-requisite course(s) for such open electives.
3.6 Students can also opt for one-credit courses of 15 to 20 hour duration, which will
be offered by the experts from the industry on specialised topics. Students can opt
for such one-credit courses during the semesters I to VII as and when these courses
are offered. A student will also be permitted to register the one-credit courses
offered by other Departments, provided the student has fulfilled the necessary pre-
requisites or the courses that may not require any pre-requisites. Under no
circumstances, the same one credit course shall be repeated in subsequent semesters
in any Department / Centre and a maximum batch size for a given course shall not
exceed 40. In the case of disciplines with multiple divisions (intake more than 60)
different course(s) shall be offered to other batch(es) of students.
On successful completion of one credit courses, Credits will be indicated in the
Grade Sheet, but will not be considered for computing the Cumulative Grade Point
Average (CGPA). However, if a student wishes to avail the exemption from any
one of the Electives (other than open elective) of the Semester VIII, he / she can do
so by exercising his / her option in writing to the respective Head of the Department
during the beginning of the VIII Semester, following the equivalence norm, that
one regular elective (in the VIII Semester) is equivalent to three one-credit
courses completed by the student during the previous semesters, IV to VII. Details
of the one credit courses offered by the department shall be forwarded to the Office
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 v
of the Controller of Examinations. However one credit courses completed during I

to III semesters shall be maintained in the Grade sheet as Additional credits
earned (not considered for the computation of GPA/CGPA).
3.7 Fast Track System shall enable students to undergo a semester-long Internship or
Special Training during Semester VIII. A student who secures a minimum CGPA of
8.50 in Semester IV with no current arrears, as on that date and maintains the
CGPA of 8.50 till VI Semester without any arrears shall be eligible to opt for Fast
Track System and such student is required to complete three elective courses
satisfactorily, while completion of Semester VII, as additional Credits during the
semesters V to VII.
3.8 Every student shall be required to carry out a Project Work in the Department /
Industry or by exercising Fast track during VIII Semester in consultation with the
Faculty Guide and submit the project report, in the prescribed format, at the end of
the VIII Semester for the valuation.
3.9 A student can register for Self-Study Elective(s) over and above the electives from
any branch of Engineering / Technology at the rate of one per semester starting
from V semester onwards provided he/she maintains a Cumulative Grade Point
Average (CGPA) of 8.50 or above till the previous semesters with no current
arrears. Credits will be indicated for such courses in the grade sheets (additional
credits) but will not be considered for computing the CGPA.
3.10 A Student may be permitted to credit online courses with the approval of the
Departmental Consultative Committee constituted by the Head of the Department,
subject to a maximum of three credits. Such students may be exempted from
attending the classes, if such course(s) are offered in the semester. Summary of such
on-line courses, taken by the students, along with the offering agency shall be
presented to the Academic Council for information and further suggestions.
However, those students need to obtain certification from the agency / agencies
offering the course, to become eligible for writing or seeking exemption (core
elective course) from the End Semester Examination. In case of credits earned
through online mode, from the other Institute / University, the credits may also be
transferred directly after due approval from the Departmental Consultative
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 vi
Committee and the Office of the Controller of Examinations. A student can get
exemption for a maximum of 3 credits during the entire programme (in lieu of
Discipline elective or Open elective).
4. VALUE ADDED COURSES / ADD-ON COURSES

A Student can opt for the Value Added Courses / Add-on Courses offered by the various
Department / Centres for which the batch size will not exceed 40 per course from
Semester II to VII. Head of the Department / Centre shall submit the list of such courses,
duly approved / ratified by the Academic Council, to the Controller of Examinations to
administer the examination process. A separate Certificate will be issued on successful
completion of the course by the Office of the Controller of Examinations.
5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A regular student (admitted after 10+2) or equivalent is normally expected to
satisfactorily fulfil the requirements for award of the degree B.E. / B.Tech. within
four academic years (8 semesters) from the date of admission but in any case not
more than 7 years (14 Semesters); lateral entry students shall fulfil such
requirements within three academic years (6 semesters) from the date of admission
but in any case not more than six years (12 Semesters) leading to the award of
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of
Anna University, Chennai.
5.2 The total period for completion of the programme from the commencement of the
semester, to which the student was admitted, shall not exceed the maximum period
(Clause 5.1), regardless to the break-of-study (vide Clause 15) or period of
prevention in order.
5.3 Each semester shall consist of minimum 90 working days or 450 periods of 60
minutes each or equivalent. Head of the Department shall ensure that every faculty
member teaches the subject / course as prescribed in the approved curriculum and
syllabi.
5.4 Special Theory / Practical Sessions may be conducted for students who require
additional inputs over and above the number of periods normally specified
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 vii
(Remedial Classes), as decided by the Head of the Department, within the specified
duration of the Semester / Programme.
6. COURSE ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION

6.1 Each student, on admission shall be assigned to a Faculty Advisor (vide Clause 8)
who shall advise / counsel the student about the details of the academic programme
and the choice of course(s) considering the students academic background and
career objectives.
6.2 Every student shall enroll for the courses of the succeeding semester, in the current
semester. However, the student shall confirm the enrollment by registering for the
courses within the first five working days after the commencement of the semester
concerned.
6.3 After registering for a course, a student shall attend the classes, satisfy the
attendance requirements, earn Continuous Assessment marks and appear for the
End Semester Examinations.
6.3.1 Each student, on admission to the programme, shall register for all the courses
prescribed in the curriculum in the first Semester of study (III Semester for
students admitted under lateral entry stream).
6.3.2 The enrollment for all the courses of the Semester II will commence 10 working
days prior to the last working day of Semester I. The student shall confirm the
enrollment by registering for the courses within the first five working days after
the commencement of the Semester II. In the case, if a student fails to register in
the course(s), he/ she may be permitted to register the same, as specified in the
Clause 6.5, in the subsequent semesters or when it is offered.
6.3.3 The enrollment for the courses of the Semesters III to VIII will commence 10
working days prior to the last working day of the preceding semester. The
student shall enroll for the courses with the guidance of the students Faculty
Advisor. If a student wishes, the student may drop or add courses (vide Clause
6.4) within five working days after the commencement of the semester
concerned and complete the registration process duly authorized by the Faculty
Advisor.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 viii
6.4 Flexibility to Add or Drop courses

6.4.1 A student has to earn the total number of credits specified in the Curriculum of
the respective Programme of study in order to be eligible to obtain the degree.
However, if a student wishes, the student is permitted to earn more than the total
number of credits prescribed in the curriculum by opting for one- credit courses,
self study electives or additional courses.
6.4.2 From the III to VIII semesters (from IV to VIII Semesters in case of lateral
entry students), the student has the option of registering for additional courses or
dropping existing courses. Total number of credits of such courses cannot
exceed 6 in a given Semester. However the maximum number of credits that a
student can register in a particular semester shall not exceed 30 credits
(regardless to the reappearance credits). In such cases, the attendance
requirement as stated Clause 7 is mandatory.
6.4.3 The minimum number of credits that a student can register in a particular
semester shall not be less than 18 credits (except VII / VIII semester).
6.4.4 The student shall register for the project work in the VIII semester only.
6.5 Reappearance Registration
6.5.1 If a student fails in a theory course, the student shall do reappearance
registration (Examination) for that course in the subsequent semesters or when it
is offered next.
6.5.2 On registration, a student may attend the classes for the reappearance
registration courses, if the student wishes, and the attendance requirement (vide
Clause 7) is not compulsory for such courses.
6.5.3 However, if a student wishes to improve his/ her continuous assessment, in the
second attempt during reappearance, shall satisfy the Clause 6.5.5 and appear
for continuous assessment as given for that particular course.
6.5.4 If the theory course, in which the student has failed, is either a professional
elective or an open elective, the student may register for the same or any other
professional elective or open elective course, respectively in the subsequent
semesters. However, the change of elective courses is permitted only once.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 ix
6.5.5 In this case (Clause 6.5.4), the student shall attend the classes, satisfy the
attendance requirements (vide Clause 7), earn Continuous Assessment marks
and appear for the End Semester Examination.
6.5.6 The student who fails in any Laboratory Course/ Project work / Seminar or any
other EEC courses (Specified in Clause 3.1) shall register for the same in the
subsequent semesters or when offered next, and repeat the course as per Clause
6.5.5.
6.5.7 If a student is prevented from writing the end semester examination of a course
or several courses due to lack of attendance, the student has to register for that /
those course(s) again, when offered next, attend the classes and fulfill the
requirements as per Clause 6.5.5 & 6.5.6. If the course, in which the student has
lack of attendance, is a Core Elective or an Open Elective, the student may
register for the same or any other Core Elective or Open Elective course(s)
respectively in the subsequent semesters and appear in the examination as per
Clause 6.5.5.
7. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR THE END SEMESTER

EXAMINATION OF A COURSE
A student who has fulfilled the following conditions (vide Clause 7.1 and 7.2) shall be
deemed to have satisfied the attendance requirements for appearing for End Semester
Examination of a particular course.
7.1 Every student is expected to attend all the periods and earn 100% attendance.
However, a student shall secure not less than 80% attendance (Physical presence)
course wise taking into account the number of periods required for that course as
specified in the curriculum.
7.2 If a student, secures attendance between 70% and 79% in any course(s) in the
current semester due to medical reasons (prolonged hospitalization / accident /
specific illness) or participation in Institution/ University/ State/ National/
International level extra and co-curricular activities, with prior permission from the
Head of the Department, shall be permitted to appear for the current semester
examinations subject to the condition that the student shall submit the medical
certificate / participation certificate attested by the Head of the Department (along
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 x
with Condonation form). Such certificates along with the condonation forms shall
be forwarded to the Controller of Examinations for verification and permission to
attend the examinations. However during the entire programme of study, a student
can avail such Condonation in any two semesters only (regardless the number of
courses).
7.3 A student shall normally be permitted to appear for End Semester Examination of
the course(s) if the student has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide Clause
7.1 7.2) and has registered for examination in those courses of that semester by
paying the prescribed fee.
7.4 Students who do not satisfy Clause 7.1 and 7.2 and who secure less than 70%
attendance in a course will not be permitted to write the End-Semester Examination
of that course. The student has to register and repeat this course in the subsequent
semesters or when it is offered next (vide Clause 6.5).
7.5 In the case of reappearance registration for a course (vide Clause 6.5), the student
has to register for examination in that course by paying the prescribed fee.
7.6 A student who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of
grades.
8. FACULTY ADVISOR
To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the
academic programme, the Head of the Department will attach a certain number of
students to a Faculty member of the Department who shall function as Faculty Advisor
for those students. The Faculty Advisor shall advise and guide the students in registering
of courses, reappearance of courses, monitor their attendance and progress and counsel
them periodically. If necessary, the Faculty Advisor may also discuss with or inform the
parents about the progress / performance of the students concerned.
9. COMMITTEES
9.1 Common Course Committee
9.1.1 A theory course handled by more than one faculty including the discipline with
multiple divisions (greater than or equal to 2 ) shall have a Common Course
Committee comprising of all members of faculty teaching that course with one
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xi
of the members as the Course Coordinator, nominated by the Head of the

Institution (Head of the Department in the case of multiple divisions of a
discipline) and student representatives (one per specialization or division)
registered for that course in the current semester.
First meeting of the Common Course Committee shall be held within fifteen
days from the date of commencement of the semester. Two subsequent
meetings in a semester may be held at suitable intervals. During these meetings,
the student members shall meaningfully interact and express their opinions and
suggestions of all the students to improve the effectiveness of the teaching-
learning process. It is the responsibility of the student representatives to convey
the proceedings of these meetings to all the students.
9.1.2 In addition, Common Course Committee (without the student representatives)
shall meet to ensure uniform evaluation through the common question papers
during Continuous Assessment and End Semester Examinations.
9.2 Class Committee Meeting
For all the courses taught, prescribed in the curriculum, Class Committee meeting
shall be convened thrice in a semester (first meeting within 15 days from the
commencement of the semester and other two meetings at equal interval after the
first meeting) comprising members of the faculty handling all the courses and two
student representatives from the class.
One of the members of the faculty (preferably not handling any courses to that
class), nominated by the Head of the Department, shall coordinate the activities of
the Committee. During these meetings, the student members shall meaningfully
interact and express their opinions and suggestions of all the students to improve the
effectiveness of the teaching-learning process. It is the responsibility of the student
representatives to convey the proceedings of these meetings to all other students.
10. SYSTEM OF EXAMINATION

10.1 Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous
Assessment throughout the semester and (ii) End Semester examination at the end
of the semester for the regular courses or as given in the Clause 16. However, the
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xii
final examination in the case of one credit courses / certificate / value added courses
may be conducted, as and when the course is completed, through the office of the
Controller of Examinations.
10.2 Each course, both theory and practical including project work, shall be evaluated as
per the Scheme of Assessment given in Clause 16.
10.3 The End Semester Examinations shall normally be conducted after satisfying the
Clause 5.2. Supplementary Examinations may also be conducted, at such times, for
the benefit of the students as decided by the Controller of Examinations.
10.4 For the End Semester examinations, both theory and practical courses including
project work, the internal and external examiners (from Academia or Industry) shall
be appointed by the Controller of Examinations as per the guidelines given by the
Examination and Evaluation Board of the Institute.
11. PASSING REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS

11.1 A student who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for a course,
vide Clause 16, comprising a minimum of 50% of the marks prescribed for the End
Semester Examination, shall be declared to have passed the course successfully and
earned the prescribed credits for that course, applicable for all registered courses.
11.1.1 If a student fails to secure a pass in a particular course, i.e., failing to obtain
minimum marks, as stated above, it is mandatory that he/she shall register and
reappear for the examination in that course in the subsequent semester(s)
whenever the examinations are conducted for that course, till he / she secures a
Pass.
11.1.2 Continuous Assessment (CA) marks obtained by the student in the first
appearance shall be retained and considered valid for one subsequent attempt,
except Clause 6.5.4, 6.5.5, 6.5.6 and 6.5.7. However, from the third attempt
onwards, the student shall be declared to have passed the course if he/she
secures a minimum of 6 Grade Points (B Grade) in the course prescribed during
the End Semester Examinations.
11.2 The minimum number of total credits to be earned by a student to qualify for the
award of Degree in the various branches of study as prescribed by the respective
Boards of Studies is given below:
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xiii
Minimum Credits
Branch of Study Regular Lateral
Admission Entry
B.E. Programmes
Aeronautical Engineering 178 134
Agricultural Engineering 177 133
Automobile Engineering 179 134
Civil Engineering 176 131
Computer Science and Engineering 176 131
Electrical and Electronics Engineering 176 132
Electronics and Communication Engineering 177 132
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 177 133
Mechanical Engineering 179 135
Mechatronics 177 133
B.Tech. Programmes
Biotechnology 175 131
Fashion Technology 176 132
Information Technology 176 131
Textile Technology 175 131
Food Technology 175 131
11.2.1 Student Migration and Credit Transfer: Normalization of the Credits will be
carried out in consultation with the Board of Studies of the programme
concerned and approved by the Head of Institution, if a student migrates from
other institutions to Bannari Amman Institution of Technology or rejoins from
previous regulation to this regulation.
11.3 A student shall be declared to have qualified for award of B.E/B.Tech. Degree if
he/she successfully completes the course requirements (vide Clause 7, 10 and 11)
and passed all the prescribed courses of study of the respective programme (listed in
Clause 2), within the duration specified in Clause 5.1.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xiv
12. ASSESSMENT AND AWARD OF LETTER GRADES

12.1 The assessment shall be based on the performance in the End Semester
Examinations and / or Continuous Assessment, carrying marks as specified in
Clause 16. Letter Grades (based on Credit Point and Grade Point) are awarded to
the students based on the performance in the evaluation process.
12.2 Credit Point is the product of Grade Point and number credits for a course and
Grade Point is a numerical weight allotted to each letter grade on a 10-point scale
(as specified in the Clause 12.3), while the Letter Grade is an index of the
performance of a student in a said course.
12.3 The performance of a student will be reported using Letter Grades, each carrying
certain points as detailed below:
Range of Total Marks (as

Grade
specified in Clause 16) / Letter Grade
Points
Specific Reason
91 to 100 10 O (Outstanding)
81 to 90 9 A + (Excellent)
71 to 80 8 A (Very Good)
61 to 70 7 B + (Good)
50 to 60 6 B (Above average)
0 to 49 0 RA (Reappearance Registration)
Incomplete 0 I
Withdrawal 0 W
Absent 0 AB
Shortage of Attendance 0 SA
RA ---Reappearance registration is required for that particular course

I --- Continuous evaluation is required for that particular course in the
subsequent examinations.
SA --- shortage of attendance (Clause 7) and hence prevented from writing
end semester examination.
12.4 After completion of the evaluation process, Grade Point Average (GPA), and the
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is calculated using the formula:
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xv
C *g
n
1 i i
GPA/CGPA =
C
n
1 i
where
Ci : Credit allotted to the course.
gi : Grade Point secured corresponding to the course.

n : number of courses successfully cleared during the particular
semester in the case of GPA and all the semesters, under
consideration, in the case CGPA.
12.5 A student who does not appear for the End Semester Examinations in a course, after
registering for the same, shall be deemed to have appeared for that examination for
the purpose of classification (Subject to Clause 14 and 15).
12.6 For the non credit courses Grades shall be indicated as given in the Clause 16 and
shall not be counted for the computation of GPA/CGPA.
12.7 Photocopy / Revaluation: A student, who seeks the re-valuation of the answer
script is directed to apply for the photocopy of his/her semester examination answer
paper(s) in the theory course(s), within 2 working days from the declaration of
results in the prescribed format to the Controller of Examinations through the Head
of the Department. On receiving the photocopy, the student can consult with a
competent member of faculty and seek the opinion for revaluation. Based on the
recommendations, the student can register for the revaluation through proper
application to the Controller of Examinations. The Controller of Examinations shall
arrange for the revaluation and declare the results. Revaluation is not permitted to
the courses other than theory courses. In the case of theory courses with laboratory
component, a student can seek revaluation for the theory component only, following
the procedure stated above.
13. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED

For the purpose of the Award of Degree, the duration of completion of the programme
shall be the total duration taken by a student for completing first time registration of all
the required courses and satisfying Clause 11, regardless to the period of Break-of-study
as per Clause 15 and satisfy any one of the conditions required as given below.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xvi
13.1 First Class with Distinction: A student who qualifies for the award of the Degree
having passed all the courses of study of all the Eight Semesters (six semesters for
lateral entry students) at the first opportunity, after the commencement of his / her
study and securing a CGPA not less than 8.50 (vide clause 12.3) shall be declared to
have passed with First Class with Distinction.
13.2 First Class: A student who qualifies for the award of the Degree having passed all
the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry
students) after the commencement of his / her study and securing a CGPA not less
than 6.50 shall be declared to have passed with First Class (not exceeded the total
duration as specified in the Clause 5).
13.3 Second Class: All other students who qualify for the award of the Degree shall be
declared to have passed in Second Class.
13.4 Course Completion Certificate shall be given to a student, provided he / she should
have registered all the courses and also registered for the examinations in those
courses (subject to Clause 6.0 and 7.0).
14. WITHDRAWAL FROM THE EXAMINATION

14.1 A student may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Head of the
Department to withdraw from appearing in the examination in any course(s) only
once during the entire duration of the degree programme.
14.2 Withdrawal application shall be valid only, if the student is eligible to write the
examination as per Clause 7 and, if such request for withdrawal is made prior to the
submission of the Continuous Assessment marks of the course(s) with the
recommendations from the Head of the Department.
14.3 Withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance in the examination for the
eligibility of a student for First Class with Distinction or First Class.
15. AUTHORIZED BREAK OF STUDY FROM A PROGRAMME

15.1 A student is permitted to go on break of study for a maximum period of one year
either as two breaks of one semester each or a single break of one year.
15.2 A student is normally not permitted to break the period of study temporarily.
However, if a student happens to discontinue the programme temporarily during the
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xvii
middle of programme of study, for reasons such as personal accident or

hospitalization due to ill health or in need of health care, he/she shall apply to the
Head of the Institution in advance, in any case, not later than the last date for
registering for the semester examination, through the Head of the Department
stating the reasons for the break-of-study (for one academic semester or 6 months,
whichever is earlier). However, a student detained for want of minimum attendance
requirement as per Clause 7 shall not be considered as permitted Break of Study
and Clause 15.3 is not applicable for such case.
15.3 The student is permitted to rejoin the programme after the break shall be governed
by the rules and regulations of DoTE and the Curriculum and Regulations in force
at the time of rejoining, subject to the Clause 11.2.1.
15.4 Authorized break of study will be counted towards the duration specified for
passing all the courses (vide Clause 5.1 and 5.2) and for the purpose of
classification of Degree (vide Clause 13).
15.5 The total period for completion of the programme reckoned from the
commencement of the first semester to which the student is admitted shall not
exceed the maximum period specified in Clause 5.1, irrespective of the period of
break of study in order that he / she may be eligible, for the award of the degree
(vide Clause 13).
15.6 In case of valid reasons (as stated in Clause 15.2) extended break-of-study may be
granted by the Head of the Institution for a period not more than one year (total
duration or two semesters whichever is earlier) in addition to the earlier authorized
break of study.
15.7 If a student does not report back to the Institute, even after the extended Break of
Study, the name of the student shall be deleted permanently from the college
enrollment. Such students are not entitled to seek readmission under any
circumstances.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xviii
16. SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT

Courses offered under B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes are assessed as given below:
I THEORY COURSES Marks
Continuous Assessment 50
Distribution of marks for Continuous Assessment:
Test I (15)
Test II (15)
Open book test (10)
Library - Seminars / Assignments (Two) (10)
End Semester Examination 50
Total Marks 100
II THEORY COURSES WITH LAB COMPONENT Marks

Test I (10)
Test II (10)
Conduct of Experiment
Preparation(5)
Experiment and Results (5)
Record Note
Final Lab Examination (20)
End Semester Examination
50
(QP pattern as per (I))
Total Marks 100
III LABORATORY COURSES Marks

Conduct of Experiment
i. Preparation (5)
ii. Experiment and Results (10)
iii. Record / Observation (5)
Test Cycle I (15)
Test Cycle II (15)
Experiments & Results (40) 50
Viva Voce (10)
Total Marks 100
Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective Department
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xix
IV TECHNICAL SEMINAR Marks

Presentation I (25)
Presentation II (25)
Report (20)
50
Presentation (20)
Viva voce (10)
Total Marks 100
V PROJECT Marks
Review I
Literature survey (10)
Problem Identification (5)
Methodology (10)
Review II
Continuation in Methodology (10)
Results / Progress (15)
Report (20)
50
Presentation (20)
Viva voce (10)
Total Marks 100
VI LANGUAGE ELECTIVE Marks

(CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT ONLY)
Test 1
Listening (10)
Speaking (5) 25
Reading (5)
Writing (5)
Test 2
Listening (10)
Speaking (5) 25
Reading (5)
Writing (5)
Oral Exam 50
Total Marks 100
Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective Department
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xx
VII ONE-CREDIT COURSE Marks

Test 30
Quiz 20
Final Examination 50
Total Marks 100
VIII MINI-PROJECT Marks

Review I 25
Review II 25
Project Evaluation
Report (25) 50
Presentation&Viva Voce (25)
Total Marks 100
IX LIFE SKILLS Marks

Test I 25
Test II 25
Final Examination 50
Total Marks 100
Grades (Excellent / Good / Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory)
X VALUE ADDED / CERTIFICATE COURSES Marks

Test I 25
Test II 25
Final Evaluation / Test 50
Total Marks 100
Grades (Excellent / Good / Satisfactory / Not Satisfactory)
XI ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Marks

Class work (based on attendance) (5)
Assignments (Minimum 8 Assignments) (20)
Model Examination (25)
End Semester Examination 50
Total Marks 100
Reports / Record Note / Integrated Lab Manual to be retained for 1 year for Academic Audit, by respective
Department
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xxi
Optional Test: A student becomes eligible to appear for the one optional test
conducted after the Periodical Test II, only under the following circumstances: (i)
absent for Test I or Test II or both on account of medical reasons (hospitalization /
accident / specific illness), or (ii) participation in the College / University / State /
National / International level Sports events with prior permission from the Head of the
Institution and (iii) on satisfying the conditions (i) or (ii), the student should have
registered for the Optional Test, through the concerned member of faculty who handles
the course or through the respective Head of the Department, submitted to the
Controller of Examinations. Such Optional Tests are not conducted for the courses
under the categories III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X and XI listed above.
17. FIELD / INDUSTRIAL VISIT / INTERNSHIP

Heads of Departments, in order to provide the experiential learning to the students,
shall take efforts to arrange at least two industrial visits / field visits in a semester. The
students may also undergo in-plant training / internship during summer / winter
vacation between III and VII semesters.
18. PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT

Every student shall be required to undergo a minimum of 40 hours of Personality
Development Programmes viz, NSS / NCC / YRC / YOGA / Sports and Games /
Technical and Non-technical Club activities during the first year, failing which he/she
shall not be permitted to appear for the End Semester examinations of semester II and
there onwards. Such students are permitted to appear for the End Semester
examinations of semester II and there onwards only after completing satisfactorily the
requirements.
The attendance of the personality and character development courses / events shall be
maintained on the regular basis by the concerned First Year Co-ordinators and made
available in the Office of the Controller of Examinations before the commencement of
Semester examinations of Semester I or Semester II.
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting held on 14.06.2015 xxii
19. DISCIPLINE
A student is expected to follow the rules and regulations laid down by the Institute and
the affiliating University, as published from time to time. Any violations, if any, shall
be treated as per the procedures stated thereof.
If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the End Semester / Continuous
Assessments, he / she shall be liable for punitive action as prescribed by the Institution /
University from time to time.
20. REVISION OF REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

The Institution reserves the right to revise/amend/change the Regulations, Curriculum,
Syllabi, Scheme of Examinations and date of implementation and to introduce
Additional Electives, Open Electives, One Credit Courses and Value Added Courses
through the Academic Council.
The Question Paper pattern (Theory Examination) for UG Programme is given below:
PART A
Objective Type Questions: 20 (20X1 = 20 Marks) 20
PART B
Short Answer Questions: 10 (10X2 = 20 Marks) 20
PART C
Long Answer Questions: 5 (5X12 = 60 Marks) 60
------
Total 100
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxiii
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVIES (PEOs)
After few years (3 to 5 years) of graduation, our graduates are expected to
I Work in multidisciplinary engineering automation domain, allied industries, software

companies and academic institution.
II Pursue their higher studies/research at the reputed institution in India /abroad
III Have the Social Responsibility, Team Work Skill, Leadership Capabilities and
Lifelong learning in their Professional Field and also become entrepreneurs
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxiv
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
(a) Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals for solving engineering problems
(b) Problem analysis: Design/conduct of experiments by analyzing the problems in

Electronics/Electrical/Instrumentation/Control field
(c) Design/development of solutions: an ability to design a system, component, or

process to meet desired needs within realistic constraints such as safety, efficiency
and productivity.
(d) Conduct investigations of complex problems: To involve in research / industry

oriented real time engineering projects
(e) Modern tool usage: Simulate/implement and predict the performance of the
component/system / process using modern engineering tools
(f) The engineer and society: Understand the professional and social responsibility with
the reference to their carrier in the field of Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering
(g) Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of automation on global,

economic environmental contexts and the need for sustainable development.
(h) Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional norms and
responsibilities of the engineering practice.
(i) Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual or as a

member/leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary fields.
(j) Communication: To communicate effectively in verbal and non-verbal forms
(k) Project management and finance: Apply engineering management principles,

economic decision making, and apply them to ones own work, as a member / leader
in a team, to manage engineering/management projects.
(l) Life-long learning: Ability to cultivate self learning, keeping pace with technological
challenges.
Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs)
(m) Exploit sensors to measure physical quantities and design signal conditioning circuits
(n) Apply instrumentation systems and advanced controllers for automation

Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 xxv
MAPPING OF PEOs AND POs
POs a b c d e f g h i j k l
PEO1 X X X X X
PEO2 X X X X X
PEO3 X X X X X X X X
Department of Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering
Project Work
Elective VII Elective Elective IX
S8 VIII
Curriculum and interlinking of courses
Design Mini Project V

Industrial Life Skills:
Industrial Laboratory
Analytical Automation
S7 Bio Medical Elective VI Gate Exams
Instruments Automation
Professional Instrumentation Elective V Laboratory
Ethics
Industrial
Process Process Control Life
Engg. Industrial Instrumentation
Control Digital Laboratory Technical Skills:
Economics
S6 Instrumentation Elective III Elective IV Laboratory Mini project
Signal Seminar
II IV Aptitude
Processing II II
Industrial Microprocessor Control

Control Smart and Microprocessors Technical Life
and Engineering
S5 Wireless and Instrumentation Elective I Elective Seminar I Mini Skills:
Engineering Microcontroller Laboratory
Instrumentation Microcontrollers I II project Aptitude
Laboratory
III
I
Numerical Data Electrical and Communication Transducers Sensors and Life Skills:
structures Linear Transducers Linear and Digital Mini Project II
Methods and Electronics Engg. Engg. Verbal
Integrated Laboratory IC Laboratory
Statistics Measurements
S4 Circuits Ability
Electron Digital Logic Fluid mechanics &

Fourier Series Electrical Fluid & Applied Electron Devices Mini
S3 Devices Circuits Life Skills:
and Transforms Machines Solid Thermodynamics Applied and Circuits Project
& Business
Mechanics Laboratory I
Circuits Thermodynamics lab English
Vector Calculus Physics Elective Chemistry Language Fundamentals of Electric Circuit Workshop
S2 and Complex
Analysis
Elective Elective II Electrical & Electronics
Engineering
Analysis Practice
Basics of Civil C Engineering

Matrices and Engineering Environmental Language
S1 Calculus Physics Science Elective I
and Mechanical
Engineering
Programming Graphics
General Electives (I to IX) are the courses offered by the department.
xxvi
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015 1
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

Minimum Credits to be Earned :177
FIRST SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
Outcomes
Code No. Course L T P C Category
PEOs POs CA ES Total
15MA101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS I,II,III a,d,k 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS
15PH102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS I,II a,b,d 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 BS
15CH103 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE I,II a,b,g,h 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 HSS
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE I - - - - - 3 100 - 100 HSS

BASICS OF CIVIL AND
15GE205 MECHANICAL I, II a,c 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
ENGINEERING
15GE106 C PROGRAMMING I,III a,l 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
15GE207 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS I,II a,e 0 0 4 2 50 50 100 ES
Total 13 2 10 22 400 300 700 -
SECOND SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
Outcomes
Code No. Course L T P C Category
15MA201 VECTOR CALCULUS AND
I,II,III a,d,k 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS
COMPLEX ANALYSIS
PHYSICS ELECTIVE - - - - - 4 50 50 100 BS
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVE - - - - - 4 50 50 100 BS
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE II - - - - - 3 100 - 100 HSS

FUNDAMENTALS OF
ELECTRICAL AND
15EE205 I,II a,c,d 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT a,b,c,d,e,i,
15EE206 I,II,III 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES
ANALYSIS k,l
15GE107 WORKSHOP PRACTICE I,II a,b,c 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES
Total 5 0 4 22 400 300 700 -
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech
Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,FT,IT (I Semester) and to MTRS, BT,TT, FD (II Semester)
Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT
Common to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (I Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT ,FD (II

Semester)
Common to EEE and EIE
Common to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT,FD (I Semester) and to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (II

Semester)
THIRD SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
Code No. Course Outcomes L T P C Category
FOURIER SERIES AND
15MA301 I,II,III a,d,k 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 BS
TRANSFORMS
15EI302 ELECTRICAL MACHINES I,II,III a,b 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 PC
FLUID AND SOLID
15EI303 I,II,III a 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
MECHANICS
APPLIED
15EI304 I,II,III a,b 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
THERMODYNAMICS
ELECTRON DEVICES AND
15EI305 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
CIRCUITS
15EI306 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS I,II,III a,b,c,e 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
FLUID MECHANICS AND
APPLIED
15EI307 I,II,III a,b 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
THERMODYNAMICS
LABORATORY
ELECTRON DEVICES AND
15EI308 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,i,l 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
CIRCUITS LABORATORY
15EI309 MINI PROJECT I I,II,III b,c,i,j,k 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC
LIFE SKILLS: BUSINESS
15GE310 - - 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC
ENGLISH
Total 17 6 10 24 600 400 1000 -
FOURTH SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
NUMERICAL METHODS AND
15MA401 I,II,III a,d,k 2 2 0 3 50 50 100 BS
STATISTICS
15EI402 DATA STRUCTURES I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
ELECTRICAL AND
15EI403 ELECTRONICS I,II,III a,d,f,m 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 PC
MEASUREMENTS
COMMUNICATION
15EI404 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES
ENGINEERING
TRANSDUCERS
15EI405 I,II,III a,b,c,d,f,m 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
ENGINEERING
LINEAR INTEGRATED
15EI406 I,II,III a,c,d 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
CIRCUITS
SENSORS AND
15EI407 TRANSDUCERS I,II,III a,b,c,d,f,m 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY
LINEAR AND DIGITAL
15EI408 INTEGRATED CIRCUITS I,II,III a,b,e 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY
15EI409 MINI PROJECT II I,II,III b,c,i,j,k 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC
LIFE SKILLS: VERBAL
15GE410 - - 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC
ABILITY
Total 15 4 12 22 600 400 1000 -
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. except CSE
Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech (Non-Credit Course)
Common to AU,ME,MTRS,EEE,EIE,BT,TT,FT
FIFTH SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
15EI501 CONTROL ENGINEERING I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
SMART AND WIRELESS
15EI502 I,II,III b,c,d,e,l,m 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
INSTRUMENTATION
MICROPROCESSORS AND
15EI503 I,II,III a,c,d,e,l 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
MICROCONTROLLERS
INDUSTRIAL
15EI504 I,II,III a,b,c,d,f 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
INSTRUMENTATION I
ELECTIVE I - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE II - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
MICROPROCESSORS AND
15EI507 MICROCONTROLLERS I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY
CONTROL ENGINEERING
15EI508 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY
15EI509 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I I,II,III c,j,g,i 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 EEC
15EI510 MINI PROJECT III I,II,III b,c,i,j,k 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC
15GE511 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE I - - 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC
Total 12 4 10 24 650 450 1100 -
SIXTH SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
Code No. Course Outcomes L T P C
PEOs POs CA ES Total Category
15GE701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS$ I,III a,g,k 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 HSS
15EI602 PROCESS CONTROL I,II,III a,b,d,e,f,n 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC

INDUSTRIAL a,b,c,d,e,f,
15EI603 I,II,III 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
INSTRUMENTATION II g,h
15EI604 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING I,II,III a,c,d,l 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
ELECTIVE III - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE IV - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
PROCESS CONTROL a,b,c,d,e,h,i
15EI607 I,II,III 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY ,m,n
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
15EI608 I,II,III a,c,d 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY
15EI609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II I,II,III c,j,g,i 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 EEC
15EI610 MINI PROJECT IV I,II,III b,c,i,j,k 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC
15GE611 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE II - - 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC
Total 12 4 10 24 650 450 1100 -

$
Common to Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (VI Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,CE,ME,MTRS,BT,FT,TT
(VII Semester)
SEVENTH SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
15GE601 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS I,III a,g,h 2 0 0 2 50 50 100 HSS
ANALYTICAL
15EI702 I,II,III a,b,c,g 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
INSTRUMENTS
15EI703 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION I,II,III c,e,g,n 3 2 0 4 50 50 100 PC
BIOMEDICAL
15EI704 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
INSTRUMENTATION
ELECTIVE V - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE VI - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION a,b,c,d,e,f,h
15EI707 I,II,III 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
LABORATORY ,i
a,b,c,d,e,g,
15EI708 DESIGN LABORATORY I,II,III 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
m,n
15EI709 MINI PROJECT V I,II,III b,c,i,j,k 0 0 2 1 100 - 100 EEC
LIFE SKILLS : COMPETITIVE a,b,c,d,e,i,k
15GE710 I,II,III 0 0 2 - 100 - 100 EEC
EXAMS ,m,n
Total 11 2 8 21 600 400 1000 -
EIGHT SEMESTER
Objectives &
Maximum Marks
ELECTIVE VII - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE VIII - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
ELECTIVE IX - - - - - 3 50 50 100 PE
15EI804 PROJECT WORK I,II,III a,d,k - - - 9 50 50 100 EEC
Total - - - 18 200 200 400 -
Common to Common to AE, AG,AU, CE, ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT (VI Semester) and to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT
(VII Semester)

Electives
Objectives & Outcomes

Code No. Course L T P C
PEOs POs
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
15LE101 BASIC ENGLISH I I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LE102 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH I I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LE201 BASIC ENGLISH II I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LE202 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH II I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LC203 CHINESE I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LF203 FRENCH I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LG203 GERMAN I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LH203 HINDI I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
15LJ203 JAPANESE I,III j,l 3 0 0 3
PHYSICS ELECTIVES
15PH201 PHYSICS OF MATERIALS I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15PH202 APPLIED PHYSICS I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15PH203 MATERIALS SCIENCE I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15PH204 PHYSICS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15PH205 SOLID STATE PHYSICS I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
15CH201 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15CH202 APPLIED CHEMISTRY I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15CH203 APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15CH204 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
15CH205 WATER TECHNOLOGY AND GREEN CHEMISTRY I,II a,b,c 3 0 2 4
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
15EI001 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN I,II,III a,b,c,d,l 3 0 0 3

INSTRUMENTATION IN PETROCHEMICAL
15EI002 I,II,III a,b,e,g 3 0 0 3
INDUSTRIES
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE
15EI003 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,n 3 0 0 3
CONTROL
15EI004 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,n 3 0 0 3
15EI005 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION I,II,III c,d,h,n 3 0 0 3
15EI006 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS I,II,III a,c,d,f,h,l,m,n 3 0 0 3
15EI007 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3
15EI008 EMBEDDED SYSTEM I,II,III a,b,c,d,l 3 0 0 3
15EI009 CODES AND STANDARDS I,II,III a,b,c,f 3 0 0 3

15EI010 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS I,II,III a,b 3 0 0 3

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND
15EI011 I,II,III a,c,f,g,n 3 0 0 3
STEEL INDUSTRIES
15EI012 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES I,II,III a,b,c,e,l,n 3 0 0 3
15EI013 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY I,II,III a,b,c,d 3 0 0 3
15EI014 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM I,II,III a,b,c,d 3 0 0 3
15EI015 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS I,II,III a,b,c,d 3 0 0 3
15EI016 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC I,II,III a,c,d,e 3 0 0 3

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER
15EI017 I,II,III a,c 3 0 0 3
INDUSTRIES
15EI018 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM I,II,III a,b,c,d,f,h,k,m 3 0 0 3
15EI019 INSTRUMENTATION IN AGRICULTURE I,II,III a,b,c,f,g,h,m,n 3 0 0 3
15EI020 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT I,II,III h,i,k,l 3 0 0 3

INSTRUMENTATION IN FOOD PROCESSING
15EI021 I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,g,k 3 0 0 3
INDUSTRIES
15EI022 JAVA PROGRAMMING I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 3 0 0 3
15EI023 FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSIS I,II,III a,c,f,g,n 3 0 0 3
15EI024 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN I,II,III a,c,f,g,n 3 0 0 3
15EI025 BUILDING AUTOMATION I,II,III c,d,h,n 3 0 0 3
15EI026 FIELD INSTRUMENTS AND PROCESS AUTOMATION I,II,III a,b,e,g 3 0 0 3
15EI027 INTERNET OF THINGS I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l 3 0 0 3
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES
15GE001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I II,III d,f,h,i,k,l 3 0 0 3
15GE002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II II,III d,f,h,i,k,l 3 0 0 3
PHYSICAL SCIENCE ELECTIVES

15GE0P1 NANOMATERIALS SCIENCE I,II a 3 0 0 3
15GE0P2 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DEVICES I,II a 3 0 0 3
15GE0P3 APPLIED LASER SCIENCE I,II a 3 0 0 3
15GE0C1 CORROSION SCIENCE I,II a 3 0 0 3
15GE0C2 ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS I,II a 3 0 0 3
15GE0C3 POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING I,II a 3 0 0 3
OPEN ELECTIVES
15EI0YA BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3
15EI0YB VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l,m,n 3 0 0 3

INSTRUMENTATION IN AEROSPACE AND
15EI0YC I,II,III a,b,d,e,g,l,m,n 3 0 0 3
NAVIGATION
OPTOELECTRONICS AND LASER
15EI0YD I,II,III a,b,c,d,e 3 0 0 3
INSTRUMENTATION
ONE CREDIT COURSES (IV to VII semesters)
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY STANDARDS FOR
15EI0XA I,II,III a,f - - - 1
INSTRUMENTATION PRODUCTS
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT USING PIC

15EI0XB I,II,III a,e - - - 1
MICROCONTROLLERS
15EI0XC DETAILED INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING I,II,III a,e,f - - - 1
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN INSTRUMENTATION AND
15EI0XD I,II,III a,c,e - - - 1
CONTROL
15EI0XE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS IN INDUSTRIES I,II,III c,e - - - 1
DESIGN OF LOW COST AUTOMATION FOR
15EI0XF I,II,III c,e,f - - - 1
INDUSTRIES
MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF
15EI0XG I,II,III c,e - - - 1
INSTRUMENTATION
15EI0XH DESIGN OF LINEAR WEIGHING MACHINE I,II,III e,f,h - - - 1
15EI0XI HIGH TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION I,II,III a,m,n - - - 1
15EI0XJ CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES I,II,III c,e - - - 1
15EI0XK HOOK-UP DIAGRAM I,II,III e,f,h - - - 1

INTERNET OF THINGS (IOT) WITH SENSOR DATA
15EI0XL I,II,III a,b,c,d,e,l - - - 1
ACQUISITION IN CLOUD
ADDITIONAL ONE CREDIT COURSES (I to III Semesters)
15GE0XA HEALTH & FITNESS - - - 1

15GE0XB FOUNDATION COURSE IN COMMUNITY RADIO
- - - 1
TECHNOLOGY
15GE0XC VEDIC MATHEMATICS - - - 1
15GE0XD INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHMS - - - 1
15GE0XE ETYMOLOGY - - - 1
15GE0XF HINDUSTANI MUSIC - - - 1
15GE0XG CONCEPT, METHODOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS
- - - 1
OF VERMICOMPOSTING
15GE0XH AGRICULTURE FOR ENGINEERS - - - 1
15GE0XI INTRODUCTION TO DATA ANALYSIS USING
- - - 1
SOFTWARE
15GE0XJ ANALYSIS USING PIVOT TABLE - - - 1
BRIDGE COURSES
15EIB01 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
15EIB02 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

SUMMARY OF CREDIT DISTRIBUTION
Range of Total
CREDITS PER SEMESTER Credits
TOTAL CREDITS in
S.No CATEGORY
CREDIT % Min Max
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 BS
7 12 4 3 - - - - 26 15% 15% 20%
2 ES
9 7 7 6 - - - - 29 16% 15% 20%
3 HSS
6 3 - - - 3 2 - 14 8% 5% 10%
4 PC
- - 12 12 16 13 12 - 65 37% 30% 40%
5 PE
- - 6 6 6 9 27 15% 10% 15%
6 EEC
- - 1 1 2 2 1 9 16 9% 10% 15%
Total 22 22 24 22 24 24 21 18 177 100% - -
BS - Basic Sciences
ES - Engineering Sciences
HSS - Humanities and Social Sciences
PC - Professional Core
PE - Professional Elective
EEC - Employability Enhancement Course
CA - Continuous Assessment
ES - End Semester Examination
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Institute of Technology | Regulations 2015
Approved in XI Academic Council Meeting 9
15MA101 MATRICES AND CALCULUS 3204

(Common to all branches)
Course Objectives
To interpret the introductory concepts of Matrices and Calculus, which will enable them to model
and analyze physical phenomena involving continuous changes of variables
To summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to fundamental
principles of Matrices and Calculus
To develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and offer
appropriate solutions, using the skills learned in their interactive and supporting environment
Course Outcomes (COs)

1. Analyze the characteristics of a linear system with eigen values and vectors
2. Identify and model the real time problem using first order linear differential equations
3. Recognize and solve the higher order ordinary differential equations
4. Characterize the functions and to get the solutions of the same
5. Integrate the functions for evaluating the surface area and volume
UNIT I 9 Hours
MATRICES
Eigen Values and Eigen Vectors of a real matrix - Properties of Eigen Values - Stretching of elastic
membranes. Cayley - Hamilton Theorem - Quadratic form: Reduction of a quadratic form to a canonical
form.
UNIT II 8 Hours
ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF FIRST ORDER
Leibnitz's Equations - Modelling and solutions using Newtons law of cooling of bodies - solutions to R-L
and R-C electric circuits.
UNIT III 11 Hours

ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF HIGHER ORDER
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. Linear differential
equations of higher order with variable coefficients: Cauchys linear differential equation - Method of
variation of parameters for second order differential equations.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS
Functions of Two Variables and their solutions - Total Differential - Derivative of implicit functions -
Jacobians Unconstrained maxima and minima.
UNIT V 8 Hours
MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Double integration with constant and variable limits - Region of integration - Change the order of
integration - Area as double integral in cartesian coordinates. Triple integral in Cartesian coordinates.
FOR FURTHER READING

Applications of mass spring system in ordinary differential equations of higher order
Total: 45+30=75 Hours
Reference(s)
1. C. Ray Wylie and C Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Sixth Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
2. Erwin Kreyszig , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tenth Edition, Wiley India Private
Limited,New Delhi 2015.
3. Peter V. O Neil , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition , Cengage Learning India
Private Limited, 2012.
4. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Forty Third Edition, Khanna Publications , New
Delhi 2014.
5. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Third Edition,Wiley India, 2014.
6. T.Veerarajan, Engineering mathematics for First Year,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
companyLimited, New Delhi, 2014.
Assessment Pattern
Remember Understand Apply Analyse Evaluate Create
Unit/RBT Total
F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M F C P M
1 2 6 6 6 20
2 2 2 4 4 6 18
3 2 2 6 6 6 22
4 2 6 8 6 22
5 2 4 6 6 18
Total 100
Assessment Questions
Remember
1. Define spectral values of a matrix.
2. State Cayley - Hamilton theorem.
3. List out five natures of a quadratic form.

4. Reproduce the solution for the first order linear differential equation + =
5. State Newtons Law of cooling in ordinary differential equation.
6. Define Jacobian in three dimensions
7. State Wronskian determinant.
8. List two sufficient conditions for extremum of a function z f ( x, y) at (a, b) .
9. Define Jacobian of u and v with respect to x and y .
10. Recall any two properties of Jacobians.
Understand
1. Identify whether there exist a square matrix without eigenvalues. Give reason.
2. Indicate the matrix which has real eigenvalues and real eigenvectors.
3. Identify in which cases can we expect orthogonal eigen vectors.
4. Compare second and higher order ordinary differential equation.
5. A condenser of capacity C discharged through an inductance L and resistance R in series and the
d 2q dq q
charge q at the time t satisfies the equation L 2
+R + =0.given that L=0.25 Henries, R=250
dt dt c
dq
ohms, C=210-6 Farads and that when t=0, charge q is 0.002 coulombs and the current =0, obtain
dt
the value of q in terms of t.
6. Represent the area bounded by the parabolas y2=4-x and y2=4-4x as a double integral.
7. Formulate Leibnitzs equation where R=100 ohms L=0.05 henry E=100 Cos300t volts
8. A condenser of capacity C discharged through an inductance L and resistance R in series and the
d 2q dq q
charge q at the time t satisfies the equation L 2
+R + =0.the circuit consists of an inductor of
dt dt c
1H, a resistor of 12, capacitor of 0.01 F and a generator having voltage given by E(t)=24 sin10t.find
dq
the charge q and the current I at time t, if q=0 and i=0 at t=0 where i= .
dt
9. Formulate the area between the curves y2=4x and x2=4y.
1 2 x
10. Indicate and change the order of integration for
0 x2
xydydx
Apply
1. Carry-out the three engineering applications of eigen value of a matrix.
11 4 7

2. Find the eigen values and eigen vectors of the matrix A = 7 2 5 and hence find the
10 4 6

eigen values of A2 , 5A and A1 using properties.
1 3 7

3. Use Cayley Hamilton theorem to find inverse of A = 4 2 3 .
1 2 1

4. Find the points of the function f ( x, y) x y xy axy where f is a maximum or minimum.
2 2
5. A body originally at 800C cools down to 600C in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being
400C. What will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from the original?
6. If the temperature of a cake is 3000F when it leaves the oven and is 2000F 10 minutes later, when will
it be practically equal to the room temperature of 600F, say, when will it be 610F? Use Newtons law
of cooling.
d 2q dq q
7. In an L-C-R circuit, the change q on a plate of a condenser is given by L 2 +R
dt dt c
dq
=Esinpt,wherei= .the circuit is tuned to resonance so that p2=1/LC. If initially the current I and the
dt
charge q be zero. Show that ,for small values of R/L, the current in the circuit at time t is given by
(Et/2L)sinpt.
8. Construct the solution for the equation ( 3 D)y =
9. Use the method of variation of parameters to solve ( 2 + 4) = cot 2.
10. Construct the equation 2 + = into a linear differential equation with constant
Coefficient.
Analyze
cos sin 0

1. Justify whether the matrix B = sin cos 0 is orthogonal or not?
0 1
0
2. Suppose that in winter the day time temperature in a certain office building is maintained at 70F, The
heating is shut off at 10 P.M. and turned on again at 6 A.M. On a certain day the temperature inside
the building at 2 A.M. was found to be 65F. The outside temperature was 50F at 10 P.M. and had
dropped to 40F by 6 A.M. Find the temperature inside the building when the heat was turned on at 6
A.M.?
3. Experiment show that the radioactive substance decomposes at a rate proportional to the amount
Present. Starting with 2grms at time t=0 find the amount available at a later time.
4. Differentiate RL and RC electric circuit.
5. Transform the equation 2 + = into a linear differential equation with constant coefficients.
6. If the voltage in the RC circuit is E = E0 cos t, find the charge and the current at time t.
7. Solve (x2D2-2xD+2)y = (3x2-6x +6)ex, y(1) = 2 +3e, (1) =3e
8. In a circuit the resistance is 12 and the inductance is 4 H. The battery gives a constant voltage of 60
V and the switch is closed when t = 0, so the current starts with I(0) = 0. (a) Find I(t) (b) Find what
happens to the current after a long time justify the current after 1 s.
9. If g ( x, y) (u, v) where u x 2 y 2 , v 2 xy prove that
2g 2g 2 2
2
4( x 2
y )
u 2 v 2 .
x 2 y 2
a a2 x2 a2 x2 y 2
10. Solve
0 0

0
xdxdydz .
Evaluate
1. Use Cayley-Hamilton theorem to find the value of 8 57 + 76 35 + 4 53 +
2 1 1
2
8 2 + if the matrix A = 0 1 0
1 1 2

2. Determine the nature, index, rank and signature by reducing the quadratic form 2x2+2y2+2z2+2yz
to canonical form by an orthogonal transformation.

2 + 2 +1
3. Determine the value of y from the equation = 2
4. Determine the solution of y of the equation 1 (1 ) .
2 =

5. Determine the value of y from the equation 1+ = (1 + ) .
2 1 12
6. Determine the complete solution for y from the equation 2 + = 2 .
7. Determine the complete solution for y of ( 2 2 + 4) = 2 sin(log ).
8. Determine the solution of the initial value problem + 6 =0 with the initial conditions
y(0)=10 and (0) =0.

x
y 2 z 2 dxdydz taken over the region of space defined by x 2 y 2 1 and
2
9. Evaluate
0 x 1.
a a
x
10. Evaluate x
0 y
2
y2
dxdy by changing into polar coordinates
15PH102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 2023

Course Objectives
To impart knowledge in properties of matter, crystallography and ultrasonics
To understand the applications of lasers and fiber optics
To implement the principles of quantum physics in the respective engineering fields

1. Realize the concept of properties of matter and apply the concepts for practical applications
2. Identify the suitable laser source for fiber optic communication applications
3. Determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves and to apply the same for day today applications
4. Classify the different types of crystal structures and analyze their properties
5. Comprehend the efficacy of quantum equations in modern areas
UNIT I 8 Hours
PROPERTIES OF MATTER
Elasticity: elastic and plastic materials - Hooke's law - Elastic behavior of a material - Stress - Strain diagram
- factors affecting elasticity. Three moduli of elasticity - Poisson's ratio - Torsional pendulum - Twisting
couple on a cylinder. Young's modulus - Uniform bending Non - uniform bending. Viscosity: coefficient
of viscosity - Streamline and turbulent flow - Experimental determination of viscosity of a liquid -
Poiseuille's method.
UNIT II 6 Hours
APPLIED OPTICS
Interference: air wedge - theory - uses - testing of flat surfaces - thickness of a thin wire. Laser: introduction
- principle of laser - characteristics of laser - types: CO2 laser - semiconductor laser (homo junction). Fiber
optics: principle of light transmission through fiber - expression for acceptance angle and numerical
aperture - types of optical fibers (refractive index profile and mode) - fiber optic communication system
(block diagram only).
5 Hours
UNIT III
ULTRASONICS
Ultrasonics: introduction - properties of ultrasonic waves - generation of ultrasonic waves -
magnetostriction - piezo electric methods - detection of ultrasonic waves. Determination of velocity of
ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating). Applications of ultrasonic waves: SONAR - measurement of velocity
of blood flow - study of movement of internal organs.
UNIT IV 5 Hours
SOLID STATE PHYSICS
Crystal Physics: lattice - unit cell - crystal systems - Bravais lattices - Miller indices - 'd' spacing in cubic
lattice - calculation of number of atoms per unit cell, atomic radius, coordination number and packing
density for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures - X-ray diffraction: Laue's method - powder crystal method.
UNIT V 6 Hours
QUANTUM MECHANICS
Quantum Physics: development of quantum theory - de Broglie wavelength - Schrodinger's wave equation
- time dependent and time independent wave equations - physical significance. Application: particle in a
box (1d) - degenerate and non-degenerate states. Photoelectric effect: quantum theory of light work function
- problems.
FOR FURTHER READING

Neutrions - expanding universe
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Exposure to Engineering Physics Laboratory and precautionary measures
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Determine the moment of inertia of the disc and calculate the rigidity modulus of a given wire using torsion
pendulum (symmetrical masses method).
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Find the elevation of the given wooden beam at the midpoint by loading at the ends and hence calculate the
Youngs modulus of the material.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Find the depression at the midpoint of the given wooden beam for 50g, 100 g, 150 g, 200 g and 250 g
subjected to non-uniform bending and determine the Youngs modulus of the material of the beam.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determine the coefficient of viscosity of the given liquid by Poiseulles method.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Form the interference fringes from the air wedge setup and calculate the thickness of the given wire.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
By applying the principle of diffraction, determine the wavelength of given laser and the average particle
size of lycopodium powder using laser source.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determine the
(i) wavelength of ultrasonics in a liquid medium,
(ii) velocity of ultrasonic waves in the given liquid
(iii) compressibility of the given liquid using ultrasonic interferometer.
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. D. S. Mathur, Elements of Properties of Matter, 5th edition, S Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi,
2012.
2. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2012.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan and S Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
4. B. K. Pandey and S. Chaturvedi, Engineering Physics, 1st edition, Cengage Learning India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
5. Halliday and Resnick, Fundamentals of Physics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2011.
6. Ian Morison, Introduction to Astronomy and Cosmology, John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., 2013.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 4 2 6 4 4 24
2 2 2 6 2 4 4 20
3 4 4 2 4 4 18
4 2 2 4 5 5 18
5 2 2 4 4 4 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Reproduce Hookes law
2. Name the three types of moduli of elasticity
3. List the two applications of air wedge
4. Recall the two conditions required for achieving total internal reflection
5. Define magnetostriction effect
6. Recognize the four applications of ultrasonics in medical field
7. Write the Braggs condition necessary for obtaining X-ray diffraction in crystals
8. Retrieve the seven types of crystal system
9. Recall four physical significance of wave function
10. Define photoelectric effect
Understand
1. Explain the procedure adopted for determining the Youngs modulus of the given material by non-
uniform bending method
2. Illustrate the effect of temperature on elasticity of a material
3. Classify the fiber optics based on refractive index profile
4. Indicate the role of optical resonators in the production of laser
5. Compare the merits of magnetostriction and piezo-electric oscillators
6. Summarize the four applications of ultrasonic waves in day-today life
7. Identify the closely packed cubic crystal structure with an example
8. Compare Laue method and powder crystal method used in X-ray diffraction
9. Infer the significance of photoelectric effect
10. Represent the two assumptions involved in solving the Schrdinger time dependent wave equation
Apply
1. Show that when a cylinder is twisted the torsional couple depends on torsional rigidity
2. Using torsional pendulum, explain the rigidity modulus of the wire
3. Design an experimental setup used for determining the thickness of a thin material
4. A silica optical fiber has a core refractive index of 1.50 and a cladding refractive index of 1.47.
Find the numerical aperture for the fiber.
5. Construct the piezo electric oscillator circuit and explain the generation of ultrasonic waves
6. Find the depth of submerged submarine if an ultrasonic wave is received after 0.33 s from the time
of transmission.(given v=1400 m/s)
7. Show that the axial ratio for an ideal HCP structure is 1.633
8. Sketch the planes having Miller indices (100) and (111).
9. Assess the various energy levels of an electron enclosed in a one dimensional potential well of
finite width a
10. Compute the relation between de Broglie wavelength and velocity of a particle
Analyse
1. Differentiate uniform bending from non-uniform bending
2. Straight lined fringes are formed only in flat glass plates. Justify.
3. Conclude that the thickness of thin wire is influenced by band width of a material
4. Outline the merits and demerits of magnetostriction oscillator method.
5. Five fold symmetry is not possible in crystal structures. Justify your answer.
6. Compare the degenerate state with non-degenerate state
Evaluate
1. Determine the viscosity of a given liquid using Poiseuilles method ( Given: water, burette, stop
clock, capillary tube, stand and travelling microscope)
2. When ultrasonic waves are passed through liquids, cavitations are produced. Criticize the statement
3. Check the packing factor for a simple cubic structure is 0.52
4. Evaluate the expression for time dependent Schroedingers wave equation
15CH103 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 2023

Course Objectives
To realize the interdisciplinary and holistic nature of the environment
To understand how natural resources and environment affect the quality of life and stimulate the
quest for sustainable development
To recognize and evaluate the socio-economic, political and ethical issues in environmental science

1. Demonstrate the importance of interdisciplinary nature of environment, its purpose, design and
exploitation of natural resources
2. Analyze the fundamental physical and biological principles that govern natural processes and role
of professionals in protecting the environment from degradation.
3. Apprehend the existing environmental challenges related to pollution and its management
4. Evaluate strategies, technologies and methods for sustainable management of environmental
systems
5. Characterize and analyze human impacts on the environment
UNIT I 6 Hours
NATURAL RESOURCES
Forest resources: Use - over exploitation - deforestation - case studies. Water resources: Use - over
utilization of surface and ground water - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use - exploitation -
environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: Effects of
modern agriculture fertilizer - pesticide problems (eutrophication, blue baby syndrome, biomagnification)
- water logging - salinity - case studies. Energy resources: renewable (solar, wind, tidal, geothermal and
hydroelectric power) - non renewable energy sources
UNIT II 6 Hours
ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY
Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem - producers - consumers - decomposers -
food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids - Types of ecosystem: Introduction - characteristic
features: forest ecosystem - desert ecosystem - ecological succession. Biodiversity - value of biodiversity -
threats to biodiversity - endangered and endemic species - Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity - field study
UNIT III 6 Hours

ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION
Pollution: Definition - causes - effects - control measures of air pollution - water pollution: (Sewage water
treatment by activated sludge and trickling filter process) - marine pollution - thermal pollution - noise
pollution. Disaster management: causes - effects - control measures of floods - earthquake - cyclone -
landslides
UNIT IV 7 Hours
SOCIAL ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENT
Sustainable development: Definition - Unsustainable to sustainable development - urban problems related
to energy. Environmental ethics - issues and possible solutions - solid waste management - causes - effects
- 3R Principles (landfills, incineration, composting). Water conservation - rain water harvesting - watershed
management. Climate change - global warming - acid rain - ozone layer depletion. Environment protection
act: Air (Prevention and control of pollution) act - wildlife protection act
UNIT V 5 Hours
HUMAN POPULATION AND ENVIRONMENT
Human population: Population growth - characteristics - variation among nations - population explosion -
women and child welfare programmes - value education - HIV / AIDS. Role of information technology in
environment and human health - occupational safety and health administration (OSHA)
FOR FURTHER READING

Human rights: E - waste and biomedical waste - Identification of adulterants in food materials
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Preparation of N/10 Oxalic acid and M/10 Sodium carbonate solution
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Estimation of dissolved oxygen in a water sample/sewage by Winklers method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Estimation of chloride content in water by argentometric method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Estimation of calcium in lime by complexometric method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Estimation of chromium in leather tannery effluents
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Determination of percentage purity of sodium carbonate
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Estimation of heavy metals in the given solution by EDTA method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Determination of concentration of unknown colored solution using spectrophotometer
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Anubha Kaushik, C.P. Kaushik, Environmental Science and Engineering , 4th Multi Colour Edtion,
New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2014
2. A. Ravikrishnan, Environmental Science and Engineering, 5th revised Edition, Sri Krishna Hitech
Publishing company Ltd, Chennai, 2010
3. T. G. Jr. Miller, S. Spoolman, New Environmental Science, 14th Edition, Wadsworth Publishing
Co, New Delhi, 2014
4. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental studies, second Edition, Universities Press Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2013
5. A. K. De, Environmental Chemistry, 7th Edition , New age international publishers, New Delhi,
2014
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 3 2 4 5 1 1 3 1 20
2 4 1 4 7 1 2 1 20
3 3 4 6 2 1 1 1 1 1 20
4 1 2 3 8 1 4 2 4 25
5 1 2 2 5 1 1 3 15
Total 100
Remember
1. Define the term bio-magnification.
2. Name any four major gaseous responsible for air pollution.
3. Recall four gases responsible for greenhouse effect.
4. State environmental ethics.

5. List any two impacts of water pollution.
6. Mention the two objectives of value education.
7. List any four consequences of air pollution on human health.
8. Recall any two endangered and endemic species of India.
9. List any two disadvantages of nuclear energy production.
Understand
1. Summarize the structural and functional attributes of an ecosystem.
2. With the help of neat flow chart explain waste water treatment process using activated sludge
process.
3. Explain the modern method of rain water harvesting technique diagrammatically and discuss the
various strategies adopted for water conservation.
4. Summarize the abstracts of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972.
5. Indicate the three consequences of noise pollution.
6. Classify the ecosystems on the basis of energy sources
7. Infer two types of photochemical reactions involved in formation and destruction of ozone in the
stratosphere.
8. Explain how the impacts of natural disasters can be minimized on human communities with on
representative example.
9. Summarize four major effects caused on forests and tribal people due to big dam construction.
10. Infer the any two conflicts over water, confining to our nation.
11. Identify three major threats to Indian biodiversity
12. Relate the concept of food chain and food web with tropic level and mention their three
significances.
Apply
1. Identify any seven impacts caused if ground water is used enormously.
2. Select the proper disaster management techiques that can be implemented to manage. a) Earthquake
b) Floods
3. Summarize the concept age-structure pyramids as a tool to achieve stabilized population in our
nation.
4. Predict the significances of child welfare programmes in India.
5. Implement the 3R approach to manage solid waste.
6. Assess the four adverse effects of solid waste.
7. Assess how climate change affects human health.
Analyse
1. Differentiate between confined and unconfined aquifers.
2. Distinguish between critical and strategic minerals with two examples for each.
3. Outline variations in population growth among nations with necessary diagram.
4. Day by day our atmosphere gets prone to serious effects and deterioration of environment
affects human health. Justify these two statements.
5. Compare the major two advantages and limitations of major greenhouse pollutant CO2.
Evaluate
1. Choose any one suitable method to minimize the impact of acid rain on environment.
2. Determine the doubling time of population, if annual growth rate of a nation is 25 years.
15GE205 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL

3003
ENGINEERING
Course Objectives
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering
To guide students to select the good building materials
To create awareness on various types of water supply and transportation systems
To impart basic knowledge in the various engineering materials and manufacturing Processes.
To understand the working principles of various Internal Combustion Engines, Refrigeration,
Boiler and power plants.
1. Understand the fundamental philosophy of Civil Engineering

2. Identify the nature of building components, functions, construction practices and material qualities
3. Understand the fundamental concepts of water supply and transportation systems
4. Recognize the various engineering materials and understand the working principles and operations
of manufacturing processes.
5. Understand the working principles and operations of Internal Combustion Engines, Refrigeration,
Boiler and power plants.
UNIT I 7 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO CIVIL ENGINEERING
History, development and scope of Civil Engineering Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction Materials
Characteristics of good building materials such as Stones
Bricks -Cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose Classification Basic
principles Measurement of length by chains and tapes.
UNIT II 7 Hours
GENERAL FEATURES RELATING TO BUILDINGS
Selection of site Basic functions of buildings Major components of buildings. Types of foundation Bearing
capacity of soils General Principles of Brick masonry Stone masonry Beams Lintels Columns Doors and
windows Introduction to Green Building and Interior Design
UNIT III 7 Hours

WATER SUPPLY AND TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
Sources of water Supply Methods of Rain Water Harvesting Flow Diagram of Water treatment Process
Modes of Transportation Systems. Classification of Highways-Components of roads Bituminous and
cement concrete roads. Importance of railways - Gauges Components of permanent way Types of bridges.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
Materials classification, mechanical properties of cast iron, steel and high speed steel Casting process-
Introduction to green sand moulding, pattern, melting furnace electric furnace Introduction to metal forming
process and types Introduction to arc and gas welding Centre lathe, Drilling and Milling machines principal
parts, operations.
UNIT V 8 Hours
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND REFRIGERATION
Internal Combustion (IC) Classification, main components, working principle of a two and four stroke
petrol and diesel engines, differences Refrigeration working principle of vapour compression and
absorption system Introduction to Air conditioning.
UNIT VI 8 Hours
ENERGY, BOILERS, TURBINE AND POWER PLANTS
Energy-Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal, Biomass and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC)Boilers
classification, Babcock and Wilcox and La-Mont Boilers, differences between fire tube and water tube
boiler Steam turbines- working principle of single stage impulse and reaction turbines Power plant
classification, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, and Nuclear power plants.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000
2. M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, TMH, 2009
3. G. Shanmugamand M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering,Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2009
4. Pravin Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Pearson Education India, Pearson,2013.
5. G. Shanmugam and S. Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
6. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai,
2015
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 7 10 17
2 7 10 17
3 4 6 4 14
4 7 12 19
5 5 10 15
6 6 12 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Classify Boiler.
2. What are the uses of high carbon steel?
3. Define welding
4. Define soldering.
5. Define Brazing.
6. What do you mean by milling?
7. Classify IC Engines.
8. List the various components of IC Engines.
9. Define Refrigeration.
10. Classify Boiler.
11. What is turbine?
12. Define water tube boiler.
13. Name the main parts of a turbine.
14. Classify power plants.
15. Writedown the scope of Civil Engineering.
16. Define surveying.
17. List the ingredients of concrete.
18. State the basic principles of survey.
19. What is meant by lintel?
20. Write down the components of buildings.
21. List the functions of foundation.
22. What is meant by bearing capacity of soil?
23. What are the factors to be considered in selection of site?
24. Define gauges.
25. Name the components of permanent way.
26. State the importance of railway.
27. List out the types of bridge.
28. Write down the classification of highway.
29. What do you meant by rain water harvesting
30. What are the factors to be considered in design of green building?
Understand
1. Compare reaction and impulse turbines.
2. What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy?
3. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine?
4. What is the function of a surge tank in Hydel power plant?
5. What is the function of a moderator in Nuclear power plant?
6. How to select the boiler?
7. Why air is pre-heated before enter into boiler?
8. How does a fusible plug function in boiler?
9. What is the function of a spark plug in IC engine?
10. What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine?
11. Compare and contrast 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine.
12. Describe the characteristics of good building stone.
13. Explain the various functions of Civil Engineer.
14. Discuss in detail about principles of surveying.
15. Describe the characteristics of cement and concrete.
16. Differentiate the English and Flemish bonds brick masonry.
17. What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry?
18. Discuss about any four super structure components.

19. Distinguish between shallow and deep foundation.
20. Distinguish between stone and brick masonry.
21. Differentiate bituminous and cement concrete roads.
22. Elucidate the components of permanent way.
23. Describe the cross section of bituminous pavement.
24. Elucidate different sources of water supply.
Apply
1. Explain in detail about rain water harvesting.
2. Explain the process of water treatment.
3. Enumerate the procedure for construction of water bound macadam road.
15GE106 C PROGRAMMING
3024
(Common to CSE, ECE, EEE, EIE, IT)
Course Objectives
Understand the basics of C primitives, operators and expressions.
Gain knowledge about the different primitive and user defined data types.
Impart knowledge about the structural programming concepts.

1. Explore the basic C programming concepts.
2. Develop programs using control statements.
3. Exemplify the concepts of Arrays and strings in C.
4. Implement the concepts of functions and pointers in C.
5. Explore the concepts of structures, unions and files in C.
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTORY CONCEPTS
C Primitives: Introduction to C - planning and writing a C program- Character Set - Keywords and
Identifiers - Data Types - Variables and Constants - Compiling and executing the C program
Operators and Expressions: Arithmetic - Relational - Logical - Increment and decrement - Conditional -
Bitwise - Comma - Sizeof() - Assignment - Shift operator - Precedence and order of evaluation - Type
Conversion Input and Output Operations: Formatted I/O functions - getchar and putchar function - gets and
puts functions
UNIT II 7 Hours
CONTROL STATEMENTS
Decision Making and Branching: simple if statement - if else statement - nesting of if else Statement -
Switch Statement.Decision Making and Looping: while statement - do while statement - for statement -
Nested for statement Jump Statements: goto - break - continue - return statement
UNIT III 9 Hours

ARRAYS AND STRINGS
Arrays: Introduction, one dimensional array, declaration - Initialization of one dimensional array, two-
dimensional arrays, initializing two dimensional arrays, multi-dimensional arrays.
Strings: Declaring and initializing string variables- Reading strings from terminal - writing string to screen
- String handling functions.
UNIT IV 10 Hours
FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS
User Defined Functions: Elements of user defined functions - Definition of functions - return values and
their types - function calls - function declaration - categories of function - call by value and call by reference
-recursion - Pre-processor directives and macros. Pointers: Understanding Pointers - accessing the address
of the variable - declaring pointer variables - Initialization of pointer variables - Accessing a variable
through its pointer
UNIT V 10 Hours
STRUCTURES AND FILES
Storage Class Specifiers: Auto - registers - static - extern - typedef
Structures and Unions: Introduction - defining a structure - declaring structure variables - accessing
structure members - structure initialization - Unions - Enumerated data type
File Management in C: Defining and opening a file - closing a file - Input/output operations on files -
Command line arguments
FOR FURTHER READING

Problem solving - Logical thinking - logic - symbolic logic - truth tables - Math puzzles - magic triangles -
magic squares - alphametic puzzles - Cross number puzzles. Creating and manipulating document using
word - Mail merge - Creating spread sheet with charts and formula using excel - developing power point
presentation with Animations.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Write a C program to perform arithmetic operations on integers and floating point numbers.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Write a C program to implement ternary operator and relational operators.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Write a C program to read the values of A, B, C through the keyboard. Add them and after addition check
if it is in the range of 100 to 200 or not. Print separate message for each.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Write a C program to display the roots of a quadratic equation with their types using switch case.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Write a C program to generate the following triangle.
1
123
12345
1234567
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Write a C program to get a matrix of order 3x3 and display a matrix of order of 4x4, with the fourth row
and column as the sum of rows and columns respectively.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Write a c program to remove the occurrence of "the" word from entered string.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Write a C program to find the factorial of given number.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Design a structure to hold the following details of a student. Read the details of a student and display
them in the following format Student
details: rollno, name, branch, year, section, cgpa.
***************************************
NAME:
ROLL NO:
BRANCH:
YEAR:
SECTION:
CGPA:
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Create two files test1.txt and test2.txt and write a C program to read the file text1.txt character by character
on the screen and paste it at the end of test2.txt
Total: 75 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Herbert Schildt, C -The complete Reference, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013
2. Byron Gottfried , Programming with C, Schaum's Outlines, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, 2013
3. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012
4. Kernighan B W and Ritchie O M, The C programming Language. Prentice-Hall of India, 2009
5. Kelley A and I. Pohl, A Book on C : Programming in C, Pearson Education, 1998
6. Ashok.N.Kamthane, Programming in C, Pearson education,2013
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 2 2 2 20
3 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
4 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
5 2 2 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. List the rules for defining a variable.
2. State the associativity property of an operator.
3. List the three constructs for performing loop operations.
4. Recall return statement.
5. Define an array.
6. Recognize strings.
7. Define functions.
8. Define pointers.
9. Define a structure.
10. List the functions used for opening and closing a file.
Understand
1. Classify the operators in C.
2. Identify the functions used for formatted I/O in C.
3. Summarize the branching statements in C.
4. Summarize the looping statements in C.
5. Classify the types of arrays in C.
6. Summarize the string handling functions in C.
7. Exemplify call by value and call by reference.
8. Illustrate the pointer concepts in C.
9. Summarize the four storage classes.
10. Explain the concept of files in C.
Apply
1. Compute the greatest of two numbers using ternary operators in C.
2. Demonstrate the concept of type conversion in C.
3. Implement a C program to find the roots of a quadratic equation using Switch case statement.
4. Implement a C program to check whether a number is prime or not.
5. Compute matrix multiplication using two dimensional arrays in C.
6. Execute a C program to check whether a string is a palindrome or not.
7. Implement a C program using functions to find factorial of a number.
8. Implement a C program to use pointers in C.
9. Execute a C program to generate a pay slip for an employee using structures.
10. Implement a C program to copy the content of one file to the other.
Analyse
1. Differentiate getchar and putchar functions.
2. Differentiate while and do while loop in C.
3. Compare strupr and strlwr functions.
4. Differentiate function definition and function call.
5. Compare structure and union.
Evaluate
1. Determine the output of the following code.
#include
int main()
{
int var = 010;
printf("%d", var);
}
2. Determine the value of the logical expression a>b && a
3. Determine the output of the C code
#include
int main()
{
int a[5] = {5, 1, 15, 20, 25};
int i, j, m;
i = ++a[1];
j = a[1]++;
m = a[i++];
printf("%d, %d, %d", i, j, m);
return 0;
}
4. Determine the output of this C code.
#include
int main()
{
int a = 10, b = 10;
if (a = 5)
b--;
printf("%d, %d", a, b--);
}
5. Evaluate the expression c=(a+b*(c/d)%e) with a=10, b=3, c=5, d=6 and e=1
Create
1. Generate a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Total,
Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks. Find out
the total, result and class as follows:
a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.
b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".
c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
i. Class "Distinction" if average >=75
ii. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
iii. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)
d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per rank
obtained by them.
2. Create a structure that can describe the employees with the fields Eno, Ename. Basic. Write a
program to calculate DA = 32% of Basic. HRA = 15% of Basic. CCA = 10% of BASIC, PF = 15%
of Basic and print all details with Net pay. All processing should be using pointer notation.
b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".
c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
i. Class "Distinction" if average >=75
ii. Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
iii. Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)
d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per rank
obtained by them.
15GE207 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 0042

Common to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (I Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT ,FD (II Semester)
Course Objectives
To learn conventions and use of drawing tools in making engineering drawings.
To understand the engineering drawing methods and procedures to draw two dimensional drawings
from three dimensional model and vice versa.
To provide the practice for converting simple drawing into the computer aided drawing.

1. Recognize the conventions and apply dimensioning concepts while drafting simple objects.
2. Develop the two dimensional drawings from three dimensional model and vice versa.
3. Utilize the visualization skill to convert simple drawing into the computer aided drawing.
UNIT I 12 Hours
CONVENTIONS AND BASIC DRAWINGS
Importance - Conventions - ISO and BIS - Drawing tools and drawing sheets - Lettering, numbering,
dimensioning, lines and symbols - Conic sections - Types constructions - Ellipse, parabola and hyperbola -
Eccentricity and parallelogram method.
UNIT II 14 Hours
PROJECTIONS
Principles - First and third angle projections - Points - First angle projection of points Straight lines -
Parallel, perpendicular and inclined to one reference plane-Solid - Cylinders, pyramids, prisms and cones -
Perspective projections.
UNIT III 12 Hours

ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND SECTION OF SOLIDS
Orthographic Projections - concepts - front view, top view and side view of simple solids - Section of Solids
- simple illustrations.
UNIT IV 12 Hours
ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
Importance - orthographic to isometric projection - simple and truncated solids. Development of surfaces -
cylinders, pyramids, prisms, cones and simple truncated objects.
UNIT V 10 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO AUTOCAD
Basics commands of AutoCAD - two dimensional drawing, editing, layering and dimensioning - coordinate
systems - Drawing practice - orthographic views of simple solids using AutoCAD.
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. K Venugpoal, Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Third edition, New Age International, 2005.
2. Basant Agrawal, Mechanical drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
3. Engineering Drawing Practice for Schools & Colleges, BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS-
SP46, 2008.
4. N. D. Bhatt and V. M. Panchal, Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Limited,
2008.
5. K.V.Natarajan, A Text Book of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, 2013.
6. George Omura, Brian C. Benton, Mastering AutoCAD 2015 and AutoCAD LT 2015: Autodesk
Official Press, Wiley Publisher, 2015.
15MA201 VECTOR CALCULUS AND COMPLEX

3204
ANALYSIS
Course Objectives
To implement the Complex Analysis, an elegant method in the study of heat flow, fluid dynamics
and electrostatics
To summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to fundamental
principles of Calculus viz: Differentiation, Integration and Vectors
To identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and offer appropriate solutions, using
the skills learned in their interactive and supporting environment

1. Characterize the calculus of vectors
2. Apply the theoretical aspects of vector integral calculus in their core areas
3. Recognize the differentiation properties of complex functions
4. Identify the complex functions and their mapping in certain complex planes
5. Use the concepts of integration to complex functions in certain regions
UNIT I 10 Hours
VECTOR CALCULUS
Gradient Divergence - Curl - Directional derivative - Solenoidal - Irrotational vector fields - Line Integral
- Surface integrals.
UNIT II 9 Hours
INTEGRAL THEOREMS OF VECTOR CALCULUS
Green's theorem in a plane - Stoke's Theorem - Gauss divergence theorem - Applications involving cubes
and parallelepiped.
UNIT III 8 Hours

ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS
Analytic Functions - Necessary and Sufficient conditions of Analytic Function - Properties of Analytic
function - Determination of Analytic Function using Milne Thompson method - Applications to the
problems of Potential Flow.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
MAPPING OF COMPLEX FUNCTIONS
Physical interpretation of mapping - Application of transformation: translation, rotation, magnification and
inversion of multi valued functions - Linear fractional Transformation (Bilinear transformation).
UNIT V 10 Hours
INTEGRATION OF COMPLEX FUNCTIONS
Cauchy's Fundamental Theorem - Cauchy's Integral Formula - Taylor's and Laurent's series - Classification
of Singularities - Cauchy's Residue Theorem.
FOR FURTHER READING

Applications to Electrostatic and Fluid Flow.
Reference(s)
1. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-
HillPublishing Company Ltd, 2003.
2. Erwin Kreyszig , Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tenth Edition, Wiley India Private
Limited,New Delhi 2015.
3. J. A. Brown and R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables and Applications , Sixth Edition, McGraw
Hill,New Delhi, 1996.
4. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Forty third Edition, Khanna Publications , New
Delhi 2014.
5. Peter V. O. Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition ,Cengage Learning India
Private Limited, 2012.
6. Glyn James, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Third Edition,Wiley India,2007.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 8 4 2 22
2 2 4 4 4 6 20
3 2 10 6 18
4 2 4 6 6 18
5 2 4 6 4 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define gradient of a vector.
2. Define irrotational of a vector.
3. State Green ' s theorem.

4. State Gauss divergence theorem.
5. Check whether the function is f(z)=z3 analytic.
6. List the necessary condition for a function f(z) to be analytic.
7. Define Bilinear transformation.
8. State the condition for the transformation w = f(z) to be conformal at a point.
9. State the formula for finding the residue of a double pole.
10.State Cauchys integral formula.
Understand

1. If F x 2 i xy 2 j evaluate the line integral F .dr from (0,0) to (1,1) along the path y=x.
2. Identify the unit normal vector to the surface x 2 xy z 2 4 at the point (1,-1,2)
3. Identify the value of x .(F ), using Stoke ' s theorem.
4. Formulate the area of a circle of radius a using Green ' s theorem .
5. Illustrate the two properties of analytic function.
6. Represent the analyticity of the function w = sin z.
7. Identify fixed points of the transformation w = z 2 .
8. Identify the image of the triangular region in the z plane bounded by the lines x= 0, y = 0, and x + y
d = 1 under the transformation w = 2z.
dz
9. Infer ( z 3)
c
2 where c is the circle z 1 .
4
10. Identify the residues of the function f ( z ) at its simple pole.
z ( z 2)
3
Apply
1. Find F .dr where F 2 y 3i xzj yz xk
c
along the line joining the
points (0,0,0) to (2,1,1).

2. If F 3xy i y 2 j , find F d r where C is the curve in the xy-plane y=2x2 from (0,0) to (1,0 ).
C

3. Apply Greens theorem in the plane to Compute (3 x 2 8 y 2 )dx (4 y 6 xy )dy where C is the
c
boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x+y=1.

2
4. Using Gauss divergence theorem, Compute F n ds where F 4 xz i y j yz k and S is the
s
surface of the cube bounded by x=0,y=0,z=0,x=1,y=1,z=1.
x
5. If =+i represent the complex potential for an electric field and x 2 y 2 ,
x y2
2
find the function .

6. If u log( x 2 y 2 ) , find v and f (z) such that f (z) =u+iv is analytic.
7. Find bilinear transformation which maps the points I,-1,I of the z plane into the Points 0,1, of the w
plane respectively.
1
8. Find the image of the circle z 1 1in the complex plane under the transformationw =
z

9. Find Taylor ' s series f(z) = cos z about z = .
3
2
1

z
10. Find the nature of singularity z e .
Analyze
1. Conclude div grad (r n ) 2 (r n ) n (n 1) r n2
2. Demonstrate the irrotational vector and solenoidal vector with an example.
3. Justify stokes ' s theorem for F yi 2 yzj y 2k , where S is the upper half of the sphere
x 2 y 2 z 2 1.

4. Justify Gauss divergence theorem for F x 2 i y 2 j z 2 k where S is the surface of the
cuboid formed by the planes x= 0, x= a, y = 0, y = b, z = 0 and z = c.
5. The complex potential f(z)=z2 describes a flow with constant equipotential lines and
streamlines ,Determine the velocity vector.
6. Show that the function u x x 3xy 2 xy y is harmonic and find the corresponding
3 2 2 2
analytic function.
7. Find the image of the rectangle whose vertices are (0,0), (1,0), (1,2), (0,2) by means of linear
transformation w = (1+i )z+2-i. Also compare the images.
z
8. Generate f ( z ) as Laurents series valid in the regions: 1 z 3 and
z 1z 3
0 z 1 2
e z dz
9.
Use Cauchys integral formula Compute
C ( z 2 ) ( z 1) 2
where C is the
circle z 3 .
z4
10. Find z
C
2
2z 5
dz where C is z 1 i 2 .
Evaluate
1. Determine ( xdydz 2 ydzdx 3zdxdy) ,where s is the closed surface of the sphere
s
x y z2 a2 .
2 2

2. Prove that curl (curlF ) grad (divF ) 2 F .

3. Check Stokes theorem for F x 2 y 2 i 2 xyj taken around the rectangle bounded by x=a, y=0
y=b.
3x 8 y 2 dx 4 y 6 xy dy where c
2
4. Check Greens theorem in the plane to determine
c
is the boundary of the region defined by (i) x 0, y 0, x y 1(ii) y x and y x 2 .

sin x sinh y
5. Determine the analytic function f(z) = P + iQ, if Q = , if f(0) = 1.
cos 2 x cosh 2 y
6. Determine f(z) and the conjugate harmonic v such that w = u + iv is an analytic function
2
y2
of z given that u = e x cos 2 xy .
1 1 1
7. Determine the image of the infinite strip y under the transformation w =
4 2 z
z 1
8. Determine the Laurents series expansion f ( z ) for 2 z 3 .
z 2( z 3)
z4
9. Determine z z 1 i 2
dz
C
2
2 z 5 where C is
e z dz
C z 1
10. Using Cauchys integral formula determine z 2 z 1
2
where C is
15EE205 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL AND

3003
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
(Common to EEE and EIE)
Course Objectives
To understand the basic concepts of electric circuits and magnetic circuits
To analyze the difference between DC and AC circuits
To Learn the fundamentals of semiconductors and BJT

1. Summarise the basic concepts of DC and AC circuits
2. Illustrate the principle of operation of generators, motors and transformers
3. Apply the fundamental concepts of semiconductor diode to design rectifiers
4. Analyze the characteristics of BJT
UNIT I 9 Hours
DC CIRCUITS
Definition of Voltage, Current, Power, Energy, Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor - Ohm's law-statement,
Illustration and limitation - Kirchoff's Laws statement and Illustration - Resistance in series and voltage
division technique - Resistance in parallel and current division technique - Simple problems.
UNIT II 9 Hours
AC CIRCUITS
Generation of single phase alternating emf - RMS value, average value, peak factor and form factor -
Analysis of Pure Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive circuits - J operator - Representation of alternating
quantities in rectangular and polar forms - Star-Delta transformation - Simple problems
UNIT III 11 Hours

ELECTRICAL MACHINES
Constructional details of DC Machines - Principle of operation of D.C. generator - EMF equation - Methods
of excitation - Self and separately excited generators - Principle of operation of D.C. motor - Back EMF
and torque equation - Transformer Constructional details - Principle of operation - EMF equation -
Transformation ratio
8 Hours
UNIT IV
SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Semiconductor theory - Theory of P-N junction diode - Volt-Ampere Characteristics - PN junction diode
current equation - Zener diode - Half wave and full wave rectifier - Average value - RMS value - Form
factor - Peak factor - Ripple factor - Efficiency - Peak inverse voltage - Transformer utilization factor -
Comparison between Half wave and full wave rectifier circuits.
UNIT V 8 Hours
BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR
Structure and working of Bipolar Junction Transistor, Input and output characteristics of CE, CB and CC
configurations, relation between alpha and beta - Concepts of transistor as an amplifier and transistor as a
switch.
FOR FURTHER READING

Light Emitting Diode - Simple House wiring - Clipper and Clampers
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M. S. Sukhija, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford
University Press, 2014.
2. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2012.
3. A. Sudhakar, Shyammohan S Palli, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010.
4. William H.Hayt Jr, Jack E.Kemmerly, and Steven M.Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata
McGrawHill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Jacob. Millman, Christos C.Halkias, Satyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2011.
6. R. S. Sedha, A Textbook of Applied Electronics, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 2013.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 4 2 6 4 20
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 12 20
Total 100
Remember
1. State Ohms law.
2. State Lenz law.
3. State Faradays law of electromagnetic induction.
4. Recall the properties of flux lines.
5. Define reluctance
6. Define average value.
7. List the advantages of three phase system.
8. Define aspect ratio.
9. State the need for modulation.
10. List the applications of diode.
Understand
1. Explain Ohms law relating to (V), (I) and (R).
2. Compare series and parallel circuits.
3. Interpolate domestic appliances connected in parallel.
4. Classify the magnetic circuits.
5. Explain the concepts of self and mutually induced emf.
6. Explain the laws of electromagnetic induction.
7. Indicate the action of diode in forward and reverse biasing with the help of V-I characteristics.
8. Explain the switching characteristics of diode.
9. Explain briefly the need for modulation.
10. Summarize the advantages of FM over AM.
Apply
1. Three resistors are connected in series across a 12V battery. The first resistance has a value of 2
ohm, second has a voltage drop of 4V and third has power dissipation of 12 W. Calculate the value
of the current in the circuit.
2. A 25 ohm resistor is connected in parallel with a 50ohm resistor. The current in 50ohm resistor is
8A. What is the value of third resistance to be added in parallel to make the total line current as
15A.
3. The self inductance of a coil of 500turns is 0.25H.If 60% of the flux is linked with a second coil of
10500 turns. Calculate a) the mutual inductance between the two coils and b) emf induced in the
second coil when current in the first coil changes at the rate of 100A/sec.
4. An air cored toroidal coil has 480 turns, a mean length of 30cm and a cross-sectional area of 5
cm2.Calculate a)the inductance of the coil and b) the average induced emf, if a current of 4 A is
reversed in 60 milliseconds.
5. A toroidal air cored coil with 2000 turns has a mean radius of 25cm, diameter of each turn being
6cm. If the current in the coil is 10A, find mmf, flux, reluctance, flux density and magnetizing
force.
6. Demonstrate the block diagram of the television and explain each block.
7. Show the block diagram of the optical fibre communication and explain each block.
8. Show the block diagram of the satellite communication and explain each block.
9. Convert the current source into voltage source in the below circuit and verify that the voltage VL
across the load is the same for each source.
10. Demonstrate the applications of diodes.
Analyse
1. Criticize the equations for the equivalent star network resistances for a given delta network.
2. Differentiate the expressions for self inductance and mutual inductance.
3. Contrast the series and parallel magnetic circuit and derive the total mmf required.
4. Compare electric and magnetic circuits.
5. Attribute the expression for RMS, average value, peak and form factor of sinusoidal voltage.
6. Identify the voltage, current in a series RL circuit supplied with an alternating voltage.
7. Resolve the phase relation in pure resistor.
8. Resolve the expression for diode current equation.
9. Identify the effect of temperature on P-N junction diode characteristics.
10. Organize the equation of transition capacitance.
Evaluate
1. For the circuit in Fig. determineix,and compute the power dissipated by the 15-k resistor.
2. An iron rod of 1cm radius is bent to a ring of mean diameter 30cm and wound with 250 turns of wire.
Assume the relative permeability of iron as 800. An air gap of 0.1cm is cut across the bent ring.
Calculate the current required to produce a useful flux of 20,000 lines if leakage is neglected.
3. Theeffectiveresistanceoftworesistorsconnectedinseriesis100 . When connected in parallel, then
effective value in 24 ohms. Determinethevalueoftworesistors.
4. Determine the equivalent resistance of the following circuit
5. Determine the form factor of the half-wave rectified sine wave as shown in fig.
6. Find the total impedance and line current in the circuit shown in fig.
7. Determine the effective value of saw tooth waveform shown in fig.
8. A series circuit consisting of 25 resistor, 64Mh inductor and 80F capacitor, is connected toa1 10V,
50Hz, single phase supply. Calculate the current and the voltage across individual elements.
15EE206 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 2023

(Common to EEE and EIE)
Course Objectives
To formulate the solution for basic electric circuit problems
To compute electrical parameters like current, voltage and power using network theorems for AC
and DC circuits
To differentiate single phase and three phase circuits
To analyze R, L, C components for resonance, coupling and transient response

1. Solve the electric circuit problems using mesh and node analysis
2. Apply network theorems to find solutions for AC and DC circuits
3. Analyse three phase circuits
4. Identify the behavior of resonance, transient and coupled circuits
UNIT I 7 Hours
GRAPH THEORY AND BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
The graph of a Network, definitions of tree, co-tree, link, basic loop and basic cut set, Incidence matrix, cut
set matrix, Tie set matrix - Duality - Concepts of Impedance and Admittance - Source Transformation -
Mesh and Nodal analysis
UNIT II 5 Hours
NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS
Superposition theorem - Thevenin's and Norton's theorem - Maximum power transfer theorem - Reciprocity
theorem - Millman's theorem.
UNIT III 5 Hours

THREE PHASE CIRCUITS
Three Phase balanced and unbalanced systems - Analysis of 3 wire and 4 wire circuit with star and delta
connected loads - Phasor diagram - power and power factor measurement.
UNIT IV 7 Hours
RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS
Series and parallel resonance - Q factor and bandwidth - Resonant frequency of a tank circuit - Coupled
circuits - Self and mutual inductances - Coefficient of Coupling - Analysis of coupled circuits - Dot rule
for coupled circuits - Equivalent circuit of coupled circuits - Coupled circuits in Series and Parallel.
UNIT V 6 Hours
TRANSIENTS
Introduction - Transient Response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits with step and sinusoidal inputs - Time
Constant Analysis.
FOR FURTHER READING

Tuned Circuits - Tank circuits - application of second order differential equations.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Verification of Mesh and Nodal analysis.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Verification of superposition theorem.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Verification of Thevenin and Norton theorems.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Power measurement using two wattmeter method.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Frequency Response of a series R-L-C Circuit.
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. William H. Hayt, Jack E. Kemmerly, and Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Eighth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Fifth Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.
3. Charles K.Alexander, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd, 2013.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 4 2 6 4 20
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 12 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define electric circuit.
2. Classify the electric circuit components.
3. Describe the V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
4. State dependent and independent sources.
5. State superposition theorem.
6. State thevenins theorem.
7. State nortons theorem.
8. State reciprocity theorem.
9. Define resonance.
10. Recall resonant frequency expression for series resonance circuit.
11. State Q factor.
12. Define bandwidth.
13. Draw the series resonance and parallel curves.
14. List the applications of resonance.
15. Define coupled circuits.
16. Compare self inductance and mutual inductance.
17. Define coefficient of coupling.
18. Describe transient response.
Understand
1. Explain the algorithm for mesh loop current analysis method.
2. Show the V-I relationships between R, L and C.
3. Explicate the algorithm for node voltage method.
4. Compare the current division and voltage division techniques.
5. Show the peak factor value for sinusoidal waveform.
6. Explain the sinusoidal response of the following single phase ac circuits.
a. Pure resistive circuit
b. Pure inductive circuit
c. Pure capacitive circuit.
7. Explain the applications of network theorems.
8. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor, bandwidth of the circuit, and
draw the resonance curve for a series resonance circuit.
9. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor, bandwidth of the circuit, and
draw the resonance curve for a parallel resonance circuit.
10. Explain in detail the concept of implementing any two types of forcing function on assumed RLC
circuit, and obtain its transient response.
11. Represent the expression for coefficient of coupling.
12. Compare the transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits with step and sinusoidal inputs.
Apply
1. Four resistors of 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 respectively are connected in parallel. What voltage must be
applied to the group in order that power of 100watts may be absorbed also find current flowing
through the circuit.
2. A resistance R is connected in series with a parallel circuit comprising two resistors 12
and 8 respectively. The total power dissipated in the circuit is 70watts when the
applied voltage is 220Volts.Calculate the value of R. In a RLC series circuit consists of resistance
15 , Inductive reactance 7.5 and capacitive reactance 12 are connected with 230 , 50Hz
supply. Calculate i) current ii) Power factor iii) Apparent, active & reactive powers iv) Capacitance
& Inductance v) Impedance. Also draw the phasor diagram.
3. An inductive coil takes 10A and dissipates 1000 Watts, when connected to supply at 250V, 25Hz.
Calculate the resistance, the inductance the impedance and power factor.
4. For the given circuit (Figure 1) discover the branch currents using mesh loop current analysis
method.
Figure 1
5. Calculate current through 20 resistance (Figure 2) by using Thevenins theorem.
Figure 2
6. Determine current through 10 resistance (Figure 3) by Nortons theorem.
Figure 3
7. Judge the superposition theorem to calculate the current through 5 resistances for the network
shown below (Figure 4).
Figure 4
8. Three resistors 25 , 50 and 75 are connected in star. Examine the equivalent delta resistors?
9. In the circuit shown below (Figure 5) switch is closed at t=0. Produce the expression for the current
in circuit and find I at t=0.25 sec.
Figure 5
Analyze
1. Design a V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
2. Compare series and parallel circuits.
3. Illustrate the three phase and single phase ac circuits.
4. Justify LC combinations are not used in electric circuit?
5. When the switch is closed at t=0, find the current I (t) and the voltage across R, L & C and analyze
it completely.
6. Outline maximum power transfer theorem.
7. Analyze the following
i) Transient response of RC circuit with step and sinusoidal inputs
ii) Transient response of RL circuit with step and sinusoidal inputs
iii) Transient response of RLC circuits with step and sinusoidal inputs
Evaluate
1. Do the following operations and write the result in polar form.
i) (5+j4) X (-4-j6)
ii) (-2-j5) / (5+j7)
2. Two impedances 14+j5 ohms and 18+j10 ohms are connected in parallel across a 200V, 50 Hz
supply. Construte i) the admittance of each branch and of entire circuit, ii) the total current.
3. List the advantages of time domain analysis of circuits.
Create
1. Propose the node voltages at all points using nodal analysis method for the network (Figure 6)
shown below.
Figure 6
2. Determine the value of current flowing through 3resistor.
3. Reconstruct the phasor diagram for pure resistive circuit.

4. Calculate the total resistance RT, and total curren I in the following circuits using star delta
transformationtechnique
5. Construct the different type of power in single phase a.c. circuits and write their formulae.
6. Propose the transient response expression for parallel RL circuits.
15GE107 WORKSHOP PRACTICE 0021

Common to AE, AG,AU,ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT,FD (I Semester) and to CE,CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (II Semester)
Course Objectives
To provide hands on training for fabrication of components using carpentry, sheet metal, fitting
and welding equipment/tools
To develop the skills for preparing the green sand mould using foundry tools and to make simple
electrical & household pipe line connections using suitable tools
To develop the skill to make / operate/utilize the simple engineering components

1. Fabricate simple components using carpentry, sheet metal, fitting & welding equipment/tools
2. Prepare green sand mould and make simple electrical & household pipe line connections using
suitable tools
3. Make / operate / utilize the simple engineering components
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Forming of simple object in sheet metal using suitable tools (Example: Dust Pan / Soap Box) (or) making
simple object using Metal Spinning Machine. (Example: Aluminum Cup).
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Prepare V (or) Half round (or) Square (or) Dovetail joint from the given mild Steel flat.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Fabrication of a simple component using thin and thick plates. (Example: Book rack)
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Making a simple component using carpentry power tools. (Example: Electrical switch Box/Tool box/
Letter box).
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Construct a household pipe line connections using pipes, Tee joint, Four way joint, elbow, union, bend,
Gate way and Taps (or) Construct a pipe connections of house application centrifugal pump using pipes,
bend, gate valve, flanges and foot valve.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Prepare a green sand mould using solid pattern/split pattern.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Construct a domestic electrical wire connections using indicator, one way switch with calling bell, two way
switch with lamp, one way switch with fan regulator and one way switch with socket.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Alignment and clearance setting of Hook set and Needle of Sewing Machine
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Change of gears for sewing machine for increase or decreasing the speed of the machine
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Adjustment of gauges and guides in sewing machines.
Total: 30 Hours
15MA301 FOURIER SERIES AND TRANSFORMS 3204

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. except CSE
Course Objectives
To understand the concepts of Fourier series, Transforms and Boundary Conditions, to model and
analyze the physical phenomena
To implement the Fourier analysis, in the study of heat flow, fluid mechanics and electromagnetic
fields
To summarize and apply the mathematical aspects that contribute to the solution of one dimensional
wave equation
To confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and offer appropriate
solutions, using the skills learned in their interactive and supporting environment

1. Recognize the periodicity of a function and formulate the same as a combination of sine and cosine
using Fourier series
2. Formulate a function in frequency domain whenever the function is defined in time domain
3. Apply the Fourier transform, which converts the time function into a sum of sine waves of different
frequencies, each of which represents a frequency component
4. Classify and solve a partial differential equation and able to solve them
5. Use the Z-transform to convert a discrete-time signal, which is a sequence of real or complex
numbers, into a complex frequency domain representation
UNIT I 9 Hours
FOURIER SERIES
Dirichlet's conditions - General Fourier series - Odd and even functions - Half range cosine and sine series
- Root mean square value.
UNIT II 13 Hours
LAPLACE TRANSFORM
Laplace Transform - Existence Condition - Transforms of Standard Functions - Unit step function, Unit
impulse function - Properties - Transforms of Derivatives and Integrals - Initial and Final Value Theorems
- Laplace transform of Periodic Functions - Inverse Laplace transforms.
UNIT III 8 Hours

FOURIER TRANSFORM
Fourier Integral Theorem - Fourier Transform and Inverse Fourier Transform - Sine and Cosine Transforms
- Properties - Transforms of Simple Functions - Convolution Theorem - Parseval's Identity
UNIT IV 8 Hours
APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Classification of Second Order Quasi Linear Partial Differential Equations - Fourier Series Solutions of
One Dimensional Wave Equation - One Dimensional Heat Equation - Steady State Solution of Two -
Dimensional Heat Equation - Fourier Series Solutions in Cartesian Coordinates.
UNIT V 7 Hours
Z -TRANSFORM
Z-Transform - Elementary Properties - Inverse Z-Transform - Convolution Method - Partial fraction method
- Solution of Difference Equations using Z-Transform.
FOR FURTHER READINGS

Solutions of one dimensional wave equation and heat equations using Laplace transforms method.
Reference(s)
1. Larry.C.Andrews and Bhimsen.K.Shivamoggi, Integral Transforms for Engineers, First Edition,
PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Ian.N.Sneddan, The Use of Integral Transforms, Second Edition, McGraw Hill companies, 1972.
3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Eighth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc,
Singapore, 2008.
4. Peter V. O. Neil,Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Seventh Edition, Cenage Learning India
Private Ltd, 2012.
5. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Fortieth Edition, Khanna Publications, New Delhi
2007.
6. C. Ray Wylie and C. Louis Barrett,Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 6 6 22
2 2 6 6 6 6 26
3 2 2 6 6 16
4 2 6 6 6 20
5 2 2 6 6 16
Total 100
Remember
1. State the Dirichlets Conditions.
2. Define even and odd function graphically.
3. List out the complex Fourier transform pair.
4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transforms.
5. Write the condition for the existence of Laplace Transform.
6. Reproduce L (t sin at).
7. State the conditions for classifications of PDE.
8. Write down the value of a2 in one dimensional wave equation.
9. Recognize z f (n 1) interms of f ( z )
.
n
10. Recall the Z Transform of cos
2 .
Understand
1. Infer the half-range cosine series for the function f x x , 0 x .
2. Interpret the Fourier series of period 2 for the function f ( x) x 0 x 1

2 x 1 x 2 .
3. Identify the Fourier transform of f x 1 x for x 1 . Hence evaluate sin x

2
0 for | x | 1 0 x dx and
4
sin x
x
dx.
0
ax
4. Illustrate the Fourier Sine and Cosine transform of e dx
and evaluate
(a
0
2
x2 )
.
t
5. Exemplify sin u cos(t u) du
0
using Laplace Transform .
z
6. Indicate the inverse Laplace transform of by the method of partial fraction.
( z 1)( z 2)( z 3)
7. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Laplace transform of 8z 2
2 z 14 z 1 .
8. Classify the possible solutions of one dimensional wave equation.
dF
9. Formulate z nf (t ) z ( z)
dz
10. Summarize Z-transform.
Apply
1. Execute the function f ( x ) cos x in ( , ) to represent as a Fourier series of periodicity 2.
2. A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of b
and then released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t.
3. Find the Fourier transform of f x a x for x a . Hence evaluate sin x
2
0 for | x | a 0 x dx and
4
sin x
x
dx.
0
1, for | x | a hence evaluate sin 2 x

sin x 2 dx
4. Find the Fourier transform of f ( x)
0 , for | x | a
0 x dx and 0
x
5. Verify the initial and final value theorem for the function 1 + e-2t.
cos 2t cos 3t
6. Find L
t
1
7. Using Convolution theorem find the inverse Laplace transform of

s s 25
2
. 2

p p2
2

8. Find L using Partial fraction method.
1
p( p 2)( p 3)
z2
9. Using Convolution theorem evaluate z 1
( z 1)( z 3) .
10. Solve the differential equation
y(n 3) 3 y(n 1) 2 y(n) 0 given that y(0) 4, y(1) 0 and y(2) 8 .
Analyze

1. Obtain the sine series for f ( x) x in 0 x 2
l
in the interval 0, l .

l x in l xl
2
2. A tightly stretched string of length fastened at both ends. The mid-point of the string taken to a
height b and show that the displacement at any time t is given by
8b 1 x at 1 3x 3at
y( x, t ) 2 2 sin cos 3 sin cos ........
1 3 .
a 2 x 2 for x a
3. Organize the Fourier transform of f(x) given by f ( x) . Hence evaluate
0 for x a

sin t t cos t .

0
t 3 dt 4

dx
4. Evaluate x
0
2

a x2 b2
2

using transform method.
x, 0 x 1
5. Organize the Fourier sine and cosine transform of f ( x) 2 x, 1 x 2 .

0, x 2

6. Prove that the Laplace Transform of the triangular wave of period 2 defined by
f (t) = t , 0t
is 12 tan h s .
2 t , t 2 s 2
s2
7.Organize the inverse Laplace transform of using partial fraction.
s 4s 13
2
d2y dy
8. Solve using Laplace Transforms 2
4 4 y te t ; y(0) 0; y' (0) 1
dt dt .
1 z2
9. Find z by the method of partial fraction.
( z 2)( z 4)
2
10. Using Z Transform solve

y(n) 3 y(n 1) 4 y(n 2) 0, n 2 given that y(0) 3 and y(1) 2 .
Evaluate
2x
1. Determine the Fourier series of the function f(x) of Period 2 given by 1 in x 0
f ( x)
1 2 x in 0 x

2. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2 apart and the points of the string are given
cx
, in 0 x
initial velocities u where u x being the distance from one end point.
c (2 x) in x 2

Find the displacement of the string at any subsequent time.

dx
3. Use transforms method to evaluate (x
0
2
1)( x 2 4)
x2
a2 x2
4. Determine the Fourier cosine transform of e 2
. Hence prove e is a self-reciprocal.
5. Choose the Laplace transform of the function f(t) with period 2 , where f(t) =

sin t , for 0 t
.

0 , for t 2

te
3t
6. Using Laplace Transform evaluate sin 2t dt
0
1

7. Using Convolution theorem find the inverse Laplace transform of .
s s 25
2 2
d2y dy
8. Solve using Laplace Transforms 2
4 4 y te t ; y(0) 0; y' (0) 1 .
dt dt
9. Solve the equation y n2 7 y n1 12 y n 2 n , given that y0 y1 0 .
z
10. Evaluate inverse Z-transform of by the method of partial
( z 1)( z 2)( z 3)
fraction.
15EI302 ELECTRICAL MACHINES 2023
Course Objectives
To impart knowledge on constructional details, principle of operation, performance characteristics
and starters of D.C machines
To understand the constructional details, principle of operation, equivalent circuit and performance
of transformers
To identify the constructional details, types, principle of operation and performance of single phase
and three phase induction motors
To understand the constructional details and principle of operation of synchronous machines
To know the constructional details and principle of operation of special machines

1. Analyse the characteristics of DC Machines
2. Identify appropriate transformer for given application
3. Illustrate the working priniciple of single phase and three phase insuction motors
4. Understand the principle of operation of synchronous machines and special machines
UNIT I 6 Hours
D.C. MACHINES
DC Generator: Principle of operation - Classifications - Characteristics and Applications of series, shunt
and compound generators - DC Motor: Principle of operation - Types - Characteristics and Applications of
series, shunt and compound motors - Starting of DC motors - Working of two point, three point and four
point starters
UNIT II 6 Hours
TRANSFORMERS
Principle of operation - Transformer on no load and load - Parameters referred to HV/LV windings -
Equivalent circuit - Regulation - Testing - Load test, open circuit and short circuit tests - Problems on
equivalent circuit
UNIT III 7 Hours

SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Single Phase Induction Motor: Construction - Working principle - Types - Split Phase Induction Motor -
Capacitor Start Induction Motor - Capacitor Start and Capacitor Run Induction Motor - Shaded Pole
Induction Motor - Applications - Three Phase Induction Motor: Principle of operation - Squirrel Cage rotor
- Wound rotor - Torque equation - Torque-Slip Characteristics Applications
6 Hours
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
Construction and Types of synchronous machines - emf equation - Principle of operation of Synchronous
motor - Synchronous condenser - V curves and Inverted V curves - Applications of Synchronous Motors
UNIT V 5 Hours
SPECIAL MOTORS
Brushless DC motor - Reluctance motor - Hysteresis motor - Variable reluctance Stepper motor - Permanent
magnet stepper motor - Universal motor
FOR FURTHER READING

Speed control of DC motor -Instrument transformers-Cooling methods for transformer
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Load test on DC shunt motor
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Speed control of DC shunt motor.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Load test on single phase transformer
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Load test on single phase induction motor.
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
2014.
2. B.L.Theraja, Textbook(s) of Electrical Technology, S.Chand publications, 2012.
3. S. K. Bhattacharya, Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd, 2012.
4. Siskind, Electrical Machines, 2012.
5. A.E.Fitzgerald and Stephen Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company
Ltd, 2010.
6. A.E.Fitzgerald and Stephen Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company
Ltd, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 4 8 6 4 26
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 6 14
Total 100
Remember
1. List out the main parts of DC machine.
2. Identify the purpose of commutator in DC machine
3. DC supply never applied to transformer - Justify
4. Define the all-day efficiency of a transformer.
5. Define slip of an induction motor.
6. Draw the power stages of an induction motor.
7. State the function of synchronous condensers.
8. List any four advantages of brushless DC motor.
9. Define universal motor.
10. List the three types of dc motor starters.
11. Identify the purpose of laminating the core in a transformer.
12. Define equivalent circuit of the transformer.
13. Define voltage regulation of a transformer.
14. Classify single phase induction motors.
15. Identify the usage of centrifugal switch in single induction motor.
16. List any two applications of shaded pole induction motors.
17. Classify three phase induction motors.
18. List any four applications of three phase induction motors.
19. Define synchronous speed.
20. State pitch factor of an armature winding.

21. Define distribution factor.
22. Define voltage regulation of an alternator.
23. Define hunting.
24. List any four applications of synchronous motor.
25. Identify the rating of the single phase machine.
26. State the working principle of brushless DC motor.
27. State the working principle of hysteresis motor.
28. Define step angle.
29. List the three types of stepper motors.
Understand
1. Compare the V and inverted V curves of synchronous motor.
2. Represent synchronous motor adjust itself to an increasing shaft load.
3. Identify the function of brushes in dc generator and dc motor.
4. Classify dc generators.
5. Infer the significance of back emf in dc motors.
6. Why dc series motor should be started with load?
7. Indicate the function of a no-voltage release coil provided in a dc motor starter.
8. Exemplify the internal and external characteristics of dc shunt, dc series and dc compound
generators.
9. Illustrate the electrical and mechanical characteristics of three types of dc motors.
10. Differentiate between step up and step down transformers.
11. Does the transformer draw any current when secondary is open? Why?
12. Why transformers are rated in kVA?
13. The efficiency of a transformer is always higher than that of rotating electrical machines. Why?
14. The no load of a 50 Hz single phase transformer is 6600/330v. Find the number of turns in each
winding if the maximum flux is to be about 0.06wb in the core.
15. Compare open circuit and short tests on transformer.
16. Derive an equivalent circuit of a single-phase transformer and show how it is useful in the analysis
of the performance of a transformer.
17. With neat circuit diagram, explain the open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase
transformer.
18. Differentiate between capacitor start and capacitor start and capacitor run induction motors.
19. How will you reverse the direction of rotation of a capacitor start induction run motor?
20. Illustrate the construction and working of split-phase induction motor.
21. Illustrate the construction and working of capacitor start and capacitor run induction motor.
22. Derive the torque equation of three phase induction motor.
23. Why an induction motor is called asynchronous motor?
24. The air gap length is kept minimum in induction motor. Why?
25. Why is the efficiency of a three phase induction motor less than that of a transformer?
26. Illustrate the construction and principle of operation of three phase induction motor.
27. Justify Why the value of regulation calculated by synchronous impedance method is more than
the actual value?
28. Justify Why a synchronous motor has no starting torque?
29. A synchronous motor always runs at synchronous speed. Why?
30. Does change in excitation affect the power factor of the synchronous motor?
31. Exemplify the concepts of EMF method to determine the voltage regulation.
32. Explain the construction and principle of operation of synchronous motor.
33. Demonstrate the concepts of MMF method to determine the voltage regulation.
34. Illustrate the construction and working principle of variable reluctance stepper motor.
35. Explain the construction and working principle of permanent magnet stepper motor.
36. Demonstrate the construction and working principle of reluctance motor.
37. Illustrate the construction and working principle of hysteresis motor.
38. Demonstrate the construction and working principle of brushless DC motor.
Apply
1. With neat sketch, explain the working of a three point starter.
2. A 10 kVA, 200/400 V, 50 Hz single phase transformer gave the following test results.
O.C. Test: 200 V 1.3 A 120 W (H.V. Side)
S.C. Test: 22 V 30 A 200 W (L.V. Side)
Calculate
i) Magnetizing current and the current corresponding to the core loss at terminal voltage and frequency.
ii) Parameters of equivalent circuit as referred to low voltage winding.
Analyse
1. Differentiate between lap and wave windings used in dc machine.
2. How will you change the direction of rotation of a dc motor?
3. Under what condition the mechanical power developed in a dc motor will be maximum?
4. The Armature of a 4-pole DC motor has lap connected winding accommodated in 60 slots, each
containing 20 conductors. If the useful flux per pole is 25mwb, calculate the torque developed when
the armature current is 60A.
5. The secondary of a 500kVA, 5000/500v transformer has 100 turns, Calculate i) Primary turns ii)
Primary and secondary full load currents, neglecting losses.
6. A single-phase 50 Hz core type transformer has a rectangular core 20 X 15cms and the maximum
allowable flux density is 1 wb per Sq.m. Find the number of turns on the high and low voltage sides
for a voltage ratio of 3300/330v.
7. The test results of a 20 kVA, 1000/250 V, 50 Hz single phase transformer are as follows:
O.C. Test: 1000 V 1.75 A 300 W (H.V. Side)
S.C. Test: 5.5 V 60 A 180 W (L.V. Side)
8. Determine the transformer constants and also draw the equivalent circuit.
9. Why single phase induction motor is not self starting?
10. Draw and explain the torque-slip characteristic of an induction motor and also mark starting torque
and maximum torque on the curve.
11. Illustrate the synchronous motor V curves and inverted V curves.
12. Compare the reluctance motor and induction motor.
13. Differentiate between synchronous motor and hysteresis motor.
14. Differentiate between variable reluctance and permanent magnet stepper motors.
15EI303 FLUID AND SOLID MECHANICS 3003
Course Objectives
To impart knowledge on simple stresses, strains and elastic constants
To enhance the student's knowledge on fluid statics, kinematics and dynamics
To impart knowledge on the fluid properties and application to real situations of fluid flow

1. Distinguish between Stresses and Strains
2. Compare rate of loading, shear force and bending moment
3. Interpret the fundamentals of fluid systems
4. Classify the pumps, fluid flow and fluid flow measuring devices
UNIT I 9 Hours
SIMPLE STRESSES AND STRAINS
Tension, compression and shear stresses - Hookes law - stress strain diagram for mild steel - Relationship
between stress and strain - Elastic constants and relationships between them - ultimate stress and working
stress - composite bars - Temperature stresses
UNIT II 9 Hours
BEAMS AND BENDING
Types of beams - Types of supports - shear force and bending moment of beams: Sketching of shear force
and bending moment diagrams for cantilever beam having point and UDL, simply supported beam having
point and UDL and over hanging beams having point load and UDL - Relationship between rates of loading,
shear force and bending moment
UNIT III 9 Hours

FLUID PROPERTIES AND KINEMATICS
Fundamental units - mass density - specific weight - viscosity - surface tension - capillarity - compressibility
- Types of flow - Streamline - streak line - path line - continuity equation
UNIT IV 9 Hours
FLUID DYNAMICS AND FLOW THROUGH PIPES
Stream and potential functions - Bernoullis equation - venturi meter - orifice meter. Darcys equation - major
and minor losses - Pipes in series and parallel - hydraulic gradient line
UNIT V 9 Hours
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
Classification of pumps - Working principle of Centrifugal pumps - Multistage centrifugal pumps -
Minimum speed to start the pump - Specific speed and characteristic curves - Working principle of
reciprocating pumps - Negative slip - Indicator diagram
FOR FURTHER READING

Types of steels - Types of Meters - Moody diagram - Functions of air vessels.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. S. Ramamrutham, Strength of Materials, Dhanpat Rai and Publication, 2010.
2. R.K. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, 2011.
3. R. K. Rajput, A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.,
2011.
4. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jain and Arun K. Jain, Mechanics of Materials, Laxmi Publications, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 7 10 17
2 7 10 17
3 4 6 4 14
4 7 12 19
5 5 10 15
6 6 12 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Define stress.
2. Define strain.
3. State Hookes law.
4. Define Elasticity.
5. Give the relationship between bulk modulus, youngs modulus and poissons ratio.
6. What is the necessity of calculating the values of thermal stresses in structural members?
7. What are the types of beams?
8. What are the different types of end conditions in a beam?
9. What are the different types of loads?
10. Define shear force and bending moment
11. What do you mean by point of contraflexure
12. Define fluids.
13. Enumerate the important fluid properties with their units of measurement.
14. List the various pressure measuring instruments.
15. What is an incompressible fluid flow?
16. List the forces present in fluid flow.
17. What is Eulers equation of motion?
18. State Bernoullis theorem.
19. What is specific speed of the turbine?
20. How pumps are classified?
Understand
1. Draw the stress strain curve of a ductile material.
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam subjected
to a couple
3. How are fluids classified?
4. Explain the importance of viscosity in fluid flow.
5. What do you understand by Continuity Equation?
6. Under what conditions one can treat real fluid flow as irrotational.
7. List the properties of stream function
8. State the assumptions used in deriving Bernoullis equation.
9. Mention the applications of Bernoullis equation.
10. Compare venture meter with orifice meter and mention the advantages of venture meter.
11. Discuss in brief how and when separation of flow takes place in a reciprocating pump.
12. Differentiate between the volute casing and vortex casing for the centrifugal pump.
Apply
1. How will you calculate yield stress?
2. How will you calculate ultimate stress?
3. Why does the viscosity of a gas increases with the increase in temperature while that of a liquid
decreases with increase in temperature?
4. Sketch the velocity distribution for uniform irrotational flow.
5. Derive the continuity equation for three dimensional flow.
6. Describe the use and limitations of the flow nets.
7. Drive Bernoullis equation for the flow of an incompressible fluid.
8. Explain the principle of venturimeter with a neat sketch. Derive the expression for the rate of flow of
fluid through it.
9. What would happen if cavitations occur in centrifugal pump?
3003
15EI304 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS
Course Objectives
To expose the fundamentals of thermodynamics and terminologies of various thermodynamics
systems
To understand the basic concepts of various thermal applications like Internal Combustion\engines,
Gas turbines, steam boiler, steam turbine and compressors
To interpret and differentiate Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems

1. Epitomize the concepts of thermodynamics and terminologies of thermodynamic systems
2. Summarize the boiler handling process and Compare the steam turbines
3. Compare and illustrate Refrigeration and Air Conditioning systems
UNIT I 9 Hours
BASIC CONCEPTS AND LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS
Thermodynamic systems - Boundary - Control volume - System and surroundings - Universe - Properties
- State-process - Cycle - Equilibrium - Work and heat transfer - Point and path functions - First law of
thermodynamics for open and closed systems - steady flow energy equations - Second law of
thermodynamics - Heat engines - Refrigerators and heat pumps - Carnot cycle - Clausius inequality -
Entropy
UNIT II 9 Hours
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND AIR STANDARD CYCLES
Internal combustion engines Classification - Air standard cycles: Otto, diesel and dual cycles - comparison
of efficiency. Gas Turbines - Brayton cycle - Open and closed cycle - Ideal and actual cycles.Working
Principle of four stroke and two stroke engines - spark and compression ignition engines - Applications of
Internal Combustion engines
UNIT III 8 Hours

STEAM BOILERS AND TURBINES
Formation of steam - Properties of steam - Steam power cycle, High-pressure boilers - Mountings and
accessories. Steam turbines: Impulse and reaction principle - Velocity diagrams - Compounding and
governing methods of steam turbines - Layout and working principle of a steam power plant
UNIT IV 9 Hours
COMPRESSORS
Classifications of compressors - Positive displacement compressors, Reciprocating compressors - Indicated
power, Clearance volume, various efficiencies, Clearance ratio, Conditions for perfect and imperfect
intercooling and Multi stage with intercooling.Rotary positive displacement compressors - Construction
and working principle of centrifugal and axial flow compressors
UNIT V 10 Hours
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
Refrigeration - Basic functional difference between refrigeration and air conditioning -Terminologies of
refrigeration - refrigerants - Vapour compression cycle and Pressure - Enthalpy and Temperature - Entropy
diagram - Saturation cycles - Effect of sub cooling and super heating - Vapour absorption: Air conditioning
systems - Terminologies of psychrometry -Simple psychometric processes - summer, winter, window and
central air conditioning
FOR FURTHER READING

Steam Turbine, Pressure Cooker, Steam Nozzles - Applications of IC engines - Cogeneration Steam power
plant - axi-centrifugal compressors , mixed-flow compressors - Domestic Refrigerator, Automobile Air
Conditioning Systems, Thermoelastic cooling
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Mahesh M Rathore , Thermal Engineering ,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Nag P.K., Basic and Applied Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
3. Stephen R. Turns, Thermodynamics Concepts and Applications, Cambridge University Press,
2006.
4. Eastop and McConkey, Applied Thermodynamics and Engineering,Pearson Education Ltd,2009.
5. Mathur M.L. and Metha F.S., Thermal Engineering, Jain Brothers, New Delhi, 2009.
6. Sankaar B.K., Thermal Enginerring, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 4 8 6 4 26
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 6 14
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Intensive and Extensive property with examples.
2. Define path, process, and cycle.
3. State Kelvin-plank statement of second law of thermodynamics.
4. Define refrigerator.
5. Define heat engine.
6. What are the differences between Petrol and Diesel engine?
7. What are the advantages of Multi- stage compressor over the single stage air Compressor?
8. Define volumetric efficiency of a compressor.
9. Define ton of refrigeration and COP.
Understand
1. What is meant by steady flow system?
2. What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle?
3. What are the limitations of first law of thermodynamics?
4. Sketch the P-V diagram of dual cycle and mark the processes.
5. Find out the specific volume of at a temperature of 200 C and 0.7 dry.
6. Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines.
7. What are the disadvantages of a single stage reciprocating air compressor?
8. What is the similarity between Diesel and Dual cycle?
9. What is meant by COP?
10.Write the difference between Refrigerator and Air Conditioner.
Apply / Evaluate
1. How will you classify the Internal Combustion engines?
2. How the ignition takes place in C.I. Engine?
3. Find out the specific volume of at a temperature of 200 C and 0.7 dry.
4. For the same compression ratio and heat rejection, which is most efficient: Otto, Diesel or Dual?
Explain with PV and TS diagrams.
5. How the use of multistage compression improves the volumetric efficiency of air compressor?
6. Compare steady state and unsteady state heat transfer.
7. Find the enthalpy and entropy of the dry steam at a pressure of 30 bar.
8. Determine the molecular volume of any perfect gas at 600 N/m2 and 30C. Universal gas constant
may be taken as 8314 J / kg mole K.
9. Differentiate impulse and reaction turbines.
10.How will you increase the Cooling Effect in Refrigerator?
Create
1. Design the efficiency and mean pressure for petrol engine working with the compression ratio of 5.5.
The pressure and temperature at the beginning of the compression are 1bar and 300k respectively. The
peakpressure is 30bar. Assume ratio of specific heats to be 1.4 for air. (Use of standard steam tables and
refrigeration tables are permitted)
15EI305 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS 3204
Course Objectives
To recall the operation of various semiconductor devices
To illustrate the characteristics of BJT and FET
To explain the operation of amplifiers and oscillators

1. Understand the working principle of various semiconductor devices
2. Determine the various parameters of BJT and FET
3. Construct amplifier circuits and oscillator circuits using BJT and FET
UNIT I 10 Hours
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Introduction to semiconductor devices - Construction and V-I Characteristics: P-N junction diode, Zener
diode, UJT, SCR, Diac, Triac, BJT - Construction and Drain and Transfer characteristics: JFET and
MOSFET.
UNIT II 10 Hours
BJT: BIASING AND MODELING
Operating Point, Fixed bias, Emitter stabilizd bias, Voltage divider bias - BJT Modeling, Determination of
h-parameters, Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h-parameters.
UNIT III 8 Hours

FET: BIASING AND MODELING
Fixed bias, Self bias, Voltage divider bias - FET small signal model, Fixed bias configuration, Self bias
configuration, Voltage divider bias configuration.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
FEEDBACK CIRCUITS AND OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS
Feedback concepts, Feedback conncetion types, Practical feedback circuits - Theory of sinusoidal
oscillators - Phase shift oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator - Colpitt's oscillator, Hartley oscillator, Crystal
oscillator.
UNIT V 8 Hours
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER AND TUNED AMPLIFIER
Differential amplifiers: Common mode analysis, differential mode analysis, DC analysis, AC analysis -
Tuned amplifiers: Characteristics, Single tuned amplifiers, double tuned amplifiers.
FOR FURTHER READING

Design of constant DC voltage source, Transistor as an amplifier, FET as a switch, Quartz clock, differential
amplifier in operational amplifier, Tuning of sound system.
Reference(s)
1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C. Halkias and Sathyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Robert L. Boylestad & Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, Pearson Education,
Tenth edition, 2012.
3. Theodre F. Boghert, Electronic Devices & Circuits, Pearson Education, Sixth edition, 2011.
4. Solid State Circuits, NPTEL - IIT, Chennai, Link: http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 2 1 6 2 6 18
2 2 2 2 6 2 2 16
3 1 1 1 2 1 2 6 6 20
4 2 6 2 12 22
5 1 1 2 4 2 6 2 6 24
Total 100
Remember
1. Mention the conditions of proper JFET biasing.
2. List out the applications for zener diode.
3. What is valley voltage of tunnel diode?
4. Draw the characteristics curve for transistor.
5. Define current amplification factor in CC transistor.
6. Mention the values of input resistance in CB, CE & CC configuration?
7. Why voltage divider bias is commonly used in amplifier circuits?
8. How FET is known as voltage variable resistor?
9. How self-bias circuit is used as constant current source?
10. Why self-bias technique is not used in enhancement type MOSFET?
11. Mention the types of IC voltage regulator.
12. State conversion efficiency.
13. Which of the transistor circuit is stable? Why?
14. Mention the conditions of proper transistor biasing?
15. In which region the JFET act as a simple resistor and why?
Apply
1. Discuss the biasing circuits of BJT and its operating point.
2. Construct an equation for differential gain and CMRR.
3. Construct an expression for frequency of oscillation of transistorized Colpitts oscillator.
4. Construct an expression for frequency of RC phases shift oscillator.
5. Prove that oscillations will not be sustained if, at the oscillator frequency, the magnitude of the
product of the transfer gain and feedback factor is less than unity.
6. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 100. The input voltages applied areV1=1mv
and V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c)
CMRR=10,000.
7. 20. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 120. The input voltages applied are
V1=1mv and V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c)
CMRR=1000.
8. Construct the expression for single and double tuned amplifiers.
9. Why SCRs are required to be connected in parallel? What are the problems associated with parallel
connection of SCRs? How they are eliminated?
10. A germanium diode carries a current of 10mA when a forward bias of 0.2V is applied.
a) Estimate the reverse saturation current (Is), b) Calculate bias voltages needed for diode currents
of 1mA and 100mA. Comment on the range of these two voltages.
Analyse
1. How are the amplifiers classified based on the bias conditions?
2. BJT is known as current controlled device. Justify.
3. FET is known as voltage variable resistor. Justify.
4. FET is known as voltage controlled device. Justify.
5. How self-bias circuit is used as constant current source?
6. CMRR for the differential amplifier should be high. Comment.
7. Explain how to stabilize the amplitude against variation due to fluctuations occasioned in Wien
bridge oscillator.
8. Show that the gain of Wien bridge oscillator using BJT amplifier must be at least three for the
oscillations to occur.
9. Analyze the below two statements.
(a) A p-n junction is a robust device and is a good choice for a diode required in power electronics.
(b) Due to the nonlinear, exponential nature of the current, the p-n junction can be used as a
Varistor.
10. Give real-time applications for single and double tuned amplifiers.
Create
1. Relate the working of transistor digital switch.
2. Relate the working of zener diode and voltage regulator.
3. Design a radio transmitter and receiver in printed circuit board using various types of oscillators.
15EI306 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 3204

Course Objectives
To understand various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using Boolean
functions
To design combinational circuits for various applications
To understand the various logic families and memory devices
To design the various synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits

1. Convert the various number systems and simplify the expressions using Karnaugh map
2. Build the combinational logic circuits for simple applications and implement a sequential digital
circuit for the given specifications
3. Interpret the logic families, different memory devices and PLDs
UNIT I 9 Hours
NUMBER SYSTEM
Review of number system; Types and conversion codes - Boolean algebra: De-Morgan's theorem -
switching functions and simplification using K-maps & Quine McCluskey method.
UNIT II 9 Hours
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
Design using logic gates - Design of adders, subtractors, comparators, code converters, encoders, decoders,
Multiplexers and demultiplexers -Function realization using multiplexers.
UNIT III 9 Hours

SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
Flip flops - SR, JK - MSJK, D and T - Shift Registers - Analysis of synchronous sequential circuits; Design
of synchronous sequential circuits - Counters, state diagram; state reduction; state assignment.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
Analysis of asynchronous sequential machines - State assignment - Asynchronous design problem -
Difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequential Circuits.
9 Hours
UNIT V
LOGIC FAMILIES AND MEMORY DEVICES
Logic Families: TTL, ECL, CMOS - Memories: ROM, PROM, EPROM - Study of memory ICs - Control
signals and their programming - Programmable Logic Devices: PLA, PAL, PLD and FPGA.
FOR FURTHER READING

Realizing the Digital Logic Circuits Concept using Virtual Instrumentation: Logic Gates, Half Adder, Full
Adder, Code Converters, Multiplexer and De-multiplexer.
Reference(s)
1. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
3. John M. Yarbrough, Digital Logic, Application & Design, Thomson, 2010.
4. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals Logic Design, Jaico Publishing, 2009.
5. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practices, Pearson Education, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 10 20
2 2 2 12 2 4 20
3 2 2 8 8 20
4 2 2 12 4 20
5 2 2 12 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Flip-flop
2. List the various methods used for triggering flip-flops
3. List the procedural steps for designing asynchronous sequential circuit.
4. Define an up-counter and down-counter.
5. Define programmable logic array.
6. List out the basic types of programmable logic devices.
7. List out the characteristics of digital logics family.
8. Define Binary logic.
9. State the De-Morgan's theorem.
10. List out the various types of flipflops.
Understand
1. Draw the logic diagram for carry Look ahead adder.
2. Draw the characteristic table of JK Flip-Flop
3. Write the characteristic equation for the J-K flip-flop
4. Distinguish between combinational and sequential logic circuits.
5. Extrapolate the excitation table for S-R flip-flop
6. Differentiate Mealy Circuit and Moore Circuit.
7. Identify the major advantages of ECL Logic.
8. Indicate any two applications of open collector logic.
9. Compare static 0 and static 1 hazard.
10. Compare up-counter and down-counter.
Apply
1. Convert an SR flip-flop into D flip-flop.
2. Using SR flip flops, design a parallel counter which counts in the sequence
000,111,101,110,001,010,000.
3. Design a counter with the following repeated binary sequence: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6. Use JK flip-flops.
4. Show how to minimize the number of rows in the primitive state table of an incompletely specified
sequential machine?
5. Implement the switching functions:
Z1 = abde + abce + bc + deZ2 = ace,
Z3 = bc +de+cde+bdandZ4 = ace +ce Using a 5*8*4 PLA
6. Sketch the operation of ECL with a neat diagram.
Analyse
1. Design the BCD-to-Seven Segment Decoder using minimum number of gates. The six invalid
combinations should result in a blank display
2. Draw the circuit diagram of a T flip-flop derived from J-K flip-flop. Explain its operation
3. A synchronous sequential machine has a single control input x and the clock, and two outputs A
and B. On Consecutive rising edges of the clock, the code on A and B changes from 00 to 01 to 10
to 11 and repeats itself if x = 1;if at any time, x = 0, it holds to the present state. Draw the state
diagram and implement the circuit using T flip-flops.
4. Compare state diagram and state table.
5. A sequential circuit with 2D Flip-Flop A and B, input X and output Y is specified by the following
next state and output equations.
A (t+1) = AX+BX B (t+1) = XY = (A+B) X
(i) Draw the logic diagram of the circuit.
(ii) Derive the state table.
(iii) Derive the state diagram.

6. Differentiate PAL and PLA.
7. Compare SPLD and CPLD
Create
1. Design a combinational circuit with three inputs and one output. The output is 1 when binary value
of the input is less than 3.
2. Tabulate the truth table and Implement the following Boolean functions by using 8*4 ROM
(i) A(x,y,z) = (1,2,4,6)
(ii) B(x,y,z) = (0,1,6,7)
15EI307 FLUID MECHANICS AND APPLIED

0021
THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To expertise in the various thermodynamic concepts and principles
To understand the fundamentals of Fluid mechanics and Hydraulic machines
To provide practice in making engineering judgments, estimates and assessing the reliability of
measurements, skills which are very important in all engineering disciplines

1. Understand the thermodynamics concepts and principles to implement in the real Engineering field
2. Measure viscosity, flow rate and discharge level of pumps
3. Design simple fluid power circuits, Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine by varying the load condition
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Find out the Viscosity value of the given oil sample by using Red Wood Viscometer
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Find out the Flash Point and Fire Point Temperature of the given fuel samples
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Performance test on Multistage Reciprocating Air Compressor by varying the delivery pressure
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Analyze the performance of centrifugal pump by varying the discharge level of the water
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Performance test on Submergible pump by varying the discharge level of the water
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control
i)velocity
ii)direction and
iii) force of single and double acting
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using simulation software
Total: 30 Hours
15EI308 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

0021
LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To illustrate the VI characteristics of semi conductor devices
To determine the various parameters of solid state devices by experimentally
To analyze the application of solid state devices

1. Explain the functionality of the solid state devices and circuits
2. Analyse the frequency response of various amplifiers and oscillators
3. Select semi conductor devices for a given application
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Design a switch using PN junction diode
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Design a voltage regulator using Zener diode.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Determine h-parameters for a transistor under CE configuration.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determine transcondutance and transresistance of JFET.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Design an intruder alarm circuit using UJT.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Design a fan regulator using SCR.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Design of audio frequency oscillator.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Design of radio frequency oscillator.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Design of instrumentation amplifier.
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C. Halkias and Sathyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Third
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Robert L. Boylestad & Louis Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, Tenth edition,
Pearson Education, 2012.
3. Theodre F. Boghert, Electronic Devices & Circuits, Sixth edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
15EI309 MINI PROJECT I 0021

Course Objectives
To develop skills to formulate a technical project
To give guidance on the various tasks of the project and standard procedures
To teach use of new tools, algorithms and techniques required to carry out the projects
To give guidance on the various procedures for validation of the product and analyse the cost
effectiveness
To provide guidelines to prepare technical report of the project

1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design solutions
2. Identify technical ideas, strategies and methodologies
3. Utilize the new tools, algorithms, techniques that contribute to obtain the solution of the project
4. Perform test and validate through conformance of the developed prototype and analysis the cost
effectiveness
5. Explain the acquired knowledge through preparation of report and oral presentations
15GE310 LIFE SKILLS: BUSINESS ENGLISH 002-
Course Objectives
To acquire command in both the receptive skills (Listening, Reading) and the productive skills
(Writing and Speaking) of English language
To understand and make effective use of English language in business contexts

1. Listen, Read, Speak, and Write Business English to the level of becoming independent users
2. Appear for the Business English Certificate (BEC) Vantage level examination conducted by the
Cambridge English Language Assessment
15 Hours
LISTENING AND READING (RECEPTIVE SKILLS)
Listening for writing short answers - filling gaps in sentences - identifying topic, context and function -
identify different functions of language in business situations - identify prompts - identify paraphrases of
required information - Scanning - reading for gist - understanding sentence structure - error identification -
identify paraphrases - cohesive words and phrases - understand the importance of analysing the distractors
- identify grammatical and semantic relationships
5 Hours
WRITING AND SPEAKING (PRODUCTIVE SKILLS)
Business Emails - notes - memos to colleagues or friends - Giving instructions - explaining a development
- asking for comments - requesting information - agreeing to requests - explaining - apologising - reassuring
- complaining - describing - summarising - recommending - persuading - Turn-taking - sustaining
interaction - initiating - responding - giving personal information - Talking about present circumstances,
past experiences and future plans - expressing opinion - speculating - organising a larger unit of discourse
- giving information - expressing and justifying opinions - speculating - comparing and contrasting -
agreeing and disagreeing
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Whitehead, Russell and Michael Black. Pass Cambridge BEC Vantage Self-Study Practice Tests
with Key, Heinle,a part of Cengage Learning, Delhi, 2003.
15MA401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND STATISTICS 2203

(Common to AU,ME,MTRS,EEE,EIE,BT,TT,FT)
Course Objectives
To by enrolling and studying this course the students will be able to Understand to solve polynomial
equations numerically
To implement the mathematical ideas to interpolation
To summarize and apply the methodologies involved in solving problems related to ordinary and
partial differential equations
To apply the concepts of testing of hypothesis in their core areas
To develop enough confidence to identify and model mathematical patterns in real world and offer
appropriate solutions, using the skills learned in their interactive and supporting environment

1. Classify the equations into Algebraic, Transcendental or simultaneous and apply the techniques to
solve them numerically
2. Differentiation and integration of functions using the techniques numerically
3. Obtain the solutions of all types of differential equations, numerically
4. Make a decision on a particular situation using sampling techniques

5. Design an experiment for an appropriate situation using ANOVA technique
UNIT I 6 Hours
SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS
Solutions of algebraic and Transcendental equations:Graffe's root squaring method and Newton - Raphson
method - Solution of system of equations: Gaussian elimination method - Inverse of a matrix: Gauss -
Jordan method - Eigen value of a matrix by Power method.
UNIT II 5Hours
INTERPOLATION, DIFFERENTIATIONAND INTEGRATION
Interpolation: Newton's divided difference formula - Differentiation: Newton's divided difference
interpolation formulae. Numerical integration: Trapezoidal rule - Simpson's rules for single and double
integrals.
UNIT III 7 Hours

SOLUTIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Solution of first order ordinary differential equations: Fourth order Runge - Kutta method - Solution of
partial differential equations:Elliptic equations by Liebmann's method, Parabolic equations by Crank
Nicholson method, Hyperbolic equations by explicit finite difference method.
UNIT IV 6 Hours
TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS
Concept of population and sample, need for sampling - Large sample tests: Tests for mean - Tests for
Proportion - Tests for variance. Small sample tests:Tests for mean (t test) - Test for equality of variances
(F test) - chi-square test for goodness of fit - Independence of attributes.
UNIT V 6 Hours
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
Completely randomized design - Randomized block design - Latin square design - Collection of data and
use the testing of hypothesis to analyze the characteristics of the data.
FOR FURTHER READING

Collection of data and use the testing of hypothesis to analyze the characteristics of the data
Total: 30 +30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Gerald C. F and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Seventh Edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2004.
2. SankaraRao. K, Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers, Third Edition, PHI Learning
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Grewal B. S, Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science with Programms in C & C++, Ninth
Edition, Khanna Publications, 2010.
4. Johnson R.A, Miller and Freund's Probability and Statistics for Engineers, Seventh Edition,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2005.
5. Jain M.K, Iyengar S.R.K, Jain R.K, Numerical Methods For Scientific &Engineering
Computation,New Age International ( P ) Ltd , New Delhi , 2005.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 8 4 2 22
2 2 12 6 20
3 2 2 4 4 6 18
4 2 4 6 4 6 22
5 2 4 6 6 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations.
2. Write the formula for Regula False method & Newtons method.
3. What do you mean by Interpolation?
4. State Newtons Divided difference formula.
5. State the derivatives of Newtons Forward and Backward Interpolation formula.
6. Write the conditions for applying Trapezoidal & Simpsons rule.
7. What do you mean by Single step and Multi step method?
8. Write the formula for Eulers and Modified Eulers method.
9. What are the limitations of Graphical method?
10. Define Slack and Surplus variables.
Understand
1. What do you meant by Numerical methods?
2. What is the condition of convergence of Regula False position method?
3. State the order and condition of convergence of Newtons method
4. What are the methods for solving simultaneous algebraic equations?
5. Write the differences between Direct and Iterative methods.
6. State the sufficient condition for solving Gauss seidel method.
7. What do you mean by Power method?
8. Write Milnes and Adams Predictor, Corrector formula.
9. What is feasible region?
10. Define Optimum basic feasible solution.
Apply
1. Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix
15 4 3 1
A 10 12 6 with the starting vector x 1 .Perform only 4 iterations.
(0)
20 4 2 1
2. Find N , where N is a real number, by Newtons method.
3. 3. Find the parabola of the form y=ax2+bx+c passing through the points (0,0) , (1,1) & (2,20).
4. A third degree polynomial passes through (0,-1), (1,1),(2,1) & (3,-2) find its value at x=4.
x: 6 7 9 12
5. Find the value of f ' (8) from the table given below
f ( x) : 1.556 1.690 1.908 2.158
6. 6. The table given below reveals the velocity V of a body during the timet specified. Find its
t: 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
acceleration at t = 1.1
v : 43.1 47.7 52.1 56.4 60.8
2 2 2 2
7. Solve dy/dx=y -x / y +x with y(0)=1 at x=0.2 find y .
8. Using Eulerss method, find y(0.01) from dy/dx= -x, y(0)=1.
9. Solve the following LPP: Maximize Z 4 x1 10 x2
10. Subject to the constraints 2x1+x2 50 ; 2x1+5x2 100 ; 2x1+3x2 90 ; x1, x2 0
11. Write down the four steps to be adopted in solving LPP.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Using Newtons method, find the positive root of cos x = 3x - 1.
2. Solve by Gauss-Elimination method: 6x + 3y +12z = 36; 8x -3y +2z = 20; 4x +11y z =33.
3. Use Lagranges interpolation formula to find the value of x when y = 20 for the following data.
X: 1 2 3 4
Y: 1 8 27 64
4. By Newtons divided difference formula find f(301).
x 300 304 305 307
y 2.4771 2.4829 2.4843 2.4871
5. A rod is rotating in a plane. The following table gives the angle through which the rod has turned
t : 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
for various values of the time t secs
: 0 0.12 0.49 1.12 2.02 3.20
2. 2 2.6
dydx
6. Evaluate x
2 1
2
y2
using Trapezoidal formula.
7. Given 5 x y + y 2 2 = 0 ; y(4 )= 1; y(4.1) = 1.0049 find

i) y (4.2) by Eulers method
ii) y(4.3) by Runge-kutta method
iii) y ( 4.4 ) by Adams method.
iv) y(4.5) by Milnes method.
8. Using Taylor series method, find the value of y(0.1) , given dy /dx = x + y and y(0)=1 and correct
to 3 decimal places .
9. Solve the following LPP
Maximize z = 20 x 1 + 80 x 2 subject to the constraints
4 x 1 + 6 x 2 90; 8 x 1 + 6 x 2 100;
5 x 1 + 4 x 2 80; x 1, x 2 0
10. Solve the following LPP graphically:
Maximize z = 100 x 1 + 40 x 2 subject to the constraints
x 1 + 2 x 2 1000; 3 x 1 + 2 x 2 900;
x 1 + 2 x 2 500; x 1, x 2 0
15EI402 DATA STRUCTURES 3003

Course Objectives
To understand the basics of abstract data types.
To learn the principles of linear and non linear data structures
To build an application using sorting and searching

1. Summarise the basics of data structures and algorithms
2. Demonstrate the concept of linear data structures
3. Design algorithms for various searching and sorting techniques
4. Demonstrate the concept of tree data structures
5. Express the concept of graph data structures
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Pseudo code - Abstract data types - ADT Implementations - Algorithm efficiency - Designing recursive
algorithms - Recursive examples
UNIT II 9 Hours
STACKS, QUEUES AND LISTS
Arrays - Basic stack operation - Stack ADT - Applications of stack - Queues operations - Queue ADT -
Queue applications - List ADT - Circular - Doubly linked list
UNIT III 9 Hours

SORTING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUES
Sorting: Insertion Sort - Selection Sort - Bubble Sort - Merge sort - Quick sort - Heap sort-shell sort -
External Sorts Searching: Sequential search - Binary Search
UNIT IV 9 Hours
TREES
Basic Tree concepts - Binary Trees - Tree Traversals - Expression tree - Binary Search Trees - AVL Search
Trees - Heap concepts - Implementation - Heap ADT.
9 Hours
UNIT V
GRAPHS
Definitions - Shortest Path Algorithms: Unweighted Shortest Paths - Dijkstra's Algorithm. Minimum
Spanning Tree: Prim's Algorithm - Kruskal's Algorithm
FOR FURTHER READING

Applications of list - Radix sort - B-Trees - Red-Black trees - Splay trees- Bucket hashing - Heap
Applications: Priority Queue - Binomial Heaps - Topological sort - Introduction to NP Completeness
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Richard F. Gilberg, and Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures , A Pseudocode Approach with C,
Thomson 2011.
2. M.A.Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Pearson Education Asia, 2013.
3. Y.Langsam, M.J.Augenstein and A.M.Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, PHI, 2007.
4. Aho, J.E.Hopcroft and J.D.Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson education, Asia,
2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 10 20
2 2 12 2 4 20
3 2 2 8 8 20
4 2 2 12 4 20
5 2 2 12 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define data structure.
2. Recall non-linear data structure.
3. Define stack.
4. List the basic operations of stack and queue.
5. Label the five types of sorting algorithms.
6. Define graph.
7. Recall the concept of searching.
8. Define minimum spanning tree.
9. List any five applications of tree data-structure.
10. Retrieve the concept of Heap.
Understand
1. Compare recursive algorithms and non-recursive algorithms.
2. Identify the minimum number of queues needed to implement the priority queue.
3. Interpret a class definition that could be used to define a node in a doubly linked list. Include only
the instance variables, not the methods. Also write one sentence to describe a situation when a
doubly linked list is appropriate.
4. Interpret Quick Sort for the following input: 65 70 75 80 85 60 55 50 45.
5. Exemplify the time complexity of sorting and searching algorithms.
6. Identify the suitable data structure for constructing a tree.
7. Indicate the condition for balancing an AVL tree.
8. Explain Djikstras algorithm to find the shortest distance in a unweighted graph.
9. Illustrate ADT implementation of array.
10. Explain the Kruskals Algorithm with an example.
Apply
1. Demonstrate Djikstras algorithm to find the shortest distance in a weighted graph.
2. Construct the infix, prefix and postfix notations for the expression (a+b)*c/d-e
3. Find a situation where storing items in an array is clearly better than storing items on a linked list.
4. Predict the Hashing Functions based on the methods by which the key value is found.
5. Demonstarte the steps to insert a new item at the head of a linked list.
6. Use Binary Search algorithm with suitable example.
7. Show the recursive algorithm with an example.
8. Predict the shortest distance between any two specific node by using spanning tree.
9. Show the complexity of insertion sort.
10. Design an algorithm for bucket sort.
Analyse
1. Differentiate linear and non linear data structure.
2. Contrast ADT implementation of array and linked list.
3. Compare internal and external sorting.
4. Differentiate between binary tree and binary search tree.
5. Compare linear and binary search.
6. Differentiate DFS and BFS.
7. Outline the traversal with an example.
8. Justify whether linked list is linear or non-linear data structure.
Evaluate
1. Criticise the best case and worst case complexity for searching algorithms.
2. Judge whether stack can be used to perform queue operations.
Create
1. Produce an application using a stack /Queue /List /Tree that reflects a real world problem
2. Plan a suitable sorting technique for sorting the records of students in an educational institution.
3. Derive a sub algorithm to find a smallest element in an array
15EI403 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

2023
MEASUREMENTS
Course Objectives
To understand the construction and working of meters used for measurement of current, voltage,
power and energy
To acquire the concepts of the potentiometers and instrument transformers
To gain knowledge about resistance, inductance and capacitance measuring methods and
display/recording devices

1. Summarize the construction and working principle of current, voltage, power and energy measuring
instruments
2. Identify suitable instrument / procedures to calibrate measuring instruments
3. Compare current & potential transformers
4. Select suitable instruments/method to measure and display/record voltage, resistance, impedance
and frequency
UNIT I 5 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
Types of ammeters and voltmeters - Construction and working principle of PMMC Instrument - Moving
iron Instrument - Dynamometer type Instrument and Rectifier type Instrument.
UNIT II 6 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF POWER AND ENERGY
Construction and working principle of Electrodynamometer wattmeter and LPF wattmeter - Phantom
loading - Measurement of power in three phase circuits - Three phase wattmeters - Construction and
working principle of single phase energy meter - Calibration of wattmeter, energy meter.
UNIT III 7 Hours

POTENTIOMETERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Potentiometers: Construction and working principle of Crompton's potentiometer, Precision potentiometer
- polar and Co-ordinate types - Applications. Instruments Transformers: Construction and working
principle of Current transformers and Potential Transformers.
UNIT IV 6 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE AND IMPEDANCE
DC Bridges - Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin double bridge and Direct deflection methods - AC bridges -
Maxwell, Wien's bridge, Hay's bridge and Anderson's bridge - Maxwell's inductance - capacitance bridge
- De Sauty's bridge, and Schering bridge - Measurement of relative permittivity - Heaviside mutual
inductance bridge - Megger.
UNIT V 6 Hours
DISPLAY AND RECORDING DEVICES
Cathode ray oscilloscope - Time base generator - Basic CRO circuits - measurement of voltage, current,
frequency and phase angle - Digital storage oscilloscope - Seven segment and dot matrix displays -
Magnetic tap and disc recorders/reproduces - Protection and grounding circuits.
FOR FURTHER READING

Digital voltmeter: Integrating type, staircase ramp type, 3.5 digit display - Resolution and sensitivity of
digital meters - Digital multimeter - digital frequency meter - Digital measurement of time.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Current and voltage measurement using PMMC instrument.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Power measurement using wattmeter.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Energy measurement using single phase energy meter.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Voltage measurement using potential transformer.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Current measurement using current transformer.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Testing of Attenuation circuit using potential meter.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Resistance measurement using Wheatstones bridge.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Measurement of capacitance using Schering bridge.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Measurement of voltage, current and frequency using CRO.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Measurement of current using digital panel meter.
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and
Instrumentation, Dhanpat Rai & Company, 2014.
2. Ernest O.Doebelin, Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement systems, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co
Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
3. J. B. Gupta, A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation, S.K. Kataria
& Sons, Delhi, 2013.
4. H. S. Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill company, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Reissland,U. Martin, Electrical Measurements: Fundamentals, Concepts, Applications, New Age
International Ltd., 2012.
6. E. W. Golding and F. C. Widdis, Electrical Measurements & Measuring Instruments, Reem
Publications Ltd, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 8 4 2 22
2 2 4 4 4 6 20
3 2 10 6 18
4 2 4 6 6 18
5 2 4 6 4 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the operating forces present in an analog instrument.
2. List the four different types of instrument used for making ammeter and voltmeter.
3. Define transfer instrument.
4. List the main source of errors in PMMC instruments.
5. State the Blondels theorem.
6. State the benefits of fictitious loading.
7. State the benefits of fictitious loading.
8. Define the term calibration.
9. State the burden of a current transformer.
10. List two methods for testing current transformers.
11. Recall four errors caused in potential transformer.
12. List four applications of instrument transformers.
13. Recall two methods used for the measurement of capacitance.
14. Label two applications of Wiens bridge.
15. Define chassis ground.
16. Recall four merits of the digital oscilloscope.
17. Define working current of a potentiometer.
18. Recall four materials used to fabricate light emitting diode.
19. Illustrate the principle of an induction type energy meter and obtain an expression for its deflecting
torque.
Understand
1. Classifythe two types of moving iron instrument.
2. Indicate the ammeter and voltmeter connection in a circuit.
3. Illustrate the constructions and working principles of moving coil and moving iron instruments
4. Summarize the construction and working of dynamometer and rectifier type instruments
5. Formulate the steps to obtain the expression for steady state deflection of a moving iron instrument.
6. Indicate the need for LPF wattmeter in power measurement.
7. Explain the construction and working principle of the single-phase energy meter.
8. Summarize the steps to obtain sensitivity of a Wheatstone bridge in terms of voltage and current
sensitivity of the galvanometer.
9. Indicate the steps to standardize a potentiometer
10. Indicate the current and voltage measurement process with the help of instrument transformers.
11. Identify the effects of ratio and phase angle errors in case of a C.T.
12. Summarize the relationship between primary and secondary winding voltage of a Potential
Transformer.
13. Formulate expression for unknown frequency using a Wiens bridge.
14. Infer the conditions that must be satisfied to balance an AC bridge.
15. Explain the procedure to measure an unknown voltage using polar and coordinate type AC
potentiometers.
16. Identify a technique to protect the instrument from overloading and short circuit conditions.
17. Indicate the operation of vertical and horizontal amplifiers used in CRO.
18. Indicate the specialities of a storage Oscilloscope.
19. Explain the operation of the time base generator with a circuit and waveform.
20. Identify the conditions to be satisfied by the device for emitting visible light.
21. Indicate the steps to measure voltage and phase angle between two voltages using CRO.
Apply
1. Predict the role of volt-ratio box.
2. Predict the steps to obtain expressions for steady state deflection of a moving coil and
electrodynamometer type instruments.
3. Show the connection diagrams for measuring voltage and power using electrodynamometer type
instrument.
4. Implement Blondels theorem for measuring power at 3 phase 3 wire systems and explain its
operation
5. A 3 phase 500 V motor load has a power factor of 0.5 and two wattmeters are connected to measure
the input power. If the measured power is 30kW, predict the reading of each wattmeter.
6. A wattmeter has a current coil of 0.03 ohm resistance and a pressure coil of 6000 ohm resistance.
Compute the percentage error, if the wattmeter current coil connected at i) load side and ii) supply
side.
7. Construct a circuit to reduce the power consumption while testing an energy meter and explain its
operation.
8. Use a potentiometer to calibrate wattmeter and show the calibration steps.
9. Use a potentiometer to calibrate a wattmeter and show the calibration steps.
10. Assess a proper connection diagram in the secondary of a current transformer to safely measure the
high current using low range ammeters.
11. Show that the resistance of leads does not affect the result in Kelvins bridge by connecting the
galvanometer at a particular position
12. A Kelvin bridge is balanced with the following constants: outer ratio arm 100 and 1000; Inner
arm ratio 99.92 and 1000.6; Resistance of link 0.1; standard resistance of 0.00377. Find the
value of Unknown resistance.
13. In a Maxwells bridge the fixed component values are R2=400, R3=600, R4=1k C4=0.5F.
Compute the appropriate values for remaining components to balance the bridge.
14. In an Anderson Bridge the component values under balanced conditions are given below. Compute
the unknown inductance L1 and resistance R1. R4 = R2 =600, r=400, R3=800, r=0 and
C=1F.
15. Use a potentiometer circuit and 0.186V standard emf cell to measure an unknown voltage (between
0 and 1V). Assume suitable dial resistances. Explain the voltage measurement process using the
circuit.
16. A CRO is set to a time base of 0.1ms/cm with a 10 cm amplitude. Predict the pulse signal waveform
with pulse repetition rate of 2000Hz and a duty cycle of 25%.
17. Construct a 5x4 dot matrix display and explain its operation.
Analyse
1. Compare Moving coil and Moving Iron Instrument.
2. Compare the operation of various instruments used for measuring voltage and current.
3. Outline the major conclusions about AC bridges by analyzing the balance equations.
4. Differentiate between the direct and phantom loading methods and judge the most suitable one for
testing energy meter.
5. Contrast the current coil and voltage coil connection in induction type energy meter.
6. Phantom loading is used to save the power Justify the statement with an example.
7. Compare the operation of different type of bridge circuits.
8. Contrast analog and digital storage oscilloscopes.
9. Compare seven segments and dot matrix displays.
10. Differentiate between current transformer and potential transformers.
11. Differentiate between nominal and turns ratio of instrument transformers.
Evaluate
1. Choose a circuit connection to protect the human being from electrical shock while handling
electrical appliances
2. Judge the effect of power factor on wattmeter readings
3. Judge the effect of two variable elements in one balance equation
4. In the Wheatstone, value of the various arm resistance is given by P= 1k, Q=100, R=2005
and S= 200. The battery has an emf of 5V and negligible internal resistance. The galvanometer
has the current sensitivity of 10 mm/A and an internal resistance of 100. Determine the
deflection of galvanometer and the sensitivity of the bridge
5. In an Anderson Bridge for the measurement of inductance the arm AB consists of an unknown
impedance with inductance L and R, a known variable resistance in arm BC, fixed resistance or
600 each in arms CD a DA, a known variable resistance in arm DE, and a capacitor with fixed
capacitance of 1 microfarad in the arm CE. The a.c. Supply of 100Hz is connected across A and C,
and the detector is connected between B and E. If the balance is obtained with a resistance of 400
in the arm DE and a resistance of 800 in the arm BC, Determine the value of unknown R and L.
6. Construct a bridge circuit with the component values of C2=500pF, R3=300, R4=72.6
C4=0.148F to measure unknown capacitance and choose appropriate values for C1 and r1 to
balance the bridge. (Assume:R4 and C4 are in parallel).
7. Judge the reasons for dividing fixed coil into two parts in electrodynamometer instruments.
8. A CRO with a sensitivity of 5v/cm is used. An AC voltage is applied to the Y-input. A 10cm long
straight line is observed. Determine the AC voltage.
9. Judge the maximum and minimum values that can be displayed using a 3 display.
Create
1. Derive a bridge circuit to employ in a harmonic distortion analyzer for discriminating 1 kHz
frequency. Assume R1 = 1 k, R2 = 2 k, and C1 = 0.1 F.
2. Produce a circuit to measure current using CRO and explain its operation.
3. Derive a circuit to convert the change in temperature in voltage by assuming suitable resistance
values and explain its operation. Let the primary sensing element is RTD.
15EI404 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 2023
Course Objectives
To understand the fundamental concepts of communication systems.
To analyze different analog and digital modulation schemes
To familiarize the basic concept of telephone modems and Optical Fiber Communications

1. Summarise the basic concepts of AM and FM radio transmission and reception
2. Illustrate the digital communication and transmission
3. Explain the telephone modems and fiber optic communication concepts
UNIT I 7 Hours
AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Elements of communication systems - Time and frequency domain - Noise and communications -
Amplitude modulation - Introduction - full carrier AM in time domain and frequency domain - Quadrature
AM and AM stereo - suppressed - carrier AM - AM Transmitters - AM Receivers.
UNIT II 6 Hours
ANGLE MODULTION
Angle modulation - Phase modulation - Angle modulation spectrum - FM and Noise - FM stereo - FM
measurements - FM Transmitters - FM Receivers - Receivers topologies - FM Demodulators
UNIT III 6 Hours

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Introduction, Pulse Modulation - Pulse code modulation - Delta Modulation - Line codes - Time division
multiplexing, vocoders and Data Compression - Digital modulation-Introduction - Frequency and phase
shift keying - Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
UNIT IV 6 Hours
DATA TRANSMISSION AND MODEMS
Data coding, Asynchronous Transmission - Synchronous Transmission - Error detection and Correction -
Data compression and encryption. Telephone Modems - Modem to computer connections - Cable Modems
and Digital subscriber Lines.
UNIT V 5 Hours
FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS
Basic fiber optic systems - Repeaters and optical amplifiers - wavelength division multiplexing, submarine
cables - SONET - Fiber in local area networks, local telephone applications - cable television applications
- experimental techniques - optical time - domain reflectometry.
FOR FURTHER READING

Local area networks - wide area networks - satellite communication - cellular communication.
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Frequency Modulation and Demodulation
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Pulse Amplitude Modulation and Demodulation
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Pre-Emphasis and De-Emphasis circuits
6 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Digital Modulation: ASK,FSK
Total: 60 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Roy Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Delmar Ltd, New York, 2013.
2. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, New Delhi,
2012.
3. Louis Frenzel ,Principles of Electronic Communication Systems by 3rd Edition,TMH
publications,2010.
4. Miller, Modern Electronic Communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
5. William Schweber, Electronic Communication System, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, India, New
York, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 4 2 4 6 2 2 20
3 8 2 6 2 3 21
4 4 4 6 2 3 2 21
5 4 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define critical frequency
2. List the applications of the quarter-wave line.
3. State Carsons rule of FM bandwidth.
4. Define modulation index of FM and PM.
5. List out the vocoding techniques.
6. State Quantization range and Quantization error.
7. Define Bit Error Rate (BER).
8. List the topologies used in data communication.
9. List out the classification of AMPS cellular telephones.
10. Define TDM.
Understand
1. Explain any two methods of generating DSB-SC.
2. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat circuit diagram and
waveforms.
3. Summarise the various ways in which a signal propagates through space.
4. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat circuit diagram and
waveforms.
5. Explain the high level AM transmitter with neat diagram.
6. Illustrate the working principle of Frequency Shift Keying demodulator circuits.
7. Compare the Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipment.
8. Explain the satellite link system model with suitable equations.
9. Explain the working principle of the Digital T carrier system.
10. Formulate the functions of ISO-OSI seven layer architecture.
Apply
1. Assess how the error is detected and corrected using Hamming codes in data communication?
2. Show the equivalent circuit for a metallic two wire transmission line.
3. An 80 MHz carrier is having an amplitude of 50v is modulated by 3 KHz audio signal is having an
amplitude of 20v. Implement the frequency spectrum of AM wave.
4. Demonstrate the expressions of the DSB-SC wave in time and frequency domain.
5. Select the suitable method for data transmission.
6. Compute the coding efficiency for the sample and hold circuit determine the minimum number of
bits required in a PCM code for a dynamic range of 80dB.
7. Assess how will you calculate over modulation of AM?
8. Assess how the ultimate modulation index of FM is estimated?
9. Show the use of Numerical Aperture?
10. Show the purpose of sample and hold circuit?
Analyse
1. Differentiate Radian & Steradian.
2. Determine the transmit power for a CDMA mobile unit that is receiving a signal from the base
station at 100dBm.
3. Compare different AM methods.
4. Contrast the advantage and disadvantages of digital transmission.
5. Compare PCM and DM.
Evaluate
1. Determine the number of cells in clusters for the following values: j=4 and i=2 and j=3 and i=3.
2. A PCM-TDM system multiplexes 32 voice-band channels each with a bandwidth of 0 kHz to 4
kHz. Each sample is encoded with an 8-bit PCM code. UPNRZ encoding is used. Determine
Minimum sample rate, Line speed in bits per second and Minimum Nyquist bandwidth.
3. Determine the dynamic range in dB for the following n-bit linear sign-magnitude PCM codes: n=7,
8, 12, and 14.
4. Determine the Nyquist sampling rate for the following maximum analog input frequencies: 2 kHz,
5 kHz, and 20 kHz.
5. A transmitter has a power of 50 mW to a 50 transmission line. The transmission line impedance
is not equal to the characteristic impedance of the transmission line. The coefficient of reflection is
0.5. Determine the reflected power and dissipated power.
Create
1. Generate a procedure to find the AM & FM spectrum by using spectrum analyzer.
2. Derive an expression for signal to noise ratio in angle modulated system.
3. Derive Campbells equation.
15EI405 TRANSDUCERS ENGINEERING 3003

Course Objectives
To understand the concepts of calibration, characteristics and response of transducers.
To impart knowledge in the construction and characteristics of various electrical transducers.
To familiarise about different transducers and sensors

1. Analyze the static and dynamic characteristics of transducers.
2. Explain the operations of resistance, inductance and capacitive transducers.
3. Infer the concepts of different transducers and sensors
UNIT I 9 Hours
CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSDUCERS
Units and Standards - Static calibration - Classification of errors - Error analysis - Limiting error - Probable
error - Static characteristics - Accuracy, Precision, Resolution, sensitivity, Linearity, Hysteresis, Range and
Span, Drift, Dead Zone - Mathematical model of transducers - zero, first and second order transducers -
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test signals.
9 Hours
UNIT II
VARIABLE RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS
Principles of operation - Construction details - Characteristics of resistance transducers - Resistance
potentiometers - Strain gauges - Resistance thermometers - Thermistors - Thermocouples - Hot wire
anemometer - Piezoresistive sensor and humidity sensor - Signal Conditioning Circuit for Thermistor and
Thermocouple.
9 Hours
UNIT III
VARIABLE INDUCTANCE TRANSDUCERS
Induction potentiometer -Variable reluctance transducers - Linear Variable Differential Transformer -
LVDT Pressure transducer - Rotary Variable Differential Transformer - Eddy current transducers, synchros
and resolvers - Electromagnetic sensors.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
VARIABLE CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS
Variable air gap type - Variable area type - Variable permittivity type - Feedback type capacitance proximity
pickup - Capacitor micro phone - Electrostatic transducer - Ultrasonic Sensors
UNIT V 9 Hours
OTHER TRANSDUCERS
Piezoelectric transducer - Magnetostrictive transducer - Semiconductor sensor - Digital transducers - Smart
sensors - Fiber optic transducers - Hall effect transducers - Photoelectric transducers - Introduction to
MEMS, Nano sensors and Bio Sensor.
FOR FURTHER READING

Seismic Sensor - IC temperature sensor - Pneumatic transducer - Flapper-Nozzle sensor - Sensors for
environmental monitoring-Sensing environmental pollution - Aerospace sensor - Sensing direction of air
flow - Measuring air speed on air craft
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and
Instrumentation, Nineteenth edition Dhanpat Rai & Co Ltd, 2012.
2. E.O.Doeblin, Measurement Systems: Applications and Design , 6th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
Book Co., 2012.
3. D. V. S. Murthy,Transducers and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2013.
4. J. P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th Edition, Addison Wesley Longman Ltd.,
UK, 2015.
5. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 2 18
2 2 4 4 6 2 18
3 2 6 6 2 4 20
4 6 6 6 4 22
5 4 6 6 4 2 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define units.
2. Give the classification of units.
3. Define Standards.
4. Define Instrumental error.
5. State the principle of primary transducer.
6. What is active transducer?
7. Name any one analog transducer.
8. List the different static characteristics of a transducer.
9. Define dynamic characteristic.
10. Mention the different types dynamic characteristics.
11. Define mathematical model.
12. What is potentiometer?
13. List out the advantages and disadvantages of potentiometer?
14. Recall the different types of strain gauge?
15. Mention the applications of strain gauge.
16. Define resistance thermometer.
17. What is self-heating error of thermometer?
18. Recall the principle of hotwire anemometer.
19. Identify the applications of thermistors.
20. State the principle of operation of piezo resistive sensor.
21. Define inductance transducer.
22. Mention the three principles of inductance transducer.
23. Recall the principle of variable reluctance accelerometer.
24. Point out the need for demodulator in variable reluctance accelerometer.
25. What is the principle of Induction Potentiometer?
26. Define LVDT.
27. State the applications of LVDT.
28. List the advantages and disadvantages of LVDT.
29. Memorize the principle of the electro-magnetic transducer.

30. Why transducers need a signal conditioning unit?
31. What is digital transducer?
32. State the principle of change of capacitance.
33. Describe the principle of capacitive transducer.
34. List the uses of capacitive transducer.
35. Define magnetostrictive transducer.
36. Name the different magnetostrictive transducers.
37. What are the errors in magnetostrictive transducer?
38. Select the suitable materials for piezo electric transducer.
Understand
1. Distinguish between accuracy and precision.
2. What are the different types of static errors? Explain each of them.
3. What are instrumental and environmental errors? How can they be avoided?
4. What is the difference between a primary and a secondary standard?
5. How self-heating error is corrected for in resistance thermometry?
6. For what application, thermistor is preferred as temperature sensor?
7. Distinguish between a resistance strain gauge and a semiconductor strain gauge.
8. Why piezoelectric transducers are useful only for dynamic measurement?
9. How frequency of supply changes the sensitivity of an LVDT?
10. Express how true zero is obtained in an Induction potentiometer?
11. Give examples of capacitive transducer applications.
12. Demonstrate how a capacitive transducer used for measuring the displacement?
13. How capacitive transducer used to measure the sound signal?
14. Illustrate the principle of capacitive pressure transducer.
15. Show how slew rate affects the operation of analog to digital converter?
16. How to choose the specific type of A/D for the given application?
17. Compare digital transducer with analog.
18. Indicate the uses of fiber optic transducers.
19. Express the special features of magnetostrictive transducer.
20. In what way MEMS technology improves the efficiency of sensor?
Apply
1. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 sec and a static sensitivity of 0.05mV/ c is used
to measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25C to 65C.The transducer is
adjusted to read 0 and 25C.Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the
temperature changes as a step.
2. Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperature changes at a constant rate of
10 per sec from 25C to 65C.Ten measurements of pressure made by an instrument at different time
intervals give the following readings in kg / cm2: 7.29, 8.03, 8.10, 7.95, 8.01, 7.98, 7.95, 8.07, 7.94 and
7.97.Find arithmetic mean, standard deviation, and most probable error.
3. A variable potential divider has a total resistance of 2k and is fed from a 10V d.c. supply. The output
is connected to a load resistance of 5k. Determine the loading errors for the wiper positions
corresponding to K=xi /xt =0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0. Use the result to plot a rough graph of error versus
xi /xt.
4. The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier whose amplification factor
is 250. An output of 2 mV appears across the terminals across the terminals of LVDT when the core
moves through a distance of 0.5 mm. calculate the sensitivity of the LVDT and that of the whole set up.
The milli-voltmeter scale has 100 divisions. The scale can be read to 1/5 of a division. Calculate the
resolution of the instrument in mm.
5. A Hall effect transducer is used for the measurement of a magnitude field of 0.5 Wb/m2. The 2 mm thick
slab is made of Bismuth for which the Halls co-efficient is -1x10-6 V m/ (A Wb m-2) and the current
is 3A.
6. A parallel plate capacitive transducer has plates 600 mm2 area which is separated by air by a distance of
0.2mm. The resistance of the transducer is 20 X 106 . Calculate the time constant of the transducer
and find the attenuation of the output 1000 Hz. The permittivity of the air is 8.85 X 10-12 F/m.
7. A quartz crystal has the dimensions of 2 mm X 2 mm X 2 mm. Quartz has the following properties charge
sensitivity = 21 C/N. Youngs modulus = 8.6 X 1010 N/m2. Permittivity = 40.6 X 10-12 F/m. Calculate
the value of force, charge, and voltage if the crystal is subjected to a strain of 10 X 10-6 m/m.
8. A thermistor has a resistance of 10K at 25C. The resistance temperature co-efficient is -0.05/C. A
Wiens bridge oscillator uses two identical thermistors in the frequency determining part of the bridge.
The value of capacitance used in the bridge is 500 pF.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare Zero order, First order and second order transducer.
2. Compare RTD, Thermocouple and Thermistor.
3. Compare different types of Analog to digital converter.
Create
1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for LVDT. The output current from the signal conditioning circuit
should be in the range 4 20 mA.
15EI406 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 3204
Course Objectives
To understand the procedure realize circuits, study the characteristics and signal analysis using
Op-amp ICs
To study the applications of Op-amp
To study internal functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits,
regulator circuits, ADCs

1. Summarize various steps involved in IC fabrication
2. Compare AC and DC charecterof op-amp and construct simple application circuits using op-amps
3. Use special ICs to construct simple application circuits
UNIT I 11 Hours
IC FABRICATION AND OP-AMP BASICS
IC classification, fundamentals of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching,
Diffusion of Impurities and packaging - methods of fabricating p-n diode and p-n-p transistor. Op-amp:
Ideal Op-Amp characteristics - Inverting and non-inverting amplififers - DC characteristics, AC
characteristics: frequency response and slew rate
UNIT II 9 Hours
APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMP
Differential Amplifier, Instrumentation amplifier, V/I & I/V converters, sample and hold circuit,
comparators, summer - Schmitt trigger, multivibrators, triangular and sine waveform generators - single
supply op-amp
UNIT III 8 Hours

FILTERS AND CONVERTERS
First order low and high pass filters - Band pass and band reject filters - D/A converter: R-2R ladder and
weighted resistor types - A/D converter: Dual slope, successive approximation, flash types and Delta -
Sigma
UNIT IV 8 Hours
SPECIAL ICS
555 Timer circuit: monostable operation, astable operation and applications - 566-voltage controlled
oscillator circuit - 565 - Phase Locked Loop circuit functioning and applications - Analog Multiplier ICs -
Hall effect ICs
UNIT V 9 Hours
APPLICATION ICS
IC voltage regulators: LM723 general purpose regulators, Basic and A78S40 - step down switching
regulators - LDO linear regulators - Buck-boost regulator - LM380 power amplifier, Isolation
Amplifiers, Optocoupler and applications.
FOR FURTHER READING

Second order low pass and high pass filters - differentiator and integrator - clippers, clampers and peak
detector, ICL 8038 function generator IC.
Reference(s)
1. Roy Choudhary, Shail B. Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age Publishing Co, 4th Edition,
2014.
2. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Prentice Hall, 4th Edition, 2009.
3. Robert F. Coughlin, Frederick F. Driscoll, Operational Amplifiers And Linear Integrated Circuits,
6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
4. William D. Stanley, Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, 4th
Edition, 2002.
5. Anthony Peyton, Vincent Walsh, Analog Electronics with Op-amps: A Source Book of Practical
Circuits, Cambridge University Press, 1993.
6. R. M. Marston, Optoelectronics Circuits Manual, Newnes, 2nd Edition, 1999.
7. http://www.analog.com/en/analog-dialogue/articles/designing-single-supply-low-power-
systems.html
8. http://www.linear.com/products/Internal_Power_Switch_Buck-Boost
9. http://www.linear.com/products/ldo_linear_regulators
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 6 6 6 4 22
2 3 2 2 4 4 2 2 19
3 2 3 2 4 4 4 2 20
4 4 2 2 4 4 2 19
5 2 2 2 4 4 4 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. State the various IC packaging techniques.
2. Define the term diffusion.
3. Define the term Epitaxial layer.
4. List the two different IC technologies.
5. Define buck boost regulator.
6. List the advantages of integrated circuits over discrete component circuits.
7. Define an operational amplifier.
8. List the characteristics of an ideal op-amp.
9. Recall the advantages of integrated circuits.
10. Define input offset voltage.
11. List the applications of Hall effect ICs.
12. Define input offset current.
13. State the reasons for the offset currents at the input of the op-amp.
14. Define CMRR of an op-amp.
15. Define sensitivity.
16. List the frequency compensation methods.
17. Label the merits and demerits of Dominant-pole compensation.
18. Define slew rate.
19. List some of the linear and non linear applications of op-amps.
20. List the features of the instrumentation amplifier.
21. Reproduce applications of the V-I converter.
22. Define comparator.
23. Recall the applications of comparator
24. Define multivibrator.
25. State the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback circuits.
26. Name any two audio frequency oscillators.
27. Reproduce the characteristics of a comparator?
28. Define filter.
29. Recall the merits and demerits of both active and passive filters?
30. List some commonly used active filters.
31. Recall the advantages of integrating type ADCs.
32. List the design considerations of single supply op amp.
33. Define resolution of a data converter.

34. State the main drawback of a dual-slope ADC?
35. List the direct type ADCs.
36. State the advantages of dual slope ADC.
37. Define conversion time.
38. Define accuracy of converter.
39. State the applications of PLL
40. List the basic building blocks of PLL.
41. Define lock-in range of a PLL.
42. Define capture range of the PLL.
43. Define Pull-in time.
44. State the expression for the VCO free running frequency.
45. Define Voltage to Frequency conversion factor.
46. List the applications of 555 timers in the monostable and astable mode of operations.
47. Recall the wave pattern to express lock-in range and capture range.
48. Define Hall effect IC.
49. List any two applications of LM380 power amplifier
50. Recall four features of A78S40 switching regulators
51. Reproduce the pin configuration of IC741.
52. Define the sample period and hold period.
53. Recall the functional block diagram of a 723 regulator.
54. List the features of buck boost regulator.
Understand
1. Classify the Integrated Circuits.
2. Indicate the steps to prepare silicon wafer
3. Explain the Czochralski growth (CZ) process and wafer processing steps with diagram and
expressions.
4. Explain the oxidation process and its importance in IC fabrication technology with a suitable
equation.
5. Illustrate the photolithography process with suitable diagrams.
6. Illustrate the Ion implantation process used in IC manufacturing.
7. Indicate the purpose of oxidation.
8. Represent the various processes used to fabricate ICs using silicon planar technology.
9. Summarize the process steps used in the fabrication of ICs using silicon planar technology
10. Illustrate the steps to obtain the expressions for common mode and differential mode gains of a
differential amplifier.
11. Differentiate between input bias current and input offset current.
12. Distinguish between common mode and differential mode signals.
13. Infer the causes of slew rate?
14. Classify DC characteristics of an op-amp and explain the procedure to improve the characteristics
15. Indicate the need for frequency compensation in practical op-amps.
16. Explain the need for an instrumentation amplifier? Give a detailed analysis for the same.
17. Compare State Schmitt trigger and astable circuit.
18. Indicate the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback circuits.
19. Explain any two audio frequency oscillators.
20. Indicate the drawbacks of weighted resistor type digital to analog converter.
21. Classify and Explain the types of ADCs
22. Classify and Explain the types of DACs
23. Explain the working principle of phase locked loop.
24. Formulate the expression for Lock range and capture range.
25. Classify the types of low drop out regulators.
26. Indicate the purpose of having a low pass filter in PLL.
27. Interpret the effects of having a large capture range.

28. Illustrate the procedure to generate triangular wave using ICL 8038.
29. Explain the operation of VCO and formulate an expression for fo.
30. Give some examples of monolithic IC voltage regulators.
31. Give the drawbacks of linear regulators.
32. Indicate the steps to achieve current boosting in IC 723 general purpose regulator.
33. Express the operation LM380 based audio power amplifier.
Apply
1. Predict the role of SiO2 in IC manufacturing
2. A non-inverting amplifier has an input resistance R1=1 k, feedback resistance Rf = 10k, input
offset voltage Vios = 5 mV and offset current Ios= 10nA. Compute (i) Maximum output offset
voltage due to Vios, (ii) Compensating resistance Rcomp, (iii) Maximum output offset voltage, after
connecting compensation resistor. (iv) Closed loop gain.
3. A non-inverting amplifier has an input resistance R1=10 k, feedback resistance Rf = 15 k, input
voltage vi = 1.5 V and load resistance RL = 20 k. Find (i) output voltage, (ii) Closed loop gain,
(iii) current through the resistance R1. (iv) Repeat the problem for inverting amplifier.
4. Select suitable steps to overcome the effect of input bias current of the op-amp output voltage
5. Show that the output corresponds to the common mode voltage vcm = (v1+v2)/2 =0 if R3/R = R2/R1
by considering a differential amplifier with ideal op-amp (Shown in the figure)
6. Choose an op-amp configuration to get 180 o phase shifted output.

7. Predict the output of 555-timer based monostable multivibrator, when the voltage across the
capacitor is more than (2/3)Vcc.
8. Predict the output waveform of an open loop comparator, when its inverting terminal is
connected to ground potential and non-inverting terminal is connected with 1V pp sinusoidal
signal
9. Select an op-amp circuit to convert the square wave into triangular wave and explain its
operation.
10. Examine the principle of operation of the successive Approximation ADC.
11. Predict the parameter, which alters the free running frequency of the VCO.
12. Consider VCO with Vcc= 10V, Vc= 3V, RT=10k, CT=0.1F, compute the output frequency.
13. Use PLL to translate frequency and demonstrate its operation with suitable block diagram
14. Classify the different types of phase detector.
15. Implement PLL to translate frequency and predict its operation with suitable block diagram
16. Predict the steps to design a step-down voltage regulator using A 78S40 switching
regulator IC.
17. Construct a signal isolation circuit and demonstrate its operation.
18. Predict the role of opto-couplers in instrumentation.
19. Discover the classification of voltage regulators.
Analyse
1. Compare dry and wet etching process.
2. Identify role of each layer in the IC
3. The gain is stabilized by negative feedback-justify.
4. Conclude the effect of high frequency in the performance of a practical op-amp.
5. Indicate the steps to obtain the input impedance from the voltage shunt feedback configuration
6. Identify the reason to get gain roll-off in op-amp circuits after a certain frequency.
7. Identify the need for external frequency compensation in op-amp.
8. Compare negative and positive feedback
9. Choose an op-amp configuration to get attenuated output.
10. Differentiate astable and monostable multivibrator.
11. Select a suitable resistance value to get cutoff frequency of 5kHz from an op-amp based low pass
filter. Assume: Capacitance = 0.01F.
12. Differentiate Schmitt trigger and comparator.
13. Compare the 555-timer based monostable and astable operations.
14. Determine the expression for voltage to frequency conversion factor in VCO.
15. Conclude the requirement of current limit protection and current foldback techniques in IC723
general purpose regulator.
Evaluate
1. Judge the steps to fabricate the following circuit.
2. Differentiate between the open loop and closed loop gain of the op-amp.
3. Differentiate between common mode and differential mode signals
4. Judge the output waveforms of voltage follower and inverter circuits when their input is 2V DC
5. A non-inverting amplifier has an input resistance R1=1 k, feedback resistance Rf = 100 k, V-
ios/T = 30 V/ C and Ios/T = 0.3 nA/ C. Assume the op-amp is nulled at 25 C. Determine the
o o o
output voltage and error voltage due to temperature, if (i) input voltage Vin = 1 mV DC and (ii) Vin
= 5 mV DC.
6. An inverting amplifier with the T feedback network has an input resistance R 1=10 M, Input
impedance Ri = 10M, Closed loop gain ACL = -10 and resistance Rt = 20 k (On T network right
and left hand side resistance is called as Rt, and middle resistance is called as Rs). Determine (i)
Feedback resistance and (ii) Rs.
7. Determine the frequency response of an open-loop op-amp and discuss about the methods of
frequency compensation.
8. Determine the output voltage of the Adder-Subtractor shown in the following figure.
Create
1. Generate -6V and +8V output for a given 2V input signal using two different op-amp circuits by
selecting suitable resistance values.
2. A 741C op-amp is used as an inverting amplifier with a gain of 50. The voltage gain vs. Frequency
Curve of 741C is flat up to 20 KHz. Predict the maximum peak to peak input signal to get
undistorted the output?
3. Generate an output of -5V for the given input 1V input op-amp circuit (Assume the input resistance
R1= 10k
4. Combine an inverting and a non inverting amplifier to amplify a 2V signal into 10V
5. Derive a differential amplifier circuit with R1=10 K and the gain=5.
6. Produce an output of 3V using an op-amp circuit for the given 8V signal.
7. Derive an adder circuit using op-amp to produce the output expression as V 0 =-(0.1V1 +V2
+10V3 ) where V1, V2 and V3 are the inputs.
8. Produce logic 1(Positive saturation) output using op-amp a circuit, when the input exceeds 2V. The
circuit should also provide a logic 0 (Negative saturation) output when the input is less than 2V.
Conclude the circuit operation along with input and output waveforms.
9. Derive a circuit to generator waveform with a frequency of 100Hz and duty cycle of 75% using 555
timer. (Assume capacitance value = 0.1F) and produce the steps to derive the circuits.
10. Derive an instrumentation amplifier circuit to produce 10V output for the inputs 2V and 4V.
(Assume the resistance values R2=2k and R3 =10k.)
11. Produce a circuit using various resistances to convert 3 bit digital into analog and explain its
operation
12. Produce a table to indicate analog to digital conversion steps, when 2.2V analog input is given to
successive approximation type A/D convertor.(Given the reference voltage = 5V)
13. Derive an expression for the frequency of oscillation in the VCO.
14. Derive the expression for lock-in-rang in PLL
15. Derive the expression for capture-rang in PLL
16. Generate a 3 kHz rectangular waveform using a 555-timer based monostable multivibarator
(Assume CT=0.01F, Vcc= 8V) and generalize its operating process.
17. Generate a 5 kHz signal using Voltage controlled Oscillator circuit and generalize its operating
process. (Assume CT=0.01F, Vcc= 8V and Vc=2V)
15EI407 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS

0021
LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To strengthen the knowledge of various electrical transducers
To design a simple signal conditioning and linearization circuit for temperature transducers
To understand the application of optical transducer and digital transducer

1. Measure displacement,pressure, level, magnetic field, vibration and force using different
transducers
2. Implement the signal conditioning circuit for RTD and linearization of thermistor
3. Analyze the measurement of light intensity and speed using appropriate transducers
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Measurement of linear displacement and Pressure using inductive transducer.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Design of signal conditioning circuit for resistance thermometer.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Measurement of magnetic field using Hall Effect transducer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Liquid level measurement using capacitive transducer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Measurement of light intensity using optical transducers.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Design of linearization circuit for thermistor.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Vibration measurement using Piezo electric accelerometer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Measurement of force using strain gauge and load cell
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Measurement of linear and angular displacement using resistive transducer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Measurement of speed using digital shaft angle encoder
Total: 30 Hours
15EI408 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED

0021
CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To design and verify various digital logic circuits
To understand the characteristics and applications of op-amp
To design the application oriented experiments based on IC 741 and IC 555

1. Design the combinational logic circuits and to verify the truth table
2. Analyze the sequential logic circuits like flip-flops,shift registers and counters
3. Understand the operation of Operational amplifier to design ADC and DAC
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Design and Implementation of Full Adder and Full Subtractor Circuits
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Realize the Code converters - Gray to Binary, Binary to Gray code, Parity generator and Parity Checker
using Logic Gates
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Implementation of 4:1 Multiplexer,1:4 De-multiplexer,4:2 Encoder and 2:4 Decoder
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Verification of Functional Tables of RS, JK, T and D flip-flops using ICs
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Design and implementation of 4-bit Shift Registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes using suitable ICs
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters using flips-flops
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Design of Astable and Mono-stable Multi-vibrator using NE/SE 555 Timer
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Application of Op-Amp (Inverting , Non-Inverting amplifier, Comparator, Integrator and Differentiator)
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter
Total: 30 Hours
15EI409 MINI PROJECT II 0021

Course Objectives
effectiveness

1. Formulate a real world problem, identify the requirement and develop the design solution
effectiveness
15GE410 LIFE SKILLS: VERBAL ABILITY 002-

Course Objectives
Read and understand the unseen passages with appropriate speed
Effectively deal with different kinds of structures
Develop strategies for vocabulary development

1. To improve their performance in the verbal ability sections of different competitive examinations
15 Hours
UNIT I
Synonyms - Antonym - Word groups - Verbal analogies - Etymology - Spellings - Critical Reasoning -
Cloze Test - One Word Substitutes - Idioms and Phrases - Text Completion
15 Hours
UNIT II
Sentence Formation - Sentence Correction - Sentence Improvement - Completing Statements - Sequencing
of Sentences - Paragraph Formation - Instructions - Change of Voice - Change of Speech - Reading
Comprehension - Sentence Equivalence
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Murphy, Raymond. English Grammar in Use - A Self - study Reference and Practice Book For
Intermediate Learners of English.IVed. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press. 2012.
2. Lewis, Norman.Word Power Made Easy. New York: Pocket Books.1991.
3. Baron's The Official Guide for New GMAT Review 2015. New Jersey: John Wiley &Sons, Inc.
15EI501 CONTROL ENGINEERING 3204

Course Objectives
To understand the different methods of system representation and obtain the transfer function
model for various types of systems
To impart necessary knowledge in the time domain and frequency domain responses
To give basic knowledge in stability analysis, state space analysis and to designing compensators
for a control system

1. Develop the mathematical model for a given system
2. Determine the response of different order systems for various inputs
3. Analyze the frequency response and stability by using various methods
4. Design a compensator for the given system
5. Represent the system in various state space models
UNIT I 9 Hours
MATHEMATICAL MODEL OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS
Open loop and closed loop systems with examples - Elements of control system - Mathematical
representation of systems - Transfer function of simple mechanical, electrical and thermal systems -
Transfer function of overall systems using block diagram reduction technique - Signal flow graph.
UNIT II 7 Hours
TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS
Standard test signals - Transient response of first and second order systems - Time domain specifications -
Steady state errors and error constants - Generalized error series - Dominant poles of transfer functions - P,
I, PD, PI and PID models of feedback control systems.
UNIT III 9 Hours

FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS
Frequency response of systems - Frequency domain specifications - Polar plot - Bode plot - Constant M
and N circles - Nichols chart - Nichols plot.
UNIT IV 11 Hours
STABILITY ANALYSIS AND COMPENSATOR DESIGN USING TIME DOMAIN
Concepts of stability - Characteristic equation - Routh-Hurwitz criterion - Root-Locus technique - Design
Specifications - Lag, lead and lag-lead networks - Cascade compensator design using time domain analysis.
UNIT V 9 Hours
STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS
Introduction to state space analysis - State model of linear system - State space representation using physical
variables, phase variables, canonical variables.
FOR FURTHER READING

Transfer function of Speed Controlled DC motor - Transient response of thermistor - Performance analysis
of PI, PD and PID controller for thermal process - Stability analysis of linear system - State space
representation using electromechanical system.
Reference(s)
1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publisher, 2011.
2. K. Ogatta, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
4. M. Gopal, Control System Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.
5. M. N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 4 2 4 6 2 2 20
3 8 2 6 2 3 21
4 4 4 6 2 3 2 21
5 4 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define control system.
2. State Masons Gain formula.
3. Label the different types of test signals.
4. List the time domain specifications.
5. List the frequency domain specifications.
6. Define gain margin and phase margin.
7. Recall the Routh stability condition.
8. Label the different types of compensators.
9. List any four advantages of state space analysis.
10. Define phase variables.
Understand
1. Compare between open loop and closed loop system.
2. Infer the block diagram.
3. Classify the system depending on the value of damping ratio.
4. Indicate the relation between static and generalized error coefficients.
5. Illustrate the M and N circles.
6. Summarise the closed loop frequency response is determined from the open loop frequency
response using Nichols chart.
7. Indicate the necessary condition for stability.
8. Summarize the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compensation.
9. Compare state and state variables.
10. Illustrate the state diagram.
Apply
1. A negative feedback closed loop system is supplied to an input of 5V. The system has a forward
gain of 1 and feedback gain of 1. Compute its output voltage.
2. Show the rule for moving the summing point ahead of a block.
3. A second order system has a damping radio of 0.6 and natural frequency of oscillation is 10 rad/sec.
Find the damped frequency of oscillations.
4. The damping ratio & natural frequency of oscillation of a second order system is 0.6 and 8 rad/sec
respectively. Find the rise time.
5. Show the polar plot of G(s) =1 / [s2(1+sT1) (1+sT2) (1+sT3)]
6. Find the magnitude and phase of closed loop transfer function with unity feedback and prove that
it is in the form of circles for every value of M and N.
7. Construct Routh array and find the stability of the system whose characteristics equation is
s6+2s5+8s4+12s3+20s2+16s+16=0.Also compute the number of roots lying on right half of s-
plane, left half of s-plane and imaginary axis.
8. Realize the Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensator using electrical network and find its transfer
function.
9. A system is characterized by the differential equation d2y/dt2+10dy/dt+7y-u=0.Find its transfer
function.
10. Show the state model of the system whose transfer function is given asY(s)/U(s)=10/s3+4s2+2s+1
Analyse
1. Compare the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.
2. Develop the transfer function of electrical and electromechanical systems.
3. Determine the transfer function of thermal system.
4. Analyze the transfer function of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
5. For a given system G(s) = 10(s+1) / (s2+13s+10), how to detect steady state error and error
constants?
6. Analyze the stability of the system using routh hurwitz criterion, root locus technique or nyquist
stability criterion.
7. For a given transfer function G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2), Design the lag, lead and lag lead networks.
Evaluate
X 1 (s) X ( s)
1. Determine the transfer function, and 2 for the system shown in figure.
F (s) F ( s)
2. Determine the overall transfer function C(S)/R(S) for the system shown in figure.
3. Determine the response of unity feedback system whose open loop transfer function is
G(s) = 4/s(s+5) and when the input is unit step.
10
4. The unity feedback control system has an open loop transfer function G(s)= . Determine
s( s 2)
the time domain specifications for a unit step input.
5. Sketch the bode plot for the following transfer function and determine phase margin and gain
75(1 0.2s)
margin. G(s) = .
s( s 2 16s 100)
1
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is given by G(s) = .
s (1 s)(1 2s)
2
Sketch the polar plot and determine the gain margin and phase margin.
7. Determine the root locus for the unity feedback system whose open loop transfer function is G(s)
K
H(s) = and sketch the plot.
s( s 4)( s 4s 20)
2
8. Compare the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.

Y ( s) 10( s 4)
9. A feedback system has a closed loop transfer function . Determine the three
U ( s) s( s 1)( s 3)
different state models for this system.
10. Determine the state model of field controlled DC motor.
Create
1. Derive the transfer function of armature controlled DC motor.
2. Derive the expression for under damped second order system when the input is unit step and plot
the response of the system.
15EI502 SMART AND WIRELESS

3003
INSTRUMENTATION
Course Objectives
To introduce the measurement system and sensors for various applications
To understand the manufacturing techniques and different types of Micro sensors and actuators
To give a comprehensive knowledge on smart sensor Design, Development and Challenges

1. Analyze and quantify the measurement systems
2. Identify, formulate, and analyze the selection of sensors for various applications
3. Implement the exposure to latest sensor technology and advanced measurement
UNIT I 10 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
General concepts and terminology, Measurement systems, Sensor classification, Static characteristics of
measurement systems - accuracy, Linearity, Resolution, Precision and sensitivity etc., Estimation of errors,
Dynamic characteristics of measurement systems, Zero order first-order and second-order measurement
systems and response.
UNIT II 10 Hours
SENSORS FOR SPATIAL VARIABLES, OPTICAL VARIABLES, CHEMICAL VARIABLES
Spatial variable measurement: Laser Interferometer Displacement sensor - synchro / Resolver displacement
transducer. Optical variables measurement - Chemical variables measurement - Thermal composition
measurement - Environmental measurement: Meteorological measurement - Air pollution measurement -
Water quality measurement - Satellite imaging and sensing.
UNIT III 9 Hours

SMART SENSORS
Primary and Secondary sensors - Amplification - Filters - Converters - Compensation - Information coding
/ processing - Data communication, standards for smart sensor interface - Smart transmitter with HART
communicator - Smart sensor for flow and temperature measurement.
8 Hours
UNIT IV
MICRO SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
Micro system design and fabrication - Micro pressure sensors (piezo resistive and capacitive) Resonant
sensors - Acoustic wave sensors - Bio micro sensors - Micro actuators - Micro mechanical motors and
pumps.
UNIT V 8 Hours
RECENT TRENDS IN SENSOR TECHNOLOGIES
Film sensors : Thick film and thin film - Integrated image sensors - Bio sensors - Integrated micro arrays -
RF - IDs - Sensor arrays - Sensor network - Multisensor data fusion - Soft sensor.
FOR FURTHER READING

Integration of Wireless Sensor Network with Virtual Instrumentation in a Hazardous Environment -
Wireless Data Acquisition in LabVIEW - ZIGBEE based wireless data acquisition using LabVIEW for
implementing smart driving skill evaluation system.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Ernest O Doebelin and Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement Systems Application and Design,
5thEdition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2012.
2. John G Webster, Measurement, Instrumentation and Sensors Handbook, CRC press IEEE press,
2010.
3. Ifan G. Hughes and Thomas P.A. Hase, Measurements and their Uncertainties: A Practical Guide
to Modern Error Analysis, Oxford University Press, 2010.
4. Tai-Ran Hsu, Mems and Micro Systems: Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 6 6 4 4 20
2 4 6 4 4 2 20
3 2 6 4 4 4 20
4 2 6 4 4 4 20
5 2 4 4 6 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. List two functional elements of the measurement systems.
2. What are the main static characteristics?
3. Define static error.
4. List the types of errors in measurements.

5. Mention the various temperature scales and relation between them.
6. What are the major sources of error?
7. Recognize the concept of smart sensor.
8. Define Wireless Sensor Network.
9. State the deployment options for WSNs.
10. Define mobility.
Understand
1. Draw the block diagram showing the basic functional elements of instrument and explain the
functions of each.
2. Explain the static and dynamic characteristics of a measurement system.
3. Explain in detail the different types of errors in measuring instruments.
4. Explain the various challenges of wireless sensor networks.
5. Illustrate the innovative mechanisms to realize the characteristic requirements of WSN
6. Compare centric paradigm and data centric paradigm.
7. Classify the various approaches of error control.
8. Summarize the features of link management.
9. Illustrate the bio micro sensor with its neat diagram.
10. Exemplify the operation of acoustic wave sensor.
11. Infer the recend trends in RF ID sensor.
Apply
1. Implement five static characteristics of an instrument in a measurement system.
2. Select a suitable measurement system to estimate the errors.
3. Implement the sensor in chemical field to identify the variable measurement.
4. Execute the operation of sensor in air pollution measurement.
5. Use the smart sensor to measure the parameters like flow and temperature.
6. Show the smart sensor working in data communication.
7. Implement the design of micro sensor and its fabrication.
8. Select a suitable sensor for pressure measurement.
9. Show the sensor technologies trends in integrated image sensor.
Analyse
1. Compare static and dynamic characteristics of measurement system.
2. Analyze the operation of smart transmitter with HART communicator.
3. Differentiate primary and secondary sensors.
4. Compare the features of thick and thin film sensors.
Evaluate
1. Determine the response of zero order, first order and second order measurement system.
2. Determine the operations of acoustic wave sensor.
3. Determine the functions of soft sensor.
Create
1. Create a ZIGBEE based wireless data acquisition system for implementing smart driving.
2. Generalize the latest sensor technology in smart home security system.
15EI503 MICROPROCESSORS AND

3204
MICROCONTROLLERS
Course Objectives
To understand the Architecture, addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8086 & 8051
To identify the need & use of interrupt structure
To infer the peripherals / interfacing ICs used in microprocessor

1. Explain the fundamental features and operation of microprocessor and microcontroller
2. Analyze the concept of peripheral interfaces used in microprocessor and microcontroller
3. Develop program to interface the peripheral devices with 8051 microcontroller
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTEL 8085 MICROPROCESSOR
Functional block diagram - Registers, ALU, Bus systems, Addressing modes. Basic interfacing concepts -
Memory Interfacing, I/O Interfacing - Timing constraints - Memory control signals - Read and write cycles
- Interrupt - Types of Interrupts, Methods of servicing Interrupts - Need for direct memory access - DMA
transfer types.
UNIT II 9 Hours
INTEL 8086 MICROPROCESSOR
Register organization of 8086 - Architecture, Modes of operation - Physical memory organization - I/O
addressing capability - Special Processor activities- assembler directives: Addressing modes of 8086 -
Instruction set of 8086 - Assembler directives and operators.
UNIT III 9 Hours

PERIPHERALS INTERFACING WITH 8085
Study of Architecture and Programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8259 PIC, 8251 USART, 8279 Key board display
controller and 8253 Timer/ Counter - A/D and D/A converter interfacing.
UNIT IV 11 Hours
MICROCONTROLLER
Introduction to 8051 microcontroller, 8051 Architecture, Microcontroller hardware, Input /Output ports and
circuits, External memory, counters and Timers, Serial Communication Interface (SCI), Serial Peripheral
Interface (SPI), Analog-to- Digital Converter, Hardware and Software Development Tools, C Programming
Language.
UNIT V 7 Hours
PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS WITH 8051
Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control & I/O instructions, Temperature Sensor (LM35) Interfacing, Stepper
motor control and UART interfacing.
FOR FURTHER READING

Introduction to PIC micro controllers - Advantage of PIC micro controllers, Microcontroller Architecture
LCD, LED and 7 Segment Interfacing, Analog to digital conversion, UART Implementation
Reference(s)
1. Ramesh Goankar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with 8085,
PenramInternational, six edition, 2013.
2. Kenneth J Ayala, 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming and Applications, Delmar
Learning, 2007.
3. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Perason Education Asia, Low price edition,
2012.
4. V.Douglas Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing Programming and Hardware, Tata McGraw Hill,
2010.
5. Muhammad Ali Mazidi& Janice GilliMazidi, The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded Systems,
Pearson Education, 5th Indian Reprint, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 14 20
2 2 2 2 14 20
3 2 2 2 12 2 20
4 2 2 2 14 20
5 2 4 12 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define processor.
2. List out the general purpose registers in 8085
3. State the timing diagram of 8085.
4. List out the addressing modes used in 8086
5. Recall the use of ALE signal?
6. Recall the use of SFRs in 8051 microcontroller?
7. List out the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
8. List the hardware requirement to interface an LCD using 8255.
9. List out the functions performed by 8279.
10. What are the alternate functions of port 3 in 8051 microcontroller?
11. What is servo motor?
Understand
1. Explain the internal hardware architecture of 8085 microprocessor with neat diagram.
2. Explain the data transfer operation of DMA with neat diagram.
3. Explain the internal hardware architecture of 8086 microprocessor with neat diagram.
4. Explain the addressing modes and assembler directives of 8086 microprocessor.
5. Explain the architecture of 8051 microprocessor with neat diagram.
6. Explain the register banks and special function register of 8051 microcontroller
7. With neat block diagram explain the 8251 and its operating modes.
8. Explain the block diagram of 8254 programmable timer with neat diagram.
9. Explain the concept of ADC with 8051 microcontroller
10. Explain the concept of UART with 8051 microcontroller
11. Design an interfacing circuit using a 3-to-8 decoder
Apply
1. To compute the 16-bit sum of N elements of a table. The starting address of table is 4150 whose
first entry is the number of elements N. The result is stored at memory location 4140 and 4141.
2. To convert two BCD numbers in memory to the equivalent hex number. The BCD digits are at
locations 4150 and 4151 and the result will be stored at 4152.
3. To find the smallest of N numbers using 8086.
4. Demonstrate the analog to digital conversion using 8051 microcontroller
5. Implement the serial communication with PC using 8051 microcontroller
6. Demonstrate the flow diagram, how an instruction is fetched and executed in an 8085
microprocessor?
7. Demonstrate the I/O read and write operation of 8085 processor with timing diagram.
8. Design an 8-key input port with device address FF H using a 3 to 8 decoder to interface with 8085.
9. Write an ALP in 8085 to find the maximum number from the given n numbers.
Analyse
1. Compare the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stack using 8085 ?
2. Compare the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stack using 8051?
3. Draw a block diagram of 8279 and explain the functions of each component
4. Draw a block diagram of 8259 and explain the functions of each component.
5. Compare the features of 8086 over 8085
6. Compare the I/O read and write operation of 8085 processor with timing diagram
7. Compare the LDA and LDAX with an example
8. Compare the memory mapped IO and IO mapped IO
9. Compare LJMP and SJMP in 8051 with an example.
Evaluate
1. Draw a block diagram of 8255 and explain the functions of each component
Create
1. Generalize the concept of real time clock using 8253.
2. Generalize the concept of hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system
3. Generalize the concept of microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
4. Generalize the concept of temperature monitoring system using microcontroller.
15EI504 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I 3003

Course Objectives
To understand about the construction, characteristics and application of different types of load cells
and torque transducers
To analyze the various types of pressure and temperature transducers
To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meet the desired
specifications and requirements of real time processes

1. Understand the construction and working principle of various type of transducers/sensor to measure
physical quantities
2. Apply suitable sensors for measuring vaccum or high pressures
3. Analyze and select suitable temperature transducers for real time applications
UNIT I 9 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF VELOCITY, TORQUE AND FORCE
Measurement of linear velocity : moving magnet, moving coil and seismic velocity transducer -
Measurement of angular velocity - electromagnetic tachogenerators, photo electric and variable reluctance
tachometers - torque measurements using resistive, inductive, magnetostrictive and digital transducers -
measurement of force - load cell - strain gauge and LVDT load cells, pneumatic and hydraulic load cells.
UNIT II 9 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT, ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND DENSITY
Measurement of linear and angular displacement - potentiometer, LVDT, piezo-electric, strain gauge
accelerometers - measurement of vibration - seismic instrument as an accelerometer and vibrometer -
density and specific gravity - Baume and API (American Petroleum Institute) scales - pressure head type
densitometer - float type densitometer - ultrasonic densitometer - bridge type gas densitometer.
UNIT III 9 Hours

PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
Units and definitions - standards of pressure - manometers, elastic type - bourdon tubes, diaphragm gauges,
bellow gauges - bell gauges - electrical types - vacuum gauges: McLeod gauge, pirani gauge, thermocouple
gauge, ionization gauge - electrical type differential pressure transmitters - calibration of pressure gauges
using dead weight tester
UNIT IV 9 Hours
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT I
Definitions and standards : techniques and classifications - bimetallic thermometers, different types of filled
in system thermometer - sources of errors in filled in systems and their compensation
- electrical methods of temperature measurement -signal conditioning of industrial RTDs and their
characteristics - 3 lead and 4 lead RTDs - 2 wire and 4 wire transmitters - IC temperature sensor - thermistor,
linearization, thermowell - head mounted temperature transducer.
UNIT V 9 Hours
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT II
Thermocouples - laws of thermocouple - types of thermocouple - fabrication of industrial thermocouples -
signal conditioning of thermocouple output - thermal block Reference(s) junctions - cold junction
compensation - response of thermocouple - special techniques for measuring high temperature using
thermocouple - radiation methods of temperature measurement - radiation fundamentals - total radiation
and selective radiation pyrometers - optical pyrometer - two colour radiation pyrometer
FOR FURTHER READING

Ultrasonic thermometers, Johnson noise thermometer, fluidic sensors, spectroscopic temperature
measurements, thermograph, temperature switches and thermostats.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
2. R. K. Jain, Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement systems Application and Design, McGraw Hill Book Company,
NewYork, 2007.
4. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2006.
5. B. C. Nakra and K. K. Chaudary, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
6. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age International Private
limited, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 6 6 20
2 2 2 4 4 6 18
3 2 2 6 6 6 22
4 2 6 8 6 22
5 2 4 6 6 18
Total 100
Remember
1. State the features of seismic velocity transducer.
2. List the different types of load cells
3. List the different units for pressure measurement.
4. Differentiate between gauge pressure and vacuum pressure.
5. State the principle involved in thermistor.
6. List any two factors, which decide the response of thermocouple to process temperature.
7. Define linearization.
8. List out the five properties of a material which should be an element of a bimetallic strip.
9. Mention any two limitations of a total radiation pyrometer.
Understand
1. Illustrate the construction and working of variable reluctance accelerometer.
2. Indicate the different methods used for pressure measurement and explain with example.
3. Explain the McLeod gauges used for vacuum pressure measurement and its limitations.
4. Compare API (American Petroleum Institute) and Baume scale.
5. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
6. Illustrate the operation of signal conditioning circuit used for an industrial RTD.
7. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
8. Exemplify the atmospheric pressure in terms of bar and kg/cm2 scales.
9. explain about the laws of thermocouple and infer some special techniques used for high-
temperature measurement using thermocouple.
10. Elucidate ultrasonic densitometer and its limitations
11. Apply the magnetostrictive effect to torque measurement and explain its operation.
Apply
1. Apply the magnetostrictive effect to torque measurement and explain its operation.
2. Calculate the torque developed by a motor shaft when it is running at 1500 rpm and delivering shaft
power of 5 Horse power.
3. Construct the functional block diagram of AD595 thermocouple signal conditioning circuit
4. Select a piezoelectric material and produce various measuring application based on the material.
5. Generalize the procedure to measure pressure using elastic diaphragm.
6. Prepare a conversion chart for various types of temperature scales.
7. The mass and spring constant of seismic instrument (Mechanical type) is given below. Calculate
the natural frequency and critical damping ratio. m = 0.005 kg, k = 500 N/m.
8. Change the specific gravity at 60o C into Degree API and Degree Baume scales
9. Prepare conversion charts for various types of pressure scales
10. Classify the mechanical instruments for measurement of pressure and explain the process to judge
the pressure by comparing known and unknown pressures.
Analyse
1. Compare 3-types of load cell spring elements.
2. Identify the role of protection tubes and thermowells in temperature measurement.
3. Compare various types of thermocouples in terms of their material combinations in positive and
negative terminals, accuracy, measurement range and applications
4. Determine which type of transducer is used for contaminated fluid density measurement.
Evaluate
1. Create a thermocouple to measure 0 to 900oC temperature by selecting suitable metal combinations
for positive and negative legs and design a signal conditioning circuit to get 1V for maximum
change in temperature. Assume the sensitivity of thermocouple =51.7V/oC.
2. Are bourdon tubes also used as differential pressure gauges? Justify.
3. Determine the specific gravity of a float if it just submerges in a liquid of density 1200 kg/m3.
4. Can seismic instrument act as an accelerometer and vibrometer? Justify.
5. Design a signal conditioning circuit for electrical method of pressure measurement.
Create
1. Design a pressure transmitter to provide 0-5V for 0 -50 psi pressure variations using LVDT and
elastic type conversion elements. Sensitivity of the elastic material is 0.1mm/psi and sensitivity of
LVDT is 1mV/mm
2. Create a thermocouple to measure 0 to 900oC temperature by selecting suitable metal combinations
for positive and negative legs and design a signal conditioning circuit to get 1V for maximum
change in temperature. Assume the sensitivity of thermocouple =51.7V/oC.
15EI507 MICROPROCESSORS AND

0021
MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To study the Architecture, addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8051 and PIC
Microcontroller
To develop skill in simple program writing
To introduce commonly used peripheral / interfacing ICs

1. Implement the code conversion, sorting and arithmetic operation in microprocessor
2. Select microcontroller for real time applications
3. Develop program to Interface various devices with PIC microcontroller
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
16 bit arithmetic operation
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Code conversion.(Binary to Grey and vice versa)
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Arithmetic program to find square, LCM, and GCD
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Sorting.(Ascending and Descending order)
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
BCD addition and Subtraction
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Implement Traffic Light controller using 8051 Microcontroller
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Interface ADC/DAC with 8051 Microcontroller
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Interface stepper motor with 8051 Microcontroller
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Interfacing LCD with PIC Microcontroller
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Interfacing ADC with PIC Microcontroller
Total: 30 Hours
15EI508 CONTROL ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0021
Course Objectives
To strengthen the concept of mathematical modeling and feedback control
To impart necessary knowledge in time response and frequency response analysis
To inculcate the stability analysis and controller design concepts

1. Develop the mathematical model of a system
2. Students will have the knowledge of time domain and frequency domain analysis
3. Analyze the response and stability of the system using modern engineering tools
4. Develop the compensator for the system
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Estimation of transfer function of DC servo motor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Determine the transfer function of AC servo motor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Design and simulation of linear and nonlinear systems.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Digital simulation of Type-0 and Type-1 system.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Time response analysis using simulation software
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Frequency response analysis using simulation software
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Performance analysis of P, PI and PID controllers.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Stability analysis of linear systems.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Compensator design using simulation software
Total: 30 Hours
15EI509 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I 0021

Course Objectives
To develop self-learning skills of utilizing various technical resources to make a technical
presentation
To promote the technical presentation and communication skills
To impart the knowledge on intonation, word and sentence stress for improving communicative
competence, identifying and overcoming problem sounds
To promote the ablility for Interacting and sharing attitude
To engarauge the commitment-attitude to complete tasks

effectiveness
15EI510 MINI PROJECT III 0021

Course Objectives
effectiveness

effectiveness
002-
15GE511 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE I
Course Objectives
To expose the undergraduate students to such methods and practices that help, develop and nurture
qualities such as character, effective communication, aptitude and holding ethical values

1. Distinguish the pattern of coding and decoding
2. Demonstrate various principles involved in solving mathematical problems and thereby reducing
the time taken for performing job functions
3. Difference between sequence and series
4. Evaluate critically the real life situations by resorting and analyzing analytical reasoning of key
issues and factors
5. Identify the odd man out
6. Calculate the percentages and averages
7. Demonstrate the blood relation concept in Verbal Reasoning
8. Plot the diagrams based on direction
9. Explain the various operations
3 Hours
CODING AND DECODING
Introduction - Description of Coding method - Coding patterns - Concepts of Coding and Decoding -
Problems involving Coding and Decoding methods
3 Hours
SEQUENCE AND SERIES
Introduction - Sequences of real numbers - Number and Alphabet series - Description of Number and
Alphabet series - Analogy - Odd man out- Power series
3 Hours
DATA SUFFICIENCY
Introduction to Data Sufficiency - Overview of the wide variety of Data Sufficiency problems - Basic
introduction on how to determine what information is sufficient to solve a given problem - Common pitfalls
to avoid
3 Hours
DIRECTION
Introduction to Direction - sense test - Overview of the wide variety of Direction problems -Direction -
Plotting diagrams
3 Hours
PROBLEM ON AGES
Introduction- basic concept - usage of percentage and averages- applications
3 Hours
ANALYTICAL REASONING
Introduction - basic concept - non verbal analytical reasoning - arrangements
3 Hours
BLOOD RELATION
Introduction - Basic concept - Kinds of relation - Tree diagram - Relations
3 Hours
VISUAL REASONING
Introduction - Basic concepts - Odd man out - Next series - Mirror image and water image
3 Hours
SIMPLIFICATIONS
Introduction - Basic concepts - Arithmetic operations -Equation solving methods - Puzzles
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2012.
2. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, First Edition, Tata McGraw-
3. Dr.R S Aggarwal, Quantitative Aptitude, Seventh Revised Edition, S.Chand Publishing Company
Ltd, 2013.
4. Edgar Thorpe , Course In Mental Ability And Quantitative Aptitude For Competitive
Examinations, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2013.
5. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw-
15GE701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 3003

Common to CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT (VI Semester) and to AE, AG,AU,CE,ME,MTRS,BT,FT,TT (VII Semester)
Course Objectives
To provide the theoretical foundations in micro and macro analysis in terms of concepts and
theories
To emphasis the systematic evaluation of the costs and benefits associated with projects
To enumerate the idea of Balance sheet and Balance of payments

1. Understand the micro economic environment for creating a favourable business environment.
2. Take decision by making use of the major concepts and techniques of engineering economic
analysis.
3. Compare the cost of multiple projects by using the methods learned, and make a quantitative
decision between alternate facilities and/or systems.
4. Apply the appropriate engineering economics analysis method(s) for problem solving: present
worth, annual cost, rate-of-return, payback, break-even, benefit-cost ratio.
5. Examine and evaluate the issues in macro-economic analysis
9 Hours
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
Introduction to Micro and Macro economics - Kinds of Economic Systems - Production Possibility Frontier
- Opportunity Cost - Objective of Organizations - Kinds of Organization.
UNIT II 9 Hours
DEMAND AND SUPPLY
Functions of Demand and Supply - Law of diminishing Marginal Utility - Law of Demand and Supply -
Elasticity of Demand - Demand Forecasting Methods - Indifference curve.
UNIT III 9 Hours

PRODUCTION AND COST
Production Function - Returns to Scale - Law of Variable Proportion - Cost and Revenue concepts and Cost
Curves - Revenue curves - Economies and Dis-economies of scale - Break Even point.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
MARKET STRUCTURE
Market Structure - Perfect Competition - Monopoly - Monopolistic - Oligopoly - Components of Pricing -
Methods of Pricing - Capital Budgeting IRR - ARR - NPV - Return on Investment - Payback Period.
9 Hours
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO MACRO ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING
National Income - Calculation Methods - Problems - Inflation - Deflation - Business Cycle - Taxes - Direct
and Indirect Taxes - Fiscal and monetary policies.
FOR FURTHER READING

Nature and characteristics of Indian Economy - Role and functions of Central bank - LPG - GATT - WTO.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. A Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
2. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta,Managerial Economics Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.
3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial
Accounting, Laxmi Publication Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand
5. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics-Concepts and Cases
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 8 6 18
2 2 2 8 6 4 22
3 2 2 8 4 16
4 2 2 8 6 4 22
5 2 2 8 6 4 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Economics
2. What is opportunity cost?
3. List the types of Demand.
4. State the law of Demand.
5. Define Elasticity of Demand.
6. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand?
7. List the factors determining Elasticity of Demand?
8. State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility.
9. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost
10. Define Monopoly.
11. Define Oligopoly
12. Name the two types of Oligopoly.
13. List the objectives of Pricing?
14. Define Accounting
15. Define inflation
Understand
1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.
2. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.
3. Give reasons why mangers aim to maximize sales even at the cost of a lower profit.
4. Explain the nature of Demand.
5. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility?
6. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples
7. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with
an example
8. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry?

9. What causes Oligopoly?
10. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.
11. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.
12. Under what conditions does a company go in for Cross Subsidization pricing?
13. What is the role of the Central bank in controlling inflation?
Apply
1. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples.
2. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of competition, and the reasons they are
able to survive in the market.
3. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing.
4. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing
5. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the pricing
method that you think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items.
Analyse
1. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics
2. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.
3. Distinguish between Cost and Price
4. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method of I
nvestigation
5. The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to prevent their
migration to cities. Discuss this statement from the point of view of Positive and Normative
Economics.
6. Decision making improves with age and experience- Discuss.
7. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for discounts
offered from the point of view of elasticity of demand
8. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different technical approaches
by different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that the cost varies
depending on the technical approach?
Create
1. Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word Economics as defined by the leading
Economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the way you understand it, in
less than 50 words.
2. Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the possible reasons for the
fluctuations from an economists point of view
3. You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interview for a job that
double your salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in time for the
interview. How will you justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost concepts you have
learnt.?
4. Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of jeans of international
quality. Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a loss, considering
that it is a very competitive market.
3204
15EI602 PROCESS CONTROL
Course Objectives
To obtain the mathematical models for first order and higher order real-time systems and also
understand the characteristics of various controller modes
To get adequate knowledge about the various controller tuning and multi loop control
To understand the construction, characteristics and application of different types of actuators for
real time applications

1. Modeling a physical process and understand the controller characteristics, selection of controller
mode and control schemes
2. Analyze various control schemes and obtain optimum controller settings using tuning methods
3. Analyze/select suitable final control elements for a closed loop systems
4. Understand the industrial applications of process and their P&ID structure
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Need for process control - continuous and batch process - mathematical model of first order process using
mass and energy balance equations - two tank interacting and non-interacting process - servo and regulator
operation - self-regulation.
11 Hours
UNIT II
CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS
Basic control actions - characteristics and step responses of ON-OFF, floating-control mode, proportional,
integral and derivative control modes - composite control modes: P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes -
step response of composite control modes - bumpless transfer - Proportional and derivative kick, reset
windup - Electronic controllers to realize various control actions - Guidelines for selection of controller
mode.
UNIT III 10 Hours

TUNING OF CONTROLLERS AND MULTI-LOOP CONTROL
Optimum controller settings - Evaluation criteria - IAE, ISE and ITAE - quarter decay ratio - Tuning of
controllers by process reaction curve method - damped oscillation method - Ziegler-Nichols tuning - Feed
forward control - ratio control - cascade control - averaging control - inferential and split range control.
UNIT IV 7 Hours
FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT
I/P and P/I converters - pneumatic and electric actuators - valve positioner - control valve - characteristics
of control valves - type of valves: globe, butterfly, diaphragm, ball valves - control valve sizing - cavitation
and flashing in control valves - Selection of control valves.
UNIT V 8 Hours
SELECTED UNIT OPERATIONS
Binary distillation column - reflux control - Case study: control of heat exchange, evaporator control,
reactor control, drum level control and combustion control. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID)
symbols - P&ID for level and flow control loops.
FOR FURTHER READING

Internet based ON/OFF controller - Simulation using virtual instrumentation: Temperature control - Level
Control - Flow control.
Reference(s)
1. Curtis D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation technology, Pearson new international edition
2013.
2. George Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
3. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2010.
4. Jonathan Love Process Automation Handbook: A Guide to Theory and Practice,Springer, 2010.
5. Peter Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 30th reprint
2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 4 2 6 4 20
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 12 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define process.
2. Recall interacting system and give an example.
3. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.
4. Name the different types of control modes.
5. Recall degree of freedom in process.
6. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
7. Name some tuning methods for getting optimum controller settings.
8. Define averaging control.
9. Define the flow capacity of a control valve.
10. List the various types of valves used in flow control applications.
11. Label the different types of plugs used in pneumatic valves.
12. Name the various control schemes involved in the heat exchanger process.
13. Recall the various control schemes used in boiler drum level control.
Understand
1. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
2. Indicate, why is it necessary to choose controller settings that satisfy both gain margin and phase
margin?
3. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a process.
4. Explain the operation of I/P converter in a control system.
5. Explain the auctioneering control.
6. Explain in detail about the characteristics of continues and discontinues modes of controller.
7. Exemplify the controller settings using Ziegler-Nichols continuous cycling method and write its
limitations.
8. Explain the Cascade control with suitable example.
9. Explain about cavitations and flashing in control valves.
10. Illustrate any two control scheme involved in heat exchanging process with neat diagram.
Apply
1. Compute the transfer function H 2 /Q for the two tank system (Assume: Tank 1 and Tank 2 are
interacting)
2. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
3. Compute the advantage of an electronic controller when compared with pneumatic controller.
4. Show how the process reaction curve can be obtained?
5. A tank operating at 50 feet head 51 lpm out flow through a valve and has a cross section area of 10
square feet calculate the time constant.
6. Select the optimum controller settings for the model G(s)=e -0.5s /(4s +1) using process reaction
Curve Method.
7. Use the split-range controller to a pressure control process and explain its operation.
8. Select the gain of proportional controller using Ziegler-Nichols method. Consider a unit step
change in the set point. The process is second order with kp =5, time constant =2, and damping
ratio=3. Assume that Gm (s)=Gf (s) =1 and apply it for interacting system.
9. Predict the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.
10. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller settings for any process.
Analyse
1. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-interacting
capacities.
2. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.
3. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
4. Distinguish between offset and error.
5. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade control?
Create
1. Create the mathematical model and implement a suitable feedback controller with proper controller
setting for a two tank interacting system.
2. Design a simple PID controller to maintain the position of an inverted pendulum vertically
3. Derive mathematical model for coupled three tank cylindrical system
4. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.

5. Develop the P&I diagram for liquid level control for three tanks. Assume suitable inputs and
outputs.
15EI603 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II 3003
Course Objectives
To understand and design the various types of flow meters
To understand the different types of level measurements adopted in industrial environment
To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, moisture and viscosity measurements

1. Analyze, formulate and select suitable flow meters for various flow measurement applications
2. Analyze and select suitable level meters for various applications
3. Apply transducers/sensors to measure humidity, moisture and viscosity
UNIT I 8 Hours
FLOW METERS I
Theory of fixed and variable head type flow meters - orifice plate - types of orifice plates, pressure tapping
and CD variations - venturi tube - flow nozzle - dall tube - pitot tube - installation of head flow meters.
UNIT II 9 Hours
FLOW METERS II
Positive displacement flow meters : constructional details and theory of reciprocating piston, oval gear and
helix type flow meters - inferential meter - turbine flow meter - nutating disc - rotameter - theory and
installation - angular momentum mass flow meter - coriolis mass flow meters - thermal mass flow meters.
UNIT III 8 Hours

FLOW METERS III
Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter - different types of excitation schemes
used - different types of ultrasonic flow meters - laser doppler anemometer - vortex shedding flow meter -
target flow meter - solid flow rate measurement - guidelines for selection of flow meter.
UNIT IV 10 Hours
LEVEL MEASUREMENT
Definition of level - visual indicators - float gauges: different types - level switches - level measurement
using displacer and torque tube - bubbler tube - boiler drum level measurement - hydra step systems -
electrical types of level gauges using resistance, capacitance, nuclear radiation and ultrasonic sensors -
measurement of level of solids - paddle wheel type - differential pressure method.
UNIT V 10 Hours
MEASUREMENT OF HUMIDITY, MOISTURE AND VISCOSITY
Units and definitions - dry and wet bulb psychrometers - hot wire electrode and hair type hygrometers -
dew cell - electrolysis type hygrometer - commercial type dew point meter - moisture terms - different
methods of moisture measurement - moisture measurement in granular materials, solid penetrable materials
like wood, web type material - capacitance type - NMR probe for moisture detection - viscosity
measurement - different methods of measuring viscosity - Saybolt viscometers - continuous measurement
of viscosity - rotameter for viscosity measurement.
FOR FURTHER READING

Case studies on industrial measurement - data sheet for industrial sensors/transducers
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd., New
Delhi,2011.
2. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age International Private
limited, 2010.
3. R. K. Jain, Mechanical & Industrial Measurements, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
4. K. Sawhney and P. Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement and Instrumentation and
Control, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2001.
5. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
6. B. G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Hand Book (Measurement), Chilton Book Co, New York 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 7 5 4 18
2 2 11 6 2 21
3 2 6 6 2 4 20
4 4 10 4 2 20
5 2 2 10 2 5 21
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the type of transmitter and receiver used in ultrasonic level gauge.
2. Name any two positive displacement type flow meters.
3. State any four methods to measure boiler drum level.
4. Classify the ultrasonic type flow meters.
5. List any four materials for fabricating orifice meter.
6. Name any four properties of fluid.
7. Define the term viscosity index.
8. Define venacontracta in orifice flow meter.
9. Classify the inferential type flow meters.
10. Classify the measurement schemes used for boiler drum level measurement.
11. Define discharge co-efficient.
12. State the karmans principle.

13. Define Laser Doppler Effect.
14. Name four type of variable area flow meters.
Understand
1. Indicate any two demerits of electromagnetic flow meter.
2. Give any two examples for moisture measurement process.
3. Sketch the schematic of inferential flow meter and explain its operation along with applications,
merits and demerits.
4. Examine the installation process of Rotameter.
5. Explain the features of vortex shedding flow meter.
6. Generalize the factors to be considered before drawing up specifications for a flow meter and
examine the factors in detail.
7. Explain the working principle of displacer type level gauge.
8. Explain the visual indicator and float type level measurement schemes.
9. Generalize procedure to measure level using ultrasonic sensor.
10. Explain the capacitive and resistive type level measurement schemes with necessary sketch.
11. Illustrate the working principle of dry and wet bulb psychrometer.
12. Summarize the procedure to measure viscosity using rotating cylinder method.
13. Explain the different schemes of moisture measurement.
14. Estimate the reason for up-down movement of a float in a liquid.
15. Illustrate the operation of Coriolis flow meter.
16. Explain the operation of reciprocating piston meter with suitable sketch.
17. Summarize the procedure to measure humidity using hygrometers.
18. Illustrate the operation of Saybolt viscometer.
Apply
1. Produce the characteristic of the two tubes in Coriolis flow meter, when the flow changes from
minimum to maximum.
2. A pitot tube mounted on an aircraft is connected to a pressure gauge which reads a pressure of 10
kN/m2. Calculate the flying speed of the aircraft. Density of air at that height can be taken as 1.2
kg/m3.
3. A Rotameter uses a cylindrical float of 3.5 cm height, 3.5 cm diameter and density of 3900 kg/m3.
The maximum inside diameter of the metering tube is 5 cm and discharge coefficient Cd = 0.6.
Calculate the maximum flow rate handling capacity of the rotameter if the fluid is water.
4. Calculate the induced emf in an electromagnetic flow meter due to the flow of a conductive fluid
in a pipe with inner diameter of 3 cm. The flux density B = 6 mV.sec/cm2 and volume flow rate Q
= 2600 cm3/min.
5. Calculate the velocity of flow in an electromagnetic flow meter for the following conditions. The
flux density in the liquid has an average value of 0.1 Weber/m2. The diameter of the pipe is 20 cm.
The induced voltage of the electromagnetic flow meter is recorded as 1 mV.
6. Use due point to specify humidity.
7. Calculate the pressure difference at the taping and nominal flow velocity V2 at the orifice having
a diameter of 30 mm kept in a pipe of 50 mm diameter. Reynolds number Ra is 105. Assume
density of water = 1000 kg/m3, discharge coefficient Cd=0.6 and kinematic viscosity is 102
cm2/sec.
8. A venturi tube of throat diameter 15 cm is placed in a pipe of diameter 30 cm to measure the
volumetric flow. The volumetric flow rate through venturi tube is 0.03 m3/sec. Water has the
viscosity of 103 Pas. venturi tube has a discharge coefficient of 0.98 and Z=1. Calculate the
Reynolds number and differential pressure developed between upstream and throat.
9. Use bubbler tube for level measurement and explain its operation.
10. Apply hydrostatic pressure method for measurement of level and explain the measurement process.
Analyse
1. Point out the need for sealing and condensation pots while mounting the head type flow meters.
2. Compare absolute humidity and specific humidity.
3. Compare orifice meter and venturi tubes.
4. Categorize the position of taps in orifice.
5. Differentiate between condensation and sealing pots.
6. Categorize the factors to be considered in piping arrangement during installation of head type flow
meters.
7. Identify a method to reduce pressure loss in over sized rotameters.
8. Compare open and closed tank level measurement techniques.
9. Distinguish between moisture and humidity.
10. Analyze the guidelines for flow meter selection.
11. Compare the excitation schemes used in electromagnetic flow meter.
12. Analyze the application details of various flow meters.
13. Compare the gravimetric feeder based solid flow measurement schemes.
Create
1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for electrical method of pressure measurement.
2. Select a flowmeter for a realtime applications based the given constraints.
15EI604 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 3204
Course Objectives
To execute the Z transform and Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) for a given signal / system.
To design the digital filters and realize the digital filters by different structures.
To understand the architecture and features of the digital signal processor.

1. Investigate the discrete time signals and systems.
2. Compute the Z transform and Discrete Fourier Transform for a given signal / system.
3. Design the digital filters and derive the equation for frequency response of FIR filters.
4. Analyze the implementation issues of discrete time systems.
5. Explain the architecture and features of the digital signal processor.
UNIT I 8 Hours
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Basic elements of digital signal processing - concepts of frequency in analog and digital signals -
classification of discrete time signals - classification of discrete time systems - mathematical representation
of signals - sampling and reconstruction of continuous time signals.
UNIT II 11 Hours
TRANSFORMATIONS
Z transform - properties - inverse Z transform - solution of difference equations by Z transform; Discrete
Fourier Transform (DFT) - properties - Efficient computation of DFT: radix-2 Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT) algorithms in Decimation in Time (DIT) & Decimation in Frequency (DIF) - correlation techniques.
UNIT III 11 Hours

DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN
Finite Impulse Response (FIR) design: Amplitude and phase responses of FIR filter - Linear phase
characteristics - Need and choice of windows - Windowing Techniques: Rectangular, Hamming and
Hanning; Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) design: Design of digital low pass Filter - Butterworth,
Chebyshev filter - impulse invariant and bilinear transformation - Frequency transformation.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
IMPLEMENTATION OF DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS
Structure for FIR systems: Direct, cascade, frequency sampling, Lattice; Structure for IIR System: Direct,
cascade and parallel; Finite word Length Effects: Representation of numbers - Quantization of filter
coefficients - round-off effects in digital filters.
7 Hours
UNIT V
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS
Introduction to DSPs - Architecture, Assembly Language Instructions, Instruction Pipelining and simple
programs in ADSP.
FOR FURTHER READING

DFT based Dual - Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) detection algorithm - analysis of speech signals using
STFT (Short-Time Fourier Transform) - Power Spectrum estimation using an AR model by FIR / IIR digital
filter - Time domain operations in Musical Sound Processing by FIR / IIR digital filter.
Reference(s)
1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and
Applications, PearsonEducation, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, Discrete - Time Signal Processing,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
3. S. Salivahanan, C. Gnanapriya, Digital Signal Processing, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private
4. P. Ramesh Babu, Digital Signal Processing, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt Limited, 2012.
5. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing - A Computer Based Approach, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2012
6. B.Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and
Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
7. http://www.analog.com/en/products/processors-dsp/adsp-21xx
processors/adsp21992.html#product-overview
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 2 2 2 12 20
2 1 1 2 4 12 20
3 1 1 2 4 12 20
4 2 2 4 12 20
5 1 1 4 12 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. State the aliasing effect.
2. Define energy signal and power signal.
3. State Parsevals relation in Z transform.
4. Define the ROC of the Z transform.
5. State the any two features of IIR filters.
6. List the any two properties of Chebychev filter.
7. State the warping effect.
8. List the any two properties of Butterworth filter.
9. List the different stages of pipelining.
10. List the features of PDSP over advanced microprocessor.
Understand
1. Illustrate the sample and hold circuit.
2. Illustrate the 4-point radix-2 DIT-FFT algorithm.
3. Compare linear and circular convolution.
4. Illustrate the basic butterfly diagram / flow graph of radix-2 DIT-FFT.
5. Compare the frequency response of Chebychev type-I and type-II filters.
6. Identify the suitable addressing mode for FFT computation, and Justify the answer.
7. Explain the internal architecture of ADSP.
8. Explain the pipeline operation with call and branch instructions.
9. Explain the opearion of sampling and reconstruction of an analog signals.
10. Exemplify the immediate and direct addressing modes.
Apply
1. The z-transform X[z] of a sequence x[n] is given by X[z]= 0.5/(1-2z^(-1)) and it is given that the
region of convergence of X[z] includes a unit circle. compute the initial value of the system.
2. Compute the 8-point DFT of the sequence x(n)=n+1 using the radix-2 decimation-in- frequency
algorithm.
3. Compute an 8-point DFT of the following sequence using DIF-FFT algorithm.
x(n)={0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7}
4. Execute the radix-2 decimation-in-frequency FFT algorithm for N=8 and draw the corresponding
signal flow graphs.
5. Compute the order of the filter of low pass Butterworth filter that has a 3dB attenuation at 500 Hz
and an attenuation of 40 dB at 1000 Hz.
6. Realize y(n)+y(n-1)+0.25y(n-2)=x(n) in cascade form network.
7. The transfer function of a system is given by H(Z) = (1+Z^-1+Z^-2) / (1+ 1/2 Z^-1) (1+1/6Z^-1).
Construct the system in parallel structure.
8. Develop a program to calculate the value of the function Y=A*X+B*Y+C*Z.
9. The specifications of the desired low pass filter is
0.8<|H(e^jw)|<1.0 for 0
|H(e^jw)|<0.2 for 0.6pi
Design a digital Butterworth digital filter using impulse invariant transformation
Evaluate
1. Determine the condition for the stability of the following system, h(n)=a^n u(n).
2. Determine the stability and causality for the discrete LTI system is represented by impulse response
h[n]=(1/2)^n u[n].
3. Determine the stability and causality for the impulse response h[n] of the LTI system is
h[n]=u[n+3]+u[n-2]-2u[n-7].
4. Determine stability and causality for the following systems.
(i) y(n) = 8x(n-4)
(ii) y(n) = n u(n) + del(n-2)
(iii) h(n) = 2^-n u(n)
5. Determine whether the following system is time invariant y(n) = x(n/2).
6. Determine whether the following system is linear or non-linear.
y(n) = 2 x(n) + 1/( x(n-1) )
7. Determine whether the following system is stable or unstable.
h(n) = ()^n u(n)
8. Determine whether the following filter is (i) Linear (ii) Stable (iii) Time-invariance (iv) Causality
y(n) = 2 x(n+1) + ( x(n-1) ) ^2
9. Determine whether the following systems are (i) Linear (ii) Static (iii) Time-invariance (iv)
Causality.
(i) y(n) = |x(n)|
(ii) y(n) = 2 x(n+2) - x(n-2)
10. Determine whether the following signals are energy or power or neither energy nor power signals.
(i) x(n) = ()^n u(n)
(ii) x(n) = sin((pi/3)*n)
Create
1. Derive the frequency response of linear phase FIR filters for symmetrical impulse response when
N is odd and even.
2. Derive the frequency response of linear phase FIR filters for anti-symmetrical impulse response
when N is odd and even.
15EI607 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY 0021

Course Objectives
To acquire knowledge about the functionality of field instruments and controllers
To gain the programming knowledge in virtual instrumentation for process control
To design and implementation of controllers for different processes

1. Implement final control elements, converters and transmitter in real time
2. Obtain closed loop response of real time systems
3. Tune controller parameters and implement advanced control schemes
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Convertion of current into Pressure and Pressure into Current using appropriate field instruments.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Open loop response of interacting and non interacting level process.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Analyze the response of different types of control valves.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Tuning of PID controller for a given system.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Closed loop control of flow process with and without transportation lag.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Closed loop control of temperature process station.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Closed loop control of pressure process.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Design of on/off controller for a system.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Implementation of single loop PID controller for a given Process.
Total: 30 Hours
15EI608 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION 0021

LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To strengthen knowledge in measurements of flow, torque and humidity using various transducers
To calibrate the pressure transducers using different standards
To design of compensation and linearization circuit for temperature transducers

1. Measure physical quantities like level, flow, temperature, viscosity, pH and conductivity by
selecting suitable sensing element
2. Design the circuits to interface, interpret and analyze the measured value for displaying or
controlling the physical variables
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Measurement of flow rate using Orifice meter, Venturi meter and mass flow meters
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight tester.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Torque measurement using strain gauge
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Interfacing of field instruments with controller.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Measurement of humidity and vacuum
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Level measurement using Differential pressure transducers
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
pH measurement and conductivity measurement.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Design of cold Junction compensation circuit for Thermocouple
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Linearization of Thermocouple
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Calibration of Differential pressure transducers using HART communicator
Total: 30 Hours
15EI609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II 0021

Course Objectives
To develop self-learning skills of utilizing various technical resources to make a technical
presentation
To promote the technical presentation and communication skills
To impart the knowledge on intonation, word and sentence stress for improving communicative
competence, identifying and overcoming problem sounds
To promote the ablility for Interacting and sharing attitude

To engarauge the commitment-attitude to complete tasks

effectiveness
15EI610 MINI PROJECT IV 0021

Course Objectives
effectiveness

effectiveness
15GE611 LIFE SKILLS: APTITUDE II 002-
Course Objectives
The undergraduate students to such methods and practices that help, develop and nurture qualities
such as character, effective communication, aptitude and holding ethical values

1. Perform arithmetical operations with complex numbers
2. Explain the meanings of a relation defined on a set, an equivalent relation and a partition of a set
3. Calculate percentages in real life contexts , find any percentage of a given whole using their
knowledge of fraction multiplication and increase / decrease a given whole by a percentage
4. Calculate the Ratio, Proportions and Variation
5. Identify the percentage gain or percentage loss
6. Differentiate Pipes and Cisterns

7. Demonstrate the situations like motion in as straight line , Boats and Streams , Trains, Races and
clocks
8. Evaluate the Counting techniques, Permutation and Combination, Recursion and generating
functions
9. Categorize the distributions of probability with respect to the random variables
10. Discuss the different cases of Mixtures and Alligation
3 Hours
NUMBER SYSTEMS
Introduction - definition- classification on Numbers - power cycles and remainders - short cut process -
concept of highest common factor - concept of least common multiple - divisibility - number of zeros in an
expression
3 Hours
PERCENTAGES
Introduction - definition and Utility of percentage - importance of base/denominator for percentage
calculations - concept of percentage values through additions - fraction to percentage conversion table
3 Hours
AVERAGES
Introduction - average of different groups - addition or removal of items and change in average -
replacement of some of the items
3 Hours
RATIO, PROPORTIONS AND VARIATION
Introduction- Ratio - properties - dividing a given number in the given ratio - comparison of ratios -
proportions - useful results on proportion - continued proportion - relation among the quantities more than
two - variation
3 Hours
PROFIT AND LOSS
Gain/Loss and percentage gain or percentage loss - multiplying equivalents to find sale price - relation
among cost price, sale price, gain/loss and percentage gain or percentage loss - an article sold at two
different selling price - two different articles sold at same selling price - percentage gain or percentage loss
on selling price - percentage gain or percentage loss on whole property
3 Hours
TIME AND WORK
Introduction - Basic concepts - Concepts on working with different efficiency - Pipes and Cisterns - Work
Equivalence (Man Days) - Alternative approach
3 Hours
TIME, SPEED AND DISTANCE
Definition - Basics of Time, Speed and Distance - Relative speed - Problems based on Trains Problems
based on Boats and Streams -Problems based on Races - time taken with two difference modes of transport
- time and distance between two moving bodies
3 Hours
PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
Definition - Fundamental rules - Theorems on Permutation - Theorems on Combination
3 Hours
PROBABILITY
Concept and importance of probability - underlying factors for Real-Life estimation of probability - Basic
facts about probability - some important consideration while defining event.
3 Hours
MIXTURES AND ALLIGATION
Definition - alligation rule - mean value (cost price) of the mixture - some typical situations where allegation
can be used.
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Abhijit Guha, Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-
2. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, First Edition, Tata McGraw-
3. Dr.R S Aggarwal, Quantitative Aptitude, Seventh Revised Edition, S.Chand Publishing Company
Ltd, 2013.
4. Edgar Thorpe , Course In Mental Ability And Quantitative Aptitude For Competitive
Examinations, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2013.
5. Arun Sharma, How to prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw-
15GE601 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2002

Common to AE, AG,AU, CE, ME,MTRS, BT,FT,TT (VI Semester);
CSE,ECE,EEE,EIE,IT(VII Semester)
Course Objectives
To understand Human values, ethical theory, codes of ethics, work place responsibilities, rights,
engineering experimentation, global issues and contemporary ethical issues
To understand personal ethics, legal ethics, cultural associated ethics and engineers responsibility
1. Articulate engineering ethics theory with sustained lifelong learning to strengthen autonomous
engineering decisions
2. Be an example of faith, character and high professional ethics, and cherish the workplace
responsibilities, rights of others, publics welfare, health and safety
3. Contribute to shape a better world by taking responsible and ethical actions to improve the
environment and the lives of world community
4. Fortify the competency with facts and evidences to responsibly confront moral issues raised by
technological activities, and serve in responsible positions of leadership
5. Be Proficient in analytical abilities for moral problem solving in engineering situations through
exploration and assessment of ethical problems supported by established experiments
UNIT I 6 Hours
HUMAN VALUES
Morals and Ethics - Honesty - Integrity - Values - Work Ethic - Civic Virtue - Respect for Others - Living
Peacefully - Caring and Sharing - Self-Confidence - Courage - Co-operation - Commitment - Empathy.
UNIT II 6 Hours
ENGINEERING ETHICS AND PROFESSIONALISM
Scope of 'Engineering Ethics' - Variety of moral issues - Types of inquiry - Accepting and sharing
responsibility - Ethical dilemmas - Moral autonomy - Kohlberg's and Gilligan's theory - Consensus and
controversy - Profession and Professionalism - Models of Professional Roles - Right action theories - Senses
of corporate responsibility - Codes of ethics: Importance - justification - limitation - Abuse - Sample codes
NSPE - IEEE - Institution of Engineers (India).
UNIT III 6 Hours

ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION
Engineering as experimentation - Engineers as responsible experimenters - Balanced outlook on law -
Cautious optimism - Safety and risk - Assessing and reducing risk - Safe exits - The Challenger case study
- Bhopal Gas Tragedy - The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl.
UNIT IV 6 Hours
WORKPLACE RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS
Fundamental Rights - Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens - Teamwork - Ethical corporate climate
- Collegiality and loyalty - Managing conflict - Respect for authority - Collective bargaining -
Confidentiality - Conflicts of interest - Occupational crime - Professional rights - Employee rights.
6 Hours
UNIT V
GLOBAL ISSUES
Multinational corporations: Technology transfer and appropriate technology - International rights -
promoting morally just measures - Environmental ethics: Engineering, ecology - economics - Human and
sentient centred - bio and eco centric ethics - Computer ethics and internet - Engineers as managers -
Consulting engineers - Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors - Moral leadership.
FOR FURTHER READING

The Challenger case study - Bhopal Gas Tragedy - The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl case studies -
Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens -Sample code of ethics like IETE,
ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian Institute of Materials Management.
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Mike W Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, 4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2014.
2. M Govindarajan, S Natarajan and V S Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning Private
3. R S Naagarazan, A text book on professional ethics and human values, New age international
limited, New Delhi,2006.
4. Charles D Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, New
Jersey, 2004.
5. Charles E Harris, Michael S Protchard and Michael J Rabins, Engineering Ethics - Concepts and
Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.
6. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethics
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 5 5 5 5 20
2 5 5 5 5 20
3 5 10 5 20
4 5 5 5 5 20
5 5 5 5 5 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Human Values.
2. What are Morals and Values?
3. What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?
4. Write the various meanings of ???Spirituality?
5. List four different types of Virtues.
6. Mention different Human values.
7. What is meant by moral autonomy?
8. Classify the types of inquiry
9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg
11. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism?
12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
13. What are the three virtues of religion?
14. What are the professional responsibilities?
Understand
1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about moral
issues?
2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?
3. Why isnt engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?
4. Why is the code of ethics important for engineers in their profession?
5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice?
6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment? How?
7. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to accident
due to the design of their product?
8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?
9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general public?
10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?
Apply
1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense
of autonomous participation is a persons work?
2. How does the code of ethics provide discipline among the engineers?
3. Exemplify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?

4. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?
5. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a
product?
6. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give some
examples.
7. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?
15EI702 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS 3003
Course Objectives
To understand the various techniques and methods of analysis that occurs in the various regions of
the spectrum
To impart an adequate knowledge about chromatography method for analysis of industrial gases
To understand the concepts of interaction of electromagnetic radiation with matter

1. Understand various methods of analysis that occurs in the various regions of the spectrum
2. Apply chromatography in real time industrial environment
3. Identify specific techniques employed for analyzing gas, dissolved component and monitoring
different pollutants in air and water
4. Understand the electromagnetic radiation method and apply analytical techniques to determine the
elements present in the sample
UNIT I 9 Hours
COLORIMETRY AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRY
Beer-Lambert's law - colorimeters - basic principle of spectroscopy - Emission and absorption of radiation
sources - UV and visible spectrophotometers - single and double beam instruments - sources and detectors
- IR spectrophotometers - attenuated total reflectance flame photometers - atomic absorption
spectrophotometers - sources and detectors - FTIR spectrophotometers - flame emission photometers.
UNIT II 7 Hours
CHROMATOGRAPHY
Different techniques - Gas chromatography - Detectors - Liquid chromatography - Applications -
High-pressure liquid chromatography - Applications.
UNIT III 10 Hours

GAS ANALYZERS AND POLLUTION MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
Gas analyzer : oxygen, NOx and H2S types, IR analyzers, thermal conductivity analyzers - air pollution
due to carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides and sulphur dioxide estimation - dust and smoke
measurements.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
PH CONDUCTIVITY AND DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYZER
Principle of pH measurement, glass electrodes, hydrogen electrodes, reference electrodes, selective ion
electrodes, ammonia electrodes - dissolved oxygen analyzer - sodium analyzer - silicon analyzer
UNIT V 10 Hours
NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE AND RADIATION TECHNIQUES
Nuclear radiation - microwave spectroscopy - NMR, ESR and EPR spectroscopy - applications - mass
spectrophotometers - nuclear radiation detectors - GM counter - proportional counter - solid state detectors
- X-ray spectroscopy - detectors - diffractometers - absorption meters - detectors
FOR FURTHER READING

Atomic Fluorescence Spectroscopy, Role of Analytical Instruments in Biomedical Instrumentation,
Methods for Moisture and water content determinations, Paper chromatography column for separation of
ink and water.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Willard, H.H., L. L. Merrit, J. A. Dean and F. L. Seattle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis, CBS
Publishing Co, New York, 2010.
2. G. W. Ewing , Instrumental Methods of Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co, New York, 2009.
3. Robert D. Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, Pharma Book Syndicate, 2008.
4. D. A. Skoog and D. M. West , Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Holt Sounder Publication,
Philadelphia, 2007.
5. Robert D. Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co, New York, 2006.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 2 4 14
2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 6 22
3 2 2 2 6 3 6 21
4 2 2 2 6 3 6 21
5 4 4 6 4 4 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Beer Lamberts law.
2. State transmittance.
3. List the main parts of pH measurement system
4. Define pH value.
5. Define column chromatography.
6. Label the types of mass analyzer
7. Recall the use of chromatograms.
8. List the four disadvantages of liquid chromatography
9. Recall the term open tubular column.
10. Define the term efficiency of a chromatography.
Understand
1. Indicate the advantages of Fourier Transform Spectrometers.
2. Illustrate the techniques used for handling solid samples in IR spectroscopy.
3. Illustrate the detectors and burners used in atomic absorption spectroscopy.
4. Explain the applications and advantages of liquid chromatography.

5. List the types of detectors used in gas chromatography and explain any two of them.
6. Summarize the function of Hays Magnetostrictive analyzer used for measurement of oxygen in
stream of gas.
7. Illustrate the operation of absorption meters.
8. Indicate the advantages of Fourier Transform Spectrometer.
9. Illustrate the detectors and burners used in atomic absorption spectroscopy.
10. With a neat schematic diagram, discuss the separation principle of HPLC (High Pressure Liquid
Chromatography).
Apply
1. Show the detection of smoke in Ionization smoke detector.
2. An open tubular column having the bore of 0.18mm and the length is 700cm, the mobile phase is
moving at a velocity of 35cm/sec. The retention time trof the solute is 1.22 min peak width at half
height is 0.75sec. Calculate
(a) Retention time of non-retained compound
(b) Capacity factor
Number of plates
(d) Plate height
3. An open tubular column having the bore of 0.18mm and the length is 700cm, the mobile phase is
moving at a velocity of 35cm/sec. The retention time trof the solute is 1.22 min peak width at half
height is 0.75sec. Compute
(a) Retention time of non -retained compound
(b) Capacity factor
Number of plates
(d) Plate height
4. Implement the Beers law for energy absorption and concentration
5. Show the detection of smoke in Ionization smoke detector.
6. Implement the intensity of radioactive radiation measured in GM and proportional counters
7. Execute the Flame Ionization and Electron Capture detectors in gas chromatography.
8. Implement the requirements of HPLC pumping system and discuss the advantages and
disadvantages of it.
9. Compute the relationship between the energy absorption and concentration and discuss the reasons
for deviations of Beers law.
10. Implement the chromotography for testing the trace quantity of pesticides in groundwater.
Analyse
1. Compare the relationships between the retention time, retention volume and retention factor.
2. Analyze the efficiency of the sodium analyzer and silica analyzer.
3. Justify hydrogen electrode is used as a primary reference electrode
4. Outline the working of gas chromatography with necessary diagrams.
5. List the basic components available in HPLC and explain about the sample injection system &
liquid chromatographic column in GC.
6. Outline the working of high pressure liquid chromatography with necessary diagram.
7. Point out the instrumentation of UV Spectrophotometer and explain with its diagrams.
8. Point out the uses of bolometer in spectroscopy.
9. Compare gas and liquid chromotography.
Evaluate
1. Substances A and B having the peak widths at base for A and B were 1.21 and 1.32 minutes
respectively. The retention times are found to be 16.86 and 18.28 minutes respectively on a 40.0cm
column. An unretained species passed through the column in 1.15 minutes. Detect the i) average
number of plates, ii) Plate height, iii) column resolution, iv) Linear mobile phase and solutes
velocity, v) Adjusted retention times of two solute.
Create
1. Design the different types of electrodes used for the determination of pH and conductivity.
2. Design the different types of electrodes used for the determination of pH and conductivity.
15EI703 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 3204
Course Objectives
To understand the fundamentals of Programmable Logic Controller(PLC), Supervisory Control and
Data Acquisition (SCADA) and Distributed Control System (DCS)
To program and configure the advanced controller for a given application
To familiarize the functions of different communication protocols
1. Develop the PLC program for various applications
2. Understand the function of Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) and Distributed
Control System (DCS)
3. Configure the DCS and communication protocol for given application
UNIT I 9 Hours
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
Evolution of PLCs - Components of PLC - Architecture of PLC - Discrete and analog I/O modules -
Programming languages - Ladder diagram - Function block diagram (FBD) - Programming timers and
Counters
8 Hours
UNIT II
PLC SCADA AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Instructions in PLC - Program control instructions, math instructions, data manipulation Instructions,
sequencer and shift register instructions - Case studies in PLC. Introduction to SCADA - components of
SCADA - features of SCADA
UNIT III 8 Hours

DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
DCS - Various Architectures - Comparison - Local control unit - Process interfacing issues
UNIT IV 10 Hours
INTERFACES IN DCS
Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces - Displays - Engineering interfaces - Low
level and high level engineering interfaces - Factors to be considered in selecting DCS - Case studies in
DCS
UNIT V 10 Hours
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
Introduction to communication protocols - TCP/IP protocol - HART communicator protocol - Media access
Protocol - Data link control protocol - PROFI bus - Mod bus - CAN bus - Field bus: General Field bus
architecture, Field bus standard, Field bus topology - interoperability - interchangeability
FOR FURTHER READING

Local Area Network - Wireless communication (Ipv6, Ipv4) - Programmable Automation Controller - CAN
bus - Analog I/O configuration in PLC programming
Reference(s)
1. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, Third edition, 2010.
2. Benjamin C Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India, 2012.
3. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical data communications for instrumentation and
control, Newnes/Elsevier, 2013.
4. K. L.S. Sharma, Overview of Industrial Process Automation, Elsevier, 2011.
5. John W Webb and Ronald A Resis, Programmable Logic Controller, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
6. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1985.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 2 1 6 2 6 18
2 2 1 1 2 6 2 6 20
3 1 1 1 2 1 6 6 18
4 2 2 6 2 6 6 24
5 1 1 4 6 2 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Programmable Logic Controller as per ISA standard.
2. List four types of number system used in PLC.
3. List four types of programming languages used in PLC.
4. Draw timing diagram of "On delay timer".
5. Draw architecture of Programmable Logic Controller
6. Draw architecture of Programmable Logic Controller.
7. Draw architecture of Programmable Logic Controller.
8. List four program control instruction used in PLC.
9. Recall the merits of shift register instruction in PLC.
10. List the four parameters in sequence output compare instruction.
11. Define SCADA.
12. List four major components in SCADA.
13. List four major process interfacing issues in DCS.
14. Draw architecture of DCS.

15. List the component of Local Control Unit.
16. Draw the heirarchy of display used in DCS.
17. Recall the two major features of operating interface.
18. Recall the two major features of engineering interface.
19. List the four major factors to be considered while a selecting a DCS.
20. Draw Media Access Control in encapsulation of a packet of data.
21. List the two limitations of Profibus.
22. Draw strucutre of HART message.
23. Recall the necessary for interchangeability.
24. List two types of FOUNDATION field bus.
25. Define TCP / IP protocol.
Understand
1. Intrepret the function of opto isolator.
2. Exemplify working of Analog and Digital Input / Output module in PLC
3. Illustrate relay diagram used in the industrial automation.
4. Infer the operation of Timer instruction used in PLC.
5. Compare the function of Up Counter and Down Counter instruction in PLC.
6. Draw the architecture and explain the function of SCADA.
7. Indicate the salient features of SCADA when compared to DCS and PLC.
8. Explain the shift register instruction with an example.
9. Compare function of Local Control Unit A, B and C type.
10. Explain the architecture evolution of Distributed Control System.
11. Exemplify the function of two major process interfacing issues in DCS
12. Indicate the salient features of hybrid architecture in DCS
13. Interpret the important function of Local control unit in DCS during emergency situation.
14. Exemplify the architecture of Distributed Control System.
15. Indicate the salient features of high level operating interface in DCS.
16. Interpret the function of high level engineering interface.
17. Indicate the factors to be considered while selecting a DCS.
18. Interpret the function of seven OSI layers.
19. Exemplify the working of HART communicator.
20. Infer the basic requirements of field bus standard.
21. Explain the general field bus architecture .
22. Interpret the need of TCP / IP protocol.
23. Explain interoperability and interchangeability.
Apply
1. Two part conveyor lines, A and B. feed a main conveyor line M. A third conveyor line R, removes
rejected parts a short distance away from the main conveyor. Conveyors A, B, and R have parts
counters connected to them. Construct a PLC program to obtain the total parts output of main
conveyor M.
2. A main conveyor has two conveyors, A and B, feeding it. Feeder conveyor A puts six-packs canned
soda on the main conveyor, Feeder conveyor B puts eight-packs of canned soda on the main
conveyor. Both feeder conveyors have counters that count the number of packs leaving them.
Construct a PLC program to give a total can count on the main conveyor.
3. Design a program that will take the accumulated value from TON timer T4:1 and display it on a 4-
digit. BCD format set of LEOs. Use address O:023 for the LEOs. Include the provision to change
the preset value of the timer from a set of 4-digit BCD thumbwheels when input A is true. Use
address I:012 for the thumbwheels.
4. Construct a non retentive timer program that will turn on a pilot light after a time-delay period. Use
a thumbwheel switch to vary the preset time-delay value of the timer.
5. Assume that a thermocouple is connected to an analog input module of Distributed Control System.
Explain how the temperature of the thermocouple is communicated to the processor.
6. The MOV instruction will be used to copy the information stored in word N7:20 to N7:35. Find the
address should be entered into the source and destination?
7. When programming stop buttons, why is it safer to use an NC button programmed to examine
for an on condition than an NO button programmed to examine for an off condition?
8. For a known TCPIIP network determine how the DNS is implemented and how IP addresses are
granted.
9. Asses how Fieldbus will change the operation of a large instrumentation network. Outline the
functions that are likely to be controlled by the DCS and which are likely to be controlled locally,
in the field.
10. Show HART protocol function is based on OSI standard.
Analyse
1. Compare Programmable Logic Controller, Distributed Control system and Supervisory Control and
Data Aquisition with important parameters.
2. Compare the architecture of HART, Fieldbus with OSI standard.
3. When programming a motor starter circuit, Justify why is it safer to use the starter sealin auxiliary
contact in place of a programmed contact referenced to the output coil instruction?
4. Differentiate Fixed, Flexible and Programmable automation.
5. Compare Remote Terminal Unit in SCADA and PLC in industrial automation.
6. In a continuous process control, to have effective PID control implementation, Distributed Control
System will be a better option than Programmable Logic Controller. Justify the statement.
7. Compare On delay timer and OFF delay timer with an example
8. Differntiate Up counter and Down Co
9. Compare relay diagram and ladder logic diagram used in PLC.
Create
1. Devise a ladder program that could be used to operate the simplified task shown in Figure for the
automatic drilling of work pieces. The drill motor and the pump for the air pressure for the
pneumatic valves must be started. The work piece has to be clamped. The drill then must be lowered
and drilling must be started to the required depth. Then the drill has to be retracted and the work
piece unclamped. This cycle is to be repeated for 10 times.
2. A traffic light controller is to be designed for a road, partially closed to traffic for urgent repair
work (Fig.1). North traffic light will go GREEN for 30 sec with South traffic light giving RED
signal. For the next 15 sec, both the traffic lights will be give RED signals. Thereafter South traffic
light will go GREEN for 30 seconds with North traffic light giving RED signal. Both the traffic
lights will give RED signal for the next 15 sec. Then this cycle repeats. Develop a PLC ladder
diagram that accomplishes this objective.
15EI704 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 3003

Course Objectives
To understand the role of instrumentation in bio medical engineering field
To get ample knowledge on Electro-physiological and non-electric parameter measurement
To analyze parameters of medical imaging and its measurements

1. Analyze about human physiology and bio potential electrodes
2. Comprehend the electro - physiological, blood flow and non - electrical parameter measurements
3. Understand the concepts of medical imaging, assisting and therapeutic devices
UNIT I 10 Hours
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO POTENTIAL ELECTRODES
Cell and their structures - action and resting potential - nervous system: functional organisation of the
nervous system, structure of nervous system, neurons, synapse - transmitters and neural communication -
cardiovascular system - basic components of a biomedical system - different types of electrodes - electrical
safety - grounding and isolation
UNIT II 9 Hours
ELECTRO - PHYSIOLOGICAL AND BLOOD FLOW MEASUREMENT
ECG - EEG - lead system and recording methods - typical waveforms - Blood flow and cardiac output
measurement: Indicator dilution, thermal dilution and dye dilution method, Electromagnetic and ultrasound
blood flow measurement.
UNIT III 9 Hours

NON - ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT
Measurement of blood pressure - Heart rate - Heart sound - Pulmonary function measurements -
spirometer - Body Plethysmograph - Blood Gas analyzers : pH of blood - measurement of blood pCO2,
pO2, pulse oximeter
UNIT IV 9 Hours
MEDICAL IMAGING PARAMETER MEASUREMENTS
X-RAY machine - Computer Tomography - Magnetic Resonance Imaging system - ultra sonography -
Endoscopy - bio-telemetry
UNIT V 8 Hours
ASSISTING AND THERAPEUTIC DEVICES
Cardiac pacemakers - defibrillators - ventilators - heart lung machine - dialysers - elements of audio and
visual aids
FOR FURTHER READING

Biosensors - glucose and drug detection, biomechanics - limb prosthetics - orthotics
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. R.S.Khandpur, Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd., 2014.
2. J.G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
2010.
3. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. G. Well, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 4 5 5 20
2 4 4 6 6 20
3 2 2 4 6 6 20
4 2 4 6 8 20
5 2 4 6 2 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define depolarization of a cell.
2. State the principle fluid medium in cell.
3. Recall the principle ions responsible for action potential.
4. List the electrodes that have high input impedance.
5. List the characteristics of ECG preamplifier.
6. List out the important parts of an ECG recorder.
7. List the lead configurations used in ECG.
8. List the ranges of frequency and voltage related to EEG.
9. Recall the instrument that is used to find epilepsy.
10. Define tidal volume.
Understand
1. Summarize the characteristics of resting potential and action potential in the cell.
2. Explain the origin of different heart sounds.
3. Summarize the cardio pulmonary blood circulation system.
4. Explain the depolarization and repolarization of heart muscle with reference to ECG wave form.
5. Illustrate 10-20 electrode systems used in EEG with a schematic sketch.
6. Explain the analysis of EEG signal.
7. Abstract the principle and working of electromagnetic blood flow meters.
8. Explain the working of X-ray machine.
9. Illustrate the operation of ultrasonic imaging systems.
10. Explain the principle of a Computer Tomography system with a schematic sketch.
11. Illustrate a heart lung machine with a schematic sketch.
Apply
1. Implement the M mode for the ultrasonic imaging system with a suitable diagram.
2. Find the differences in the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular
synchronous pacemaker.
3. Demostrate how many electrodes are required to be attached to a human subject for recording any
one of the unipolar chest lead signals? In the standard 12-lead ECG recording system.
4. Construct with a schematic sketch an EEG measuring system.
5. Find out the merits of medical thermography.
6. Implement a biotelemetry with suitable applications with a neat sketch.
7. Compute the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular synchronous
pacemaker.
8. Asses the working of the ultrasonic imaging system (M-mode) with a suitable diagram.
9. Execute the working of an 12 lead ECG machine with a neat block diagram.
Analyse
1. Compare between metallic microelectrode and non-metallic microelectrode.
2. Outline the different types of heart sounds for different condition with specific schematic wave
forms.
3. Conclude on what parameters does the free running frequency of VCO depend on?
4. Outline the various electro surgery techniques used in diathermy unit.
5. Justify the essential use of a coupling medium like olive oil or special jelly are essential in ultrasonic
imaging system?
6. Justify: A certain patient monitoring unit has an input amplifier with a CMRR of 1, 00,000:1 at 60
Hz. At other frequencies, CMRR is 1000:1. Do you consider these ratios adequate for the
monitoring the ECG?
7. Outline the medical name of low blood pressure
8. Differentiate the types of electrodes that are used to record EEG.
Evaluate
1. Illustrate two types of audio aids with diagram
2. Choose type of electrode the hydrogen ion concentration of the blood is easily determined?
3. For perfect lock, Determine the phase relation between the incoming signal and VCO output signal?
4. Critise the following statement: MRI is superior to other imaging systems
Create
1. Produce a biotelemetry system with necessary components with its schematic sketch.
2. Relate a CT imaging to a MRI scan. Justify the same with principles and diagrams
15EI707 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

0021
LABORATORY
Course Objectives
To obtain practical knowledge in advanced controllers
To automate linear and non linear processes
To design discrete controller for a transfer function model

1. Interface filed instruments with PLC and DCS
2. Develop program in PLC to control a given Process
3. Develop program in DCS to control a given Process
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Level and flow control using PLC
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Control of automatic bottle filling system using PLC.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Traffic light control system using PLC (Sequence output instruction)
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Interfacing Variable Frequency Drive with PLC
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Implementation of PID controller for multi loop process
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Pressure and Flow control using DCS
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Design of interlock system using DCS
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Configuring DCS- System for sequence control
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Temperature control process using PLC
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Configuring DCS- System for cascade control
0 Hours
EXPERIMENT 11
Mini project for laboratory experiments
Total: 30 Hours
15EI708 DESIGN LABORATORY 0021
Course Objectives
To obtain adequate knowledge in design of various signal conditioning circuits, instrumentation
systems, controller and control valve

1. Implement the Variable frequency drive and HMI for real time process
2. Design of simple transmitter circuit using sensor/transducers and amplifiers
3. Calibrate final control elements or transmitter
4. Perform panel wiring, documentation of instrumentation projects and development of P&I for
simple process
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Development of P and I diagram for a heat exchanger process.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Implementation of Variable Frequency Drive circuit for motor speed control.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Design of P, PI and PID controllers using operational amplifier.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Design an orifice plate for a typical application using simulation.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Implementing signal condition circuit for strain gauge using virtual instrumentation.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Design of instrumentation amplifier.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Configuring Human Machine Interface for a given application.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Control panel design.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 9
Design of temperature transducer.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 10
Preparation of documentation of instrumentation project and project scheduling for the above case study.
(Process flow sheet, instrument index sheet and instrument specifications sheet, job scheduling, installation
procedures and safety regulations).
Total: 30 Hours
15EI709 MINI PROJECT V 0021

Course Objectives
effectiveness

effectiveness
15GE710 LIFE SKILLS : COMPETITIVE EXAMS 002-
Measurements 15 Hours
SI units, systematic and random errors in measurement, expression of uncertainty accuracy and precision
index, propagation of errors. PMMC, MI and dynamometer type instruments; dc potentiometer; bridges for
measurement of R, L and C, Q-meter. Measurement of voltage, current and power in single and three phase
circuits; ac and dc current probes; true rms meters, voltage and current scaling, instrument transformers,
timer/counter, time, phase and frequency measurements, digital voltmeter, digital multimeter; oscilloscope,
shielding and grounding.
Sensors and Industrial Instrumentation 15 Hours

Resistive-, capacitive-, inductive-, piezoelectric-, Hall effect sensors and associated signal conditioning
circuits; transducers for industrial instrumentation: displacement (linear and angular), velocity,
acceleration, force, torque, vibration, shock, pressure (including low pressure), flow (differential pressure,
variable area, electromagnetic, ultrasonic, turbine and open channel flow meters) temperature
(thermocouple, bolometer, RTD (3/4 wire), thermistor, pyrometer and semiconductor); liquid level, pH,
conductivity and viscosity measurement.
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, Computer Organization, McGraw-Hill, Third
Reprint 2015.
3. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne,"Operating System Principles", John
Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2013.
4. Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D. Ullman Compilers: Principles, Techniques and Tools ,
2nd Edition, Pearson, 2012.
5. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts , McGraw -
Hill, 2015.
6. Behrouz A.Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
8. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, Computer Organization, McGraw-Hill, Third
Reprint 2015.
9. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne,"Operating System Principles", John
Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd, Ninth Edition, 2013.
10. Alfred V. Aho, Ravi Sethi and Jeffrey D. Ullman Compilers: Principles, Techniques and Tools ,
2nd Edition, Pearson, 2012.
11. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth and S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts , McGraw -
Hill, 2015.
12. Behrouz A.Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014.
15EI804 PROJECT WORK ---9

Course Objectives
effectiveness

effectiveness
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
3003
15LE101 BASIC ENGLISH I
Course Objectives
To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner
To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the
development of all the four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom
To focus on improving and increasing vocabulary
To improve spelling and pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises

1. Converse in English with more confidence
Unit I 7.5 Hours

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
1 Basic words- 12 most used words Starting a conversation and Sentence construction
in English, usage and talking about what one bolstered by mother
pronunciation does tongue
2 Basic words- 20 often used Analysing an action plan Creating and presenting
words, usage and pronunciation ones own action plan
3 Basic words with a focus on Discriminative listening Informal conversation
spelling
4 Basic words- 10 oft used words, Content listening and Reading comprehension
usage and pronunciation Intonation
5 Unit Test I
UnitII 7.5 Hours

6 Basic words + greetings to be Formal conversation Intonation to be used
used at different times of the in formal address
day
7 Last 28 of the 100 most used Informal conversation Reading practice and
words between equals peer learning
8 Using the 14 target words to Informal dialogues using Guided speaking-
form bigger words contracted forms talking to peers using
contracted forms
9 Palindromes, greetings- good Placing a word within its Offering
luck, festivals context- culling out congratulations
meaning
10 Unit Test II
Unit III 7.5 Hours

11 Homophones Formal and informal Lets Talk is a group
methods of self- activity that gives
introduction them some important
pointers of speech
12 Homophone partners, matching Contracted forms of the Translating English
words with their meanings be verbs, ve and s sentences to Tamil
13 Briefcase words- finding smaller Formal and informal Team work-
words from a big word ways of introducing speaking activity
others involving group
work, soft skills
14 Compound words and Giving personal details Using the lexicon
pronunciation pointers about oneself
15 Unit Test III
Unit IV 7.5 Hours

16 Proper and common nouns Asking for personal Pronunciation pointers-
information and details an informal introduction
to the IPA
17 Pronouns Telephone skills and Reading aloud and
etiquette comprehension
18 Abstract and common nouns Dealing with a wrong Reading practice and
number comprehension
19 Group names of animals, Taking and leaving Pronunciation pointers
adjectives messages on the
telephone
20 Unit Test IV
Unit V 7.5 Hours

21 Determiners Interrupting a Pair work reading
conversation politely- comprehension
formal and informal
22 Conjugation of the verb to be- Thanking and Comprehension
positive and negative forms responding to thanks questions that test
scanning, skimming
and deep reading
23 Am/is/are questions Giving instructions and Small group activity
seeking clarifications that develops
dialogue writing
24 Present continuous tense-form Making inquiries on the Finishing sentences
and usage telephone with appropriate
verbs
25 Unit Test V
Unit VI 7.5 Hours

26 Words with silent b Calling for help in an Dialogue writing
Present continuous questions emergency
27 Words with silent c Making requests and Identifying elements
Simple present tense- form and responding to them of grammar in text
usage politely extract
28 Simple present tense- rules Describing people Guided writing
29 Words with silent g Describing places Filling in the blanks
Questions in the simple present with correct markers
tense of tense
30 Unit Test VI
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
15LE102 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH I 3003
Course Objectives
To acquire effective listening and reading skills
To develop speaking and writing skills
To improve their understanding of grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation

1. Develop their fluency and language competency in English
UNIT I 9 Hours
GRAMMAR
Content words- Structural words - Subject - Verbs and verb phrase - Subject - Verb agreement - Tenses -
Active voice and passive voice - Sentence types (declarative, imperative, exclamatory & interrogative) -
Framing questions - Comparative adjective
UNIT II 9 Hours
LISTENING
Listening for specific information: Short conversations/monologues - Gap filling - Telephone conversations
- Note-taking - Listening for gist / interviews - Listening to songs and completing the lyrics - Clear
individual sounds - Word stress - Telephone etiquette
UNIT III 9 Hours

READING
Prediction - Skimming for gist - Scanning for specific information - Understanding text and sentence
structure
UNIT IV 9 Hours
WRITING
Short documents: E-mail - memo - note - message- notice -advertisement - Short reports / proposals -
Principles of writing a good paragraph: Unity, cohesion and coherence - Identifying the topic sentence and
controlling ideas - Paragraph writing (descriptive, narrative, expository & persuasive)
UNIT V 9 Hours
SPEAKING
Self-introduction - Giving personal and factual information - Talking about present circumstances, past
experiences and future plans - Mini-presentation - Expressing opinions and justifying opinions - Agreement
/ disagreement - Likes and dislikes - Speculation - Tongue twisters
FOR FUTHER READING

Novel Reading - Book Review
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Murphy, Raymond. English Grammar in Use - A Self-Study Reference and Practice Book For
Intermediate Learners Of English .IVed. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press. 2012.
2. Seely, John. Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking. Indian ed. New Delhi: Oxford
University Press. 2005.
3. 3. Anderson, Kenneth etal. Study Speaking: A Course in Spoken English for Academic Purposes.
United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press. 2004.
15LE201 BASIC ENGLISH II 3003

Course Objectives
To give room for a natural acquisition of Basic English Grammar through sample listening, reading
and writing inputs
To specifically focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to increase speaking ability
To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises

1. Communicate better with improved fluency, vocabulary and pronunciation
Unit I 7.5 Hours
31 Difference between Present Calling for help in an Reporting an event-

Continuous and Simple Present emergency journalistic style
tense.
32 Verbs have and have got Describing animals Asking for and giving
directions
33 Simple Past Tense Inviting people, Self- enquiry and offering

accepting and ones opinion on a given
declining invitations topic.
34 Spelling rules & table of Irregular Refusing an invitation Reading and practicing pre-
Verbs written dialogues
35 Unit Test I
Unit II 7.5 Hours
Questions and the negative form Apologizing and

36 (Reading) conversation
of the simple past tense responding to an
practice
apology
37 Asking questions in the simple Reading Seeking, granting and

past tense comprehension refusing permission
38 Paying compliments Pair work: writing dialogues

Past continuous tense
and responding to them and presenting them
Difference between simple past

39 Describing daily Reading and comprehension
and past continuous- when and
routines skills
where to use each
40 Unit Test II
Unit III 7.5 Hours
Making plans- applying

41 Talking about the
Simple future tense grammar theory to written
weather
work
42 Simple future tense- more aspects, Talking about Opening up and expressing
possessive pronouns possessions ones emotions
43 Talking about current

Future continuous tense Listening comprehension
activities
Revision of future tense- simple

44 and continuous forms, Asking for the time Discussion- analyzing and
prepositions used with time and and date debating a given topic
date
45 Unit Test III
Unit IV 7.5 Hours

46 Articles a/an Writing, speaking Transcribing dictation
and presentation
skills
47 Singular- Plural (usage of a/an) Reading practice- Comprehension logical
independent and analysis, process analysis
shared reading and subjective expression
48 Countable and uncountable Listening Vocabulary: using context
nouns- a/an and some comprehension tools to decipher meaning
49 Articles- the Sequencing Listening to a poem being
sentences in a recited, answer questions
paragraph on it and practice reciting
the same
50 Unit Test IV
Unit V 7.5 Hours
51 Articles- the: usage and avoidance Speaking: sharing Listening: comprehend and
stories about family, follow multiple step
village/town, instructions read out by the
childhood, etc. 10 teacher
students
52 Articles- the: usage and avoidance Speaking: sharing Reading: make inferences
with like and hate stories about family, from the story about the plot,
village/town, setting and characters
childhood, etc. 10
students
53 Articles- the: usage and avoidance Speaking: sharing Comprehension passage

with names of places stories about family,
village/town,
childhood, etc. 10
students
54 This/ that/ these and those Writing a notice- Speaking: Debate

announcement
55 Unit Test V
Unit VI 7.5 Hours

56 One and ones Collaborative Writing short answers to
learning- problem questions based on reading
solving
57 Capitalization and punctuation Controlled writing Listen to a story and
respond to its main
elements
58 Syntax and sentence Guided writing Listen to a poem and
construction- rearrange discuss its elements
jumbled sentences
59 Cloze Free writing Frame simple yet
purposeful questions about
a given passage
60 Unit Test VI
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
15LE202 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH II 3003

Course Objectives
To acquire skills for using English in workplace effectively
To communicate for essential business needs
To prepare students for taking BEC Vantage level examination which is an International
Benchmark for English language proficiency of Cambridge English Language Assessment (CELA)
To enhance the communicative ability from Intermediate to Upper Intermediate level

1. To enable students to get International recognition for work and study
2. To use English confidently in the International business environments
3. To be able to take part in business discussion, read company literature, write formal and informal
business correspondences and listen and understand business conversations
9 Hours
UNIT I
GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY
Simple, compound and complex sentences - Direct and indirect speech - Conditionals - Business vocabulary
- Collocations - Discourse markers
9 Hours
UNIT II
LISTENING
Listening to identify topic, content, function - Sentence stress - Rhythm - Intonation
9 Hours
UNIT III
READING
Reading graphs and charts - Skimming and scanning texts - Job advertisements - Read business articles for
specific information - Understanding the structure of a text - Error identification
9 Hours
UNIT IV
WRITING
Formal and Informal English - Longer Documents: writing individual paragraphs to longer text, Business
Correspondence, Reports and Proposals - Transcoding
9 Hours
UNIT V
SPEAKING
Collaborative task - Turn taking (initiating and responding appropriately) - Negotiating - Exchanging
information - Language Functions: suggesting - comparing and contrasting - expressing - Finding out facts,
attitudes and opinions - Commonly mispronounced words
FOR FURTHUR READING

Reading Novels (The Monk Who Sold His Ferrari by Robin Sharma; Three Mistakes of my Life by Chetan
Bhagat; The Fountainhead by Ayn Rand)
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively Developing
Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002.
2. Eric H. Glendinning and Beverly Holmstrom, Study Reading: A Course In Reading for Academic
Purposes.United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press, 2004.
15LC203 CHINESE 3003

Course Objectives
To help students acquire the basics of Chinese language
To teach them how to converse in Chinese in various occasions
To teach the students the Chinese cultural facets and social etiquettes

1. An ability to communicate effectively (a)Improve fluency in Chinese (b)Clarity on the basic sounds
of the Chinese Language
Unit I 9 Hours
N ho -
Xuhu wnhu de jbn biod yngy - ; Xuhu jisho zj de
xngmng, guj - ; Xuhu hny pnyn de shngm -
; ynm h shngdio - ; Pn d h shngdio linx -
Unit II 9 Hours
Xinzi j din -
Xuhu shjin, rq de biod - ; Rshn - ; Shngc - ; Jzi
- ; Huhu - ;Hudng - ; Kn t wnchng huhu - ; Xu cy
shu shjin ; Thun linx - D y d rnhu lin xin - ; B ximin
de c n zhngqu de shnx pili chngj -
Unit III 9 Hours

N jin moy znme mi? - ?
Xnwn jiqin j qin de biod - ; Tojihunji - ; Tch du
su mi dngx dxio, yns dng dng jt yoqi ;
Shngc Hudng - ; Kn t wnchng huhu - ; Xu cy shu shjin ;D
y d rnhu lin xin - ;Tng lyn xunz zhngqu d'n -
; Bchng cy bio -
Unit IV 9 Hours
Xuhu xnwn jitng qngkung, zhy h ninlng -
Xuhu din ci t yoqi jizhng - ; Shngc - ; Jzi - ; Huhu
- ;Hudng - ; Kn t wnchng huhu - ; Xu cy shu shjin ;D
y d rnhu lin xin - ;Tng lyn xunz zhngqu d'n -
; Bchng cy bio - Jus bnyn - ; Tng lyn pndun du cu -
Unit V 9 Hours
Nzi n'er gngzu -
Xuhu xnwn jitng qngkung, zhy h ninlng - Shngc
- ; Jzi - ; Huhu - ; Hudng - ; Kn t wnchng huhu -
;Tng lyn xunz zhngqu d'n - ; Bchng cybio - -
Tng lyn xunz zhngqu d'n - ; Bchng cy bio -
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. TiyanHanyuShenghuoPian "Experiencing Chinese" Ying Yu Ban Di 1 Ban. Beijing: Higher
Education Press: Gaodengjiaohuchu ban she. 2011.
2. 1.Mandarine Day - Hancel Don : Chinese learning Software 2.My Chinese Classroom - David J.
White
3. www.chinesexp.com.cn www.yiwen.com.cn
15LF203 FRENCH 3003

Course Objectives
To help students acquire the basics of French language
To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions

1. The students will become familiar with the basics of French language and start conversing in French
UNIT I 6 Hours
Alphabet Franais (alphabets) - Les Accents Franais (the accents in French) - aigu - grave - circonflexe -
trma cdille - crire son nom dans le franais (spellingone-sname in French) - Les noms de jours de la
semaine (Days of the week)
UNIT II 6 Hours
Les noms de mois de l'anne (Months) - Numro 1 100 (Numbers 1 to 100) GRAMMAIRE :Conjugaison
UNIT III 10 Hours

Moyens de transport (Transport) - Noms de Professions (Professions) - Noms d'endroits communs (Places)
- Nationalits (Nationalities) ECOUTER : (Listening) couter l- alphabet associ des prnoms franais -
couter et rpondre PARLER (Speaking)Prsntation - mme /Prsentez - Vous (Introducingoneself) LIRE
:Lireles phrases simples
UNIT IV 12 Hours
Pronoms (Pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (Common masculine and Femininenouns) -
Verbes communs (Common verbs) COUTER: couter et crier les prnoms - Observer les dessins et couter
les dialogues LIRE : Lire les profils d'utilisateurs d'interlingua (alter ego) PARLER: Parler de sa ville -
Parler de sa profession
11 Hours
UNIT V
Narration de son nom et l'endroit o on vit - Son ge et date de naissance - Numro de tlphone et'dresse
- Narration du temps - La France en Europe PARLER: Conversation entre deux amis - Jouer la scne
COUTER: Ecouter les conversations (CD alter ego) CRIRE: crireune carte postale
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Alter ego+ Niveau a1 ,Catherine Hugot,, HACHETTE LIVRE 2012.
2. Cahier alter ego+
3. Grammaire Progressive du Franais, CLE international, 2010.
4. Collins Easy Learning French Verbs& Practice, Harpercollins, 2012.
5. Barron's Learn French, 3rd edition
6. FranaisLinguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000. FranaisI.Harrisonburg: The
7. Rosetta Stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2001.
15LG203 GERMAN 3003

Course Objectives
To help students acquire the basics of German language
To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions

1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Clarity on the basic sounds of the German language
(b) Improved fluency in German Proper vocabulary
UNIT I 9 Hours
GRAMMAR
Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers - Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and Conjugations -
definite and indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary - Nominative - Accusative and dative
case - propositions - adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessive articles.
UNIT II 9 Hours
LISTENING
Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciation: Includes all lessons in
the book - Greetings - talking about name - country - studies - nationalities - ordering in restaurants - travel
office - Interaction with correction of pronunciation.
UNIT III 9 Hours

SPEAKING
Speaking about oneself - about family - studies - questions and answers - dialogue and group conversation
on topics in textbooks - talks on chosen topics.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
READING
Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet : name, country, people,
profession, family, shopping, travel, numbers, friends, restaurant,studies - festivals
UNIT V 9 Hours
WRITING
Alphabets, numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books - control exercises - writing on chosen
topics such as one self, family,studies - country.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary, VERLAG
FUR DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007.
2. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.
3. Cassel Language Guides - German: Christine Eckhard, Black & Ruth Whittle, Continuum, London
/ New York, 1992.
15LH203 HINDI 3003

Course Objectives
To help students to acquire the basics of Hindi
To teach them how to converse in Hindi on various occasions
To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in Hindi

1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Improved fluency in Hindi (b) Clarity on the basic
sounds of the Hindi language Proper vocabulary
UNIT I 9 Hours
HINDI ALPHABET
Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowel Signs - Chandra Bindu
& Visarg -Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary.
UNIT II 9 Hours
NOUNS IN HINDI
Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in a ,e,i,o, u,) - Masculine & Feminine - Reading Exercises.
UNIT III 9 Hours

PRONOUNS AND TENSES
Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - Definite & Indefinite
pronouns - Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Assertive & Negative Sentences
- Interrogative Sentences.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY
Parts of body - Relatives Spices - Eatables - Fruit & Vegetables - Clothes - Directions-Seasons -
Professions.
UNIT V 9 Hours
SPEAKING
Model Sentences - Speaking practice for various occasions.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Publications Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2009.
2. Syed, PrayojanMulak Hindi, RahamathullahVaniPrakasan, New Delhi, 2002.
3. Ramdev, VyakaranPradeep, SaraswathiPrakasan, Varanasi, 2004.
15LJ203 JAPANESE 3003

Course Objectives
To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language
To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions
To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes

1. An ability to communicate effectively with: (a) Improved fluency in Japanese (b) Clarity on the
basic sounds of the Japanese language Proper vocabulary
UNIT I 9 Hours
Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese(Hiragana) - Long vowels -
Pronunciation of in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings and Expressions - Numerals.
N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 - san - Kanji - Technical Japanese
Vocabulary (25 Numbers) - Phonetic and semantic resemblances between Tamil and Japanese
UNIT II 9 Hours
Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja arimasen - S1 ka - S2 ka -
N1 no N1 - so des ka ' koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2 (Place) des - dhoko-N1
no N2 - Kanji-10 - ima-.ji-fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mashitha - V masen deshitha
- N1(Time) ne V - N1 kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25
Numbers) - Dictionary Usage.
UNIT III 9 Hours

N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendheshitha - N1(vehicle) de
ikimasu - kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1 wo V (Transitive) - N1
wo shimus - Nani wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka - V masho - Oo. Kanji-10 ,
N1( tool - means ) de V - Word / Sentence wa go nan des ka - N1( Person ) ne agemus - N1( Person ) ne
moraimus - mo V shimashitha - , Kanji-10 - Japanese Typewriting using JWPCE Software, Technical
Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
UNIT IV 9 Hours
Introduction to Adjectives - N1wanaadj des. N1 wa ii adj des - naadjna N1 - ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo - amari
- N1 wadho des ka - N1 wadhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2 - dhore - N1 gaarimasu - wakarimasu - N1 ga suki
masu - N1 gakiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of yoku - dhaithai - thakusan - sukoshi
- amari - zenzen - S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 gaarimasu - imasu - N1(Place) ne N2 gaarimasu - iimasu -
N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu - iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thing ) no N2 (Position) - N1 ya N2, Kanji-10
- Japanese Dictionary usage using JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
UNIT V 9 Hours
Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhonokurai - gurai -Quantifier-
(Period ) ne -.kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense of Noun sentences and na Adjective
sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yoriadj des - N1 tho N2 tho Dhochiragaadj des ka and
its answering method - N1 [ no naka ] de {nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu} ga ichiban adj des ka - answering -N1
gahoshi des - V1 mas form dhake mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu form ne ikimasu/kimasu/kayerimasu - N1
ne V/N1 wo V - Dhokoka - Nanika - gojumo - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook1-1, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt.
Ltd., Delhi, 2007.
2. Software 1. Nihongo Shogo-1 2. Nihongo Shogo-2 3. JWPCE Software
3. 1. www.japaneselifestyle.com 2. www.learn-japanese.info/ 3. www.kanjisite.com/ 4. www.learn-
hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters
PHYSICS ELECTIVES
15PH201 PHYSICS OF MATERIALS 3024

Course Objectives
To understand the physical properties of conductors, semiconductors and superconductors
To recognize the basic principles of interaction of light with matter and working of optical devices
To classify the types of dielectric, magnetic materials and polarization mechanisms with their
properties

1. Exemplify the physical properties of conductors, superconductors and semiconductors with
applications
2. Identify the suitable semiconducting material for solar cell applications
3. Select the suitable materials for insulating and dielectric applications
4. Compare the optical properties of display devices
5. Analyze the properties of magnetic materials for practical applications
UNIT I 9 Hours
CONDUCTING AND SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS
Electrical and thermal conductivity of metals - Wiedemann Franz law - band theory of metals - density of
states. Superconductors: properties - types - High Tc superconductors- applications.
UNIT II 10 Hours
SEMICONDUCTORS
Elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration - electrical
conductivity - band gap. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration - variation of Fermi level. Hall
effect: theory and experimental determination - applications: Solar cells
UNIT III 9 Hours

DIELECTRIC MATERIALS
Types of polarization: electronic, ionic, orientation and space charge polarization mechanisms - Langevin
-Debye equation - frequency and temperature effects on polarization - dielectric strength and loss - dielectric
breakdown mechanisms - active dielectric materials: pizo, pyro and ferroelectricity - applications.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
OPTICAL MATERIALS
Interaction of light with materials - optical absorption - transmission - Luminescence in solids -
Fluorescence and Phosphorescence - Optical band gap - LED ,LCD.
8 Hours
UNIT V
MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Classification and properties - domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials - anti-ferro and ferri
magnetic materials - applications: magnetic recording and memories.
FOR FURTHER READING

Photonic crystals - LIFI
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
Using Lees disc apparatus, determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Find the band gap value of the given semiconductor diode. Based on the band gap value, identify the
given semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
With the aid of travelling microscope, find the refractive index of a transparent solid and liquid material.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determine the wavelength of polychromatic source in the visible region using spectrometer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Based on Hall effect, calculate the charge carrier density of a given semiconductor and identify the nature
of the semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Draw the B-H curve of a ferromagnetic material subjected to external magnetic field and hence identify the
nature of the material.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determine the V-I characteristics of a solar cell.
Reference(s)
1. Saxena, Gupta, Saxena, Mandal, Solid State Physics, Pragati Prakashan Educational Publishers,
13th revised edition, Meerut, India, 2013.
2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company
3. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010.
4. M.A. Wahab, N.K. Mehta, Solid state physics-structure and properties of materials, Narosa
publishing house Pvt. Ltd, 6th edition, 2010.
5. Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Donald A. Neamen , Mc Graw-Hill, 2011.
6. P.K. Palanisamy, Materials Science, Scitech Publications India Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 2 1 4 2 1 2 1 1 20
2 2 2 2 4 5 3 4 22
3 1 2 1 3 4 3 4 2 20
4 2 2 2 5 2 5 2 20
5 1 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 18
Total 100
Remember
1. State Meissner effect.
2. List six properties of superconducting materials.
3. Define photovoltaic effect.
4. List the six common applications of dielectric materials.
5. Retrieve optical absorption in metals.
6. Reproduce the principle of LCD in display devices.
7. Recall the term hysteresis in ferromagnetic materials.
8. List four applications of magnetic materials.
9. Recognize the need of optical band gap in differentiating the materials.
10. Reproduce five applications of hard magnetic materials in day to day life.
Understand
1. Explain the principle, construction and working of LED.
2. Classify the three types of materials based on band gap energy.
3. Interpret the working mechanism and characteristics of a solar cell.

4. Illustrate Hall effect experiment used to find the concentration of charge carriers in n- type
semiconductors and hence explain the necessary theory.
5. Summarize the various dielectric breakdown mechanisms observed in dielectric materials.
6. Infer the principle involved in working of magnetic levitation.
7. Classify the two types of luminescence in solids with appropriate energy level diagrams.
8. Subsume the four types of polarization mechanisms involved in dielectric materials.
9. Illustrate the V-I characteristics of a solar cell.
10. Extrapolate the Clausius Mosotti equation for the dielectric material which is subjected to external
electric field.
Apply
1. Free electron density of aluminum is 18.10x1028 m-3. Calculate its Fermi energy at 0K. Plancks
constant and mass of free electron are 6.62x10-34 Js and 9.1x10-31 Kg.
2. Compute the relation between Remanence and Coercivity.
3. Demonstrate the domain theory of ferromagnetism.
4. Derive the expressions for electrical and thermal conductivity of metals and hence compute the
Wiedemann Frantz law.
5. Compute the carrier concentration in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
6. Calculate the number of free electrons per unit volume in a metal in terms of Fermi energy.
7. Assess the Magnetic levitation and SQUIDS in day to day life.
8. Show the importance of dielectric breakdown mechanisms in dielectrics.
9. Implement the applications of dielectric materials in real world problems.
10. Compute the relation between polarization vector and electric field (E).
Analyse
1. Differentiate Phosphorescence and Fluorescence.
2. Can we increase the orientation polarization with increase in temperature? Justify
3. Justify the principle, construction, working, advantages and disadvantages of LCD.
4. Compare hard and soft magnetic materials.
5. Differentiate the ferromagnetic and anti-ferromagnetic materials with examples.
6. Compare dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
7. Distinguish between polarization and polarizability.
8. Differentiate elemental and compound semiconductors.
9. Compare type I and type II superconductors.
10. Compare LED and LCD.
15PH202 APPLIED PHYSICS 3024

Course Objectives
To understand conducting, semiconducting, dielectric and magnetic properties of materials and
exemplify their applications
To analyze the basic concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer with illustrations
To gain knowledge about acoustical standards of buildings

1. Differentiate the materials based on their properties and suit them for appropriate applications
2. Select the suitable materials for insulating and dielectric applications
3. Investigate the working mechanisms and efficiency of heat engines by applying the laws of
thermodynamics
4. Compare the different heat transfer mechanisms and its applications

5. Choose the proper acoustic materials for the construction of buildings
UNIT I 11 Hours
CONDUCTORS AND SEMICONDUCTORS
Conductors: Classical free electron theory - electrical and thermal conductivity - Wiedemann - Franz law -
merits and demerits of classical free electron theory - band theory - density of states.
Semiconductors: Elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors - Fermi level and
electrical conductivity - band gap energy - extrinsic semiconductors - n-type and p-type semiconductors:
variation of Fermi level with temperature (qualitative) - Hall effect - applications.
UNIT II 9 Hours
DIELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Dielectrics: Fundamental terminologies - electronic and ionic polarizations - orientation polarization
mechanism (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin - Debye equation - dielectric loss -
applications of dielectric and insulating materials. Magnetic Materials: Properties of dia, para and
ferromagnetic materials - domain theory of ferromagnetism - hysteresis curve - hard and soft magnetic
materials - applications
UNIT III 9 Hours

THERMODYNAMICS
Zeroth law of thermodynamics - Heat - equilibrium and quasistatic process - path functions - comparison
between heat and work - internal energy - first law of thermodynamics - isothermal and adiabatic process -
work done - reversible and irreversible process - second law of thermodynamics - entropy - enthalpy -
Carnot ideal engine and its efficiency - Carnot's theorem-actual heat engine: Diesel engine and its efficiency
UNIT IV 9 Hours
HEAT TRANSFER
Modes of heat transfer - thermal conductivity - heat capacity and diffusivity - rectilinear flow of heat -
conduction through bodies in series and parallel - determination of thermal conductivity: good conductor:
Searle's method - bad conductor: Lee's disc method - applications of heat transfer: formation of ice in ponds
- conductivity of earth's crust and age of earth - practical applications
UNIT V 7 Hours
ACOUSTICS
Classification of sound based on frequency - characteristics of audible sound - reverberation time: Sabine's
formula - determination of absorption coefficient - Erying's formula (qualitative). Sound insulation - sound
absorbing materials - factors affecting the acoustics of building - remedies
FOR FURTHER READING

Nanomaterials and its applications
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Find the band gap value of the given semiconductor diode. Based on the band gap value, identify the given
semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
With the aid of traveling microscope, find the refractive index of a transparent solid and liquid material
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determine the wavelength of polychromatic source in the visible region using spectrometer
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Reference(s)
1. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an Introduction, John Wiley and Sons,Inc,
2010.
2. BrijLal, N. Subrahmanyam and P. S. Hemne, Heat, Thermodynamics & Statistical Physics, S.
Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.
3. Saxena, Gupta, Saxena, Mandal, Solid State Physics, Pragati Prakashan Educational Publishers,
13threvised edition, Meerut, India, 2013.
4. P.K. Mittal, Applied Physics, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2008.
5. Donald A. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices,McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 3 4 3 4 4 2 4 24
2 2 2 4 2 2 4 4 20
3 2 4 4 2 4 2 2 20
4 2 2 4 2 2 4 4 20
5 2 2 2 2 4 4 16
Total 100
Remember
1. State Ohms law.
2. Define drift velocity.
3. List the two drawbacks of classical free electron theory.
4. State Wiedemann-Franz law.
5. Mention the practical unit used for electrons magnetic moment.
6. Recall the term hysteresis in ferromagnetic materials.
7. List the four uses of magnetic materials.
8. State Zeroth law of thermodynamics.
9. State the Kelvins statement of second law of thermodynamics.
10. Name the three modes of heat transfer.
11. State Echelon effect.
Understand
1. Illustrate the significance of Fermi energy.
2. Why indirect gap semiconductors are preferred in fabricating transistors?
3. Classify the types of magnetic materials.
4. Outline the term retentivity and coercivity.
5. Compare dia, para and ferro magnetic materials.
6. Point out the ideal conditions required for diesel cycle.
7. Sketch the isothermal and adiabatic processes in P-V diagram.
8. Is it possible for a practical engine to have 100% efficiency? Justify.
9. Ice kept in saw dust or wrapper in a blanket will not melt. Why?
10. Classify the types of sound waves.
11. Explain the three characteristics of musical sound.
Apply
1. The average energy of a conduction electron in copper at 300 K is 4.23 eV. Calculate the Fermi
energy of copper at 300 K.
2. Determine the carrier concentration of p-type semiconductor whose hall coefficient is 3.6610-4
m3/C.
3. Compute the efficiency of Carnots engine operating between the temperatures 3270C and 270C.
4. Point out practical applications of heat conduction.
5. Compute the efficiency of Carnots engine working the steam point and the ice point.
6. Assess the reason for the formation ice on pond surface.
7. The intensity of sound produced by thunder is 0.1 Wm-2.Calculate the intensity level in decibels.
8. Calculate Sabines mathematical relation for reverberation time of the hall.
9. Compute the minimum wavelength of audible sound at zero degree centigrade.
Analyse
1. Distinguish between relaxation time and collision time.
2. Differentiate between electrical and thermal conductivity.
3. List the various applications of soft and hard magnetic materials for day to day life.
4. Analysis the six properties of hard and soft magnetic materials.
5. If the system and surrounding are in thermal equilibrium, is it necessary they are in same state?
Comment the statement.
6. Differentiate isothermal and adiabatic process.
7. Entropy remains constant in an adiabatic process. Justify the statement.
8. Compare Carnots cycle and diesel cycle.
9. Distinguish between loudness and intensity of sound.
10. Compare reverberation and echo.

11. How do you maintain optimum reverberation in a hall? Justify.
15PH203 MATERIALS SCIENCE 3024

Course Objectives
To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials
To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials
To understand the nature and applications of different magnetic materials

1. Distinguish electrical properties of different kinds of conducting materials
2. Identify the different types of semiconductors and its applications
3. Categorize the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics
4. Choose the suitable material for the construction of display devices
5. Select appropriate magnetic materials for magnetic storage devices
UNIT I 8 Hours
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF METALS
Quantum free electron theory: Fermi-Dirac distribution function - Fermi energy and its variation with
temperature - density of energy states - calculation of density of electrons and fermi energy at 0K - mean
energy of electrons at 0K - problems.
UNIT II 10 Hours
SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS
Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - intrinsic semiconductors: expressions for number
of electrons and holes - determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy - electrical
conductivity - band gap energy determination - carrier concentration in extrinsic semiconductors. Hall
effect: theory and experimental determination - uses - problems.
9 Hours
UNIT III
DIELECTRICS
Introduction - fundamental definitions in dielectrics - expressions for electronic and ionic polarizations -
orientation polarization (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin - Debye equation - frequency
and temperature effects on polarization - internal field - expression for internal field (cubic structure) -
Clausius - Mosotti equation and its importance - applications of dielectric materials - problems.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
OPTICAL MATERIALS
Introduction - optical absorption in metals, semiconductors and insulators. Fluorescence and
phosphorescence. Light emitting diode: principle, construction, working and applications. Liquid crystal
display: general properties - dynamic scattering display - twisted nematic display - applications -
comparison between LED and LCD. Blue ray disc - principle - working.
UNIT V 9 Hours
MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Introduction - orbital and spin magnetic moments - Bohr magneton - basic definitions - classification of
magnetic materials - domain theory of ferromagnetism - process of domain magnetization - explanation of
hysteresis curve based on domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials.
FOR FURTHER READING

Optical data storage and Giant magnetoresistance
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
With the aid of traveling microscope, find the refractive index of a transparent solid and liquid material.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Reference(s)
1. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an Introduction, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc, 2010.
2. S.O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2014.
3. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company
4. P.K. Palanisamy, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2010.
5. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.
6. R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai publications, New Delhi, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 5 2 1 5 2 1 18
2 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 4 22
3 1 2 1 3 3 3 5 2 20
4 2 3 3 3 2 5 2 20
5 1 3 3 2 5 3 1 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define density of electron energy states in metals.
2. Recall Fermi energy.
3. State Hall Effect.
4. List out the four advantages of semiconductors.
5. Define dielectric constant
6. Recall electric polarization.
7. Define Fluorescence.
8. Recognize hard and soft magnetic materials.
9. State the working principle of LED.
10. Define Bohr magnetron.
Understand
1. Classify three types of free electron theory
2. Represent the variation of Fermi level with temperature
3. Explain Clausius-Mosotti relation.
4. Compare element and compound type semiconductors.
5. Illustrate the variation of Fermi level with temperature in n-type semiconductors.
6. Distinguish between a dielectric and insulator.
7. Mention the technique to increase the emission time in phosphorescence.
8. Exemplify hysteresis on the basis of domain theory of ferromagnetism.
9. Identify four examples for hard magnetic materials.
10. Identify four properties of ferromagnetic materials.
Apply
1. Compute the Fermi direc function for energy kT above the Fermi energy.
2. Asses the Fermi-Dirac distribution function.
3. Energy level of p-type and n-type semiconductors and justify the results
4. Compute the carrier concentration of intrinsic semiconductors
5. Explain the principle, construction and working of Hall Effect
6. Show that electronic and ionic polarizabilities are independent of temperature.
7. Calculate the polarization of an atom above value five.
8. Differentiate the dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
9. Compute the B-H Hysteresis curve on the basis of domain theory.
Analyse
1. Discriminate drift velocity and thermal velocity of an electron
2. Difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors.
3. Obtain the expression for concentration of charge carriers in p-type semiconductor.

4. In practical dielectrics, the current does not exactly lead the voltage by 90?. Justify.
5. Local field is the space and time average of the electric field acting on a particular molecule Justify
the result.
6. Justify the special features of magnetic blue ray disks.
7. Analyze the role of energies in the domain growth.
8. Explain the roll of activators in optical materials
9. Describe the working of twisted pneumatic display device.
10. Compare LED and LCD.
15PH204 PHYSICS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS 3024
Course Objectives
To familiarize with the physical properties of materials
To gain practical applications of modern spectroscopy and microscopy techniques
To understand the preparation of bio and nanomaterials

1. Identify the electrical and thermal properties of conducting and semiconducting materials
2. Analyze the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics
3. Choose specific materials for optical and magnetic data storage devices
4. Investigate the specimen with the aid of suitable spectroscopic techniques
5. Realize the methods adopted for preparing nano materials
UNIT I 10 Hours
CONDUCTING AND SEMICONDUCTING PROPERTIES
Quantum free electron theory - Fermi-Dirac distribution function - effect of temperature on Fermi function
- density of energy states - calculation of density of electrons and Fermi energy at 0 K. Intrinsic
semiconductors: expressions for density of electrons and holes - intrinsic carrier concentration - band gap
energy. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in n-type and p-type semiconductors - variation of
Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration - problems.
UNIT II 9 Hours
DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES
Introduction: fundamental definitions in dielectrics - types of polarization - expressions for electronic and
ionic polarization mechanisms - orientation polarization (qualitative) - Langevin-Debye equation -
frequency and temperature effects on polarization - dielectric loss - dielectric breakdown mechanisms -
active dielectric materials - applications of dielectric materials - problems.
UNIT III 10 Hours

OPTICAL AND MAGNETIC PROPERTIES
Optical properties: introduction - light interaction with solids - atomic and electronic interactions - optical
properties of metals, semiconductors and insulators - reflection - refraction - absorption - transmission -
luminescence and photoconductivity. Magnetic properties: introduction - origin of magnetic moment -
properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials - domain theory and hysteresis effect - hard and soft
magnetic materials - problems.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
SPECTROSCOPY AND MICROSCOPY TECHNIQUES
Introduction: different types of spectroscopy techniques - basic principle of FTIR spectroscopy and X-ray
Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS). Basic principle and working mechanisms of Scanning Electron
Microscope (SEM) - Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - Atomic Force Microscope (AFM).
8 Hours
UNIT V
BIO AND NANO MATERIALS
Biomaterials: classification of biomaterials - development of biomaterials - applications. Nanomaterials:
properties - synthesis of nanomaterials - top-down approach: ball milling technique - bottom-up approach:
Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) - uses of nanomaterials. Carbon nanotubes: properties and
applications.
FOR FURTHER READING

Health and environmental impacts
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Find the band gap value of the given semiconductor diode. Based on the band gap value, identify the
given semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Reference(s)
1. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering An Introduction, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc, 2010.
3. Jacob Milliman, Christos Halkias, Satyabrata JIT, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
4. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Subbiah Pillai, Nanobiotechnology, MJP Publishers, 2010.
6. Yang Leng, Materials Characterization: Introduction to Microscopic and Spectroscopic Methods,
Wiley-VCH, 2013.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 4 2 2 5 2 2 2 1 1 22
2 2 2 2 2 5 3 4 20
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 22
4 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 18
5 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the merits of quantum free electron theory over classical free electron theory
2. Define carrier concentration
3. Recall Fermi energy
4. List the four types of polarization mechanisms.
5. Recognize polar and non-polar molecules
6. Define Bohr magneton
7. Recall coercivity and retentivity
8. Point out the four salient features of biomaterials
9. Define bioactive materials
10. State the working principle of FTIR spectroscopy
Understand
1. Classify three types of materials based on bandgap energy
2. Explain fermi-distribution function and effect of temperature on Fermi function
3. Represent the variation of Fermi level with temperature
4. Explain intrinsic and thermal breakdown mechanisms
5. Infer the importance of Fermi level in a semiconductor
6. Illustrate the phenomenon of B-H hysteresis on the basis of domain theory
7. Classify four types of biomaterials
8. Represent the scanning electron microscope to determine the grain size of the nanomaterials
9. Explain the principle, construction and working of Scanning electron microscope
10. Explain the principle and working mechanism of X ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS)
Apply
1. Find the variation of Fermi level with temperature and impurity concentration in n-type
semiconductors
2. Show that electronic and ionic polarizabilities are independent of temperature
3. Show that the position of Fermi level is exactly at the midpoint of forbidden energy gap in intrinsic
semiconductor
4. Compute the relationship between polarizability and electric flux density.
5. Assess the properties of dia, para and ferromagnetic materials
6. Show that top down method is inferior to bottom up method
7. Construct B-H Hysteresis curve on the basis of domain theory
8. Design the principle, construction and working of chemical vapour deposition.
9. Show that the electronic polarizability is directly propotional to the volume of an atom
10. Compute the expression for carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors
Analyse
1. Extrinsic semiconductors possess high electrical conductivity than intrinsic semiconductors. Justify
2. Silver is the best conductor of electricity. But gold is used in high-end electronic connectors.
Justify.
3. Identify the role of impurity concentration in the variation of Fermi level in the case of p-type
semiconductors.
4. Compare polar dielectrics with non-polar dielectrics.
5. Analyse the features of hard and soft magnetic materials.
6. Compare the six properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials
7. Differentiate top down approach from bottom up approach.
8. Select the four important features of TEM
9. Justify the electronic polarizability of Argon is much greater than that of Helium.
10. Intrinsic semiconductors are insulators at 0K. Justify.
15PH205 SOLID STATE PHYSICS 3024

Course Objectives
To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials
To understand the working mechanism of junction diodes
To impart knowledge in optical and magnetic materials
1. Identify different types of emission of electrons and significance of Fermi function

2. Explore the carrier concentration and its variation with temperature of different semiconducting
materials
3. Analyze the I-V characteristics of a junction diode
4. Investigate the various polarization mechanisms in dielectrics
5. Select appropriate optical and magnetic materials for data storage devices
UNIT I 10 Hours
EMISSION PROPERTIES AND QUANTUM THEORY OF SOLIDS
Emission of electrons: types thermionic emission-principle- Richardson equation- secondary emission-
principle- work function- Fermi-Dirac distribution function and its temperature dependence significance of
Fermi energy- density of energy states- calculation of density of electrons and Fermi energy at 0K- average
energy of electrons at 0K problems.
UNIT II 9 Hours
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
Intrinsic semiconductors: the law of mass action - expressions for density of electrons and holes -
determination of carrier concentration - band gap energy. Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration
in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall effect: theory - experimental determination of Hall voltage -
applications - problems.
UNIT III 9 Hours

JUNCTION DIODE CHARACTERISTICS
Introduction - pn junction diode - volt-ampere characteristics - diode current equation - static and dynamic
resistances - space charge - diffusion capacitance - junction diode switching times. Diode circuit with DC
voltage source. Applications: full wave rectifier - capacitor filters - clamper circuits.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
DIELECTRICS
Introduction: fundamental definitions in dielectrics - expressions for electronic and ionic polarizations -
orientation polarization (qualitative) - space charge polarization - Langevin Debye equation - frequency
and temperature effects on polarization - expression for internal field (cubic structure) - Clausius-Mosotti
equation - dielectric loss - applications of dielectrics - problems.
8 Hours
UNIT V
OPTOELECTRONICS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Principle, working and characteristics of LED and LCD - blue ray disc. Magnetic materials: basic
definitions - properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials - explanation of hysteresis curve based on
domain theory - hard and soft magnetic materials. Magnetic storage device: principle - working - giant
magnetoresistance.
FOR FURTHER READING

Motion of an electron in uniform and non-uniform magnetic fields - electric and magnetic fields in a crossed
configuration.
2 Hours
INTRODUCTION
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
semiconductor.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Reference(s)
1. Jacob Millman, Christos Halkias and Satyabrata JIT, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
2. William D. Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an Introduction, John Wiley and sons, Inc,
2010.
4. R. S. Sedha, A textbook of Applied Electronics, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
5. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2010
6. M. N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 2 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 22
2 2 2 2 3 2 3 6 20
3 2 1 3 2 5 2 2 3 20
4 2 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 20
5 2 2 3 2 2 2 5 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the Richardson equation.
2. Define dynamic resistance.
3. State the law of mass action.
4. Define Hall Effect.
5. List the three practical applications of p-n junction diode.
6. List the three practical applications of p-n junction diode.
7. List the four types of polarizations in dielectrics
8. Reproduce the expressions for electronic and ionic polarization.
9. State the working principle of LED.
10. Define retentivity and coercivity.
Understand
1. Explain the variation of Fermi-Dirac distribution function with temperature.
2. Indicate the importance of Fermi level.
3. Indicate the reason for preferring extrinsic semiconductors over intrinsic semiconductors.
4. Represent four applications of Hall Effect.
5. Represent the switching action of a diode.
6. Interpret the relation between polarization and polarisability in dielectrics.
7. All the dielectrics are insulators but all the insulators are not dielectrics. Illustrate with examples.
8. Interpret the relation between the dielectric constant and electric susceptibility.
9. Explain the phenomenon of electroluminescence in LED.
10. Summarize the working principle of giant magnetoresistance.
Apply
1. Find the expression for density of electrons and Fermi energy at 0 K.
2. Using the Fermi function, compute the temperature at which there is 1% probability that an electron
in a solid will have energy 0.5 eV above EF of 5 eV.
3. Explain how phosphorous atoms donate electrons to the conduction band.
4. Apply the law of mass action to determine the carrier concentration of intrinsic semiconductors.
5. Construct a circuit using p-n junction diode and execute its V-I characteristics.
6. Construct a diode circuit with DC voltage source and demonstrate its working conditions.
7. Show that electronic polarizability is independent of temperature.
8. Explain frequency dependence of dielectrics with a neat sketch.
9. Apply the domain theory to the hysteresis effect observed in ferromagnetic materials.
10. Compute the wavelength of light emitted by an LED with band gap energy of 1.8 eV.
Analyse
1. The average energy of electrons at 0 K depends on Fermi level. Justify.
2. Differentiate p-type and n-type semiconductors.
3. Outline the working principle of full wave bridge rectifier.
4. At optical frequencies the total polarization is less. Justify.
5. Outline the causes for dielectric loss in dielectric materials.
6. Analyze the magnetic behavior of dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
7. Compare the properties of LED and LCD.
8. Outline the difference between hard and soft magnetic materials.
Evaluate
1. Evaluate the resistance value using V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
2. Evaluate the value of Fermi distribution function for an energy kT above the Fermi energy at that
temperature and comment on the answer.
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
15CH201 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3024
Course Objectives
To recall the terminologies of electrochemistry and explain the function of batteries and fuel cells
with its electrochemical reactions
To understand the fundamentals of corrosion, its types and polymers with its applications
To choose appropriate instrumentation technique for interpreting analytical data

1. Construct an electrochemical cell and measure its potential.
2. Identify the components and processes in batteries and infer the selection criteria for commercial
battery systems with respect to different applications.
3. Utilize electrochemical data to formulate an electrochemical half-cell and cell reactions for
corrosion control processes.
4. Differentiate the polymers used in day to day life based on its source, properties and applications.
5. Identify the applications of analytical methods for the estimation of elements in aqueous media.
UNIT I 10 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTROCHEMISTRY
Types of electrodes - electrode potential - salt bridge - cell reaction - cell representation - silver-silver
chloride electrode - calomel electrode - determination of single electrode potential - electrochemical series
and its importance. Ion-selective electrode: glass electrode - measurement of pH using glass electrode.
Concentration cells (electrode and electrolyte). Potentiometry - potentiometric titrations (redox titration).
difference between electrochemical and electrolytic cells
9 Hours
UNIT II
ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES
Batteries - characteristics of battery - types of batteries. construction, working and applications: Primary
(alkaline) and secondary (lead-acid and nickel-cadmium) - Modern batteries (zinc air battery and lithium
batteries) - precautions for battery maintenance. Comparison with conventional galvanic cells. Fuel cells -
Types of fuel cells: solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell - solid oxide fuel cells - microbial fuel cell. Hydrogen-
oxygen fuel cell - construction, working, advantages and limitations
UNIT III 8 Hours

CORROSION SCIENCE
Corrosion: definition - types of corrosion: chemical and electrochemical corrosion - Pilling-Bedworth ratio
- types of oxide layer (stable, unstable, volatile, porous) - hydrogen evolution and oxygen absorption
mechanism for electrochemical corrosion - mechanism for rusting of iron. Types of electrochemical
corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion (pitting, waterline and pipeline). Galvanic
series - applications. Factors influencing corrosion: nature of metal and environment. Corrosion control
methods: sacrificial anode method - impressed current cathodic protection method - electroplating -
electroless plating
10 Hours
UNIT IV
POLYMERS AND ITS PROCESSING
Advantages of polymers over metals. Monomers - polymers - polymerization - functionality - degree of
polymerization - classification of polymers based on source and applications - Molecular weight
determination. Types of polymerization: addition, condensation and copolymerization - mechanism of free
radical polymerization. Preparation, properties and applications of thermosetting (epoxy resin and bakelite)
and thermoplastics (polyvinyl chloride and polytetrafluoroethylene). Compounding of plastics - injection
and extrusion moulding methods
UNIT V 8 Hours
INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES FOR CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Beer - Lamberts law. Principle, instrumentation (block diagram only) and applications: Ultra violet
spectroscopy - Atomic absorption spectroscopy - Colorimetry (estimation of a transition metal) - Flame
photometry (estimation of an alkali metal).
FOR FURTHER READING

Nobel prize winners in chemistry over past 5 years
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
General instructions to students - Handling reagents and safety precautions
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Determination of amount of hydrochloric acid present in the given sample using pH meter
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Conductometric titration of mixture of acids
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Electro analytical determination of strength of iron in the given sample by potentiometric method using
saturated calomel electrode.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Measurement of rate of corrosion on zinc/mild steel in aerated neutral/acidic/alkaline solution by weight
loss measurements / Tafel polarization method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method
Reference(s)
1. M. Munjal and S.M. Gupta, Wiley Engineering Chemistry, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2013.
2. A. Pahari and B.Chauhan, Engineering Chemistry, Infinity Science press LLC, New Delhi, 2010.
3. P.H. Rieger, Electrochemistry, Springer, Netherland, Second Edition (Reprint) 2012.
4. Fred W. Billmeyer JR, Textbook of polymer science, John Wiley & sons, Third edition, 2008.
5. Willard Merritt and Dean Settle, Instrumental methods of analysis, CBS publishers, Seventh
edition, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 1 3 4 2 4 4 1 2 23
2 1 1 1 4 4 3 1 2 1 2 20
3 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 17
4 5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 23
5 1 3 3 7 2 1 17
Total 100
Remember
1. List any four significances of EMF series.
2. Define the term single electrode potential.
3. Recall the four advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell.
4. Define the term functionality of a monomer.
5. State Pilling-Bedworth rule.
6. Name two monomers used for the preparation of epoxy resin.
7. Label the parts and charge carried by electrodes in electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
8. List any two significances of monomer functionality.
9. State Beer - Lamberts law.
10. Define concentration cell.
Understand
1. Classify two types of polymers based on source.
2. Compare electrochemical cell and electrolytic cell with suitable diagrams.
3. Illustrate the mechanism involved in electrochemical corrosion.
4. Explain the principle and five components of UV-visible spectrophotometer.
5. Outline the mechanism for the synthesis of (CF2-CF2)n polymer.
6. Identify any two analytical methods to estimate sodium present in aqueous media.
7. Illustrate the injection molding process with a necessary explanation and two advantages.
8. Indicate any two importance of salt bridge in an electrochemical cell.

9. Ilustrate the route to synthesis epoxy resin from its two monomers.
10. Summarize any four advantages of polymers over metals in everyday life.
Apply
1. Calculate the single electrode potential value zinc half-cell dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4 solution at
25C? E Zn/Zn 2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK -1 Mol -1 , F= 96500 Coulombs.
2. Identify two advantages of degree of polymerization.
3. Find the concentration of given solution using spectrophotometer, if %T, bath length and molar
adsorption coefficient are 18, 1 cm and 6000 L/mol. cm.
4. Derive an equation for determination pH of unknown solution using glass electrode.
5. Elaborate the six applications of electrochemical series.
6. Select and explain suitable potentiometric titration to estimate the amount of ferrous ion in the
given solution.
7. Discuss the construction and working of electrolyte concentration cell with suitable example.
8. Assess the significances of monomer functionality in the properties and structure of polymer.
Analyse
1. Outline any two methods for preventing chemical and electrochemical corrosion.
2. Compare the advantages and limitations of electro and electroless plating of nickel.
3. The statement prevention is better than cure is not suitable for corrosion science and engineering-
Justify the answer in your own words.
4. Differentiate addition and condensation polymers based on its synthesis.
5. Arrange the following polymers based on the increasing order of resistance towards chemical
1. poly(ethylene) 2. Starch 3.Baklite 4.Teflon
Evaluate
1. Calculate the electrode potential of zinc metal if EMF of the cell is 1.10 V (Sat. Calomel electrode
was used for complete cell formation.
2. Electrode potentials of A and B are E 0 A/A+ = +0.76 V and E 0 B/B+ = -0.34 V respectively.
Choose the appropriate anode half-cell and cathode half-cell by giving the cell representation
3. Find out the degree of polymerization for a low density polytetrafluoroethylene with a molecular
weight of 10002 amu. (Atomic weights of F=18.9; C=12)
4. The standard reduction potentials of metals Ag, Fe, Cu and Zn are +0.80v,-0.44v, +0.34v and -
0.76v respectively. Arrange the metals in the increasing order of their ability to undergo corrosion.
Create
1. A ship hull in ocean is safe against corrosion under any circumstance - Argue.
2. Derive the probable reason and possible solution for the following:
i. Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.
ii. Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.
iii. Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.
15CH202 APPLIED CHEMISTRY 3024
Course Objectives
To understand the necessity of water softening processes
To recognize the fundamentals of corrosion, alloys, phase rule and fuels with its applications.
To characterize the chemical compounds using analytical techniques.

1. Attribute the internal and external treatment methods for the removal of hardness in water for
domestic and industrial applications.
2. Exemplify the type of corrosion and its mechanism which will help to develop the corrosion control
methods.
3. Apply the applications of alloying and phase rule in the field of metallurgy.
4. Analyse the three types of fuels based on calorific value for selected applications.
5. Recognize the applications of analytical methods in characterizing the chemical compounds
UNIT I 10 Hours
WATER PURIFICATION
Hardness of water - classification of hardness (temporary and permanent) - units of hardness (ppm, mg/l,
degree Clark, degree French) - expression of hardness in terms of calcium carbonate equivalence -
estimation of hardness by EDTA Method - Uses of water for industrial purpose - requirements of boiler
feed water - disadvantages of using hard water in industrial boilers: scale - sludge - priming - foaming -
caustic embrittlement. Removal of dissolved salts from hard water: Internal conditioning (phosphate,
carbonate, calgon and colloidal methods) - external conditioning: ion exchange process, reverse osmosis,
electrodialysis. Uses of water for domestic purpose - municipal water purification (screening, aeration,
coagulation, sedimentation, filtration and disinfection of water - break point chlorination).
UNIT II 8 Hours
CORROSION SCIENCE
Corrosion - chemical and electro chemical corrosion - Pilling Bedworth rule - Mechanism (type of oxide
layer, oxygen absorption - hydrogen evolution) - Galvanic series - types of electrochemical corrosion:
galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion (pitting, pipeline and waterline corrosion) - Factors
influencing corrosion (nature of metal & environment). Corrosion control: sacrificial anode - impressed
current method. Protective coatings - paints - constituents and functions.
UNIT III 9 Hours

ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE
Alloys: purpose of alloying - function and effects of alloying elements - properties of alloys - classification
of alloys. Ferrous alloys: nichrome and stainless steel. Non-ferrous alloys: brass and bronze. Heat treatment
of steel (Annealing, hardening, tempering, normalising, carburizing and nitriding).
Phase rule: Phase - component - degree of freedom - phase rule - phase diagram - Applications - one
component system (water system). Reduced phase rule - two component system (lead and silver system).
10 Hours
UNIT IV
FUELS
Classification - characteristics - calorific value - solid fuel - coal - types - analysis of coal (proximate and
ultimate analysis) - processing of coal to coke - carbonization - types (low temperature and high temperature
carbonization) - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Liquid fuels - petroleum -
refining of crude oil - knocking - octane number - cetane number. Liquid fuel from coal (Bergius process).
Gaseous fuels - natural gas (CNG) - coal gas - producer gas - syn gas - shale gas.
UNIT V 8 Hours
INSTRUMENTAL METHODS
Beer - Lamberts law. Principle, instrumentation (block diagram only) and applications: Ultra violet
spectroscopy - Infrared spectroscopy - Atomic absorption spectroscopy - Colorimetry (estimation of
transition metal) - Flame photometry (estimation of alkali metal).
FOR FURTHER READING

Synthesis and applications of bio-fuels.
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Water quality of BIT campus - River - Bore well water with respect to hardness, TDS and pH.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Determination of the strength of Fe(II) in the given sample by potentiometric method.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Measurement of rate of corrosion on mild steel in aerated, neutral, acidic and alkaline medium by Tafel
polarization method/ weight loss method.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Estimation of copper content in brass by EDTA method.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.
Reference(s)
2. M. Munjal et.al., Wiley Engineering Chemistry, Second edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2013.
3. Willard Merritt and Dean Settle, Instrumental methods of analysis, CBS publishers, Seventh
edition, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 1 3 4 2 1 4 4 1 1 23
2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 17
3 1 1 1 4 4 3 1 2 2 1 20
4 5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 23
5 1 3 3 7 2 1 17
Total 100
Remember
1. Define the term hardness of water.
2. List any two internal conditioning methods to convert hard water to soft water.
3. List the two types of electrochemical corrosion.
4. Recall any two reasons for galvanic corrosion.
5. List the four major objectives of alloying steel.
6. State Gibbs phase rule.
7. Define octane number.
8. State Beer-Lamberts law.
9. Recall any four applications of colorimetry.
Understand
1. Compare temporary and permanent hardness in water.
2. Illustrate the estimation of carbonate, non-carbonate and total hardness by EDTA method.
3. Identify the needs of corrosion control methods with suitable examples.
4. Indicate the two suitable conditions for electrochemical corrosion to occur.
5. Classify the three types of alloys based on metal composition.
6. For one component water system, the triple point is an invariant point. Reason out.
7. Distinguish between syn gas and coal gas.
8. With a neat diagram, explain the processes involved in Bergius process to get synthetic petrol.
9. Diiferentiate chromophore and auxochrome with an example.
10. Infer the role of ammonium thiocyanate in the colorimetric estimation of iron.
Apply
1. Illustrate the necessary steps involved in municipal water treatment..
2. Suggest a suitable laboratory method to estimate carbonate, non-carbonate and total hardness of
water.
3. Sketch a suitable protection method to prevent ships hull made of iron from corrosion.
4. Assess the effects of alloying elements.
5. Apply Gibbs phase rule for one component water system with a neat diagram.
6. Find the combusted products of the following components.
(i) 2H2 (ii) CH4
7. Find the application of colorimetry for the estimation of iron.
8. Calculate the number of the modes of vibrations for the following molecules.
(i) C6H6 (ii) CO2
Analyse
1. How can the effect of caustic embrittlement in boiler be resolved?
2. Identify the problems created in boilers if priming and foaming takes place.
3. Increase in temperature increases corrosion rate. Justify.
4. Zinc is more corroded when coupled with copper than lead Reason out.
5. Distinguish ferrous and non-ferrous alloys with examples.
6. Arrange the following materials based on their increasing calorific value.
peat, lignite, bituminous, wood, anthracite and sub-bituminous.
Evaluate
1. Bolt and nut made of the same metal is preferred in practice. Give reason.
2. Support the statement Coke is a better fuel than coal.
3. Calculate the absorbance if 10% of light is transmitted.
4. Determine the effect of pH of the conducting medium on corrosion.
5. Determine the number of phases present in the following systems.
(i) Two miscible liquids (alcohol & water)
(ii) Two immiscible liquids (benzene & water)
Create
i) Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.
ii) Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.
iii) Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.
2. AAS is a better method for environmental analysis than calorimetric analysis. Justify.
15CH203 APPLIED ELECTROCHEMISTRY 3024

Course Objectives
To understanding the basic concepts of electrochemistry and their application
To expanding knowledge about corrosion and methods of control
To gaining information regarding principle, working and application of batteries and fuel cells

1. Construct an electrochemical cell and measure its potential.
2. Measure the emf of a cell using different electrodes.
3. Identify the components and processes in batteries and infer the selection criteria for commercial
battery systems with respect to different applications.
4. Differentiate types of corrosion and its prevention by suitable techniques.
5. Recognize the importance of fuel cells and solar battery.
UNIT I 9 Hours
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTROCHEMISTRY
Introduction - electrical conductance in solution - electrical double layer - electrode potential - importance
of electrode potential. Electrochemical cell - standard cell: Weston cadmium cell - Concentration cell:
electrode and electrolyte - applications. Applications of electrolytic cells: electrolysis of water, electrolysis
of brine and electroplating of copper and gold
UNIT II 9 Hours
REFERENCE ELECTRODES
Primary and secondary reference electrodes - metal-metal ion electrode, metal-metal insoluble salt
electrodes: silver-silver chloride electrode, calomel electrode - ion-selective electrode: glass electrode -
measurement of pH of a solution using glass electrode. Quinhydrone electrode: construction - advantages -
limitations. Applications of EMF measurements: Potentiometric titrations: acid-base titration - oxidation-
reduction titration - precipitation titration
UNIT III 10 Hours

ENERGY STORING DEVICES
Types of batteries - alkaline, lead-acid, nickel-cadmium and lithium batteries - construction, working and
commercial applications. Electrochemical sensors. Decomposition potential: variation of decomposition
potential for different metals - importance of decomposition potential. Over voltage: factors affecting over
voltage value. Maintenance and precautions in battery handling
10 Hours
UNIT IV
CORROSION SCIENCE
Corrosion - causes - dry and wet corrosion - Pilling - Bedworth rule - mechanism (hydrogen evolution and
oxygen absorption) - rusting of iron. Galvanic series - applications. Galvanic corrosion - differential
aeration corrosion (pitting, waterline and stress) - factors influencing corrosion. Corrosion control -
sacrificial anode and impressed current cathodic protection methods - Metallic coatings: chromium plating
- nickel plating - galvanizing and tinning
UNIT V 7 Hours
FUEL CELL AND SOLAR BATTERY
Introduction - types of fuel cell: low, medium and high temperature fuel cell. Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell -
advantages. Solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cells, biochemical fuel cell. Solar battery -
domestic, industrial and commercial applications. Environmental and safety issues
FOR FURTHER READING

Document the various batteries with its characteristics used in mobile phones and laptops
Maintenance free batteries, Battery recycling
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
General instructions to students - Handling reagents and safety precautions.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Electroplating of copper onto a stainless steel object.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determination of strength of iron in a given solution by potentiometric method.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Determination of amount of hydrochloric acid present in the given sample using pH meter.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determination of corrosion inhibition on mild steel using natural inhibitors.
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Estimation of barium by precipitation titration.
Reference(s)
1. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
2. B. S. Chauhan, Engineering Chemistry, 3rd Edition, Laxmi Publication Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S Pathania, Principles of physical chemistry, 46th Edition,
Vishal publishing Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
4. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, 5th Edition, S. Chand &
Company, New Delhi, 2012.
5. S. Vairam, Engineering Chemistry, 1st Edition, John -Willy, India private limited, New Delhi,
2014.
6. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 20
2 1 4 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 20
3 1 1 4 5 2 4 2 1 1 2 23
4 2 1 2 5 1 3 2 2 2 2 22
5 2 2 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 15
Total 100
Remember
1. List any two advantages of hydrogen oxygen fuel cells.
2. Name any two secondary batteries used in electronic appliances.
3. State pilling bedworth rule.
4. List any two applications of lithium battery.
5. Define overvoltage.
6. Recall the two limitations of quinhydrone electrode.
7. List the three major applications of galvanic series.
8. Recall the term redox reaction.

9. Define standard electrode potential.
Understand
1. Identify any two factors affecting the rate of corrosion based on the nature of metal.
2. Compare solar battery with lead acid-battery with respect to cell reactions, advantages and
limitations.
3. Explain the working of hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell with necessary diagram and cell reactions.
Mention its two advantages and limitations.
4. Explain the difference between galvanic and differential aeration corrosion with an example each.
5. Summarize any five factors that affect overvoltage value of a cell.
6. Differentiate cell from battery.
7. Sketch and explain the construction and working of saturated calomel electrode with necessary cell
reactions.
8. With a neat sketch explain the working of a silver silver chloride electrode.
9. Elucidate the working principle of Weston cadmium cell with suitable cell reactions.
10. Distinguish galvanic and electrolytic cells based on cell reactions.
Apply
1. Assess the six advantages of solid polymer electrolyte fuel cell.
2. Many metals form oxide layer when exposed to atmospheric conditions due to corrosion. Predict
the four types of metal oxide layers formed with two examples each.
3. An iron pipe line buried under soil is used to carry natural gas, suggest any two corrosion control
techniques that can be employed to minimize/control corrosion.
4. Predict the type of corrosion taking place when a piece of iron rod is exposed to moisture and
explain the mechanism of rust formation.
5. Illustrate the construction of 6V lead-acid battery and explain its functioning during discharging
and charging process.
6. Select a suitable secondary storage battery used in mobile phones. Explain its reactions during
charging and discharging process.
7. Find the electrode potential of zinc rod using saturated calomel electrode as reference electrode (E
cell value is 1.10 V).
8. Apply the principle of ion selective electrode to find the pH of HCl solution using glass electrode
with necessary equations.
9. Can we use KCl salt bridge to construct a cell using Ag and Pb half-cell. Give reason.
10. Identify a suitable technique to achieve copper coating on stainless steel object with a neat diagram.
Analyse
1. Can you store zinc sulphate solution in a copper container? Give reason if your answer is yes/no.
2. Predict why copper cannot displace hydrogen from mineral acid solution.
3. Represent diagrammatically an electrochemical cell that produces 1.1 volt as an output. Write the
half-cell reactions responsible for that.
4. Zinc corrodes at a faster rate when coupled with copper than lead. Give reason.
5. Does the water exhaust from hydrogen - oxygen fuel cell is drinkable? Give reasons if Yes/No.
Evaluate
1. Electrode potentials of A and B are E0A/A+ = +0.76 V and E0B/B+ = -0.34 V respectively. Choose
the appropriate anode half-cell and cathode half-cell by giving the cell representation.
2. Glass electrode cannot be used in solutions having pH greater than 9.0. Give reason.
3. As an engineer, which type of metal oxide forming metal you will choose for your design? Reason
out.
4. The standard reduction potentials of metals Ag, Fe, Cu and Zn are +0.80v,-0.44v, +0.34v and -
0.76v respectively. Arrange the metals in the increasing order of their ability to undergo corrosion.
5. Identify any two advantages of microbial fuel cell over lead acid battery.
Create
i) Stainless steel should not be used to build ship hull.
ii) Small anodic area results in intense corrosion.
iii) Metal under water drop undergoes accelerated corrosion.
2. As an engineer, which type of metal oxide forming metal you will choose for your design? Reason
out.
15CH204 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY 3024

Course Objectives
To impart knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and industrial
applications
To understand the principles and applications of electrochemistry, fuels and combustion
To recognize the fundamentals of polymers, nano chemistry and analytical techniques

1. Identify the internal and external treatment methods for the removal of hardness in water for
domestic and industrial applications
2. Utilize the concepts of electrochemistry in real time applications
3. Realise the importance of fuel chemistry in day to day life
4. Differentiate the polymers used in day to day life based on its source, properties and applications
5. Familiarize with the synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials
UNIT I 10 Hours
WATER PURIFICATION TECHNOLOGY: SOFTENING AND DESALINATION
Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree of hardness and
estimation (EDTA method). Use of water for industrial purposes: Boiler feed water - scale - sludge - priming
and foaming - caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water: External conditioning - ion exchange
methods - Internal conditioning - trisodium, dihydrogen, trihydrogen phosphate and sodium hexameta
phosphate - carbonate - colloidal methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis - electrodialysis. Domestic water
treatment - Disinfection of water - break point chlorination
UNIT II 10 Hours
ELECTROCHEMISTRY
Introduction - EMF - Single electrode potential - Calomel electrode - Glass electrode - pH measurement
using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells - Cell reactions - Reversible
cells and irreversible cells. Batteries - characteristics of battery - types of batteries, construction, working
and applications: Primary (alkaline) and secondary (lead-acid and nickel-cadmium) - Modern batteries (zinc
air battery and lithium batteries) - precautions for battery maintenance. Fuel cell: Hydrogen - Oxygen fuel
cell.Electroplating of copper and electroless plating of nickel
UNIT III 8 Hours

FUELS AND COMBUSTION
Fuel: Introduction - classification of fuels - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values - analysis of
coal (proximate and ultimate) - carbonization - manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking
- octane number - cetane number - natural gas - Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) - Liquefied Petroleum
Gases (LPG) - producer gas - water gas. Combustion of fuels: introduction - theoretical calculation of
calorific value - calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and air ratio - ignition temperature
UNIT IV 9 Hours
POLYMER AND COMPOSITES
Monomers - functionality - degree of polymerizations - classification of polymers based on source and
applications; porosity - tortuosity - molecular weight determination by Ostwald method - polymerization
methods: addition, condensation and copolymerization - mechanism of free radical polymerization -
thermosetting and thermoplastics. Polymer blends - composites, significance, blending - miscible and
immiscible blends, phase morphology, fibre reinforced plastics, long and short fibre reinforced composites
UNIT V 8 Hours
NANOMATERIALS
Types of Nanomaterials - Nano particles - nanoclusters - nano rod - nanowire - nano tube. Synthesis: Top
down process: laser ablation - electrodeposition - chemical vapor deposition. Bottom up process:
Precipitation - thermolysis - hydrothermal - solvothermal process. Carbon nanotubes: Types - production -
properties - applications. Working principle and applications - Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) -
Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - UV-Visible spectrophotometer
FOR FURTHER READING

Application of nanomaterials in medicine, environment, energy, information and communication sectors
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Water quality of BIT campus - River - Bore well water with respect to hardness, TDS and pH
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Determination of strength of a commercial mineral acid by conductometric titration
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Conductometric titration of mixture of acids
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Determination of the strength of iron in the given sample by potentiometric method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol by Ostwald viscometry method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Reference(s)
New Delhi, 2013.
3. P.H. Rieger, Electrochemistry, Springer, Netherland, Second Edition (Reprint) 2012.
4. Fred W. Billmeyer JR, Textbook of polymer science, John Wiley & sons, Third edition, 2008.
5. G. Cao, Ying Wang, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications,
World Scientific, New Jersey, 2011.
6. S. Sarkar, Fuels and combustion, 3rd edition, Orient Longman Ltd. New Delhi, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 1 2 4 3 1 3 1 3 1 21
2 2 1 2 2 5 2 1 1 3 1 1 21
3 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 19
4 1 1 1 3 4 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 20
5 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 19
Total 100
Remember
1. Define the term break point chlorination.
2. Name a method to prevent the scale formation in the industrial boilers.
3. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.
4. List any two advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell.
5. Define functionality of a monomer.
6. Name any two thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers.
7. List any two applications of SEM.
8. Recall any two application of X-Ray diffractometer.
9. List three factors which affects the standard electrode potential of cell.
Understand
1. Illustrate any three applications of electrochemical series.
2. Summarize the four applications of calorimeter.
3. Explain the components of TEM with a neat sketch.
4. Compare bottom up approach with top down approach of nanoparticle synthesis.
5. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.
6. Differentiate between thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics
7. Why copper cannot displace hydrogen from mineral acid solution?
8. Identify two significances of RO method in water treatment.
9. Indicate any two advantages of water gas over producer gas.
10. Compare nanocluster with nanocrystal.

11. Identify the reasons for change of properties of materials at nanoscale.
Apply
1. A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg(HCO3)2 per litre. Calculate the
total hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence.
2. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO4. Calculate hardness in
ppm.
3. Find out the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4
solution at 25C? E Zn/Zn 2+ = 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK-1Mol-1, F= 96500 Coulombs.
4. Calculate the reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu=0.5M at 25C. E Cu 2+/ Cu= +0.337V.
5. Find out the weight and volume of air required for the complete combustion of 1 kg of coke.
6. A sample of coal containing 60% C, 6% H, 33% O, 0.5 % S, 0.2% N and 0.3% of ash. Find the
gross and net calorific value of coal.
7. Calculate the degree of polymerization of polypropylene having molecular weight of 25200.
8. Apply the principle of ion selective electrode to determine the pH of HCl solution using glass
electrode with equations.
Analyse
1. Calgon conditioning is advantageous over phosphate conditioning- reason out.
2. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is a soft water- Jusify.
3. Hydrogen electrode is not generally used for pH measurements Why?
4. Zinc reacts with dil.H2SO4 to give hydrogen but silver doesnt liberate hydrogen. Give reasons.
5. Good fuel should have low ash content- Give reasons.
6. Sugar is an example of non-electrolyte - Reason out.
Evaluate
1. Hydrogen fuel is an ideal fuel for the future among all other fuels- Justify.
2. Choose a best method for water purification and explain their components.
15CH205 WATER TECHNOLOGY AND GREEN

3024
CHEMISTRY
Course Objectives
To imparting the knowledge on the principles of water technology and green chemistry
To understanding the principles and applications of green technology in water treatments
To infer the engineering applications of green chemistry in dyes, corrosion engineering and
nanotechnology

1. Understand the importance of green chemistry with its emergence and development
2. Realize the designing of safer methodologies for green technology to meet the objectives of green
engineering
3. Identify the type of corrosion and its mechanism which will help to develop the corrosion control
methods
4. Apply suitable technique to extract natural dye from its source
5. Familiarize with the synthesis and characterization techniques of nanomaterials
UNIT I 9 Hours
WATER TREATMENT
Water quality parameters - Hardness of water - Disadvantages of hard water - Degree of hardness and its
estimation (EDTA method) - Boiler feed water - Boiler troubles: Priming, foaming and caustic
embrittlement - Softening of hard water: Internal conditioning: Sodium hexameta phosphate - Phosphate
methods; External conditioning: Ion exchange method - Desalination: Reverse osmosis - Electrodialysis.
Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - Break point chlorination.
UNIT II 8 Hours
WASTE WATER ANALYSIS
Basic principles and concept of green chemistry - Need of green chemistry in day-to-day life - Scientific
areas for practical applications of green chemistry - Industrial effluents - Waste water analysis: Concept of
chemical oxygen demand (COD) and biological oxygen demand (BOD) - Removal of trace pollutants in
waste water: Membrane Bioreactor (MBR) technology - Wet oxidation method.
UNIT III 10 Hours

CHEMISTRY OF CORROSION
Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion - chemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedworth rule - oxygen
absorption - hydrogen evolution - galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - differential
aeration corrosion (pitting, pipeline, water line and wire fence corrosion) - factors influencing corrosion.
Methods of corrosion control: choice of metals and alloys - proper designing - cathodic protection
(Sacrificial anode method, impressed current method) - modifying the environment. Protective coatings:
Concept of electroplating: electroplating (gold and copper) - electroless plating (nickel and copper).
UNIT IV 9 Hours
NATURAL DYES
Introduction - definition - classification of natural dyes - concept of chromophores and auxochromes -
Extraction process of colour component from natural dyes: Aqueous extraction, non-aqueous extraction -
Purification of natural dyes: Chromatography techniques - Types - Column chromatography - thin layer
chromatography - Qualitative analysis: UV-Visible spectroscopic study - Mordant: Metallic and non-
metallic mordant - advantages and disadvantages of natural dyes.
UNIT V 9 Hours
NANOMATERIALS
Types of Nanomaterials - Nano particles - nanoclusters - nano rod - nanowire - nano tube. Synthesis: Top
down process: laser ablation - electrodeposition - chemical vapor deposition. Bottom up process:
Precipitation - thermolysis - hydrothermal - solvothermal process. Carbon nanotubes: Types - production -
properties - applications. Working principle and applications: Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) -
Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) - UV-Visible spectrophotometer. Synthesis of Au and Ag
nanoparticles using plant extract - Advantages.
FOR FURTHER READING

Protection of metals in concrete against corrosion Microwave technology on green chemistry
2 Hours
EXPERIMENT 1
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 2
Water quality- river/bore well water with respect to hardness and TDS
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 3
Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid in a given solution using pH meter
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 4
Estimation of strength of iron by potentiometric method using calomel electrode
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 5
Extraction of a natural dye by aqueous extraction method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 6
Measurement of rate of corrosion of mild steel in aerated neutral/acidic/alkaline solution by weight loss
measurements/Tafel polarization method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 7
Determination of dye concentration in a given sample by using UV-Visible spectroscopic method
4 Hours
EXPERIMENT 8
Reference(s)
New Delhi, 2013.
2. V K Ahluwalia, Green Chemistry - Environmentally Benign Reactions, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2012.
3. Giusy Lofrano, Green Technologies for Wastewater Treatment - Energy Recovery and Emerging
Compounds Removal, Springer Dordrecht Heidelberg, New York, London, 2012.
4. Ashis Kumar Samanta and Adwaita Konar, Natural Dyes - Dyeing of Textiles with Natural Dyes,
Dr.Emriye Akcakoca Kumbasar (Ed.), InTech Publisher, New Delhi, 2011.
5. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
6. David Pozo perez, Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials, InTech Publishers, NewDelhi, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 20
2 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 17
3 1 2 1 4 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 23
4 1 2 6 6 3 2 20
5 3 2 2 3 6 2 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. List out any four water quality parameters.
2. Name the salts responsible for temporary hardness of water.
3. Recall any two practical applications of green chemistry.
4. Define wet oxidation in waste water treatment.
5. State Pilling Bed-worths rule.
6. Recall any two examples for differential aeration corrosion.
7. Name any two natural dyes.
8. Recall the role of auxochromes in dyes.
9. Name the four methods of nanomaterial synthesis.
10. Name any two plant extracts used in silver nanoparticles synthesis.
Understand
1. Hardness of water is always expressed in terms of CaCO3 equivalent. Reason out.
2. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft water - Justify.
3. Represent the need of green chemistry in waste water treatment.
4. Indicate the importance of MBR technology in waste water treatment.
5. Express the mechanism of wet corrosion.
6. Bolt and nut made from same metal is preferred in practice. Reason out.
7. Classify the types of natural dyes based on their chemical structure.
8. Compare the properties of metallic and non-metallic mordents.
9. Infer any two important needs of green chemistry in nanotechnology sector.
10. Identify the physicochemical and engineering properties of nanomaterials.
Apply
1. A sample of water contains 180 mgs of MgSO4 per litre. Calculate the hardness in terms of CaCO3
equivalents. (Molecular weight of MgSO4 is 120).
2. Calculate the non-carbonate hardness of a sample of water containing the dissolved salts as given
below in mg/l Mg(HCO3)2 = 7.3; Ca(HCO3)2 = 40.5 and NaCl =50.
3. Select the scientific areas for the practical applications of green chemistry.
4. Predict the significance of sacrificial anode in the prevention of corrosion.
5. Outline the principle of electro-deposition to achieve copper coating on stainless steel object with
a neat diagram.
6. Select a suitable technique used for the purification of natural dye.
7. Assess the role of Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) in nano-materials characterization.
Analyse
1. Distinguish between scale and sludge.
2. Identify the four reasons for boiler troubles.
3. Differentiate between BOD and COD.
4. The rate of corrosion increases with increase in temperature. Give reason.
5. Outline the effect of pH of the conducting medium on corrosion.
6. Differentiate chromophores & auxochromes in dyes.
Evaluate
1. Substantiate the statement that nature of the environment affects corrosion..
2. Choose and explain any two best methods to synthesis nanoparticles.
Create
1. Plan and execute a method to get pure water from waste water using available low coast material
in your area.
2. Relate the characteristic properties of natural with synthetic dyes.
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
3003
15EI001 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM
DESIGN
Course Objectives
To study the Architecture of 8051 and PIC Microcontroller
To teach about the I/O ports and role of RTOS on microcontroller
To impart knowledge on PIC Microcontroller and its interfacing with various pheripherals
To give case study experiences for microcontroller based applications

1. Design programs using 8051 microcontroller for various real time issues
2. Differentiate the conceptual knowledge between 8051 and PIC microcontrllers
3. Interface PIC microcontroller with various peripheral devices
4. Analyze and propose suitable solutions to complex problems
UNIT I 9 Hours
8051 ARCHITECTURE
Architecture - memory organization - addressing modes - instruction set - Timers - Interrupts - I/O ports,
Interfacing I/O Devices - Serial Communication.
UNIT II 9 Hours
8051 PROGRAMMING
Assembly language programming - Arithmetic Instructions - Logical Instructions - Single bit Instructions
- Timer Counter Programming - Serial Communication Programming - Interrupt Programming - RTOS for
8051 - RTOSLite - FullRTOS - Task creation and run - LCD digital clock/thermometer using FullRTOS
9 Hours
UNIT III
PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Architecture - memory organization - addressing modes - instruction set - PIC progrmming in Assembly &
C - I/O Port, Data Conversion, RAM& ROM Allocation, Timer Programming , MP -LAB.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
PERIPHERAL OF PIC MICROCONTROLLER
Timers - Interrupts, I/O ports - 2C bus - A/D converter -UART - CCP modules - ADC, DAC and Sensor
Interfacing - Flash and EEPROM memories.
UNIT V 9 Hours
SYSTEM DESIGN CASE STUDY
Interfacing LCD Display - Keypad Interfacing - Generation of Gate signals for converters and Inverters -
Motor Control - Controlling DC/AC appliances - Measurement of frequency - Stand alone Data Acquisition
System.
FOR FURTHER READING

Speed Control of DC motor using PIC microcontroller - Interfacing accelerometer with PIC microcontroller
- Interfacing of rotatory encoder with ATMEGA2560
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Micro controllers, Prentice Hall of India book Co, New Delhi,
2012.
2. Rajkamal, Microcontrollers - Architecture, Programming, Interfacing & System Design,
2nd,Pearson, 2012.
3. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey ,PIC Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18, Pearson Education 2012.
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice G. Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems, Prentice Hall, 2005.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 12 2 2 24
2 2 2 2 2 6 2 16
3 2 6 6 4 2 2 2 24
4 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 20
5 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 16
Total 100
Remember
1. List three main criteria to choose the microcontroller.
2. Define Flip-flop
3. Define timers and counters.
4. Define stack pointer
5. State the job of TMOD register
6. List three applications of RTOS
7. Define watchdog timer
8. Write down two importance of stack register.
9. Define PCLATH
10. List any four instruction set of PIC microcontroller.
Understand
1. Illustrate the architecture of 8051 microcontroller with neat sketch.
2. Summarize the different types of bus available in 8051
3. Explain the memory organisation 8051 microcontroller.
4. Explain and explain the terms a. SFR b. PSW c. PC .
5. Indicate the various addressing modes of 8051 microcontroller with suitable examples each.
6. Illustrate the block diagram of UART with neat sketch.
7. Represent the different capture modes available in the capture module of PIC.
8. Explain in detail how analog interfacing with PIC can be accomplished using the digital i/o of
functions of PIC.
9. Identify the four step sequence of Stepper motor if we start with 0110.
10. Explain the case study for controlling of AC and DC appliances using microcontroller.
Apply
1. Construct a program to rotate the stepper motor clockwise / anticlockwise continuously with full
step sequence.
2. Conclude on memory organization of a PIC microcontroller.
3. Design the PIC Timer Interrupts at the intervals:0.0, 1ms, 1.5 ms, 3.0 ms and this shall be repeated
as long as MC is switched ON.
4. Demonstrate the working of RS-232 Serial communication.
5. Select a method to calculate duty ratio in PWM.
6. Develop interrupt facilities and programming techniques for RTOS.
7. Predict the importance of RTOS and its application with necessary diagrams?
Analyse
1. Differentiate between 8051 and PIC?
2. Differentiate microprocessor and microcontroller?
3. Identify a method to test a LCD whether it is ready or not to receive a command or data?
4. With necessary diagram, explain the case study of generation of gating signals for a single phase
half controlled rectifier used to control speed of a DC Motor using any one controller.
5. Differentiate parallel and serial communication.
6. Justify why the crystal oscillator frequency in 8051 is chosen as11.0592Mhz?
Evaluate
1. With necessary diagram, explain the case study of generation of gating signals for a single phase
half controlled rectifier used to control speed of a DC Motor using any one controller.
2. Determine the calculation of baud rate for serial data transfer in mode 1
Create
1. Calculate the resolution of 10bit ADC having Max. having analog value +10 volt.
2. In key board interface, if RB7-RB4 =0111 is the data read from the columns, Which column does
the pressed key belongs to.
15EI002 INSTRUMENTATION IN PETROCHEMICAL

3003
INDUSTRIES
Course Objectives
To understand the process involved in petroleum refineries
To impact adequate knowledge on the distillation column and its control process
To understand the controlling concepts of major unit of refineries like distillation column, reactors
,driers, heat exchangers, etc.,
To be acquainted with the safety measures in petroleum industries

1. Understand the scenario of the production and consumption of fossil fuels in India.
2. Apply the various conversion process through measuring instruments.
3. Understand the importance of controlling the various parameters and enhance the knowledge on
usage of safety instrumentation to avoid the accidents in industries.
UNIT I 7 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Petroleum exploration, production and refining - refining capacity in India - consumption of petroleum
products in India - constituents of crude oil.
UNIT II 10 Hours
DISTILLATION PROCESS CONTROL
Introduction to P &I diagram - atmospheric distillation of crude oil with P&I diagram - Separation of crude
oil - vacuum distillation process - thermal conversion process - control of distillation column - temperature
control - process control - feed control - reflux control - reboiler control
UNIT III 9 Hours

REACTORS PROCESS CONTROL
Control of chemical reactors: temperature control, pressure control - Dryers: control of dryers - batch dryers
- atmospheric and vacuum dryers - continuous dryers
UNIT IV 10 Hours
HEAT EXCHANGE SYSTEM
Control of heat exchangers and evaporators - variables and degrees of freedom - liquid to liquid heat
exchangers - steam heaters - condensers - reboiler and vaporizers - cascade control - feed forward control -
evaporators: types of evaporators
UNIT V 9 Hours
SAFETY INSTRUMENTATION
Hazardous and non-hazardous area - classification of zone 0, zone 1 & zone 2 - pressurization techniques -
zener barrier
FOR FURTHER READING

Stability of distillation column operation, Vacuum dryers, Case Study: Distillation process in Reliance
Industries Limited & Bharat Petroleum Corporation ltd. (BPCL).
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Ram Prasad, Petroleum Refining Technology, Khanna Publishers Ltd, New Delhi, 2000
2. B.G. Liptak, Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, New York,1973
3. B.G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Handbook Volume II, 2003
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 14 20
2 2 2 2 14 20
3 2 2 2 12 2 20
4 2 2 2 14 20
5 2 4 12 2 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Petrochemical-cum-refinery complex.
2. Define flooding.
3. Define degrees of freedom.
4. Define intrinsic safety.
5. List eight components that are used in drilling and explain its operation.
6. Define oil immersion protection method.
7. Define oil immersion protection method.
8. List the three types of hazardous area location.
9. Recall the importance of dryers in petrochemical industry.
10. State the use of Derrick.
Understand
1. List out the important commercial products obtained from petroleum.
2. Define coking.
3. Justify the process of oil and gas formation.
4. Indicate the need for reactors in chemical industry.
5. Sketch the diagram of horizontal tube evaporator.
6. Compare intrinsic and extrinsic safety method.
7. Classify the petroleum recovery techniques and explain each.
8. Compare the thermal cracking, visbreaking and coking process.
9. Classify the four types of evaporator and explain the working principle of falling film evaporator
and short tube evaporator.
10. Explain in detail about the hazardous and nonhazardous areas.
Apply
1. Show the two types of chemical reactors used in industry.
2. Find the advanced heat-transfer controls used in heat exchanger.
3. Implement the zener barrier and pressurization hazard method in safety zone.
4. Design an advanced heat-transfer control used in heat exchanger.
5. Design the two different types of chemical reactors used in industry.
6. Find the reason for using safety valve in a stationary boilers.
7. Predict the reason for using water cooled refrigerator for counter flow measurement.
8. Implement the recovery method that injects stream or other gases and liquids to simulate oil flow.
9. Design a P&I diagram for temperature control.
10. Design a P&I diagram for vaccum distillation column.
Analyse
1. Differentiate light and middle distillate.
2. Differentiate on shore and off shore.
3. Justify the two variables used in thermal cracking process.
4. Compare adiabatic and non-adiabatic dryers.
5. Compare zone 1, zone 2 and zone 3 hazardous areas.
6. Differentiate on shore and off shore derrick used for petroleum exploration.
7. Justify the temperature control of reactors used in Oil industry.
8. Differentiate light and heavy distillate.
9. Compare adiabatic and non-adiabatic dryers.
10. Compare zone 0, zone 1& zone 2 hazardous areas in detail.
Create
1. Create a statistical report on petroleum consumption in India.
2. Create a list of oil refineries in India and create a data sheet about capacity of oil production
15EI003 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE

CONTROL
3003
Course Objectives
To identify and model a linear and nonlinear system
To impart knowledge on Parametric estimation and Recursive identification methods
To understand the concept of Adaptive control schemes, Robustness and applications of adaptive
control method.

1. Interpret the wide applicability of the principles covered in identifying a model of the system.
2. Analyse the various parameter estimation and the development and properties of the various
methods.
3. Identify, formulate, and analyze the implementation of adaptive controllers.
UNIT I 9 Hours
MODELS FOR IDENTIFICATION
Models- System Identification procedure-Models of LTI systems: Linear Models -Transfer Function
model- State space Models- Model sets, Structures and Identifiability-Models for Time-varying and Non-
linear systems: Models with Non-linearities - Non-linear state-space models-Black box models, Fuzzy
models.
UNIT II 11 Hours
PARAMETER ESTIMATION METHODS
Linear regression - Least square estimation - prediction error methods - optimal prediction - Parameter
Estimation - Maximum Likelihood methods - Instrumental variable methods: Description of instrumental
variable methods - Input signal design for identification.
9 Hours
UNIT III
RECURSIVE IDENTIFICATION METHODS
Recursive least square method - Recursive instrumental variable methods - Recursive prediction error
methods - Recursive pseudolinear regression - Identification of systems operating in closed loop:
Identifiability considerations - direct identification - indirect identification.
8 Hours
UNIT IV
ADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES
Introduction - Types of adaptive control - Gain scheduling controller - Model reference adaptive control
schemes - Self tuning regulator - Direct Self tuning regulator - Indirect Self tuning regulator.
UNIT V 8 Hours
ISSUES IN ADAPTIVE CONTROL AND APPLICATION
Controller Implementation - Estimator Implementation - Interaction of Estimator and control - Operational
Issues -Robustness - Introduction, methods for improving robustness - Industrial Adaptive Controller -
Application of adaptive control - ship steering.
FOR FURTHER READING

Data and Model Objects in System Identification Toolbox - Two Tank System modeling using SISO
Nonlinear ARX and Hammerstein-Wiener Models - Motorized Camera using MIMO Nonlinear ARX and
Hammerstein - Wiener Models - Vehicle Dynamics System.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Karel J. Keesman, System Identification an Introduction, Springer, 2013.
2. Tao Liu, FurongGao, Industrial Process Identification and control design, Step-test and relay-
experiment-based methods, Springer- Verilog London Ltd, 2012.
3. K.J. Astrom and B. J. Wittenmark, Adaptive Control, Second Edition, Pearson Education Inc.,
2012.
4. LennartLjung, System Identification: Theory for the User, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2010.
5. T. Soderstorm and PetreStoica, System Identification, Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd., 2010.
6. LennartLjung, System Identification: Theory for the User, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2008.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 6 2 4 4 20
2 2 2 6 6 4 20
3 2 4 4 6 4 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 6 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define model of a system.
2. What is model validation?
3. List the properties of identifiability.

4. Name some models which have nonlinearities.
5. Define black box models.
6. List two parametric estimation methods.
7. Define pseudo linear regression.
8. State MIT rule.
9. Define adaptive control technique.
10. Define Self-Tuning Control (STC).
Understand
1. Explain the procedure involved in the system identification process with a neat flow diagram
2. Identify the advantages of state space method.
3. Infer the problems with time invariant systems.
4. Summarize the various frequency domain methods available for non-parametric estimation.
5. Discuss instrumental variable method and compare it with Least square method.
6. Explain the pseudolinear regression vector for equation error type model structure with the help
of one step ahead prediction.
7. Explain the Model Reference Adaptive Control (MRAC) approach and the MIT Rule in deriving a
suitable control law.
8. Explain Recursive Least Square (RLS) Technique and the purpose of using this RLS technique in
an estimation problem.
9. Represent diagrammatically a nonlinear system.
10. Identify the properties of identifiability.
Apply
1. Execute the properties of identifiability of a model structure.
2. Implement the nonlinear black box model for a nonlinear system and explain its basic features of
functions expansions.
3. Find the control law for the following control problem: Consider the transfer function of a linear
system kG(s), where G(s) is known and k is an unknown parameter. Find a feedforward controller
that gives a system with the transfer function Gm(s) = k0G(s), where k0 is a given constant. Use
the controller structure u = uc, where u is the control signal and uc the command signal.
4. Execute an expression for parameter estimation by least square method.
5. Use the transient response analysis to estimate the system model.
6. Show the properties of least square method.
7. Predict the weakness of impulse response analysis.
8. Assess the frame work for parameter estimation using maximum likelihood method.
9. Demonstrate the usefulness of transient response analysis in system estimation.
10. Use MIT rule to design an MRAS for a first order system and draw the block diagram of the system.
Analyse
1. Differentiate linear regression and regression vector.
2. Consider a linear process with the transfer function kG(s), where G(s) is known and k is an unknown
parameter. Find a feedforward controller that gives a system with the transfer function Gm(s) =
k0G(s), where k0 is a given constant. Use the controller structure u = uc, where u is the control
signal and uc the command signal. Use the MIT rule to update the parameter q, and draw a block
diagram of the resulting adaptive system.
3. Consider the FIR model
y(t) = b0u(t) + b1u(t 1) + e(t) where, t = 1, 2, ...
Where {e(t)} is a sequence of independent normal random variables with zero mean and standard
deviation . Determine the regressor vector and parameter vector of the linear regression model.
4. Describe the procedure for development of the nonlinear state space model for a system.
5. Differentiate direct Identification and Indirect Identification .
6. Compare Classical feedback system with adaptive system.
7. Compare direct and indirect adaptive methods.
8. Compare Classical feedback system with adaptive system.
9. Compare linear regression and regression vector.
10. Identify the various frequency domain methods available for non-parametric estimation.
Create
1. Design a temperature controller for a chemical reactor using NOVATUNE,a general purpose
adaptive controller.
2. Derive an expression for linear model and set of linear models.
3. Obtain an expression for statespace models of time invariant systems.
4. Derive an expression for nonlinear black box model and explain its basic features of function
expansions.
15EI004 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL

3003
Course Objectives
To analyze the enhanced control strategies and enhancements in PID controllers
To understand the concept of computing the future output of a plant based on modelling and
proposed control action
To interpret about multi-loop, multivariable, batch control and plantwide control schemes
To analyze the steps involves in inferential control and process monitoring

1. Analyze the various advanced control schemes
2. Investigate the need for multi-loop and multivariable control systems
3. Identify the role of batch control and plant wide control
4. Interpret the inferential control and process monitoring schemes
UNIT I 8 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Brief review of dynamic behavior of processes, single-loop feedback control systems, stability analysis and
design of feedback control systems - Enhanced single loop control strategies - selective control/override
systems, nonlinear control systems, adaptive control systems - PID enhancements: anti-reset windup, auto-
tuning, gain scheduling and self tuning.
UNIT II 10 Hours
MODEL BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS
Introduction - Static and Dynamic control law-state - IMC Structure - IMC design procedure - IMC based
PID control design - first order and second order process - Model Predictive Control - Optimization problem
- Dynamic Matrix Control - Implementation of MPC - case study: distillation column control.
UNIT III 10 Hours

MULTI-LOOP AND MULTIVARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Process interaction and control loop interaction, pairing of controlled and manipulated variables - selection
of manipulated variables and controlled variables - tuning of multi-loop PID control systems - decoupling
and multivariable control strategies - strategy for reducing control loop interaction - Case study: control of
mixing tank using multivariable control concept.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
BATCH CONTROL AND PLANT WIDE CONTROL
Batch control systems: control during the batch - run-to-run control - batch scheduling and hierarchy. Plant
wide control issues - steady state and dynamic effects of recycle - control and optimization hierarchy - plant
wide control examples: MPN and HDA process - interaction of plant design and control system design.
Case study: HDA process (Toluene hydrodealkylation process)
UNIT V 8 Hours
INFERENTIAL CONTROL AND PROCESS MONITORING
Introduction - Design Criteria - Implementation Issues - Case Study: Fired Heater, Traditional Monitoring
Techniques - Quality control charts - Normal Distribution - Control Chart - EWMA Control Chart.
FOR FURTHER READING

Control of Chemical Reactors - Stirred tank and tubular reactor
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Process Dynamics and Control, John
Wiley &sons, 2011
2. Peter Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011
3. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008
4. E. F. Camacho, C. Bordons, Eduardo F. Camacho,Model Predictive Control in the Process Industry,
Springer, 2011
5. Thomas E. Marlin, Marlin Thomas, Process Control: Designing Processes And Control Systems
for Dynamic Performance, McGraw Hill Publication, 2000
6. Ray Ogunnaike, Babatunde A. Ogunnaike, W. Harmon Ray, Process Dynamics, Modeling, And
Control, Oxford University Press, 1997
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 6 4 6 20
2 4 6 2 4 4 20
3 2 4 4 4 6 20
4 4 6 4 6 20
5 4 4 6 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the functions of selective control.
2. Define feedback control.
3. List out three conditions for stability of feedback control systems.
4. Recognise the cause for anti-reset windup
5. List out the four advantages of MPC.
6. State the various operating levels of batch control system.
7. State the stability theorem related to multi-loop control system.
8. Define linear regression
9. List the parameters to be specified in order to design an MPC system.
10. List the difficulties in controlling a MIMO system.
Understand
1. Interpret the effects when inputs are coupled to the outputs with negative relative gains.
2. Illustrate the effects of dead time in a process. How to overcome this?
3. Summarize the effects of process interaction and loop interaction.
4. Interrelate function between linear regression and least square methods.
5. Interpret the design of digital controller for a given process
6. Explain the objective(s) of model based predictive control.
7. Summarize the benefits of decoupling control scheme.
8. Indicate the steps to identify the subsets of MVs and CVs of a multi-loop system.
9. Indicate the significance of eigen values and eigen vectors.
10. Interpret how to incorporate the safety in plant and control system design.
Apply
1. Compute the dynamic response of a first order lag system with time constant p =0.5 and static
gain Kp =1 to (a)a unit impulse input change,(b)a unit step change a sinusoidal input change of
sin0.5t. Examine the behavior of the output after long time (t infinity) for each of the input
changes above.
2. Consider a first order system with p = 30 sec and Kp =1. Initially, the system is at steady state.
Then the input changes is given linearly with time: m(t)=t. Compute an expression that shows how
the output changes with respect to time for the given input.
3. Predict the interaction among the loops of a distillation column.
4. Show whether given system is stable. Sampled data control systems represented by the following
characteristic equation using Jurys stability test 6Z^2-2Z+1=0
5. Demonstrate plantwide control with a suitable sketch.
6. Demonstrate batch control proceess with suitable example.
7. Show whether second order system is equivalent to two first order systems in series.
8. Show whether given system is stable using Jurys stability test Z^2-7Z+9=0
9. Compute continuous time transfer function and Convert the continuous time model into discrete
time model (Assume N=1, T=0.4).
10. A 2x2 process has the steady state gain matrix K=[ 1 K12]. Calculate determinant, RGA, eigen
values and singular values of K. Use K12 = 0 as the base case; then recalculate the matrix properties
for a small change, K12 = 0.1sec
Analyse
1. Judge whether transfer function be derived for a nonlinear system.
2. Consider the level control system implemented with a computer whose inputs and outputs are
calibrated in terms of full range (100%). The tank is 1 m in diameter and the valve on the exit line
act as a linear resistance with R= 6.37min/m2 . The level transmitter has a span of 0.5 m and an
output range of 0 to 100%. The flow characteristic of the equal percentage control valve is related
to the fraction of lift l by the relation f = 1 (30)l-1. The air-to-open valve receives a 3 to 15 psi
signal from an I/P converter, which in turn, receives a 0 to 100% signal from the computer
implemented proportional controller. When the control valve is fully open ( l =1), the flow rate
through the valve is 0.2 m3 /min. At the nominal operating condition, the control valve is half open
( l =0.5). Determine the closed-loop response to a unit step change in the set point for three values
of the controller gain: Kc=1, 2 and 5.
3. Flow control loops are usually fast compared to other loops, and so they can be considered to be at
steady state (essentially). In this case, Integral control is recommended. Judge whether for Gd=
Gp=Kp, the integral control provides satisfactory control for both set point change and disturbance.
4. Why do we claim that there are a large number of control configurations for a MIMO process?
Determine the number of alternative control loop configuration for a process with N controlled
variables and M manipulations, where M>N.
5. Consider a process that consists of a liquid chemical tank with two level indicators, a heater, inlet
pump, outlet pump and two valves. Assume that we want to perform the following sequence of
operations: a) Start the sequence by pressing a button S. b) Fill the tank with a liquid by opening
valve V1 and turning ON the pump P1 until the upper level L1 is reached. c) Heat the liquid until
the temperature is greater than TH. The heating can start as soon as the liquid level above the lower
limits L0. d) Empty the liquid by opening valve V2 and turning ON pump P2 until the lower level
L0 is reached. e) Close the valves and go to step (a) and wait for a new sequence to start. Determine
information flow diagram, sequence function chart and ladder diagram for above sequence process.
6. Justify the need for parameter estimation in a process control.
7. Differentiate between linear regression and least square methods
8. Outline the effects when inputs are coupled to the outputs with negative relative gains
9. Structure a flowchart for performing stability analysis of a non-linear process model.
Evaluate
1. Judge whether transfer function be derived for a nonlinear system
Create
1. Derive the expression for Relative Gain Array.
2. Relate the controlled variable and the manipulated variable in a multi-loop control scheme
15EI005 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION 3003
Course Objectives
To gain knowledge on different methods of power generation
To provide clear view of the various measurements involved in power generation plants
To understand about the Piping and Instrumentation (P&I) diagram

1. Explain the basics of power generation and measurements used in a power plant
2. Analyze various control schemes used in boilers
3. Investigate turbine control process
UNIT I 9 Hours
OVERVIEW OF POWER GENERATION
Survey of methods of power generation - hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power - importance of
instrumentation in power generation - thermal power plant - building blocks - combined cycle system -
combined heat and power system - sub critical and supercritical boilers-details of boiler processes P&I
diagram of boiler - cogeneration.
UNIT II 9 Hours
MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS
Electrical measurements - current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor etc.- non electrical parameters
-Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow - drum level measurement - steam
pressure and temperature measurement - turbine speed and vibration measurement - flue gas analyzer - fuel
composition analyzer- smoke density measurement -dust monitor.
UNIT III 9 Hours

BOILER CONTROL I
Combustion of fuel and excess air- firing rate demand - steam temperature control - control of deaerator -
drum level control - single, two and three element control - furnace draft control - implosion - flue gas dew
point control -trimming of combustion air - soot blowing.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
BOILER CONTROL II
Burners for liquid and solid fuels - burner management - furnace safety interlocks - coal pulverizer control
- combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers - air/fuel ratio control - fluidized bed boiler -
cyclone furnace.
UNIT V 9 Hours
CONTROL OF TURBINE
Types of steam turbines - governing system - speed and load control- transient speed rise -free governor
mode operation - automatic load frequency control - turbine oil system - oil pressure drop relay - oil cooling
system - turbine run up system - Case study.
FOR FURTHER READING

Application:Tidal power plant - Geo-thermal power generation - Solar Power Satellite - Recent trends in
thermal power plant.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Swapan Basu and Ajay Kumar, Power Plant Instrumentation and Control,Elsevier,2015
2. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., Power Plant Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
3. Jain R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements,Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013
4. Liptak B.G., Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, 2013

5. Jain R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements,Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 3 1 4 2 4 1 1 2 20
2 2 3 2 4 2 6 1 20
3 2 1 4 6 2 1 3 1 20
4 1 3 2 7 1 2 2 18
5 3 2 2 2 1 2 6 2 2 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define cogeneration
2. List out the advantages of hydro power plant
3. List out the advantages of thermal power plant
4. Name the various method of power generation
5. What is meant by pulversing of coal?
6. Draw the block diagram of thermal power plant.
7. State Chain reactions
8. Define fission process
9. Recall the types of boilers
10. Define piping and instrumentation diagram.
11. List the types of Radiation detector
12. List the different types of level sensing device
13. Define turbine
14. Define electrical precipitators
15. List the types of pre-heating methods.
16. List out the parameter to be measured in deaerator control
17. Define vibration displacement
Understand
1. Identify the purpose of the reservoir?
2. Represent the pressure transmitting line using P&I diagram
3. Identify the reason why float type level measurement is not suitable for boiler drum level
measurement?
4. Explain the operation of ionization smoke detectors.
5. Elucidate the essential of vibration measurement in turbine control.
6. Identify the requirements of sustain fission process
7. Elucidate the properties of a good moderator
8. Explain the purpose of control rods
9. Explain how to determine the actual speed in a stroboscope?
10. Illustrate the purpose of mechanical type vibration instruments
11. Explain about the need of long retractable soot blowers
12. Indicate where we use the electrical precipitators?
13. Exemplify how the pollution from power plant is reduced
14. Illustrate the purpose of cooling system used in a power plant
15. Classify Solar and Wind Power generation schemes

16. Compare steam turbine and gas turbine
17. Indicate the device used for current and voltage measurement in power plant.
18. Identify the different parameters for failure analysis in power plant
Apply
1. Find a 60MW turbo generator set has an overall efficiency of 25%. The calorific value of a coal
used is 24 MJ/Kg. Calculate the consumption of coal per kWh and also per day if the load factor is
30%
2. A stage of an impulse turbine operates close to the maximum blading efficiency. The blades are
equiangular; the friction effects in blades may be neglected. The mean blade velocity is 200 m/s
and the steam flow rate is 0.75kg/s. Compute the discharge angle at which the steam leaves the
blade and the diagram power
3. Find a nuclear power plant is operated continually for one year producing 500MW. The reactor
contained 75 tonnes of 3% enriched uranium dioxide fuel. Assuming the power plant efficiency to
be 33% calculate the mass of U-235 consumed in kg.
4. Find a condenser for a steam power plant receivers 185 t/h of steam 40 deg Celsius, 92% quality.
cooling water enters 33 deg Celsius and leaves 37 deg Celsius. The condensate leaves at 39 deg
Celsius. The pressure inside the condenser is found to be 0.077 bar. Calculate the cooling water
flow required in m3/s.
5. Demonstrate a P&I diagram for basic neutralizer control
6. Demonstrate a P&I diagram for Distillation Column
7. Demonstrate a P&I diagram for basic column control
8. Demonstrate the piping and instrumentation diagram for automatic rice cooking machine
9. Demonstrate the piping and instrumentation diagram for fresh milk vending machine
10. Demonstrate piping and instrumentation diagram for batch reactor control system
Analyse
1. Differentiate the function of thermal, nuclear and hydro power plant
2. Compare the different types of boilers.
3. Differentiate between steam turbine and gas turbine
4. Compare two element and three element drum level control.
5. Differentiate tidal and geo thermal power plant
6. Differentiate solar and tidal power plant
7. Differentiate flue gas analyzer and fuel composition analyzer
8. Compare current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor with its equation
9. Compare measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow
10. Compare sub critical and supercritical boilers
Create
1. Derive a steam power plant, operating with one regenerative feed water heating is run at the initial
steam conditions of 35.0 bar and 440C with exhaust pressure of 0.040 bar. Steam is bled from the
turbine for feed water heating at a pressure of 1.226 bar. Generate (1) Specific heat consumption
(2) Thermal efficiency of the cycle (3) Economy percentage compared with the cycle of a simple
condensing power plant
2. Generate a piping and instrumentation diagram for thermal power plant
15EI006 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS

3003
Course Objectives
To understand the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning and applications of robots.
To differentiate the robotic sensors, actuators and end-effectors.
To formulate the control algorithms and path planning algorithms for the robots.

1. Explain the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning and applications of robots.
2. Compute the kinematics of a robotic manipulator.
3. Design the control algorithms and path planning algorithms for the robots.
4. Select the suitable sensor, actuator and gripper for the robot.
UNIT I 8 Hours
FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOTICS
Automation and robots - a brief history of robotics - definition and laws of robotics - anatomy of robot -
robot classifications - robot specifications - robot configurations - robot links - robot joints - performance
parameter - applications of robots.
UNIT II 11 Hours
ROBOT KINEMATICS
Robot architecture - pose of a rigid body - coordinate transformation - homogenous coordinates - Denavit
and Hartenborg (DH) parameters - forward position analysis - inverse position analysis - velocity analysis:
The Jacobian matrix, link velocities, singularity - acceleration analysis.
UNIT III 8 Hours

ROBOT POWER SOURCES AND END EFFECTOR
Power Sources: Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives - Determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio.
End Effector: Types of end effector - mechanical grippers - vacuum cups - magnetic grippers - adhesive
grippers - hooks, scoops, miscellaneous devices - tools as end effector - the robot end effector interface -
selection and design of the gripper.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
ROBOTIC SENSORS AND VISION
Sensors in robotics - classification - tactile, proximity and range sensors - sensors based systems;
Introduction to machine vision - the sensing and digitizing function in machine vision - image processing
and analysis - training the vision system - robot programming and languages.
UNIT V 10 Hours
PATH PLANNING, CONTROL OF ROBOTIC MANIPULATORS AND APPLICATIONS
Considerations on trajectory planning - joint interrelated trajectories - cartesian path trajectories - control
of robot - PID control - computed torque technique - Robots in manufacturing and non-manufacturing
application - Robot cell design - selection of a robot.
FOR FURTHER READING

Rail Guided Vehicles (RGV), Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV) - implementation of robots in industries
- various steps - safety considerations for robot operations - Economic Analysis of Robots - Pay back
Method, Equivalent Uniform Annual Cost (EUAC) Method, Rate of Return Method.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Robert J. Schilling, Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis & Control, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Mikell P.Groover, Mitchell Weiss, Roger N.Nagel, Nicholas G. Odrey, Industrial Robotics, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.
3. S K Saha, Introduction to Robotics, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2013.
4. K S Fu,Ralph Gonzalez,C S G Lee, Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision, and Intelligence, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2010.
5. Klafter R.D., Chimielewski T.A., Negin M., Robotic Engineering - An integrated approach,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2012.
6. Bruno Siciliano, Oussama Khatib, Springer Handbook of Robotics, Springer-Verlog Berlin
Heidelberg, 2008.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 4 12 20
2 2 2 4 12 20
3 4 2 2 12 20
4 2 2 4 12 20
5 2 2 2 2 12 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define degrees of freedom in robotic manipulator.
2. Classify the robots.
3. List the programming languages used in robots.
4. List the specifications of robot.
5. List the different internal and external sensors that can be used in designing a robot arm.
6. List the any four tools used as end effectors in robot applications.
7. State the significance of integral gain.
8. List the technical features required for machine loading applications.
9. Define structural length index in workspace of a robot.
10. List the advantages of pneumatic actuator.
Understand
1. Illustrate the robot language structure.
2. Explain the origin and various generations of robots.
3. Explain the control issues in robotic manipulator.
4. Illustrate the in-line robot work cell.
5. Illustrate the hydraulic actuator components.

6. Explain the functions of machine vision techniques used in robotics.
7. Identify the considerations in gripper selection and design based on Engelbergers factors.
8. Compare the PD and PID controller for the joint in robotic arm.
9. Explain the pick and place robot operation in material transfer applications.
10. Illustrate the any two applications of robots in non -manufacturing applications.
11. Classify the non-industrial applications of robotics.
Apply
1. A vector P=3i-2j+5k is first rotated by 90 degree about x-axis, then by 90 degree about z-axis.
Finally, it is translated by -3i+2j-5k.Compute the new position of vector P.
2. Compute the DH parameters for the three revolute (3R) planner arm.
3. Compute inverse kinematics solution for a three link planner arm.
4. Compute the inverse kinematics solution for three link planner arm based on the given data.
The input homogenous matrix, T=[0.25 -0.866 0 4.232; 0.866 0.5 0 1.866; 0 0 1 0;0 0 0 1].
Link lengths: a1=a2= 2 units and a3= 1 unit.
5. A pert weighing 8 kg is to be held by a gripper using friction against two opposing fingers. The
coefficient of friction between the fingers and the part is estimated to be 0.3. The orientation of the
gripper will be such that the weight of the part will be applied in a direction parallel to the contacting
finger surfaces. A fast work cycle is anticipated so that the g factor to be used in force calculations
should be 3. Compute the required gripper force for the given specifications.
6. A motor has a torque constant, Km=10 oz-in./A and a constant voltage of 12 V/Kr/min. The
armature resistance is 2 ohm. If 24 V were applied to the terminals compute the torque at stall (0
r/min).
7. A vacuum cup gripper is used to lift steel plates weighing 100.48 lbs. Each of the two vacuum cups
is 10 inches in diameter. Assuming a safety factor of 2.6, compute the negative pressure required
to lift a steel plate.
8. A stepper motor is used to drive a linear axis of a robot. The motor is connected to a screwed shaft
having a single start thread of pitch 2.5 mm. The resolution desired for the controlled motion is 0.5
mm. Compute: i) Step angles that are required on the motor to obtain the resolution. ii) Pulse rate
required to drive the axis if the velocity is 80 mm/s.
9. Compute the translated vector for the given vector v = 25i + 10j + 20k, perform a translation by a
distance of 8 units in xdirection, 5 units in y direction and 0 units in z direction.
10. Compute the time required for each joint of a three axis RRR manipulator to travel the following
distance using slew motion: Joint 1, 30 degree, Joint 2, 60 degree; and Joint 3, 90 degree. All joints
travel at a rotational velocity of 30 degree/s. neglect the effects of acceleration and deceleration.
Analyse
1. Outline the functions involves the interfacing of the end effector with the robot.
2. Differentiate touch and force sensors.
3. Outline the gripper mechanisms used in mechanical gripper.
4. The weight of a robot = 100 lbs. The angle of incline is 6o. The robot builds up its peak speed of
20 MPH over a distance of 100 feet. Compare the HP of the required motor by two different
methods. Assume g = 32.2 ft/(sec*sec).
Evaluate
1. Determine the rotation matrix for the ZYZ Euler angles.
2. Determine the degrees of freedom for SCARA configuration in spatial domain.
3. Suppose the reference frame M coincides with the fixed frame F. Now, the frame M is rotated by
an angle about the axis Z. Determine the rotation matrix for M with reference to F.
4. If the two links of a two-link planner manipulator have equal lengths, Determine expression for the
homogenous transformation matrix.
5. A DC servomotor used to actuate a robot joint has a torque constant of 25 in.-lb/A, and a constant
voltage of 15 V/Kr/min. The armature resistance = 3.0 ohms. At a particular moment during the
robot cycle, the joint is not moving and a voltage of 30 V is applied to the motor. Determine the
torque of the motor immediately after the voltage is applied.
6. A vacuum cup gripper is used to lift steel plates weighing 60.48 lbs. Each of the two vacuum cups
is 5 inches in diameter. Assuming a safety factor of 1.6, determine the negative pressure required
to lift a steel plate.
Create
1. Derive the resultant forward kinematics equation for the 4-DOF SCARA robot.
2. Derive the resultant forward kinematics equation for the PUMA 560 robot.
15EI007 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES 3003

Course Objectives
To understand the learning algorithm used in different artificial neural network
To analyze the functions of fuzzy relations and fuzzy inference systems
To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve practical problems
To understand the steps involved in genetic algorithm and solve simple optimization problems

1. Understand the concept of artificial neural network and their control applications
2. Apply the concept of fuzzy logic control for simple applications
3. Analyze the steps involved in genetic algorithm implementation
UNIT I 9 Hours
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK
Biological neuron and their artificial models - neuron modeling - learning rules - McCulloch-Pitts Neuron
- Hebb network - types of neural networks - single layer feed forward network - Perceptron - multi layer
feed forward network - back propagation - learning factors.
UNIT II 8 Hours
NEURAL NETWORKS IN CONTROL APPLICATIONS
Feedback networks Auto associative and Hetero associative memory network - Hopfield networks -
applications of neural networks - process identification - artificial neuro controller for inverted pendulum.
UNIT III 10 Hours

FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS
Classical sets - fuzzy sets - fuzzy operation - fuzzy relations - fuzzification - defuzzification - if-then rules-
Membership function - knowledge base - data base - rule base - decision-making logic - Fuzzy Inference
System(FIS): Mamdani, Sugeno and Takagi architecture.
UNIT IV 8 Hours
FUZZY LOGIC APPLICATIONS
Fuzzy controller for inverted pendulum, image processing, blood pressure during anesthesia - introduction
to neuro-fuzzy controllers.
UNIT V 10 Hours
GENETIC ALGORITHM
Introduction- Basic operators - General Genetic algorithm - Classification: Adaptive, Hybrid, Parallel-
Optimization of travelling salesman problem using Genetic algorithm approach.
FOR FURTHER READING

MATLAB Toolbox - Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, Genetic Algorithm - Design of fuzzy PID controller
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Sivanandam S N, Deepa S N, Principles of Soft Computing, Second Edition, Wiley India Ltd.,2011
2. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons
Ltd,2011
3. Sivanandam S N, Deepa S N, Introduction to Genetic Algorithms,Springer, 2010
4. Jacek M.Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi,
2014
5. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd .,New Delhi,2012
6. G.J. Klir and T.A. Folger, Fuzzy Sets, Uncertainty and Information, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 6 4 2 20
2 2 4 8 4 2 20
3 4 6 10 4 4 28
4 2 4 2 4 12
5 4 6 10 20
Total 100
Remember
1. List the three basic elements of a neuron model.
2. Define defuzzification.
3. Name any four methods of defuzzification.
4. List any two advantages of the Back propagation algorithm.
5. List any three applications of the fuzzy logic controllers in real time world.
6. Recall any four properties of fuzzy sets
7. List any four types of learning rules.
8. State the output of AND function and OR function neuron.
9. Define Hebbian learning rule.
10. State Linguistic variable.
Understand
1. Explain the simplified model of an artificial neuron.
2. Illustrate the training and classification of continuous perception with an example.
3. Explain back propagation algorithm with your own training sets.
4. Interpret the parts and functions of biological neuron.
5. Exemplify the perceptron multilayer network with its algorithm

6. Indicate the steps in designing a fuzzy control system
7. Summarize the defuzzification methods with appropriate mathematical representations.
8. Explain the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference block.
9. Explain the resemblance of Artificial Neural Network with human brain.
10. Explain the algorithm of discrete feedback network containing only one layer of neurons with a
neat sketch
Apply
1. Implement the fuzzy rule for home heating system
2. Implement fuzzy logic controller for blood pressure control during anesthesia.
3. Assess various techniques involved in pattern recognition.
4. Construct a discrete Hopfield network with input vector [1 1 1 -1]. Test the network with missing
entries in first and second components of the stored vector.
5. Implement a suitable artificial neuro controller to stabilize the inverted pendulum components of
the stored vector.
6. Compute the net input to output neuron with [x1,x2,x3] = [0.3,0.5,0.6] and [w1,w2,w3] = [0.2,0.1,-
0.3]
7. Implement OR function with binary inputs and bipolar targets using perceptron training algorithm
upto 3 epochs. ,0.1,-0.3]
8. Compute the power set and cardinality of power set of given set X={3,5,7,9}. --EndFragment-->
,0.1,-0.3]
9. Implement AND function with binary inputs and bipolar targets using perceptron training
algorithm upto 2 epochs.
10. Implement the inverse plant identification process and its characteristics using appropriate neural
network.
Analyse
1. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.
2. Differentiate feed-forward and feed-back neural network.
3. Compare Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets.
4. Analyze the goal of inverted pendulum.
5. Outline the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.
6. Compare single layer perceptron classifier and multi-layer perceptron classifier.
7. Differentiate auto-associative and hetero-associative memory neural networks.
8. Compare fuzzy set and classical set.
9. Justify the need for training the neural network.
10. Justify whether laws of excluded middle and contradiction are applicable for fuzzy set.
Create
1. Assume that the vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used to represent eight
states of recurrent neural network with three bipolar binary neurons.The equilibrium states are p =
[- 1 - 1 - 1] and q = [1 1 1]. Sketch the desirable state transitions between the vertices.
2. Design a Hopfield network for 4 bit bipolar patterns. The patterns are 1st sample S1 = [1 1 -1 -1],
2nd sample S2 = [-1 1 -1 1], 3rd sample S3 = [-1 -1 -1 1]. Find the weight matrix and the energy
for the three input samples. Determine the pattern to which sample S = [-1 1 -1 -1] associates.
15EI008 EMBEDDED SYSTEM 3003

Course Objectives
To study the various components within an embedded system and their interactions
To study the techniques of interfacing between processors & peripheral devices
To enable writing of efficient programs for a given process
To understand the software tools available in an embedded system

1. Summarize the concept of Embedded Systems and Memory Organization.
2. Analyze the timer, counter devices and buses for device network.
3. Explain about the device drivers and interrupts Servicing Mechanisms
4. Design simple embedded system using microcontroller
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Embedded System - Processor in the System - Hardware Units - Software Embedded into a System -
Exemplary Embedded Systems - Embedded System-On-Chip (SOC) and in VLSI Circuit.
UNIT II 9 Hours
PROCESSOR AND MEMORY ORGANIZATION
Structural Units in a Processor - Selection for an Embedded System - Memory Devices - Memory Selection
for an Embedded System - Allocation of Memory to Program Segments and Blocks - Memory Map of a
System - Direct Memory Access - Interfacing Processor - Memories and I/O Devices.
UNIT III 9 Hours

DEVICES AND BUSES FOR DEVICE NETWORK
I/O Devices - Timer and Counting Devices - Serial Communication Using the I2C, CAN - Advanced I/O
Buses between the Networked Multiple Devices - Host System or Computer Parallel Communication
between the Networked I/O - Multiple Devices using the ISA, PCI, PCI-X and Advanced Buses
UNIT IV 9 Hours
DEVICE DRIVERS AND INTERRUPTS SERVICING MECHANISM
Device Drivers - Parallel Port Device Drivers in a System - Serial Port Device Drivers in a System - Device
Drivers for Internal Programmable Timing Devices - Context and the Periods for Context - Switching -
Deadline and Interrupt Latency.
9 Hours
UNIT V
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROCONTROLLERS
Intel's series of micro-controllers - Design case study using 8051, A/D converters and other peripherals
devices - Applications (Biometrics, RFID)
FOR FURTHER READING

Basic implementation using IDE - Implementation of hardware Interrupt - Interface 7 Segment Display
using I2C - Serial communication using UART - Interface LM35 temperature sensor using ADC -
Implementation of device drivers: USB
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Micro controllers, Prentice Hall of India book Co, New Delhi,
2012.
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay, Danny Causey ,PIC Microcontroller and Embedded
Systems using Assembly and C for PIC18, Pearson Education, 2012.
3. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw Hill book
Co, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Jonathan W. Valvano, Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing, Brooks cole,
2004.
5. David E Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2003.
2004.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 6 2 6 2 24
2 2 6 2 6 2 2 20
3 2 2 2 6 6 2 20
4 2 8 2 2 2 2 18
5 2 2 2 2 6 2 2 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Define an embedded system
2. Define ROM image.
3. Define bus.
4. List any two purposes of program counter.
5. Define SOC.
6. List 2 importance of DMA.
7. Define plug and play devices.
8. Define context, interrupt latency and interrupt service deadline.
9. Define resolution and conversion time in ADC.
10. Classify the instruction set of 8051.
11. List four control and I/O instructions used in 8051.
12. List four control and I/O instructions used in 8051.
Understand
1. Identify the components of embedded system hardware.
2. Identify the classification of embedded systems.
3. Indicate two conditions that should be considered in selecting a processor for an embedded system?
4. Represent three stage pipeline and superscalar processing.
5. Identify the need of software timers.
6. Represent the interrupt structure of 8051.
7. Summarise the architecture of 8051.
8. Exemplify the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
9. Formulate the steps involved in coding the program and test the program?
10. Identify the characteristics that are taken into account when interfacing a device port
11. Identify ten ways by which the synchronous signals with the clocking information transmit from a
master device to slave device.
12. Explain the signals, clock-inputs, control bits and status flags at registers or memory in a hardware
timer device.
Apply
1. Predict the common characteristics of embedded system
2. Demonstrate the conceptual working of an embedded system.
3. Select an appropriate method for inter task communication
4. Construct a 6-tuple format of the FSM with a neat description.
5. Design an embedded system for an adaptive cruise control system in a car.
6. Demonstrate a scenario with pseudocode where the monitors implement synchronized producer
consumer problem
7. Predict a pseudocode for read and write operations of elevator communication constructs using
shared memory.
8. Design a 3-bit counter that counts the following sequence: 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 1, 2, etc. This counter has
an output odd whose value is 1 when the current count value is odd. Use the sequential design
technique of the chapter. Start from a state diagram, draw the state table, minimize the logic, and
draw the final circuit.
9. Design a 2-bit comparator (compares two 2-bit words) with a single output less-than, using the
combinational design technique described in the chapter. Start from a truth table, use K- maps to
minimize logic, and draw the final combinational circuit.
10. Demonstrate a scenario with pseudocode where the monitors implement producer consumer
problem.
Analyse
1. Differentiate volatile and non-volatile memory.
2. Differentiate serial and parallel ports.
3. Outline the techniques of power and energy management in a system
4. Conclude the role of processor reset and system reset.
5. Justify the use of vector address for an interrupt source
Evaluate
1. Determine the reduction in power dissipation for a processor CMOS circuit when voltage reduces
from 5V to 1.8V operation.
2. Check for the steps involved in initializing and configuring a device
3. How do you assign service priority to the multiple device drivers of a system.
4. Criticise on the usage of queues used for a network.
5. Determine the hardware and software parts of an automatic chocolate vending machine
Create
1. Design an embedded system for a smart card and automatic chocolate vending machine.
2. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
3. Design seven segment LED display using 8051
15EI009 CODES AND STANDARDS 3003

Course Objectives
To understand the instrumentation standards govern by different organizations
To apply safety standards for safety PLC
To understand standards implemented in industries

1. Understand various types of National Fire Protection Association
2. Analyze different types of ISO standards used in instrumentation
3. Construct Piping and Instrumentation diagram using ISA standards
4. Interpret various safety standards and protocols used for the various process in industries
UNIT I 9 Hours
STANDARDS
Codes and Standards:National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)-NFPA 70:National Electric Code,
NFPA 496:Standard for Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment-Instrument Society
of America (ISA):Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test (ISA S82.01), Definitions and
Information Pertaining to Electrical Instruments (ISA S12.1), Application of Safety Instrumented Systems
for the Process Industries(ISA S84.01).
UNIT II 9 Hours
ISO - THE INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION
EIA 232 interface standard - EIA 485 interface standard - EIA 422 interface standard - Serial interface
converters - ISO/OSI Reference(s) model- Data link control protocol - Media access protocol: Token
passing and CSMA/CD - TCP/IP -Standard ETHERNET Configuration.
UNIT III 9 Hours

INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF AUTOMATION
ISA standards- Process Flow Diagram - P and I diagram: symbols and layout - Loop diagram -Tagging
conventions -Line and function symbols - Equipment representation - P&I diagram for basic neutralizer
control system -Distillation Column.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
STANDARDS FOR SAFETY PLC
Characteristics of safety PLCs:Hardware characteristics of safety PLC- Software Characteristics of safety
PLC - Design of safety PLCs - Triple Modular Redundant (TMR systems) - Safety PLC with 1003
architecture - Communication feature of safety controllers - New development in communication
UNIT V 9 Hours
SAFETY STANDARDS
Safety Instrumentation Standards - Electrical Standards -Fire and Gas Standards - Oil and Gas Standards -
Sub sea Control Systems Standards - Protective Coating Standards
FOR FURTHER READING

Application of P&I diagrams in paper industry - Cement industry - Sugar cane industry - HART application
-Industrial Ethernet application
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. National Fire Protection Association,Quincy,Massachusetts,2014
2. G.K.McMillan, Process/Industrial Instrument and Controls Handbook, Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill
handbook, New York, 2011
3. J.Berge, Field Buses for Process Control: Engineering, Operation, and Maintenance, ISA Press,
2010
4. Terrence L. Blevins, Mark Nixon, Control Loop Foundation: Batch and Continuous Processes,
ISA, 2011.
5. Dave Macdonald, Practical Industrial Safety, Risk Assessment and Shutdown Systems, Elsevier
publication, 2004
6. Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, John Park, Deon Reynders, Practical Industrial Data Networks,
Elsevier, 2004
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 5 2 3 5 3 2 20
2 4 4 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 20
3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 1 20
4 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 20
5 3 2 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define NFPA?
2. List different types of standards used in ovens and furnace?
3. List different types of standards used in purged and pressurized enclosure
4. List different types of standards used in Compressed Gas for Industrial and Medical Facilities
5. List different types of standards used in Fire Protection
6. State loop diagram
7. List some of the line and function symbols
8. List some of the industrial safety standards
9. Define TMR
10. Recall ISO
Understand
1. Explain about different level of ISO standards
2. Interpret P&I diagram for basic neutralizer control system
3. Exemplify P&I diagram for Distillation Column
4. Summarise in detail about Data link control protocol
5. Explain in detail about Media access protocol
6. Explain about TCP/IP
7. Illustrate EIA 485 interface standard with its pin diagram
8. Illustrate EIA 232interface standard with its pin diagram
9. Explain in detail about ETHERNET
10. Explain in detail about Safety Instrumentation Standards for fire and gas Standards
11. Explain in detail about Safety Instrumentation Standards for fire and gas Standards
Apply
1. Draw ladder logic diagram for count the cycle of Extraction and Retraction of a cylinder.
One cycle is 1 Extraction and 1 Retraction.
Switch off the cylinder power supply when it reach10 Cycles
2. Find where can be PLC used in the place of relays?
3. Show will the power for the output on the first rung normally in ON state or OFF state?
Would the output on the second rung normally is ON state or OFF state?
4. Find in dangerous processes it is common to use two palm buttons that require a operator to use
both hands to start a process (this keeps hands out of presses, etc.). To develop this there are two
inputs that must be turned on within 0.25s of each other before a machine cycle may begin.
5. Find a counter goes below the bottom limit which counter bit will turn on?
6. Demonstrate PLC is preferred more than DCS, Defend.
7. Demonstrate the bottle filling system using PLC with ladder logic
8. Show the program for control instructions, math instructions and sequencer instructions used to
execute certain functions in PLC and SCADA?
9. Demonstrate the stamping system using PLC.
10. Demonstrate piping and instrumentation diagram for fresh milk vending machine
11. Demonstrate piping and instrumentation diagram for rice cooking machine
Analyse
1. Compare any two real time applications of PLC and DCS in detail
A conveyor is run by switching ON or OFF a motor. We are positioning parts on the conveyor with
an optical detector. When the optical sensor goes on, we want to Wait 1.5 seconds, and then stop
the conveyor. After a delay of 2 seconds the conveyor will start again. We need to use a start and
stop button - a light should be on when the system is active.
2. Differentiate between PLC and SCADA automation software.
3. Justify Ladder logic outputs are coils
4. Differentiate between DCS and PLC
5. Compare timers and counters
6. Compare EIA 485 with EIA 422 interface standard
7. Compare EIA 422 interface standard with EIA 232 interface standard
8. Compare EIA 232 interface standard with EIA 485 interface standard
9. Contrast PLC with DCS
Create
1. Generate a system involving a PLC for the placing on a conveyor belt of boxes in batches of four
2. Generate a simple program that will use one timer to flash a light. The light should be on for 1.0
seconds and off for 0.5 seconds. Do not include start or stop buttons
3. Derive ladder logic that uses a timer and counter to measure a time of 50 days
15EI010 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS 3003

Course Objectives
To learn hydraulic fluid / Pneumatic air fundamentals including generation and distribution
To understand working principles, operation of hydraulic and pneumatic components
To expose to various techniques of circuit building in pneumatics
To know about the ladder logic diagram to programmable logic control of fluid power system

1. Understand the fundamentals of fluid systems and basic concepts of hydraulic system
2. Understand the concepts of designing hydraulic circuit
3. Understand the concepts of pneumatic system and concepts of pneumatic system circuit design
UNIT I 9 Hours
FLUID POWER SYSTEMS AND FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid power system. Types of fluid
power systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids - General types of fluids - Fluid power symbols. Basics of
Hydraulics Applications of Pascals Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow - Reynold's number - Darcy's
equation - Losses in pipe, valves and fittings.
UNIT II 9 Hours
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS
Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory - Pump classification - Gear pump, Vane Pump, piston pump,
construction and working of pumps - pump performance - Variable displacement pumps. Fluid Power
Actuators:Linear hydraulic actuators - Types of hydraulic cylinders - Single acting, Double acting special
cylinders like tandem, Rodless, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Construction of double acting cylinder,
Rotary actuators - Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motor
UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS
Construction of Control Components : Direction control valve - 3/2 way valve - 4/2 way valve - Shuttle
valve -check valve - pressure control valve - pressure reducing valve, sequence valve, Flow control valve -
Fixed and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays. Accumulators and Intensifiers: Types of
accumulators - Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, Intensifier - Applications of Intensifier -
Intensifier circuit
UNIT IV 9 Hours
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS
Pneumatic Components: Properties of air - Compressors - Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator Unit - Air
control valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Fluid Power Circuit Design, Speed control
circuits, synchronizing circuit, Penumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit design for simple applications
using cascade method
UNIT V 9 Hours
DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS
Introduction to PLC - ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control. Fluid power circuits Failure
and Trouble shooting. Fluidics - Introduction to fluidic devices, simple circuits. Servo systems - Hydro
Mechanical servo systems, Electro-hydraulic servo systems and proportional valves
FOR FURTHER READING

Properties of hydraulic fluids - Pump classification - Applications of Intensifier - Properties of air -
Application of PLC
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2006
2. S.R. Majumdar, Oil Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004
3. James L Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2003
4. S.R. Majumdar, Pneumatic systems Principles and maintenance, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
5. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2006
6. Illangov Soundarrajan, Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Prentice hall of India, 2007
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 2 2 2 20
3 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
4 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
5 2 2 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define the term fluid power.
2. Name three basic methods of transmitting power?
3. Define the term mass density.
4. Define the term absolute viscosity and kinematic viscosity.
5. Define surface tension, capillarity.
6. What is oxidation stability?
7. What are fluid power symbols?
8. State Pascals law.
9. State the continuity equation.
10. What are the various energy losses occur when liquid flows through a pipe?
11. What is the function of pump?
12. What do you mean by slip?
Understand
1. What is the fundamental difference between Hydraulics and pneumatics?
2. State the effect of temperature and pressure on viscosity of liquids?
3. What is the difference between the force and pressure?
4. Differentiate between the laminar and turbulent flow?

5. Where the hydrodynamic displacements pumps are employed? Why?
6. Which pump-external gear, internal gear, screw vane and piston generates the least noise? Why?
7. Why are centrifugal pumps not preferred for fliud power application?
8. Why are double acting cylinders known as differential cylinders?
9. Which hydraulic motor is generally the most efficient? Why?
10. State the difference between the hydraulic motor and hydraulic pump?
Apply/Evaluate
1. To investigate a hydraulic and pneumatic system Requirements: Two syringes of equal size. A
plastic tube of about 10 cm that will fit tightly over the opening of both syringes.
Draw out the plunger (piston) of one syringe and push in the plunger of the other syringe. Connect
the two syringes by means of the plastic tube. Push in the plunger of one syringe. Draw that plunger
out again.
For the Hydraulic System shown, following data are given:

Pump is adding 5 hp (3730 W) to fluid Pump flow is 0.001896 m3/s Pipe has 0.0254 m inside dia
Sp.
Gravity of oil = 0.9 Kinematic viscosity of oil is 100 CS
Elevation difference between station 1 & 2 is 6.096 m Pipe lengths: 1 ft = 0.305 m, 4 ft = 1.22 m,
16 ft = 4.88 m Find pressure available at inlet to hydraulic motor.
The pressure at the oil top surface level in the hydraulic tank is atmospheric (01 MPa).
Create
1. The feed system of a press could be operated either manually or automatically with the following
preconditions.
The press tool should be in position.
The work piece must be clamped.
No part of the operators body should be in the working area.
2. Design a schematic circuit which will operate one spring return cylinder from any one of three
identical valves.
3. Design a schematic circuit that requires the operator to push one of two buttons that in turn shifts a
detented, two position, and four-way valve. The valve is air-piloted in both directions and operates
a double acting cylinder. 4. Design and Assemble an Automatic Cam Cycling circuit.
15EI011 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN

3003
IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES
Course Objectives
To know the role of instrumentation in a steel industry
To understand the control operations carried out at various stages of iron and steel industry.

1. Understand the role of the furnaces and processes of casting and rolling in iron and steel industries
2. Suggest suitable instrumentation for a typical measurement in iron and steel industry
3. Develop control schemes for various control operations in iron and steel industries
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO FURNACES
Process description in diagrammatic and functional block details - raw materials preparation - operation of
blast furnace (BF) and auxiliary units, including stoves - Basic oxygen Furnace (BoF) - Electric Furnace
(EF) - Open Hearth Furnace (OHF) - relative merits of various steel making furnaces.
UNIT II 9 Hours
CASTING AND ROLLING
Quality of steel - impurities present and allowed limits for usable steel - waste recycling. Continuous casting
and batch casting of steel - primary and secondary rolling - features of cold rolling - steel finishing
operations.
UNIT III 9 Hours

MEASUREMENTS IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES
Identification of various process parameters in the industry - selection of suitable measurement hardware
for temperature, pressure, level, flow, weighing and proportioning - special gauges for measurement of
thickness and shape - Control room layout for mill operations - graphic displays - alarm management.
9 Hours
UNIT IV
CONTROL APPLICATION
Special applications for controls - Blast Furnace (BF) Stove combustion control system - gas and water
control system in Basic Oxygen Furnace (BoF) - Mould Level control system in Strand Casting operations.
UNIT V 9 Hours
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
Evalution of computer applications in the industry - Review of data logging, SCADA, DDC and DCS.
Practices for model calculating and data logging - steel rolling mill control - annealing process control -
utilities management with computer systems
FOR FURTHER READING

The need for iron and steel in the civilised world - history of steel making - per-capita consumption of steel
in India and in other countries.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Liptak, Bela G, Instrumentation in the Processing Industries, Chilton Publishers, 1973.
2. Considine D. M., Process/Industrial Instruments and control Handbook, McGraw Hill, 5th edition
1999.
3. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R. Schmid, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Pearson
Education, 2013.
4. Robert H. Perry, D.W. Green and J.O. Maloney, Perry's Chemical Engineers, Handbook, McGraw
Hill Inc, New York, 7th ed, 1998.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 2 1 4 2 1 2 1 1 20
2 2 2 2 4 5 3 4 22
3 1 2 1 3 4 3 4 2 20
4 2 2 2 5 2 5 2 20
5 1 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Reproduce the functional block diagram to describe a steel making process.
2. Recall the auxiliary units of blast furnace.
3. Recognize the allowable limit of impurities in usable steel.
4. List the features of cold rolling.
5. Reproduce the essential measurement schemes in steel industries.
6. Recall the special applications for controllers.
7. State the importance of mould Level control system in strand casting operations.
8. List the applications of SCADA.
9. Define the term direct digital control.
10. Recall the annealing process steps.
Understand
1. Explain the process operation with its functional block diagram.
2. Indicate the steps to prepare raw material for steel making.
3. Classify the furnaces used in iron and steel industries.
4. Summarize the operation of blast furnace with a diagram and explain the usage of its auxiliary
units.
5. Indicate the factors to decide the quality of steel.

6. Indicate the steps to identify the impurities present in steel.
7. Summarize the waste recycling process with a block diagram.
8. Explain the steel finishing operation.
9. Exemplify the weighing and proportioning.
10. Infer the need for special gauges in steel processing industry and explain the measurement schemes
based on special gauges.
11. Explain the graphic displays used in steel processing industry.
12. Illustrate operation of mould level control system used in strand casting operation.
13. Identify the need for gas and water control system in basic oxygen furnace.
14. Summarize the evolution of computer based application in the industry.
15. Interpret meaning of data logging in process industries and infer the role of data logging.
16. Classify the benefits of DDC.
17. Explain the operation of DCS with its block diagram.
18. Summarize the data logging process with an example.
19. Represent utility management.
20. Explain the computer based utility management system.
Apply
1. Predict the various process parameters in steel industry.
2. Select the suitable method and instrument for measurement of pressure and temperature in steel
manufacturing process.
3. Select the suitable instrument for measurement of flow and level in steel manufacturing process.
4. Construct suitable measurement systems for temperature and pressure measurement in steel
industries and explain their operations.
5. Implement a suitable level/flow measurement scheme for steel industry.
6. Implement a control scheme for Blast furnace stove combustion.
7. Design a control scheme for gas and water control system in basic oxygen furnace.
8. Design a SCADA for switching an industrial motor,
9. Implement a digital control scheme for steel rolling mill and explain its controlling operations.
10. Demonstrate computer based annealing process control.
Analyse
1. Differentiate between basic oxygen furnace and electric furnace used in iron and steel industries
2. Outline the merits of each furnace used in iron and steel industries by relating with other furnaces.
3. Compare the electric furnace with open hearth furnace.
4. Compare the usable steel with other steels.
5. Differentiate between continuous and batch steel casting methods.
6. Compare primary and secondary rolling process used in steel industries.
7. Contrast the stove combustion control and water control systems.
8. Outline the control room layout for mill operation with necessary accessories.
9. Contrast data monitoring and data logging.
10. Integrate DDC with SCADA and explain its benefits.
Create
1. Generalize the procedure to design an alarm management system based on the given constraints.
2. Combine all the control schemes used in iron and steel industry and derive overall control using a
DCS.
15EI012 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES 3003

Course Objectives
To obtain the switching characteristic of different types of power semi-conductor devices.
To determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of AC, DC converters.
To understand application of Power Electronics drives.

1. Distinguish between the principle operation of power semi-conductor devices
2. Analyze the operating principle of rectifiers, choppers, cycloconverters, and inverters
3. Identify the drives for various control applications.
UNIT I 9 Hours
POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES
Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power Diode - DIAC- SCR - TRIAC - Power transistor,
MOSFET and IGBT - Ratings of SCR - Series parallel operation of SCR, di/dt & dv/dt protection.
UNIT II 10 Hours
CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS
Single Phase and Three phase uncontrolled converter - Single Phase and Three phase half and fully
controlled converters - Single phase and Three phase dual converter operation - Effect of source inductance
UNIT III 9 Hours

CHOPPERS AND CYCLOCONVERTERS
Principle of chopper operations - control strategies - Step up and step down chopper - Buck and boost
switched mode regulators - cycloconverters , Single phase cycloconverters
UNIT IV 9 Hours
INVERTERS
Single phase and three phase (both 120 deg mode and 180 deg mode) inverters - PWM techniques:
Sinusoidal PWM modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM - Current source inverters - Voltage source
inverter - UPS.
8 Hours
UNIT V
DRIVES
Introduction to DC drives - AC drives-Frequency control - Vector control- Stepper motor drives- Position
control- Servo drives- applications
FOR FURTHER READING

Simulation of One Phase TCR/TSC Static Var Compensator - Four-Quadrant Chopper DC Drive - Three-
Level PWM Converter and Dead Time - Brushless DC and AC Motor Drive
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Muhammad H. Rashid, Power Electronics Circuits, Devices & Applications, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2013.
2. Dr.P.S. Bhimbra, Power Electronics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Ned Mohan, Tore.M.Undeland, William.P.Robbins, Power Electronics: Converters Applications
and Design, Wiley India, New Delhi, 3rd edition, 2010.
4. Singh. M.D & Khanchandani, K.B Power Electronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2010.
5. Singh. M.D & Khanchandani, K.B Power Electronics Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2008.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 6 4 6 20
2 2 4 6 4 4 20
3 4 6 4 4 2 20
4 2 4 4 6 4 20
5 4 4 4 4 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define free wheeling diode.
2. Define firing angle of SCR.
3. List the advantage and disadvantage of PWM control.
4. State the applications of UPS.
5. Define extinction angle.
6. Define Cycloconverter. Give its applications.
7. What is dual converter? Mention its uses.
8. What are the control strategies of chopper?
9. List the advantages and disadvantages of a buck-boost regulator.
10. Define AC drive and DC drive.
Understand
1. Explain the switching characteristics of MOSFET.
2. Identify the structure of a TRIAC with relevant diagram and symbol. Explain the different operating
modes of TRIAC with its V-I characteristics. Also discuss its advantages and disadvantages.
3. Infer the need of series and parallel operation of SCRs. Also explain their operation with V-I
characteristics and string efficiency.
4. Indicate the effect of source inductance on the performance of a single phase fully controlled
converter with the conduction of various thyristors during one cycle.
5. Explain the operation of single phase fully controlled rectifier with R, RL load.
6. Illustrate the operation of single phase dual converter with neat waveform.
7. Explain the operation of single phase semi converter and derive expressions for its average and rms
output voltages.
8. Explain the principle of basic chopper circuit with relevant voltage and current waveforms. Also
explain the various control strategies used to get the variation in the output voltage.
9. Classify the basic topologies of switching regulators and explain the operation of buck regulator
with continuous load current using suitable waveforms.
10. With neat diagram and waveforms, explain three phase voltage source inverter, using SCR
operating in180 degree conduction mode. Also, obtain the expression for rms value of output
voltage.
11. Explain sinusoidal pulse width modulation as used in PWM inverters.
12. Illustrate the operation of current source inverter with neat diagram.
13. Explain the working principle of single phase cycloconverter.
14. Interpret stator voltage control techniques for the speed control of a 3-phase induction motor.
15. Describe stator frequency control for the speed control of a 3-phase motor and derive the
expressions for motor torque, maximum torque and the slip at which it occurs.
16. Explain volts/hertz control for a 3-phase induction motor for its speed control.
17. Identify the principle of chopper opreration.
18. Illustrate the operation of single phase inverter in 180 degree with neat waveform.
Apply
1. A single-phase full converter is supplied from 230 V, 50 Hz, The load consists of R = 10 ???and a
large inductance so render the load current constant. For a firing angle delay 0. Determine (1)
Average output voltage (2) Average output current (3) Average and rms values of thyristor currents
(4) The power factor.
2. A single phase half controlled thyristor converter is connected to a load of a 5ohm resistance, 1H
inductance and 10V emf. Compute the average load voltage and average load current assuming
continuous current operation for a triggering angle 45deg. Estimate the input power factor if the
load current can be assumed to be constant. The supply voltage is 230V, 50Hz.
3. The full wave controlled bridge rectifier has an ac input of 120V rms at 60Hz and a 20ohm load
resistor. The delay angle is 40deg. Determine the average current in the loads, the power absorbed
by the load and the input power factor.
4. A resistive load of 10ohm is connected through a half wave SCR circuit to 220V, 50Hz, single
phase source. Calculate the power delivered to the load for a firing angle of 60.find also the value
of input power factor
5. A dc chopper is turned on for 30sec and off 10sec. i) duty cycle ii) chopping frequency. A dc
chopper of input voltage 200V remains on for 25msec and off for 10msec. Determine the average
voltage which appears across the load.
6. A dc chopper circuit is operating on TRC principle at a frequency of 2KHz on a 220V dc supply.
If the load voltage is 170V, compute the conduction and blocking period of thyristor each cycle.
7. A step up chopper is used to deliver load voltage of 500V from a 200V dc source. If the blocking
period of the thyristor is 80s, compute the required pulse width.
8. A step up chopper has input voltage of 220V and output voltage of 660V. If the non-conducting
time of thyristor is 100sec. compute the pulse width of output voltage. If the pulse width is halved
for a constant frequency operation, find the new output voltage.
9. For type-A chopper, dc source voltage = 230 V, load resistance = 10 ohms. Take a voltage of 2 V
across chopper when it is on. For a duty cycle of 0.4, calculate (A) average output voltage (b) rms
value of output voltage and chopper frequency.
10. A step-up chopper has input voltage of 220 V and the output voltage of 660 v. If the conducting
time of thyristor-chopper is 100 s, compute the pulse width of output voltage. In case output-
voltage pulse width is halved for constant frequency operation, find the average value of new output
voltage. For the basic dc to dc converter, express the following variables as functions of Vs, R and
duty cycle in case load is resistive:
Average output voltage and current
Output current at the instant of commutation
Average and rms freewheeling diode currents
Rms value of the output voltage
Rms and average thyristor currents
Effective input resistance of the chopper
11. Apply the suitable control scheme for controlling the speed of dc separately excited dc motor for
above and below base speed.
12. Apply the suitable control scheme for controlling the speed of dc shunt motor for above and below
base speed.
Analyse
1. Compare 120 and 180 modes of inverter operation.
2. Differentiate between half controlled and fully controlled converter circuits.
3. How is 12 pulse converters formed from 6pulse converters?
4. Compare VSI and CSI.
5. Compare single pulse width modulation over multiple pulse width modulation technique.
Create
1. Combine the waveform of single phase half controlled converter resistive load with inductive and
capacitive load.
2. Generalize the operation of stepper motor drive frequency control and vector control.
15EI013 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY 3003
Course Objectives
To develop a skill set in analyzing and solving problems of static electric field and magnetic field
using vector calculus, electromagnetic laws and appropriate co-ordinate systems.
To manipulate Maxwells equations using vector calculus for the purpose of investigating static,
time varying electric and magnetic fields.

1. Apply vector calculus to understand the behavior of static electric and magnetic fields
2. Analyze Static and dynamic Electromagnetic fields
3. Examine Electromagnetic wave propagation in different media
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Different co-ordinate systems: Cartesian coordinates, cylindrical coordinates, spherical coordinates -
Vector calculus: Differential length, area and volume, line surface and volume integrals - gradient of a
scalar, divergence of a vector and divergence theorem - curl of a vector and Stokes theorem - Laplacian of
a scalar
9 Hours
UNIT II
ELECTROSTATICS
Coulombs Law Electric field intensity Field due to point and continuous charges Gausss law and its
applications to calculate electric field Electric scalar potential Polarization-Boundary conditions-Poissons
and Laplaces equations Capacitance-energy density
UNIT III 9 Hours

MAGNETOSTATICS
Magnetic field intensity Biotsavart Law - Amperes Law Magnetic field due to straight conductors, circular
loop, infinite sheet carrying currentMagnetic flux density in free space, conductor, magnetic materials
Magnetization-Boundary conditions Magnetic vector potential Magnetic force Torque Inductance-Energy
density
9 Hours
UNIT IV
ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS
Faradays laws, induced EMF Static and dynamic EMF, Maxwells equations (differential and integral
forms) Displacement current Poynting theorem
UNIT V 9 Hours
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
Electro Magnetic Wave equations Wave parameters: velocity, intrinsic impedance, propagation constant
Waves in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics, conductors - skin depth - Poynting vector
FOR FURTHER READING

Transformation of coordinates, Electric field intensity due to co-axial cylinder, Scalar magnetic potential,
Maxwell equation for sinusoidal time varying quantity, Skin effect, Transmission line parameters,
Transmission line equations, input impedance
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. William H. Hayt, Jr. John A. Buck, Engineering Electromagnetics", McGraw Hill Higher
Education, 8th revised Edition, 2011.
2. K. A. Gangadhar, P.M. Ramanathan, Electromagnetic Field Theory, Khanna Publishers, Sixteenth
Edition, 2011.
3. Bhag Sing Guru and Huseyin R. Hiziroglu, Electromagnetic Field Theory Fundamentals,
Cambridge University Press, fourth Edition, 2010.
4. A.Joseph. Edminister and Vishnu Priye, Electromagnetics, Special Indian edition, Schaums
Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
5. Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, Third Edition, Oxford University Press, 2010
6. Kraus and Fleish, Electromagnetics with Applications, McGraw Hill International Editions, Fifth
Edition, 2008.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 12 20
2 2 4 6 8 20
3 2 6 12 20
4 2 12 6 20
5 4 8 8 20
Total 100
Remember
1. State divergence theorem and stokes theorem.
2. List vectors in Cartesian coordinate, cylindrical, spherical coordinate systems
3. Define skin depth
4. State Coulombs Law and Gausss law.
5. State Faradays law
6. List the Boundary condition of electrostatics.
7. List the wave parameters for uniform plane waves
8. Reproduce the various magnetic material used in practices
9. Define Poynting vector?
10. State Biotsavart Law
Understand
1. Compare circuit theory and field theory
2. Illustrate the boundary condition for dielectric to dielectric
3. Exemplify the inductance of two conductors carrying current in same and opposite directions
4. Explain the boundary condition for dielectric to free space
5. Identify the relation between Cartesian and cylindrical coordinate systems
6. Identify the Maxwells equation for differential and point form.
7. Identify the Maxwells equation for time varying harmonic field
8. Illustrate the torque equation for rectangular loop.
9. Illustrate the magnetic field due to infinite sheet conductor
10. Illustrate the magnetic field due to circular loop conductor
Apply
1. Compute the validity of the divergence theorem considering the field D=2xy ax +x2ay c/m2 and
the rectangular parallelepiped formed by the planes x=0,x=1,y=0,y=2 &z=0,z=3.
2. Find the electric field intensity at the point (0, 0, 5) m due to Q1 =0.35 C at (0,4,0) m and Q2 =-
0.55 C at (3,0,0) m.
3. Construct the expression for the electric field due to a straight and infinite uniformly charged wire
of length L meters and with a charge density of + c/m at a point P which lies along the
perpendicular bisector of wire.
4. Compute an expression for field intensity at any point 'p' with distance, h, metre due to a straight,
uniformly charged wire at a linear density of +1, coulombs per meter length. Also, find E , if the
point 'p' is along the perpendicular bisector of wire and if the conductor is infinitely long.
5. Execute the boundary conditions of the normal and tangential components of electric field at the
inter face of two media with different dielectrics.
6. A uniform plane wave of 200 MHz, traveling in free space impinges normally on a large block of
material having r =4, r =9 and =0. Find transmission and reflection co efficient of interface.
7. The magnetic field intensity in free space is given s H=H0sin at t A/m. where =t-z and is a
constant quantity. Compute the displacement current density.
8. Given that potential V=10sincos/r2 find the electric flux density D at (2,/2,0)
9. The electric field in a spherical co-ordinate is given by E=rr/5. Show that closed E.dS=(?.E)dv.
10. Given A= 2rcos+jrsin in cylindrical co-ordinates .for the contour x=0to1y=0to1 verify stokes
theorem.
Analyse
1. Determine the attenuation constant and phase constant for the uniform plane wave with the
frequency of 10GHz in a medium for which =0, r=2.3 and =2.54x10-4/m
2. Assume that E and H waves, traveling in free space, are normally incident on the interface with a
perfect dielectric with r=3 . Determine the magnitudes of incident, reflected and transmitted E and
H waves at the interface.
3. Conclude the relation between three variables E, V and D in electrostatic field.
4. Differentiate electric and magnetic circuits
5. Given a half-circle of charge density as shown, determine E at the origin.
Conclude the potential at the centre of square, each side of square having charge density of c/m
Evaluate
1. Calculate the total current in a circular conductor of radius 4mm if the current density varies
according to J=104/R A/m2.
2. A solenoid 25cm long, 1cm mean diameter of the coil turns a uniformly distributed windings of
2000turns. The solenoid is placed in uniform field of 2 tesla flux density a current of 5A is passed
through the winding. Determine the
A. Maximum torque on the solenoid
B. Maximum force on the solenoid
C. The magnetic moment on the solenoid.
3. A plane sinusoidal electromagnetic wave traveling in space has Emax = 150 V /m
(A) Find the accompanying H.
(B) Propagation is in x-direction and H is oriented in Y-direction. What is the direction of E.
Compute the average power transmitted.
4. Choose the best method of coordinate system
5. Determine the concept of magnetic field due to various types of conductor
Create
1. In a 2-dimensional rectangular bar analyze the electric field computation inside the rectangle bar at
any point P due to surface charge distribution of +rs.
2. Create a parallel plate electrolytic capacitor having 2mm thick and 3 mm width r= 1.2, d=2 m and
calculate stress per m2 .
3. Design a solenoid used in process control system
4. Design a 11KV overhead transmission system and calculate the inductance per phase.
5. Design a suitable cable to carry the information from switching station to the consumer.
15EI014 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 3003
Course Objectives
To give basic knowledge in digital control system
To impart necessary knowledge in stability analysis for discrete system
To model systems in state space representation
To provide a solution to state equations and to study various computational algorithms
To know about the compensators in digital controllers

1. Understand the concepts of digital control system
2. Able to analyze the stability of the discrete system
3. Understand the concepts of State Space System
4. Design a compensator for the given system
UNIT I 9 Hours
DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
Digital control system - sample and hold - analog to digital converter - digital to analog converter -
quantizing and quantizing error - sampling process - frequency response of zero order hold - first order hold
- PI, PD controllers - digital PID
UNIT II 9 Hours
RESPONSE OF DISCRETE SYSTEM
Pulse transfer function of cascaded elements, closed loop systems - characteristic equation - relationship
between s-plane and z-plane poles - unit step response of digital control system - stability of discrete system
- Jury's stability test - Root locus technique for digital system
UNIT III 9 Hours

STATE SPACE REPRESENTATION
State variable formulation of discrete system - decomposition of discrete transfer function - direct
decomposition - cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition - solution of state equation by recursive
method - state transition matrix and its properties
UNIT IV 9 Hours
SOLUTION OF STATE EQUATION
Solution of discrete time state equation - evaluation of state transition matrix - transfer function matrix -
Discretisation of continuous time system - Solution of discrete time state equation by Cayley Hamilton
theorem
UNIT V 9 Hours
COMPENSATION TECHNIQUES
Compensation by continuous network - compensation by digital computer - frequency domain technique
of designing D(z)
FOR FURTHER READING

Simulation of types of digital controller - Simulation of discrete system to analysis the stability - Simulation
of discrete time state equation - Simulation of compensation techniques
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, New Delhi, 2012
2. K. Ogata, Discrete time control system, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi 2011
3. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New age International P.Ltd, New Delhi
2011
4. Lawrence J. Kamm, Understanding Electro Mechanical Engineering: An Introduction to
Mechatronics, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2000
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 20
2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 20
3 3 2 2 6 2 2 3 20
4 2 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 20
5 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Label the types of sampling process.
2. State quantization.
3. Recall the relationship between S and Z plane.
4. List the types of stability analysis of digital control system.
5. Define state space analysis.
6. List the advantages of state space approach.
7. Define Cayley Hamilton theorem.
8. List the types of discretization.
9. Define Compensation.
10. Recall frequency domain specifications.
Understand
1. Indicate the symbolic representation of a ZOH and FOH.
2. Identify the transfer function of zero order hold device.
3. Infer the necessary condition for stability by Jurys stability test.
4. Illustrate the procedure for root locus techniques in digital system.
5. Classify the decomposition of discrete transfer function.
6. Summaries thestate transition matrix and its properties
7. Identify the solutions of discrete time equations.
8. Classify the methods to determine the state transition matrix.
9. Extrapolatethe information that can be obtained from frequency response plots.
10. Identify the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compensation.
Apply
1. Implement the theorem required to satisfy to recover the signal e(t) from the samples e*(t).
2. Compute the pulse transfer function of digital PID controller.
3. Compute the pulse transfer function of two cascaded systems, each described by the deferential
equation y (k) = 0.5y (k-1) + r(k).
4. Using Jurys stability criterion find the range of K, for which the characteristic equation z3+ Kz2+
1.5Kz (K + 1) = 0 is stable.
5. Show the root locus in the z-plane for the system shown in Figure for 0< K <. Consider the
sampling period T = 4 sec.
6. Find the state model for the deferential equation and also nd its state transition matrix.
y(k+2) + 3y(k+1) + 2y(k) = 5u(k+1) + 3u(k).
7. Let A be an n*n matrix. Using Cayley Hamilton theorem show that any with kn can be written as
a linear combination of {I, A, , An-1}
8. Consider a discrete linear discrete - data control system, whose input - output relation is described
by the difference equation y (k+2) +2y (k+1) +y (k) =u (k+1) +u (k). Compute the following
canonical models.
i. Observable canonical form.
ii. Controllable canonical form.
9. The block diagram of a digital control system is shown in the figure. Design a compensator D(z)
to meet the following specifications:
(a) Velocity error constant, Kv 4 Sec.,
(b) Phase margin 400 and
(c) Band width =1.5 rad. /sec
10. A block diagram of a digital control system is shown in Figure. Design a PID controller D(z), to
eliminate the steady-state error due to a step input and simultaneously realizing a good transient
response, and the ramp-error constant Kv should equal 5.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Conclude in detail about implementation of control algorithms with an example.
2. A sampler and ZOH are now introduced in the forward loop show in Figure. Determine the stability
of the sampled-data system via bilinear transformation and justify the stable linear continuous time
system becomes unstable upon the introduction of a sampler and ZOH.
3. Determine the different state space representation of the of pulse transfer function
G(z)=(z+1)/[z2+13z+0.4]
4. Determine the discrete state and output equation of the system and pulse transfer function of the
following continuous time system. G(s)=1/s(s+2)
5. Outline the stability analysis of a discrete time control system.
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity - feedback digital control system is given as
Check the root loci of the system for 0< K <. Indicate all important information on the root
loci.
7. Determine the solution for discrete state space equation.
8. Determine the state transition matrix of the discrete system
9. Consider the feedback control system shown in Figure.
The plant is described by the transfer function G(s)=K / s(s+5). Integrate a digital control using
frequency response plot for the system to meet the following specifications.
(a) Velocity error constant, Kv 10
(b) Peak Overshoot25% and
(c) Settling time (2% tolerance band) 2.5sec
10. Conclude the design procedure of Digital Controllers using frequency response methods.
Create
1. Drive the necessary condition for the digital control system
2. The pulse transfer function of digital control systems is given by
Produce the various state space representations for the system and find the complete solution to a
unit step input and assume that, the initial conditions are zero.
15EI015 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS 3003
Course Objectives
To understand the various error controlling techniques in data communication networks
To explain the function of various protocols
To understand internet, email and its uses in modern communication

1. Understand the function of various protocols
2. Recognize the various devices used in internet and their functions
3. Analyze the services and features of the various layers of data networks
UNIT I 9 Hours
OVERVIEW OF DATA COMMUNICATION
Introduction: Networks, protocols and standards, standards organizations - line configurations - topology -
categories of networks - inter networks - OSI model: functions of the layers - encoding and modulation -
digital-to-digital conversion, analog-to-digital conversion, digital-to-analog conversion, analog-to-analog
conversion - transmission modes - transmission media: guided media, unguided media
UNIT II 9 Hours
ERROR CONTROL AND DATA LINK PROTOCOLS
Error detection and correction: Types of errors, detection, Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC), Longitudinal
Redundancy Check (LRC), Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), and check sum - error correction: single bit
error correction - data link control: line discipline, flow control, error control - data link protocols:
asynchronous protocols, synchronous protocols, and character oriented protocols, bit oriented protocols -
link access procedures
UNIT III 9 Hours

SWITCHING AND NETWORKS
Switching: Circuit switching, packet switching, message switching - LAN: IEEE 802, Ethernet, token bus,
token ring, FDDI - MAN: IEEE 802.6, SMDS - networking and internet working devices: repeater, bridge,
switch, router and gateway
UNIT IV 9 Hours
X.25, FRAME RELAY, ATM AND SONET/ SDH
X.25: X.25 Layers - Frame relay: Introduction, frame relay operation, frame relay layers - congestion
control - leaky bucket algorithm - traffic control - ATM: design goals, architecture, layers and applications
- SONET/SDH: synchronous transport signals, physical configuration, layers and applications
9 Hours
UNIT V
NETWORK, TRANSPORT AND APPLICATION LAYERS
Routing algorithms: distance vector routing, link state routing - TCP / IP protocol suite: overview of TCP/IP
network layers: addressing, subnetting - application layer: Domain Name System (DNS), telnet, File
Transfer Protocol (FTP), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
FOR FURTHER READING

Concept of Highway Addressable, Remote Transducer, HART protocol,Physical layer, Data link layer and
its benefits - Troubleshooting of HART - Overview of Modbus protocol - Modbus protocol structure.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, New Delhi, 2013
2. K. Ogata, Discrete time control system, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi 2004
3. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New age International P.Ltd, New Delhi
2004
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 14 20
2 2 2 2 14 20
3 2 2 2 14 20
4 2 2 2 14 20
5 2 2 2 14 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Name the layers of OSI does the encryption/decryption process.
2. Identify which OSI layer is responsible for binary transmission, cable specification and physical
aspects of network communication
3. Define PDU.
4. Label the types of flow control techniques that can be implemented in a network
5. Point the purpose of the preamble in Ethernet frame.
6. Outline the IEEE 802.2 standard represent in Ethernet technologies
7. Describe token pass in a token bus.
8. List the two functions of a router.
9. State the default port number for SMTP.
10. Point the purpose of HTTP protocol.
Understand
1. Demonstrate network topology which has a central device that brings all the signals together.
2. Distinguish Simplex, Half Duplex and Full Duplex transmission line modes.
3. Illustrate the error detection and correction methods designed for single bit detection or correction.
4. Represent the two features that make switches preferable to hubs in Ethernet-based network.
5. Indicate the incorrect VRC bit.
6. Distinguish between packet switching and circuit switching.
7. Classify the three WAN devices found in the cloud.
8. Paraphrase the two advantages of CIDR provided to a network.
9. Predict the primary disadvantage of telnet, when compared to SSH.
10. Express the port numbers included in the TCP header of a segment.
Apply
1. An 8-PSK system has an incoming data stream at 2400 bps. Compute the symbol rate of the
transmitter?
2. A data link between the head office of a financial organization and one of its branches runs
continuously at 2.048 Mbps. Between the hours of 0900 and 1700 it is noted that there are 295 bits
received in error. Calculate the bit error rate.
3. Demonstrate how the Hamming code is used to correct a single-bit error in the data stream.
4. Sketch which type of switching network is followed by internet.
5. Show which type of switching that provides a constant bandwidth for the complete duration of a
message transfer
6. When a collision occurs in a network using CSMA/CD, examine the hosts respond after the back
off period has expired?
7. A network is configured with the IP, IPX and AppleTalk protocols. Manipulate routing protocol is
recommended for this network.
8. Judge what metric does the RIP routing protocol consider being infinity.
Analyse
1. Classify the type of transmission mode of a telephone system.
2. Distinguish between connection-oriented transmission and connectionless transmission.
3. Point out which type of media is immune to EMI and RFI.
4. Contrast an analog signal with a digital signal.
5. Illustrate the two conclusions drawn when multiple errors detected in a transmission line.
6. A routing issue has occurred in you internetwork. Outline which type of devices should be
examined to isolate this error.
Create
1. In LAN installations where potential electrical hazards or electromagnetic interference may be
present, design type of media is recommended for backbone cabling.
2. A network administrator is required to use media in the network that can run up to 100 meters in
cable length without using repeaters. The chosen media must be inexpensive and easily installed.
The installation will be in a pre-existing building with limited cabling space. Design type of media
would best meet this requirement.
3. Create the CRC-4 character for the following message using a divisor constant of 10011:
1100 0110 1011 01
4. Design, construct and verify the operation of a parity generator circuit. The circuit allows selection
of even or odd parity and indicates when a parity error occurs. Another option for the circuit is to
operate with a choice of 7- or 8-bit data inputs.
5. A PC cannot connect to any remote websites, ping its default gateway or ping a printer that is
functioning properly on the location segment. Explain the action will verify that the TCP/IP stack
is functioning correctly on this PC?
15EI016 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC 3003
Course Objectives
To provide the basics of neural networks and fuzzy logic
To expose the concepts of feed forward and feedback neural networks
To understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems
To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve the complicated practical problems

1. Understand the concepts of feedback and feed forward neural networks.
2. Understand the concept of fuzzy set theory and fuzziness involved in various systems.
3. Apply neural networks and fuzzy logic concept in real time systems.
UNIT I 10 Hours
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK
Introduction - biological neuron and their artificial models - neuron modeling - learning rules - types of
neural networks - single layer - multi layer feed forward network - back propagation - learning factors.
UNIT II 9 Hours
NEURAL NETWORKS IN CONTROL APPLICATIONS
Feedback networks - Hopfield networks - applications of neural networks - process identification - artificial
neuro controller for inverted pendulum.
UNIT III 8 Hours

FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS
Classical sets - fuzzy sets - fuzzy operation - fuzzy relations - fuzzification - defuzzification - if-then rules.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL
Membership function - knowledge base - data base - rule base - decision-making logic - fuzzy logic
controller: Mamdani and Sugeno-Takagi architecture.
9 Hours
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
Fuzzy controller for inverted pendulum, image processing, blood pressure during anesthesia - introduction
to neuro-fuzzy controllers.
FOR FURTHER READING

Artificial neuro controller for real time control system - neuro-fuzzy modelling and control.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Jacek M. Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing House, New
Delhi,2006.
2. John Yen, Reza Langari, Fuzzy logic Intelligence, control and Information, Pearson
Education,1999.
3. H.J. Zimmerman, Fuzzy Set Theory-and its Applications, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New Delhi
2006.
4. B. Kosko, Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi 2009.
5. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi 2012.
New Delhi, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 1 1 5 4 3 1 1 1 1 20
2 2 3 1 4 3 1 3 2 1 20
3 3 1 1 4 2 1 2 1 1 2 18
4 4 1 1 5 3 2 1 1 1 1 20
5 4 2 2 3 4 1 3 1 2 22
Total 100
Remember
1. List the three basic elements of a neuron model.
2. Define defuzzification.
3. List the types of defuzzification.
4. List the applications of neural networks.
5. List some of the multilayer neural network.
6. List the advantages of the Back propagation algorithm.
7. Recall the various properties of fuzzy sets.
8. List the various applications of fuzzy logic.
9. Label different types of learning rules.
10. State the output of AND function neuron and OR function neuron.
11. State Hebbian learning rule.
12. Define Linguistic variable.
Understand
1. Summarise the simplified model of an artificial neuron.
2. Interpret the training and classification of continuous perception with an example.
3. Explain the back propagation algorithm with your own training sets.
4. Illustrate the perceptron multilayer network with its algorithm.
5. Indicate the various steps involved in designing a fuzzy control system.
6. Represent the various methods of defuzzification.
7. Formulate the fuzzy rule for home heating system.
8. Indicate the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference block.
9. Compute the role of knowledge based systems.
10. Explain the learning factors of neural network.
11. Represent the if then rules for fuzzy logic system.
Apply
1. Design the modeling of blood pressure control using neural network.
2. Find the techniques involved in pattern recognition.
3. Predict the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.
4. Demonstrate the controller based inverted pendulum using fuzzy logic.
5. Construct the artificial neuro controller for inverted pendulum.
6. lUse the fuzzy controllers for controlling the blood pressure during anesthesia.
7. Select the suitable controller for controlling the inverted pendulum whether fuzzy or neural
network.
8. Design the membership function for mamdani method with suitable examples.
Analyse
1. Predict the similarities and dissimilarities between fuzzy logic and neural networks.
2. Differentiate feed-forward and feed-back neural network.
3. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.
4. Justify how does ANN resemble brain?
5. Compare single layer perceptron classifier with multi-layer perceptron classifier.
6. Compare sugeno or mamdani fuzzy logic controller.
7. Identify the advantages of neuro-fuzzy controller than the other controllers.
Evaluate
1. Compare Fuzzy sets with Crisp sets.
2. Judge the method which is suitable for decision making.
3. Choose the controller which is suitable for real time applications and justify by supporting the same.
Create
1. Generate the fuzzy rules for controlling the invereted pendulum.
2. Relate the Sugeno and Mamdani methods for creating membership function.
3. Argue which method is suitable for controlling inverted pendulum whether the fuzzy or neural
network.
4. Generate and sketch the desirable state transitions between the vertices by assuming that the
vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used to represent eight states of recurrent
neural network with three bipolar binary neurons. The equilibrium states are p = [- 1 - 1 - 1] and
q = [1 1 1].
15EI017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN

3003
PAPER INDUSTRIES
Course Objectives
To understand the various unit operations in the paper industry
To find the alternative sensors and transducers for various measurements
To evolve the appropriate controls and schematics for specific applications
To know the world-class paper mills employing IT-enabled applications

1. Understand the basic operations of Paper Industry
2. Identify the design of Analyzers and instrumentation required for the Paper control loops used in
Paper Industry
3. Identify various process parameters in the paper industry
UNIT I 9 Hours
AN OVERVIEW OF PAPER MAKING PROCESS
Paper making process-Raw materials -Pulp separation-screening-Bleaching-Cooking-Chemical reaction-
chippers-types of digesters-H factor and Kappa factors-Stock preparation-Instrumentation needs Energy
conservation and paper quality control
UNIT II 11 Hours
PAPER PROPERTIES AND ITS MEASUREMENT
Physical, electrical, optical and chemical properties of paper-Basic weight, thickness, density, porosity,
smoothness, softness, hardness and compressibility-stress -strain relationship-Tensile strength, bursting
strength, tearing resistance, folding endurance, stiffness and impact strength -Dielectric constant, dielectric
strength, dielectric loss and Properties of electrical insulating paper - Brightness, colour, gloss and capacity
Starch constant acidity and pH-Measurement techniques
UNIT III 5 Hours

CONSISTENCY MEASUREMENT
Definition of consistency-Techniques for head box consistency measurement - Stock consistency
measurement and control
UNIT IV 10 Hours
PAPER MAKING MACHINE
Functioning of Paper making machine-Quality parameters-moisture, basic weight, caliper, brightness,
colour, ash content, strength, gloss and tensile strength - Parameters monitoring Instrumentation
UNIT V 10 Hours
CONTROL ASPECTS
Machine and cross direction control technique -consistency, moisture -and basic weight control -dryer
control-computer based control systems Mill wide control.
FOR FURTHER READING

Conventional measurements at wet end-pressure-vacuum-temperature-liquid density-specific gravity-
level-flow-consistency measurement
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Sankaranarayanan, P.E., Pulp and Paper Industries -Technology and Instrumentation Kotharis Desk
book series, 1995
2. Handbook of Pulp and Paper technology, Britt K.W.Van Nostrand Reinbold Company, 1970
3. James P.Casey , Pulp and Paper chemistry and chemical Technology, John Wiley and sons, 1981
4. Austin G.T., Shrencs Chemical Process Industries, McGraw Hill International Student Edition,
Singapore, 1985
5. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd .,New Delhi.2012.
New Delhi, 2009
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 2 1 6 2 6 18
2 2 2 2 6 2 2 16
3 1 1 1 2 1 2 6 6 20
4 2 6 2 12 22
5 1 1 2 4 2 6 2 6 24
Total 100
Remember
1. List the the types of wood used for making pulp.
2. State the objectives of bleaching the papers.
3. List any two temperature sensors used in paper industry mentioning the location of measurement.
4. Retrieve the raw materials to be considered for making paper.
5. Define the term consistency as used in paper and pulp industry.
6. Define pH of liquids and what is the pH value for pulp?
7. Recall the functioning of paper making machine.
8. Recognise the quality parameters of paper machine.
9. List types of valves used in pulp and paper making process.
10. Define condensate conductivity control.
Understand
1. Explain the pulping process with neat diagram.
2. Explain the different methods of pulp production to make different strengths and grades of paper
with schematic diagram.
3. Explain with hardware the measurement and control of density, specific gravity and thickness in
the pulp making process.
4. Explain the hardware used to monitor and control the pH of the pulp.
5. Compare head box consistancy measurement and stock consistancy measurement.
6. Explain the techniques for head box consistancy measurement.
7. Summarize the parameters monitoring instrumentation.
8. Explain in detail about paper making machine.
9. Illustrate the concept of mill wide control.
10. Explain in detail about flow measurement techniques used in paper industry
Apply
1. Compute the GSM weight of paper for the given details.
Weight of reel in kgs = 25
Length of paper in meter = 30
Reel width in cms = 15
2. Compute H factor for a cooking process.
3. Find the suitable digester for a paper making process.
4. Demonstrate the stress-strain relationship for a paper.
5. Select a suitable technique for pH measurement.
6. Assess the head box consistancy measurement of paper.
7. Carry-out the functioning of paper making machine.
8. Predict the suitable parameters monitoring instrument for paper industry.
9. Design a computer based control design for paper mill.
10. Implement a conventional method for specific gravity measurement in paper industry.
Analyse
1. Outline the various process variable in paper making process. Also explain the benefits, difficulties
and requirements of process control implementation in paper making process in details.
2. Compare the various types of transducers applied for the measurement of temperature in paper
making process.
3. Differentiate head box consistancy measurement and stock consistancy measurement in paper
industry.
4. Justify the need of quality control in paper industry.
5. Integrate the concept of paper making process.

6. Outline the parameters measuring instruments used in paper industry.
Evaluate
1. Determine the suitable method for measuring physical properties of paper.
2. Choose the appropriate instrument which is used to measure moisture content in paper.
3. Check whether the quality control in each process is needed for paper making industry?
4. Criticise the functioning of paper making machine.
Create
1. Derive the stress-strain relationship of paper
2. Relate H factor and Kappa factor of paper
3. Generalise the concept of computer control system in paper industry
15EI018 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM

3003
Course Objectives
To get adequate knowledge about various etching techniques in micromachining.
To understand the concept of micromachining techniques.

1. Classify the fabrication methods and materials used in MEMS
2. Identify the application of MEMS in sensor and actuator
3. Explain the uses of micro machining, polymer and optical MEMS
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS - Energy Domains and Transducers - Sensors and Actuators -
Introduction to Micro fabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes - New Materials - Review of Electrical
and Mechanical concepts in MEMS - Stress and strain analysis - Flexural beam bending - Torsional
deflection
UNIT II 11 Hours
SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-I
Physical, electrical, optical and chemical properties of paper - Electrostatic sensors - Parallel plate
capacitors - Applications - Interdigitated Finger capacitor - Comb drive devices - Thermal Sensing and
Actuation - Thermal expansion - Thermal couples - Thermal resistors - Applications - Magnetic Actuators
- Micromagnetic components - Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators
UNIT III 10 Hours

SENSORS AND ACTUATORS-II
Piezoresistive sensors - Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stress analysis of mechanical elements -
Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors - Piezoelectric sensors and actuators -
piezoelectric effects - piezoelectric materials - Applications to Inertia, Acoustic, Tactile and Flow sensors
- micro pumps
UNIT IV 8 Hours
MICRO MACHINING
Silicon isotropic Etching - isotrophic wet Etching - Dry Etching of Silicon - Plasma Etching - Deep Reaction
Ion Etching (DRIE) - Isotropic Wet Etching - Gas Phase Etchants - Case studies - Basic surface micro
machining processes - Structural and Sacrificial Materials - Acceleration of sacrificial Etch - Striction and
Antistriction methods - Assembly of 3D MEMS - Foundry process
UNIT V 7 Hours
POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS
Polymers in MEMS - Polyimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) - Parylene -Fluorocarbon -
Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors - Optical MEMS - Lenses and Mirrors -
Actuators for Active Optical MEMS
FOR FURTHER READING

Design analysis of MEMS capacitive differential pressure sensor for aircraft altimeter - Diaphragm design
for MEMS pressure sensors using Data mining tool
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education Inc., 2011
2. Nadim Maluf, An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design, Artech House, 2011
3. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC press Baco Raton, 2012
4. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2010
5. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay k. varadan and Osama O.Awadelkarim, Micro sensors MEMS and smart
devices, John Wiley & son LTD, 2010
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 2 2 18
3 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
4 2 2 6 2 3 2 6 23
5 2 2 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define MEMS
2. State sensor.
3. Define micro fabrication.
4. Define stress and strain.
5. Recall the significance of comb drives capacitive actuator.
6. Draw the micro technology subfields.
7. List out the types of flow sensors.
8. Recognize the acoustic sensor.
9. Recall micromachining process.

10. Define plasma etching.
11. Draw the various types of beams and their deflected shapes.
12. Outline the use of MEMS mirror chips in projection screen TVs
13. Define LCP
14. State PDMS
15. Draw the various types of beams and their deflected shapes
16. Define DRIE.
17. Define plasma etching
18. Recall micromachining process
19. Define inertia
Understand
1. Illustrate the materials and interfaces in a schematic microstructure.
2. Express the factors should be considered for selecting the tactile sensor
3. Discuss the lithographic patterning process.
4. Explain the assembly of 3D MEMS.
5. Summarize the fabrication process for a dual-valve unpowered micro flow system using parylene
as structural layer.
6. Elucidate the different types of etching process.
7. Explain the need of optical MEMS.
8. Show the process for fabricating micro fluid channels using PDMS.
9. Explain the need of optical MEMS.
11. Illustrate the materials and interfaces in a schematic microstructure
12. Compute the equation for the voltage difference between two parallel plates.
Apply
1. Show the process for fabricating micro fluid channels using PDMS.
2. Interpolate the Structural tests using a MEMS Acoustic Emission Sensor.
3. Examine the traffic flow control using surface acoustic wave sensors.
4. Explain the MEMS application in pavement condition monitoring.
5. Interpolate the Structural tests using a MEMS Acoustic Emission Sensor
6. Use optical sensors for Pipeline implementation
7. Explain the Structural tests using a MEMS Acoustic Emission Sensor
8. Explain any four application of MEMS in consumer electronic products
9. Explain the role of optical sensors for Pipeline implementation
10. Explain the traffic flow control using surface acoustic wave sensors
Analyse
1. Determine how airbags systems are triggered using MEMS accelerometer chip
2. Compare different types of etching process
3. Differentiate electrostatic sensors and piezoresistive sensors
4. Point out the role of lithographic patterning process
5. Outline the factors should be considered for selecting the tactile sensor
6. Determine the speed of the car using MEMS accelerometer
Evaluate
1. Compare electrostatic sensors and piezoresistive sensors.
2. Design and carry out experiments requiring the assembly of custom fixtures, materials
3. Outline the process for fabricating micro fluid channels using PDMS.
4. Determine the equation for the voltage difference between two parallel plates
Create
1. Invent a model of an Analog Devices ADXL202 and be able to explain how a MEMS accelerometer
works.
2. Design of heartbeat measuring transducer.
15EI019 INSTRUMENTATION IN AGRICULTURE 3003
Course Objectives
To get adequate knowledge about various sensors used in agriculture processes
To have a knowledge about applications in micromachining techniques
To know about automation process in agriculture field

1. Analyze/Select suitable sensors for various agriculture processes and testing
2. Monitoring Instrumentation set-up for various agriculture processes using Supervisory Control and
Data Acquisition
3. Explain the uses of automation in overall agriculture and related systems
UNIT I 9 Hours
AGRICULTURE FOR ENGINEERS
Introduction: Necessity of instrumentation and control for food processing - agriculture sensor requirements
- remote sensing, bio sensors in Agriculture - standards for food quality
UNIT II 9 Hours
SOIL SCIENCE AND SENSORS
Measurement of PH, conductivity, resistivity, temperature and soil - Moisture and salinity - Iron
concentration -Measurements methods of soil analysis - Instrumentation for environmental conditioning of
seed germination and growth
UNIT III 9 Hours

PROCESSES AND INSTRUMENTATION
Flow diagram of sugar plant and instrumentation set-up - Flow diagram of fermented and control (Batch
process) - Oil extraction plant and instrumentation set-up- Pesticides manufacturing process and control -
Flow diagram of Diary industry and instrumentation set-up - Juice extraction control set-up
UNIT IV 11 Hours
SCADA FOR AGRICULTURE
Application of SCADA for agriculture process parameters and control - Water distribution and management
control - Auto-Drip irrigation systems - Irrigation Canal management - upstream and downstream control
concepts and supervisory control
UNIT V 7 Hours
AGRICULTURE AUTOMATION
Automation in Earth Moving Equipment and farm implements - pneumatic, hydraulic and electronic control
circuits in harvesters, cotton pickers, tractors
FOR FURTHER READING

Green houses and Instrumentation: Ventilation, cooling and heating wind speed, temperature and humidity,
rain gauge, carbon dioxide enrichment measurement and control. Electromagnetic, radiation,
photosynthesis, infrared and CV, bio sensor methods in agriculture.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Perry G CIGR Handbook of Agricultural Engineering: Information technology, American Society
of Agricultural Engineers, 2006 Digitized 12 Apr 2011
2. Johnson C. D.Process Control Instrumentation Technology 7th Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2013
3. Jonathan Love Process Automation Handbook: A Guide to Theory and Practice, springer, 2007
4. Liptak B. G.Instrument Engineers Handbook, Process Measurement Volume I and Process Control
Volume II, 2005
5. D.Patranabis Industrial Instrumentation Tata McGraw Hill publications, New Delhi, 2010
6. Nadim Maluf, An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design, Artech House, 2004
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 6 2 6 16
2 2 2 4 8 2 2 6 26
3 2 4 4 2 4 16
4 2 2 6 2 2 6 20
5 2 2 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define standards for food quality
2. List any four uses of bio sensors in agriculture process
3. Define pH
4. Recall the resistivity of the soil
5. List any four merits of batch process
6. Define SCADA
7. Recall Auto-Drip in irrigation systems
8. Define pneumatic action
9. Recall automation in agriculture
Understand
1. With neat sketch illustrate the necessity of instrumentation and control in food processing
2. Indicate the requirements of sensors in agriculture processing
3. Explain any two measurement methods for soil analysis
4. Explain the role of the Instrumentation for environmental conditioning of seed germination and
growth
5. Explain the Flow diagram and instrumentation set-up for sugar plant
6. Explain the various steps involved to construct Flow diagram and instrumentation set-up for
fermented and control process
7. Explain about Pesticides manufacturing process
8. Explain about Water distribution and management control process
9. Explain Irrigation Canal management system
10. Explain Automation in Earth Moving Equipment and farm implementation process
Apply
1. Demonstrate remote sensing methodology in agriculture process
2. Execute any two methodology for moisture and salinity test of the soil
3. Execute instrumentation setup for oil extraction process
4. Demonstrate upstream and downstream control concepts and supervisory control
5. Demonstrate hydraulic control circuits in harvesters
Analyse
1. Differentiate bio sensors and transducers
2. Differentiate conductivity and resistivity
3. Attribute the steps involved to measure pH
4. Differentiate continuous and batch process
5. Attribute the steps involved to design control setup for juice extraction process
6. Demonstrate SCADA for agriculture process parameters and control
7. Differentiate electronic and hydraulic control
8. Attribute pneumatic, hydraulic and electronic control circuits in harvesters, cotton pickers, tractors
Create
1. Create hydraulic system for cotton pickers process
2. Create upstream and downstream control structure for agriculture process
15EI020 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3003

Course Objectives
To understand quality concepts and philosophies of TQM
To apply TQM principles and concepts of continuous improvement
To apply the quality tools, management tools and statistical fundamentals to improve quality.
To understand the quality systems and procedures adopted.

1. Understand the philosophy and core values of Total Quality Management (TQM)
2. Apply TQM principles ,quality tools, management tools and statistical fundamentals to improve
quality
3. Understand the quality systems and procedures
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Quality costs, Top Management Commitment,Quality
Council, Quality Statements, Barriers to TQM Implementation, Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby, Team Balancing
9 Hours
UNIT II
TQM PRINCIPLES
Customer satisfaction - Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality,Customer
Retention, Continuous Process Improvement,5S, Kaizen, Just-In-Time and TPS Partnering
UNIT III 9 Hours

STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL
The seven tools of quality, New seven Management tools, Statistical Fundamentals - Measures of central
Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for variables and
attributes, Concept of six sigma.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
TQM TOOLS
Quality Policy Deployment (QPD), Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Benchmarking,Taguchi Quality
Loss Function, Total Productive Maintenance (TPM), FMEA
UNIT V 9 Hours
QUALITY SYSTEMS
Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems, ISO 9001:2008 Quality System - Elements,Implementation
of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, ISO 14001:2004
FOR FURTHER READING

Basic statistics,Hypotheses,t Test,F test, one factor,two factors,full factorials,fractional factorials
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Dale H.Besterfiled,Total Quality Management, Pearson Education,2011
2. James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay,The Management and Control of Quality,South-Western
(Thomson Learning), 2012.
3. J. S. Oakland,Total Quality Management, Butterworth?Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford. 2010
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 2 4 6 2 20
2 2 4 2 6 6 20
3 2 2 5 6 6 4 25
4 4 4 2 6 4 20
5 2 4 6 3 15
Total 100
Remember
1. List the steps of FMEA.
2. Define the quality dimensions.
3. State demings philosophy
4. Label the 7 tools of QC.
5. Recall the various types of quality costs.
6. State the duties of quality council.
7. State 5s principles of quality management
8. Define benchmarking
9. Reproduce the concept of six sigma and its implications.
10. Retrieve the needs of ISO 9000 in quality
Understand
1. Abstract the evolution of TQM.
2. Represent the various process involved in ISO 9000 implementation and certification
3. Explain Taguchis loss function.
4. Interpret the concept of optimum quality cost.
5. Indicate the various steps involved in bagging the demings quality award.
6. Summarise the concept behind statistical fundamentals of quality management
7. Infer the reason for implementing kaizen in an organization to improve quality
8. Illustrate the various elements of system quality
9. Compare QFD with QPD
10. Represent the control charts for variables and attributes
Apply
1. Compute eight creative ideas for the improvement of quality in a field of your choice.
2. Implement your own ideas to provide quality system by applying the necessary principles and tools
of TQM
3. Execute the team balancing concept in short notes
4. Carry out the layout (plan) of the company by your own ideas to provide quality systems by
considering you as the production engineer
5. Demonstrate with an example to prove the importance of TQM in the current scenario.
6. Select the concepts of control chart available for problem solving to control the quality of statistical
process with an example
7. Identify an external agency and implement the process of auditing for an educational institution
by following the concern quality factors.
8. Execute your own ideas to improve the quality of the product
9. Choose the best method of handing to improve the Customer Retention
10. select an appropriate scheme to enhance employee involvement
Analyse
1. Organize the role of leadership in implementing TQM
2. Outline the steps involved in constructing a house of quality
3. Justify that the productivity improvement is due to total productive maintenance.
4. Differentiate between quality cost and quality council
5. Attribute your words to improve the customer satisfication based on various principles of TQM
6. Predict the tools of TQM and explain it
7. Show with an example that ISO 9000 and various other quality systems are necessary to improve
quality
Evaluate
1. Support your own words to improve quality
2. Choose the best principles of TQM to satisfy the customer and eluciate the same
3. Determine the various techniques for implementation of quality systems
4. Determine the needs of ISO 9000 over other standard quality system
5. Judge your words to prove that the various quality standards are necessary to produce quality
systems
6. Criticise the contribution of Demings over Juran
Create
1. Generate the plan for creating an organization is now thinking of adopting and implementing TQM
practices.
2. Generalize the theme how you would go about carrying out this task, if you have been hired as an
external consultant for this purpose?
3. Produce your own opinion about quality systems if various standards like ISO 9000 and ISO
9001:2004 where not processed.
15EI021 INSTRUMENTATION IN FOOD

3003
PROCESSING INDUSTRIES
Course Objectives
To provide exposure to various techniques and methods that occurs in the various regions of food
analysis
To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques for analysis of food substances
To understand the concepts of electrodes and biosensors that has potential applications in food and
beverage industries

1. To understand role of analytical and bio- analytical sensing and instrumentation in food process
industries and apply the various techniques used in analysis of food
2. Summarize the concepts of automatic controllers and its application in food industry
3. Understand several seperation techniques and spectroscopic methods and apply for unique food
technology related case study
UNIT I 9 Hours
MOISTURE, TURBIDITY AND HUMIDITY MEASUREMENTS
Role of moisture content in food - wet and dry method - IR technique. Humidity - Definitions - role in food
processing - classical types - wet and dry bulb hygrometer - Electronic methods. Turbidity and colour:
Definition and role, standards and units, basic turbidity meter, light scattering and absorbtion type
UNIT II 9 Hours
FOOD ENZYMES AND FLAVOUR
Food enzymes and flavour : Human olfaction - Importance of enzyme sensors - biosensors -sensing arrays
- Electronics Nose.
UNIT III 9 Hours

CONTROLLERS AND INDICATORS
Basic control concept - Temperature controller in dryer - ration control in food pickling -atmospheric
controller in food preservation
UNIT IV 9 Hours
CHROMATOGRAPHY AND MASS SPECTROMETRY IN FOOD INDUSTRY
Basics of gas and liquid chromatography - GC and HPLC Application in food analysis - MS application in
food analysis
UNIT V 9 Hours
OTHER ANALYTICAL EQUIPMENTS
Fourier transform Infra red spectroscopy, Scanning electron microscopy, Tandem Electron Microscopy
FOR FURTHER READING

X-ray fluorescence - Differential Scanning Calorimenter
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Nielsen, S.S,-Introduction to the chemical analysis of foods- Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Boston,
London 2004.
2. Mahindru,S.N, -Food additives. Characteristics, detection and estimation-. Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi 2000.
3. B.G.Liptak, ed -Instrument Engineers Handbook: Process Measurement and Analysis-,
Butterworth &Heinemann, 1995
4. R G. Moreira, T.P Coultate Automatic Control for Food Processing System. 2001.
5. Willard, H.H., L. L. Merrit, J. A. Dean and F. L. Seattle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis, CBS
Publishing Co, New York,2010
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 4 5 5 20
2 4 4 6 6 20
3 2 2 4 6 6 20
4 2 4 6 8 20
5 2 4 6 2 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define moisture
2. List the techniques for determine the moisture content in food
3. List the various classical types of food processing
4. Reproduce the importance of enzyme sensors
5. Retrieve the basic concepts of controllers
6. State chromatography
7. List the application of chromatography and spectrometry in food processing industries
8. Define spectrometry
9. List the various analytical equipments of spectrometer
10. Expand the term a. GC b. HPLC c.MS
Understand
1. Identify the best method of moisture measurement and explain the same
2. Represent the few words to determine needs of instrumentation in food processing industries
3. Illustrate the few words about temperature controller in dryer
4. Abstract the concept behind GC and HPLC application in food analysis
5. Subsume the necessity of fourier transform Infra red Spectroscopy
6. Formulate the construction and working of scanning electron microscopy
7. Extrapolate the specialty of Tandem Electron Microscopy
8. Indicate the Difference behind the wet and dry bulb hygrometer
9. Represent the role of controller in food processing
10. Abstract Human olfaction
Apply/Analysis
1. Construct and explain the ratio control in food pickling
2. Compute the ideas of atmospheric controller in food preservation
3. Predict the controller which is suitable for food processing technique and explain the same
4. Design and explain Bio-sensors
5. Assess few words about sensing arrays
6. Justify your own words to prove that controller is very essential in food processing industries
7. Compare electronic nose and sensing arrays
8. Compare humidity and moisture
9. Outline the various standards and units of moisture, Turbidity and Humidity
Evaluate
1. Support by few word that instrumentation is essential in all processing industries with application
2. Choose the best method of chromatographic techniques and elaborate
3. Determine the basic concept behind the turbidity meter
Create
1. Relate the three analytical equipments of spectroscopy to evaluate them
2. Generate a plan to revoke the problem of food processing industries in the areas of
instrumentation (Case Study)
15EI022 JAVA PROGRAMMING

3003
Course Objectives
Impart the fundamental concepts of core JAVA
Gain programming skills in JAVA.
Gain the built in knowledge of standalone and web applications

1. Identify the syntax, semantics and classes in Java language.
2. Demonstrate the concepts of OOPs
3. Explore the concept of Input and Output in Java.
4. Develop programs using strings.
5. Implement programs in Applet, AWT and Event handlers in Java.
UNIT I 9 Hours
JAVA BASICS
The Genesis of Java - Overview of Java - Data Types, Variables, and Arrays - Operators - Control
Statements -Introducing Classes - Methods and Classes
UNIT II 9 Hours
OOPS AND MULTITHREADED PROGRAMMING IN JAVA
Inheritance: Basics - Using Super ?? Creating a Multilevel Hierarchy - Method overriding ?? Using
Abstract Classes -Packages and Interfaces: Packages - Access Protection - Importing Packages- Interfaces
Definitions and Implementations - Exception Handling: Types - Try and Catch - Throw - Multithreaded
Programming: Creating Threads - Inter Thread Communication
UNIT III 9 Hours

I/O AND EXPLORING JAVA.IO
I/O Basics - Reading Console Input -Writing Console output - Native Methods - I/ O Classes and Interfaces
- File -The Byte Streams - The Character Streams - Using Stream I/ O Serialization
UNIT IV 9 Hours
STRING HANDLING
String Handling: Special String operations and Methods - Sting Buffer - Exploring java.lang: Simple type
Wrappers -System - Math - Collections Framework: Collections Interfaces and Classes - Utility Classes:
String Tokenizer - Date and Time
UNIT V 9 Hours
APPLETS, EVENT HANDLING AND AWT
Applet Basics - Applet Architecture - Applet Display Methods - Parameter Passing - Event Handling
Mechanisms -Event Classes - Event Listener - Working with Windows , Graphics , Colors and Fonts -
AWT Controls - Layout Managers and Menus - JDBC Concepts
FOR FURTHER READING

Spring framework - Container concepts - DAO Support and JDBC Framework - An introduction to
Hibernate 3.5 - Integrating and configuring Hibernate - Building a Sample Application
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Herbert Schildt, Java 2-Complete Reference, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2011.
2. Deitel &Deitel, Java How to Program, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
3. Gary Cornell and Cay S.Horstmann, Core Java Vol.1 and Vol.2, Sun Microsystems Press, 2008.
4. Herbert Schildt, Java, A Beginner's Guide, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 2 4 20
3 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
4 2 2 6 2 3 6 21
5 2 2 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. List the five buzzwords of java.
2. Define byte code
3. Define JVM.
4. List the three usage of native methods
5. Recognize the rules of using static keyword.
6. Recall final keyword
7. Label the three features of swing.
8. Label the three advantages of AWT in java.
9. Recall session tracking.
10. Define JDBC.
Understand
1. Classify the types of inheritance.
2. Compare Break and Continue statement in java.
3. Illustrate the exception handling in java with an example.
4. Illustrate the differences between method overloading and method overriding.
5. Represent InputStreamReader with an example.
6. Compare character streams and byte streams in handling input.
7. Classify the differences between equals () and == in java string in terms of their function and output.
8. Classify the differences between length() and capacity() in string buffer in terms of their function
and output.
9. Explain parameter passing in applet.
10. Represent the choice controls in AWT.
Apply
1. Implement the concept of function overloading to add int, float and double datatype.
2. Demonstrate the access control specifier with an example program.
3. Show the usage of String args[] in main method to read characters using command line arguments.
4. Implement multi level inheritance for a banking system.
5. Construct a package to explain the four access specifier.
6. Execute native methods to change the value of a variable in c.
7. Demonstrate the creation of menus using AWT.
8. Demonstrate Applet Architecture.
9. Demonstrate the methods in string buffer and string.
10. Show the differences methods and package.
Analyse
1. Outline the differences between while and do while loop.
2. Compare if-then and switch case.
3. Java does not support multiple inheritance. Justify.
4. Contrast the keywords final and finally in terms of class, methods and exception.
5. Differentiate methods and native methods.
6. Compare string and string buffer in string manipulations
7. Organize the process of parameters passing in applet and methods.
8. Outline the creation of menus using AWT.
Evaluate
1. Determine the output of the following
class Super {
private int a;
protected Super(int a) { this.a = a; }
}
class Sub extends Super {
public Sub(int a) { super(a); }
public Sub() { this.a=5; }
}
2. Determine which can directly access and change the value of the variable name
package test;
class Target {
public String name = "hello";
}
Create
1. Generate the following output using class and methods
01
024
0369
0 4 8 12 16
0 5 10 15 20 25
0 6 12 18 24 30 36
0 7 14 21 28 35 42 49
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64
0 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81
2. Derive a program to find the longest substrings without repeating characters. Iterate through the
given string, find the longest maximum substrings.
3. Given array is already sorted, and it has duplicate elements. Generate a program to remove
duplicate elements and return new array without any duplicate elements. The array should contain
only unique elements.
15EI023 FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSIS 3003

Course Objectives
To understand different Fault Detection and Diagnosis methods
To impart knowledge and skills needed to design and detect sensor and actuators faults using
structured residual approach and directional structured residual approach
To give an overview about advanced level issues in Fault Detection and Diagnosis

1. Explain different approaches of Fault Detection and Diagnosis methods
2. Design and detect sensor and actuators faults using structured residual approach and directional
structured residual approach
3. Gain knowledge in advanced level issues in Fault Detection and Diagnosis
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSIS
Scope of FDD, Types of faults and different tasks of Fault Diagnosis and Implementation - Different
approaches to FDD: Model free and Model based approaches - Classification of Fault and Disturbances -
Different issues involved in FDD - Typical applications.
UNIT II 9 Hours
ANALYTICAL REDUNDANCY CONCEPTS
Introduction - Mathematical representation of Fault and Disturbances: Additive and Multiplicative types -
Residual Generation: Detection, Isolation, Computational and stability properties - Design of Residual
generator - Residual specification and Implementation.
UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN OF STRUCTURED RESIDUALS
Introduction - Residual structure of single fault Isolation: Structural and Canonical structures - Residual
structure of Multiple fault Isolation: Diagonal and Full Row canonical concepts - Introduction to parity
equation implementation and alternative representation.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
DESIGN OF DIRECTIONAL STRUCTURED RESIDUALS
Introduction to Directional Specifications: Directional specification with and without disturbances - Parity
Equation Implementation Linearly dependent column.
UNIT V 9 Hours
ADVANCED LEVEL ISSUES AND DESIGN INVOLVED IN FDD
Introduction to Residual generation of parametric fault - Robustness Issues - Statistical Testing of Residual
generators - Applications of Neural and Fuzzy logic schemes in FDD - Case study
FOR FURTHER READING

Different types of faults in Control valves Automatic detection, quantification and compensation of valve
stiction
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Janos J. Gertler Fault Detection and Diagnosis in Engineering systems - 2nd Edition, Macel
Dekker, 2014.
2. Chiang, Leo H., Richard D. Braatz, and Evan L. Russell. Fault detection and diagnosis in Industrial
systems, Springer Science & Business Media, 2013.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 4 2 4 6 2 2 20
3 8 2 6 2 3 21
4 4 4 6 2 3 2 21
5 4 6 6 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define FDD.
2. State stability properties.
3. List any two approaches to FDD.
4. Draw the residual structure of single fault Isolation
5. List the frequency domain specifications.
6. Define Passive Fault-tolerant Control.
7. Recall the function of State Observer.
8. Reproduce parity equation.
9. List any four types of faults in Control valves.
10. Define compensation of valve stiction.
Understand
1. Compare between Model free and Model based approaches to FDD.
2. Infer Residual Generation.
3. Compare Passive Fault-tolerant Control- Active Fault tolerant Control.
4. Indicate the relation between Structural and Canonical structures of single fault Isolation.
5. Illustrate Fault-tolerant Control Architecture.
6. Summarize the different types of faults in Control valves.
7. Indicate directional specification with and without disturbances.
8. Summarize Fault tolerant Control of Three-tank System.
9. Compare Generalized Likelihood Ratio Approach Marginalized Likelihood Ratio Approach.
10. Explain Norms based residual evaluation and threshold computation.
Apply
1. Demonstrate Fault-tolerant Control Architecture.
2. Show the Mathematical representation of Faults and Disturbances.
3. Implement fault diagnosis system using State Observer State Estimators.
4. Demonstrate Residual structure of single fault Isolation.
5. Construct Diagnosis and Fault-tolerant control architecture of chemical process.
6. Execute Fault-tolerant Control design against major actuator failures.
7. Show parity equation implementation and alternative representation in structured residuals.
8. Construct Fault tolerant Control of Three-tank System.
9. Execute Fault tolerance Principles for actuator compensation.
10. Design Diagnosis and Fault-tolerant control for chemical process.
Analyse
1. Differentiate Model free and Model based approaches to FDD.
2. Attribute Residual structure of multiple fault Isolation.
3. Contrast between passive and active Fault-tolerant Control.
4. Justify whether Likelihood Ratio Approach leads optimum threshold settings or not.
5. Outline the Fault-tolerant Control design against major actuator failures.
6. Compare Diagonal and Full Row canonical concepts.
7. Differentiate quantification and compensation in valve stiction
Create
1. Derive mathematical expression for Likelihood Ratio Approach.
2. Derive mathematical expression for Marginalized Likelihood Ratio Approach.
3. Combine active and passive fault-tolerant control structure for Three-tank System.
4. Relate Fault-tolerant Control design against major actuator failures.
5. Derive expression for Statistical methods based residual evaluation and threshold settings.
15EI024 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM DESIGN 3003

Course Objectives
To design and analyse various circuits for Industrial primary devices
To study the standard symbol of instrumentation system and design of piping and instrumentation
diagram

1. Design and analyse various circuits for Industrial primary devices.
2. Study the standard symbol of instrumentation system and design of piping and instrumentation
diagram
UNIT I 9 Hours
DESIGN OF SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS
Design of V/I Converter and I/V Converter - Analog and Digital filter design and Adaptive filter design -
Signal conditioning circuit for pH measurement, Air-purge Level Measurement - Signal conditioning circuit
for Temperature measurement: Thermocouple, RTD and Thermistor - Cold Junction Compensation and
Linearization - software and hardware approaches
UNIT II 9 Hours
DESIGN OF TRANSMITTERS
Introduction to 2 wire and 4 wire transmitters - Design of RTD based Temperature Transmitter,
Thermocouple based Temperature Transmitter and Capacitance based Level Transmitter and Smart Flow
Transmitters
UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGN OF DATA LOGGER AND PID CONTROLLER
Design of ON/OFF Controller using Linear Integrated Circuits - Electronic PID Controller -
Microcontroller based Digital Two-degree of freedom PID Controller - Microcontroller based Data Logger
- Design of PC based Data Acquisition Cards
UNIT IV 9 Hours
ORIFICE AND CONTROL VALVE SIZING
Orifice, Venturi and flow nozzle Sizing - Liquid, Gas and steam services - Control valve Sizing - Liquid,
Gas and steam Services - Rotameter Design.
UNIT V 9 Hours
DESIGN OF ALARM AND ANNUNCIATION CIRCUIT
Alarm and Annunciation circuits using Analog and Digital Circuits - Design of Programmable Logic
Controller - Design of configurable sequential controller using PLDs
FOR FURTHER READING

PCB board design guidelines - layout scheme - single and multilayer PCB
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. C. D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology, 8th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2012.
2. Control Valve Handbook, 4th Edition, Emerson Process Management, Fisher Controls
International, 2013.
3. R.W. Miller, Flow Measurement Engineering Handbook, Mc-Graw Hill, New York 2011.
4. Bela G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Handbook - Process Control and Optimization,4th Edition,
Vol.2, CRC Press, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 6 20
3 2 2 2 6 6 6 24
4 2 6 8 8 24
5 2 4 6 4 16
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Sensitivity
2. State Peltier effect
3. Define Self heating
4. State Seeback effect
5. Draw a circuit to convert voltage to current using op amp
6. Define Dew point.
7. Draw the calibration circuit of RTD
8. List out the advantages of Thermocouple
9. Outline the requirements of air in air purge level measurement.
10. Define linearization
11. List the features of capacitance based level transmitter
12. Describe the working principle of capacitance based level transmitter
13. Define transmitter
14. Name the three methods of capacitance based level measurement

15. List the metals used for Resistance Thermometers
16. Quote the equation for change in resistance of RTD
17. List the requirements of the conductor material employed in RTD
18. Draw the symbolic representation of level, flow, temperature and pressure transmitter.
19. List the methods used to extract signal from noise in thermocouple based temperature
measurement.
20. List the materials required for calibration of RTD.
21. List the various types of thermocouples and the alloys used for manufacturing it.
22. List the types of transmitters
23. Define data logger.
24. Define standalone data logger.
25. Recognize the need for ADC and DAC in PC based data acquisition system.
26. Define Pressure recovery factor.
27. Define cavitation and flashing
Understand
1. Indicate the force balance equation involved in rotameter design.
2. Indicate the need for control valve characteristics.
3. Tell the drawbacks of valve over sizing.
4. Illustrate the design procedure involved in orifice sizing with the help of necessary equation
5. Explain the various aspects to be considered in control valve selection and need for sizing.
6. Recall the formulae for valve co-efficient in case of liquids, gases, steam and vapors in control
valve sizing and explain the valve co-efficient of control valve.
7. Summarize the design of Rotameter using appropriate expressions and parameters involved.
8. Explain the design of orifice for a given flow condition of liquid services.
9. Discuss the design procedure for venturi and flow nozzle sizing in detail for gas services.
10. Explain the working of fire alarm panels.
11. Explain the working of annunciator panels in process control.
12. Indicate the expression for the output voltage of PI controller.
13. Indicate the expression for the output voltage of PID controller.
14. Explain an application of microcontroller based data logger using appropriate diagrams.
15. Explain two position controller by implementing it using op-amp circuits and appropriate resistance
values.
16. Illustrate microcontroller based digital two-degree of freedom PID controller.
17. Outline the considerations for selecting capacitance probe in level measurement.
18. Illustrate the operating principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of Capacitance based
level transmitter.
19. Interpret the procedure for transmitter selection and explain about intelligent Transmitters
20. Summarize the various digital communication protocols employed in transmitters
21. Distinguish transmitters and transducers.
22. Explain the bubbler method of level measurement along with its signal conditioning circuit.
23. Explain in detail about the thermocouple sensors and the technique used to eliminate the effect of
noise while measurement.
24. A type K thermocouple with a 750F reference produces a voltage of 35.56mV. Indicate the
temperature?
25. Indicate the need of reference junction compensation.
Apply
1. Compute the seeback E.M.F for a material with =50V/oC if the junction temperatures are 200C
and 1000C.
2. A voltage of 23.72mV is measured with a type K thermocouple at a 0 0C reference. Calculate the
temperature of the measurement junction.
3. A J type thermocouple with a 250C reference is used to measure oven temperature from 3000C to
4000C. Compute the output voltages correspond to these temperatures?
4. Sketch the signal conditioning circuit for RTD
5. An RTD has 0 =0.005/0 C, R=500, and a dissipation constant PD=30mW/0C at 200C. The RTD
is used in a bridge circuit such as that R1=R2=500 and R3 variable resistor used to nullify the
bridge. If the supply is 10V and the RTD is placed in a bath at 100C, Calculate the value of R3.
6. If a type J thermocouple is to measure 10000 C at a -1000C reference. Compute the voltage to be
produced.
7. A type-J thermocouple is to be used in a measurement system that must provide an output of 2V at
200C. A solid state temperature sensor system will be used to provide reference temperature
correction. The sensor has three terminals. Supply voltage, output voltage and ground. The output
voltage varies as 8mV/C. Design the complete circuit.
8. Sketch the circuit for linear approximation of Resistance Temperature Detectors
9. A type S thermocouple with a -50 C reference measures 12.120mV. Calculate the junction
temperature
10. A proportional derivative controller has a 0.4 to 2 V input measurement range, a 0-5 V output,
Kp=5%/% and kD=0.08%/(%/min). The period of the fastest expected signal is 1.5s. Compute the
parameters and implement this controller with an op-amp circuit.
11. Use microcontroller based digital two-degree of freedom PID controller for an industrial
application.
12. A inch chlorine line at 80F carries 200pounds per hour. The upstream pressure is 55psi and it
discharges into a tank at atmospheric pressure. Compute the valve coefficient of control valve to
be installed adjacent to the tank and recommend a valve type.
13. Examine the actual flow to standard flow conversion
14. Calculate the valve co-efficient for a valve that allow 150gal of ethyl alcohol per minute with
specific gravity of 0.8 at maximum pressure of 50psi.
15. An equal percentage valve has a maximum flow of 50cm3/s and minimum flow rate of 2cm3/s. If
the full travel is 3cm. Calculate the flow at 1cm opening.
Analyse / Evaluate
1. Compute the seeback E.M.F for a material with =50V/oC if the junction temperatures are 200C
and 1000C.
2. A voltage of 23.72mV is measured with a type K thermocouple at a 0 0C reference. Calculate the
temperature of the measurement junction.
3. A J type thermocouple with a 250C reference is used to measure oven temperature from 3000C to
4000C. Compute the output voltages correspond to these temperatures?
4. Sketch the signal conditioning circuit for RTD
Create
1. Construct a PC based data acquisition card for an industrial application.
2. Design an orifice plate as per BS1042 for the application liquid (Sulphuric Acid)
Flow range:600-1500kg/min
Flow temperature-50C
Co-efficient of volume expansion(2)-1.8x10-5/C
Density at 0C -1.14g/cc
Room temperature-28C
Diameter of pipe-15.24cm
Upstream pressure-5.2x105 Pa
Dynamic viscosity at 50C -0.015g/cm
Pressure tapping-flange
Co-efficient of volume expansion(1)-1.1x10-5/C
Co-efficient of volume expansion(3)-0.00202/C
3. Design a rotameter using the following data.
Pipe diameter: 5.1cm
r=2.55cm
Differential pressure across rotameter-60cm WC
f-920kg/m3
p- 2850kg/m3 and Qmax=2500x10-6m3/sec
15EI025 BUILDING AUTOMATION 3003
Course Objectives
To understand the principles and application of Building Automation system and building process
control
To study the dynamic performance of building processes/systems, control fundamentals and
building process control.
To get knowledge in security systems

1. Understand the concepts of sensors and instrumentation in building automation systems.
2. Analyse the concepts of safety
3. Develop efficient systems in building automation systems
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Fundamentals: Introduction to HVAC- Basic Processes (Heating, Cooling) Basic Science - Air Properties
- Psychometric Chart - Heat Transfer mechanisms - Human Comfort: Human comfort zones - Effect of
Heat, Humidity - Heat loss.
UNIT II 9 Hours
PROCESSES
Heating Process & Applications: Boiler, Heater - Cooling Process and Applications: Chillers - Ventilation
Process and Applications - Central Fan System - AHU - Exhaust Fans - Unitary Systems - VAV, FCU -
Energy Saving concept & methods - Lighting control - Building efficiency improvement - Green Building
- Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Certification concept and examples.
UNIT III 10 Hours

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (FAS)
Introduction to fire alarm system - Fire modes, History, Components, and Principles of operation FAS
Components: Field Components, Panel Components and Applications. FAS Architectures: Types of
Architectures, Examples. FAS loops: Classification of loops, Examples. Power Supply design for FAS.
Cause & effect matrix: Examples. Fire Standards: FAS Design procedure in brief, NFPA 72A, BS 5839,
Indian Standards.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Introduction to Security Systems, Concepts Access Control System: Access Components, Access control
system Design. CCTV: Camera: Operation & types, Camera Selection Criteria, DVR Based system, DVM,
Network design, Storage design and CCTV Applications
UNIT V 8 Hours
PERIMETER INTRUSION
Concept, Components, Technology and Advanced Applications Security Design: Security system design
for verticals.
FOR FURTHER READING

Applications of Building Management Systems
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Reinhold A. Carlson, Robert A. Di Giandomenico, Understanding Building Automation
Systems (Direct Digital Control, Energy Management, Life Safety, Security, Access Control,
Lighting, Building Management Programs), R.S. Means Company, Inc 2012.
2. William B. Riddens, Understanding Automotive Electronics, Sixth Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann Woburn, 2010.
3. Michael F. Hordeski, HVAC Control in the New Millennium, First edition, Fairmont Press, 2011.
4. NJATC, Building Automation Control Devices and applications, First edition, Amer Technical
Pub, 2012.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 4 2 6 4 4 24
2 2 2 6 2 4 4 20
3 4 4 2 4 4 18
4 2 2 4 5 5 18
5 2 2 4 4 4 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Define intelligent building.
2. Recall BAS.
3. List the different systems in BAS.
4. List the different types of mounting for humidity sensors in BAS.

5. Recall Fire.
6. Label the conventional Fire Alarm System
7. List the component within Fire Alarm System
8. List the basic Component of Access Control System.
9. Label the basic components of CCTV system.
10. List the types of Camera.
11. List the types of cameras.
Understand
1. Illustrate the evolution of intelligent buildings.
2. Summarize the importance of each system in BAS.
3. Explain the process of BAS design.
4. Illustrate the working principle, characteristics of different types of temperature sensors RTD,
Thermister, Thermocouple, Bimetallic strip.
5. Explain the working principle of Dry bulb & Wet bulb Psychrometer.
6. Explain different types of mounting for air & water flow meters Measurement of CO2 level in air.
7. Explain the operation of different modes in AHU
8. Illustrate the working of different types of AHU with combination of 100% outdoor air, mixed air,
constant volume, variable volume, dual duct, single duct.
9. Explain the Heat recovery techniques.
10. Summarize the concept of Variable Air Volume (VAV) system.
11. Illustrate the design and working of radiation coil and chilled beam.
12. Illustrate the design and working of CRAC unit and VRV systems.
13. Illustrate the design and working of unit heater, Fan coil unit and unit ventilator.
14. Describe various terminal unit systems
CAV
VAV
FCU
UV
15. Explain the Architecture of BAS system.
16. Classify the Fire Alarm System.
17. Exemplify FAS architecture and its types.
18. Exemplify the Fire Alarm System loops
19. Explain the working Principles of Fire Alarm devices and its working Application in building
safety.
20. Explain the basic concepts of Access Control System.
21. Illustrate the features and working principle of Access Control System Devices.
22. Explain the system Architecture of Access Control System.
23. Explain the system Architecture of CCTV System.
24. Summarize Video Management Systems (VMS).
25. Explain the CCTV System Architecture.
Apply
1. Design the comfort parameters for human being temperature, humidity, flow, pressure, clean air,
Co2%.
2. Design the different components in AHU damper, filter, cooling coil, heating coil, fan, heat
recovery wheel, and humidifier.
3. Find the battery calculations and its requirement and design
4. Assess the difference between Straight cable and Cross Cable.
5. Find the camera calculations parameters in VMS.

6. Identify the cable used in Access Control System.
7. Find the cause and effect MatrixFire alarm system.
8. Mention the uses of different types of VAV CAV.
9. Find the parameters affecting building operation.
10. Show the role of different stakeholders in BAS system design.
Analyse
1. Compare intelligent architecture and structure.
2. Construct the stages of Fire Alarm System
3. Outline the components of fire alarm detection system, SLC wiring and its classification.
4. Conclude the technology and application of Intrusion systems.
5. Conclude the benefits of Access Control System.
6. Compare the classification of FAS loops.
7. Compare the various terminal unit systems
8. Outline the basic Fire Alarm System.
9. Conclude the need of Fire alarm System.
10. Conclude the need of Access Control of System.
Evaluate
1. Determine the power supply requirement and its designing parameters.
2. Choose the terminology for Cameras.
3. Choose the Fire terminologies.
15EI026 FIELD INSTRUMENTS AND PROCESS

3003
CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION
Course Objectives
To study the commissioning and calibration of field instruments
To understand real time controllers and communication protocols for various closed loop systems
To get knowledge in application of PLC and SCADA in process industries
1. Explain the various commissioning and calibration techniques for field instruments in process
industries
2. Understand real time controllers and communication protocols for various closed loop systems
3. Gain knowledge in logical application of PLC and SCADA in each individual process
UNIT I 9 Hours
FIELD INSTRUMENTS
Hands on training for configuration - commissioning - troubleshooting - calibration - Pressure transmitter
- Temperature transmitter - Level transmitter - Flow transmitter - pH measurement - Humidity - Vibration
UNIT II 8 Hours
CONTROL SCHEMES
Controllers - two position - PID - Tuning of PID - Process characters - Single capacity process - Multi
capacity process - Feed back - Feed forward - Cascade - Ratio - Split range
UNIT III 8 Hours

FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL COMMUNICATION
Control valve - Solenoid valve - Motor operated valve - Actuators (Pneumatic & Electric) - Serial
communication - Device net - Field bus - MOD bus - Profi bus - Ethernet - Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE)
UNIT IV
PLC AND SCADA
Introduction to PLCs - ladder logic programming - PLC system configuration - PLC hardware configuration
- Identify Honeywell ML 200 PLC CPU, I/O Modules, Communication modules - Plan the ML 200R PLC
including the selection of appropriate I/O, redundancy and communications - ML 200R configuration and
use of soft master Programming tool
UNIT V 10 Hours
PLC HARDWARE INTERFACING
Building a project, implementing redundancy functions and downloading to PLC - Monitoring basics
(Start/Pause/Resume/Stop monitoring), online editing, and force I/O - Debugging basics, use of
breakpoints, reset and clear PLC - Identify function blocks in library - Use of PID function block -
Communicate via SNET, FENET, Profi bus DP modules Overview of SCADA system
FOR FURTHER READING

Understanding memory addressing, variables, and data types - Trouble shooting & maintenance of PLC
Total 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Curtis D. Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation technology, Pearson new international edition,
2013
2. George Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012
3. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical data communications for instrumentation and
control, Newnes/Elsevier, 2013
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 1 3 4 2 4 4 1 1 1 23
2 1 1 1 4 4 3 1 2 2 1 20
3 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 17
4 5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 23
5 1 3 3 7 2 1 17
Total 100
Remember
1. Quote, why process control is needed in industries?
2. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller?
3. Describe the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.
4. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
5. Match the feed forward and feedback control system.
6. Recall the undesirable effects of dead time in a process.
7. Point an actuator.
8. Define PLC.
9. List out the advantages of PLC over relays.
10. Outline the use of Local Control Unit (LCU).
11. List out the programming languages used in PLC.
12. Identify the components involved in PLC.
13. Point the features and applications of SCADA.
14. List the advantages of SCADA.
15. What are the rules addressed for operating a communication system?
16. Define protocol.
17. Describe the basic requirements of communication protocol.
Understand
1. Discuss the principles and working of differential pressure transmitters.
2. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
3. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
4. Distinguish between offset and error.
5. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
6. Tell how the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers.
7. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade control?
8. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a process.
9. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.
10. Elucidate the trade-offs between relays and PLC for control applications.
11. Explain why a stop button must be normally closed and a start button must be a normally open.
12. Express the following ladder logic and justify what will happen if it is used?
13. Give a concise description of a PLC.

14. Discuss Programming timers and counters.
15. Express the necessity of reset instructions for all timers and counters.
Apply
1. A tank operating at 50 feet head 51 lpm out flow through a valve and has a cross section area of 10
square feet calculate the time constant
2. Use the split-range controller to a pressure control process and explain its operation.
3. Examine where can be PLC used in the place of relays?
4. In the figure below, will the power for the output on the first rung normally in ON state or OFF
state?
5. Would the output on the second rung normally is ON state or OFF state?
6. Convert the following flow chart to ladder logic.
7. If a counter goes below the bottom limit which counter bit will turn on?
8. Demonstrate the bottle filling system using PLC.
9. How are the program control instructions, math instructions and sequencer instructions used to
Analyse/Evaluate
1. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-interacting
capacities.
2. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller settings for any process.
3. Illustrate the Proportional, PI, PD and PID controllers.
4. Identify the most suitable control valve for any flow process.
5. How are the program control instructions, math instructions and sequencer instructions used to
6. Differentiate PROFI bus and MOD bus.
7. Compare timers and counters.
8. Differentiate between PLC and SCADA.
9. Compare the address capability of different protocols.
10. Ladder logic outputs are coils. Justify.
11. Can seismic instrument act as an vibrometer? Justify.
Create
1. Design a simple PID controller to maintain the position of an inverted pendulum vertically.
2. Design a pressure transmitter to provide 0-5V for 0 -50 psi pressure variations using LVDT and
elastic type conversion elements. Sensitivity of the elastic material is 0.1mm/psi and sensitivity of
LVDT is 1mV/mm. (C)
3. Create a simple program that will use one timer to flash a light. The light should be on for 1.0
seconds and off for 0.5 seconds. Do not include start or stop buttons.
4. Design a digital PID using PLC for temperature process.
5. Invent ladder logic that uses a timer and counter to measure a time of 25 days
15EI027 INTERNET OF THINGS 3003

Course Objectives
To impart knowledge in Internet of Things (IoT)
To understand the concept of interfacing smart sensors/actuators with internet connectivity
To illustrate the various protocol standards deployed in the Internet of Things (IoT) domain

1. Explain the characteristics and various design levels in internet of things
2. Execute on connected devices, domains and various protocol standards
3. Demonstrate the working and challenges of IOT on various domain specific applications
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS
Introduction to Internet of Things: Overview of Internet of Things, defining characteristics, connected
things, functional blocks, architectural models, communicating APIs, Comparing Internet of Things and
Machine to Machine (M2M) connectivity, Differences between IoT and M2M
UNIT II 9 Hours
DESIGN OF INTERNET OF THINGS
Design of Internet of Things: Physical Design of IoT, Logical Design of IoT, IoT Enabling Technologies,
IoT Levels and Deployments, Introduction to Physical Devices and Endpoints.
UNIT III 9 Hours

DESIGNING CONNECTED DEVICES
Designing Connected Devices: Basic Design Principles, Embedded Computing basics, Prototyping,
Embedded prototyping, Sensors, Actuators, Beagle Bone Black, Development Options, Online Prototyping
tools and components, APIs, Moving to the market needs, CC3200 SoC WiFi Controller with Cloud
connectivity
UNIT IV 9 Hours
VARIOUS PROTOCOL STANDARDS AS ENABLERS OF IOT
Various Protocol Standards as enablers of IoT: Overview of Internet communications TCP/IP and UDP,
Static and Dynamic Assignment, IP Address, IPv4 and IPv6, Wireless Communication Standards for IoT
WiFi Connectivity include Servers with CC3200
UNIT V 9 Hours
DOMAIN SPECIFIC IOT AND THEIR CHALLENGES
Domain Specific IOT and their challenges: Illustrated Domains Home Automation, Smart Cities,
Environment, Energy, Retail, Logistics, Health and Life Style, Industrial IoT CC3200 across various
applications segment
FOR FURTHER READING

Application of Internet of Things in Industries
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things (Essential Knowledge), MIT Press, 2015.
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, Designing the Internet of Things, 2015.
3. Arshdeep Bagha & Vijay Madisetti, Internet of Things A Hands-On Approach,VPT, 2014.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 8 8 4 22
2 2 10 4 4 20
3 2 6 10 18
4 2 4 6 6 18
5 2 4 6 4 6 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Internet of Things.
2. List the applications of IoT.
3. Indicate the major functional blocks in IoT.
4. Identify the challenges of IoT deployment.
5. State the benefits of IoT.
6. Identify the technologies that are used in IoT.
7. How will you secure the data in IoT?
8. Define privacy.
9. Define WSN.
10. State the addressing schemes in embedded system.
11. Define SoC.
12. Identify the technical issues in IoT.
13. Define interoperability.
14. State the principle of cyber security.
15. Define Internet of Everything.
16. Define an embedded system.
17. Identify the components of embedded computing system.
18. Classify embedded systems.
19. Recognize the two conditions that should be considered in selecting a processor for an embedded
system.
20. Difference between Von Neumann and Harvard architecture.
21. Define station Mode.
22. List the physical devices that are used in IoT.
23. List the characteristics of sensor.
24. Define API.
25. Identify the wireless communication protocols available in CC3200.
26. Define protocol and standards.
27. Indicate the ADC channels are available in CC3200 ARM Controller.
28. List the features of ARM Cortex- M4.
29. Define Baud rate and Serial Communication Interface.
Understand
1. Illustrate the functional blocks and its characteristics of IoT.
2. Explain the working of various elements of IoT.
3. Demonstrate the architectural models for IoT.
4. Explain the logical level and physical level design of IOT.
5. Summarize the enabling technologies and IoT deployment.

6. Identify the characteristics of embedded computing system.
7. Explain the serial and parallel communication protocols online protocols.
8. Illustrate the architecture of CC3200.
9. Explain the working of CC3200 SoC WiFi Controller with Cloud connectivity.
10. Illustrate the security mechanisms for IP-based IoT applications.
Apply
1. Predict the role of physical devices and endpoints in IoT.
2. Demonstrate the steps to connect CC3200 SoC WiFi Controller with Cloud connectivity.
3. Choose the peripherals supported for Arm Cortex- M4 in CC3200.
4. Predict the challenges in embedded computing system design.
5. Summarize the various wireless communication standards for IoT.
6. Predict the role of Beagle Bone Black processor in IoT applications.
7. Demonstrate any two applications of IoT in Industrial automation.
8. Explain the application of CC3200 in medical, energy, retail and logistics domains.
9. Assess the impacts of IoT in agriculture, health care, transportation.
Analyse
1. Compare the Internet of Things and Machine to Machine (M2M) connectivity.
2. Differentiate between IoT and WSN.
3. Justify the market needs for IoT.
4. Compare the IPv4 and IPv6.
5. Differentiate TCP/IP and UDP
6. Conclude the security challenges in the IP-based Internet of Things.
Create
1. Generate the IoT framework for home automation.
2. Design an IoT framework for smart cities.
3. Design an IoT framework for health and life style for a real-time situation.
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES
15GE001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I 3003
Course Objectives
Study of this subject provides an understanding of the scope of an entrepreneur, key areas of
development, financial assistance by the institutions, methods of taxation and tax benefits, etc

1. Able to gain Knowledge about entrepreneurship, motivation and business.
2. Able to develop small scale industries in different field.
UNIT I 9 Hours
BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Nature, scope and types of Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur Personality Characteristics, Entrepreneurship
process. Role of entrepreneurship in economic development
UNIT II 9 Hours
GENERATION OF IDEAS
Creativity and Innovation, Lateral Thinking, Generation of Alternatives, Fractionation, Reversal Method,
Brain Storming, Analogies
9 Hours
UNIT III
LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS
Contract act-Indian contract act, Essential elements of valid contract, classification of contracts, sale of
goods act- Formation of contract of sale, negotiable instruments- promissory note, bills and cheques,
partnership, limited liability partnership (LLP), companies act-kinds, formation, memorandum of
association, articles of association.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
BUSINESS FINANCE
Project evaluation and investment criteria (cases), sources of finance, financial statements, break even
analysis, cash flow analysis.
UNIT V 9 Hours
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Importance- functions-deciding on the production system- facility decisions: plant location, plant layout
(cases), capacity requirement planning- inventory management (cases)-lean manufacturing, Six sigma.
FOR FURTHER READING

Role of social networking sites in business
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi: 2005
2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi: 2000.
3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill: 2006
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 4 20
2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 20
3 3 2 2 2 4 3 4 20
4 3 2 2 2 3 4 4 20
5 1 2 2 2 2 2 5 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. What is entrepreneurship?
2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?
3. Define a small-scale industry
4. Who is an intrapreneur?
5. State functions of SISI

6. What is serial entrepreneur?
7. What is Technopreneurship?
8. What is reversal method?
9. What is brainstorming?
10. What do you mean by term business idea?
11. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of entrepreneurship
12. What is a project report?
13. What is project scheduling?
14. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.
15. What is contract act?
16. Define MOU.
17. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.
18. Classify the financial needs of an organization
19. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur?
Understand
1. Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation?
2. Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur.
3. How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur?
4. Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital.
5. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur
6. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm.
7. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur?
8. What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991?
9. Why scheduling is very important for a production design?
Apply
1. If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea?
2. Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovation that you can
implement in your business.
3. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run you business.
4. How will you generate your capital and other financial supports.
5. In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the various stages using
any of the tools or techniques
Create
1. Draft a sample project report for your business
2. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan.
3. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financial support to your
business
15GE002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II 3003

Course Objectives
Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services
Handle the human resources and taxation
Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan

1. Increase in awareness of the entrepreneurship Development for engineering decisions.
UNIT I 9 Hours
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Marketing environment,Segmentation, Targeting and positioning, Formulating marketing
strategies,Marketing research, marketing plan, marketing mix (cases)
UNIT II 9 Hours
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories
Act 1948 (an over view)
UNIT III 9 Hours

BUSINESS TAXATION
Direct taxation, Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax
(Cases).Indirect taxation, Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST (Cases)
UNIT IV 9 Hours
GOVERNMENT SUPPORT
Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute-NIESBUD, IIE, EDI. State Level
Institutions-TIIC, CED, MSME, Financial Institutions
UNIT V 9 Hours
BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION
Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market
survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis.
FOR FURTHER READING

Ethics in Entrepreneurship
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi: 2005.
2. Philip Kotler., Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi: 2003.
3. Aswathappa K, Human Resource and Personnel Management - Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill:
2007.
4. Jain P C., Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi: 2002.
5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill: 2006.
6. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 20
2 2 6 6 6 20
3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 20
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 20
5 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?
2. Mention the three functions of NSIC.
3. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?
4. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?
5. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report
6. What is Motivating Training?
7. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?
8. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?
9. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?
10. What are the types of entrepreneurs?
11. List the various qualities of entrepreneur
12. What is entrepreneurship training?
13. State the role of NISIET.
14. List the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?
Understand
1. What are the elements of EDP?
2. How would you Classify Projects?
3. What is the role played by commercial banks in the development of entrepreneur?
4. What are the target groups of EDP?
5. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?
6. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?
Apply
1. Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs?
2. Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur?
3. Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project?
4. Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country?
5. Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepreneur.
6. Elaborate the schemes offered by commercial banks for development of entrepreneurship.
7. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entrepreneurship
Analyse
1. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship
2. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to overcome
these barriers?
3. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India
Evaluate
1. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India.
2. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India.
Create
1. Design a short entrepreneurship development programme for farmer.
2. "All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss.
3. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepreneurs
4. Discuss the role of the government both at the Central and State level in motivating and
developing entrepreneurship in India.
5. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME's.
6. Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative
entrepreneurs. Do you agree? Justify your answer with examples.
7. Discuss the Culture of Entrepreneurship and its role in economic development of a nation.
What factors contribute to nurturing such a culture?
PHYSICAL SCIENCE ELECTIVES
15GE0P1 NANOMATERIALS SCIENCE 3003
Course Objectives
Understand the fundamentals of physics of nanomaterials
Correlate on multidisciplinary branch
Acquire the knowledge in nanomaterials synthesis, compile and analyze data and draw conclusions
at nano level

1. Categorize nanomaterials based on their properties
2. Design different experimental methods for preparation of nanomaterials
3. Infer the working mechanism of different characterization instruments as well as analyses and
interpret data
4. Know the different techniques for making nano semiconducting materials and utilize them for
applications
5. Understand the impact of nanomaterials and their applications in nanodevices
UNIT I 9 Hours
NANO SCALE MATERIALS
Introduction-Feynman's vision-national nanotechnology initiative (NNI) - past, present, future -
classification of nanostructures,nanoscale architecture - effects of the nanometer length scale - changes to
the system total energy, and the system structures- effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties -
magnetic properties of nanoscale materials -differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical
properties.
UNIT II 9 Hours
NANOMATERIALS SYNTHESIS METHODS
Top down processes - mechanical milling, nanolithography and types based on radiations - Bottom up
process - chemical vapour deposition, plasma enhanced CVD, colloidal and sol-gel methods - template
based growth of nanomaterials - ordering of nanosystems, self-assembly and self-organization - DC
sputtering and RF sputtering process.
UNIT III 9 Hours

CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES
General classification of characterization methods - analytical and imaging techniques - microscopy
techniques - electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic
force microscopy - diffraction techniques - X-ray spectroscopy - thermogravimetric analysis of
nanomaterials.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
SEMICONDUCTOR NANOSTRUCTURES
Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots,
super lattices-epitaxial growth of nanostructures-MBE, metal organic VPE, LPE - carbon nano tubes-
structure, synthesis and electrical properties -applications- fuel cells - quantum efficiency of semiconductor
nanomaterials.
UNIT V 9 Hours
NANOMACHINES AND NANODEVICES
Microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) and Nanoelectromechanical systems (NEMS)-fabrication,
actuators-organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic LED??s - basic
processes, carrier injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- nano motors -bio nano
particles-nano - objects - applications of nano materials in biological field.
FOR FURTHER READING

Application of graphene in various field - supercapacitors - third generation solar cell-dye sensitized solar
cell (DSSC) -fuel cells.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Willam A. Goddard, Donald W.Brenner, Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering, and Technology,
CRC Press, 2012.
2. Charles P. Poole Jr and. Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley Interscience,
2007.
3. Guozhong Cao, Y. Wang, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials-Synthesis, Properties & Applications,
Imperials College Press, 2011.
4. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw -
Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2012.
5. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John
Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2006
6. Viswanathan B, AuliceScibioh M, Fuel cells: Principles and Applications, University Press, 2009.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 3 4 4 2 4 3 4 24
2 2 3 4 4 4 3 4 24
3 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 16
4 2 2 4 2 4 3 17
5 2 4 3 2 4 4 19
Total 100
Remember
1. Explain the term nano
2. List three types of classifications of nanomaterials.
3. Recall the principle behind lithography.
4. Define top-down and bottom-up approach.
5. Name two types of nanoarchitecture
6. Define nanocomposites.
7. Recall the principle of electron microscopy.
8. List 5 characterization techniques in nanotechnology.
9. Define quantum well and quantum wire.
10. Write the allotropy of carbon.
Understand
1. Explain the effect of nanometer length scale.
2. Can affect the system total energy when particle size reduced? Justify.
3. Explain plasma enhanced CVD.
4. Identify the difference between self-assembly and self-organization.
5. Name 3 synthesis process under bottom-up approach.
6. Explain contact mode in AFM.
7. Is it possible to explain the entire details of the sample by taking one characterization technique? if
no, justify.
Apply
1. Find three day to day live commercial application of nanotechnology?
2. Choose two template methods used to obtain nanowire or nanorods.
3. Construct the experimental setup for organic LED.
4. Find 4 industrial applications of CNT.
Analyse
1. Differentiate between bulk and nanomaterials.
2. Identify the roll of nanoparticles in biological field.
3. Distinguish between glow discharge and RF sputtering.
4. Criticize the future challenges for nanotechnology?
Evaluate
1. Nanomaterials, do they exist in nature? If yes, Identify the nanomaterials and recognize.
15GE0P2 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND 3003

DEVICES
Course Objectives
Impart knowledge in physical properties of semiconducting materials
Analyze the factors affecting the operation of semiconductor devices
Apply the physics of semiconductors to develop semiconductor devices

1. Exemplify the transport properties of semiconductors
2. Understand the physics of PN junction
3. Analyze the factors affecting the properties of PN junction diode
4. Demonstrate the geometry and operation of bipolar junction Transistors
5. Summarize the optical properties and design of optoelectronic devices
UNIT I 9 Hours
CARRIER TRANSPORT IN SEMICONDUCTORS
Carrier drift - drift current density - mobility effects on carrier density - conductivity in semiconductor -
carrier transport by diffusion - diffusion current density - total current density - breakdown phenomena -
avalanche breakdown.
UNIT II 9 Hours
PHYSICS OF P-N JUNCTION
Basic structure-Built in potential barrier, Electric field and space charge width of P-N junction under zero,
forward and reverse bias- Diffusion capacitance - one sided and linearly graded junctions.
UNIT III 9 Hours

P-N JUNCTION DIODE
Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction - boundary condition - minority carrier distribution -
ideal p-n junction current - temperature effects - applications - the turn on transient and turn off transient.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
Introduction to basic principle of operation - the modes of operation - amplification - minority carrier
distribution in forward active mode - non-ideal effects - base with modulation - high injection emitter band
gap narrowing - current clouding - breakdown voltage - voltage in open emitter configuration and open
base configuration.
UNIT V 9 Hours
OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES
Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient - electron hole pair generation - solar
cell - homo junction and hetero junction - Photo transistor - laser diode, the optical cavity, optical
absorption, loss and gain - threshold current.
FOR FURTHER READING

Organic semiconductors- diodes - transistors-working and applications
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
2. S. M. Sze and M. K. Lee, Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology, John-Wiley & Sons,
2015.
3. Ben. G. Streetman and S. K. Banerjee , Solid State Electronic Devices, Pearson Education Ltd,
2015.
4. C. Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, John-Wiley & Sons, 2012.
5. J. Millman and C. Halkias, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
6. Hagen Klauk, Organic Electronics: Materials, Manufacturing and Applications, Wiley-VCH, 2006.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 3 4 4 2 2 3 2 20
2 2 3 4 4 4 3 4 24
3 2 4 2 2 2 4 4 20
4 2 2 4 2 4 4 18
5 2 4 2 2 4 4 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Define drift current density
2. Recall diffusion capacitance
3. Write the ideal diode equation
4. List the three modes of transistor operation
5. State the principle of solar cell
Understand
1. Identify the two scattering mechanisms that affect mobility of charge carriers in semiconductors
2. Sketch the energy band diagram of a P-N junction under thermal equilibrium
3. Exemplify the boundary conditions used to calculate minority carrier distribution in a junction
diode
4. Explain the base width modulation occur in transistors
5. Illustrate the working mechanism of a phototransistor
Apply
1. By applying the concept of scattering, explain the mobility of holes in a semiconductor.
2. Apply Poission equation to space charge region and hence derive the electric field under zero bias
3. Show that the minority carrier concentrations in a diode decay exponentially with distance away
from the junction to their thermal-equilibrium values.
4. Derive an expression for excess minority current in the emitter region under forward action mode
by applying the ambipolar transport equation.
5. Show that the minority carrier concentrations in a diode decay exponentially with distance away
from the junction to their thermal-equilibrium values.
Analyse
1. Differentiate drift current and diffusion current
2. Space charge width increases upon reverse bias. Justify
3. Silicon is preferred over germanium for the manufacture of semiconductor devices. Justify
4. Compare emitter bandgap narrowing and current crowding.
5. Differentiate homojunction and heterojunction laser
15GE0P3 APPLIED LASER SCIENCE 3003
Course Objectives
Impart knowledge on laser science
Explore different strategies for producing lasers
Create expertise on the applications of lasers in various fields

1. Realize the concept of stimulated emission and apply the same for laser oscillation
2. Understand the properties laser and working of different laser systems
3. Determine the rotation of earth, velocity and distance using lasers and apply the same for day today
applications
4. Design the different laser based instrumentation for medical field
5. Summarize the applications of lasers in industry
UNIT I 9 Hours
LASER FUNDAMENTALS
Introduction - principle - Einstein's prediction - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission - Einstein's
relations - A and B coefficients - population inversion - condition for large stimulated emission spontaneous
and stimulated emission in optical region - light amplification. Components of lasers: active medium -
pumping - pumping mechanisms - resonant cavity.
UNIT II 9 Hours
CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPES OF LASERS
Introduction - directionality - intensity - coherence - monochromaticity. Classification of lasers - principle,
construction, working, energy level diagram and applications of CO2 laser - dye laser - excimer laser -
Nd:YAG laser - semiconductor laser.
UNIT III 9 Hours

LASERS IN SCIENCE
Harmonic generation - stimulated Raman emission - lasers in chemistry - laser in nuclear energy - lasers
and gravitational waves - LIGO - rotation of the earth - measurement of distance - velocity measurement -
holography.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
LASERS IN MEDICINE AND SURGERY
Eye laser surgery - LASIK - photocoagulations - light induced biological hazards: Eye and skin -
homeostasis - dentistry - laser angioplasty - laser endoscopy - different laser therapies.
UNIT V 9 Hours
LASERS IN INDUSTRY
Applications in material processing: laser welding - hole drilling - laser cutting. Laser tracking: LIDAR.
Lasers in electronics industry: ranging - information storage - bar code scanner. Lasers in defence: laser
based military weapons - laser walls.
FOR FURTHER READING

Q-switching - mode locking - thermo-optic effects - astronomy lasers - fighting crime with lasers - laser
engraving.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. K. Thiyagarajan and A. K. Ghatak, LASERS: Fundamentals and Applications, Springer, USA,
2015.
2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction to Lasers Theory and Applications, S. Chand Publisher, 2013.
3. W. Koechner, M. Bass, Solid State Lasers: a graduate text, Springer Verlag, New York, 2006.
4. K. P. R. Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
5. K. R. Nambiar, Lasers: Principles Types and Applications, New Age International Publications,
2006.
6. A. Sennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications, CRC Press, 2006.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 20
2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 20
3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 20
4 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 20
5 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Recognise the term LASER
2. Define stimulated absorption
3. Define spontaneous emission
4. Define stimulated emission
5. Distinguish between spontaneous and stimulated emission
6. State population inversion
7. List the four characteristics of lasers
8. Mention the five medical applications of lasers
9. State the principle behind the holography
10. Recall the term resonant cavity
Understand
1. Identify the condition needed for laser action
2. Interpret the pumping of atoms
3. Exemplify the optical excitation occurs in three level laser systems
4. Explain the determination of rotation of earth using laser
5. Summarize the application of lasers in welding and cutting
6. Explain the term LASIK
7. Classify the different types of lasers based on materials
8. Illustrate the working of laser in material processing
Apply
1. Predict the condition for laser action
2. Derive the Einsteins A and B coefficients
3. Deduce the expression for large stimulated emission
4. Construct the experimental setup for distance measurement
5. Find the applications of lasers in stimulated Raman
6. Assess the wavelength of emission of GaAs semiconductor laser whose bandgap energy is 1.44 eV.
Analyse
1. Laser beam should be monochromatic, Justify?
2. Differentiate ordinary light source from laser source
3. Compare the working of gas lasers with excimer laser
4. Four level laser systems are more efficient than three level laser systems. Justiify?
Evaluate
1. Determine the intensity of laser beam be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength.
For He-Ne laser wavelength is 6328 A0 and radiates energy at the rate of 1mW.
2. Choose the appropriate lasers for the materials processing in industry
15GE0C1 CORROSION SCIENCE 3003
Course Objectives
Recognize the terminologies used in corrosion science.
Impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.
Understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and monitoring.

1. Familiarize with the fundamentals of corrosion science.
2. Understand the types of corrosion and role of chemistry behind corrosion of metals.
3. Develop their ability to identify, formulate and solve corrosion based problems.
4. Calculate the corrosion rate using different methods.
5. Analyze the analytical part of corrosion science which gives contextual knowledge to their higher
research programmes.
UNIT I 9 Hours
CORROSION
Importance of corrosion - spontaneity of corrosion - passivation - direct and indirect damage by corrosion
- importance of corrosion prevention in industries - area relationship in both active and passive states of
metals - Pilling Bedworth ratio and its significance - units of corrosion rate (mdd and mpy) - importance of
pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and disadvantages.
UNIT II 7 Hours
TYPES OF CORROSION
Eight forms of corrosion: uniform, galvanic, crevice corrosion, pitting, intergranular corrosion, selective
leaching, erosion corrosion and stress corrosion. High temperature oxidation, kinetics of protective film
formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.
UNIT III 9 Hours

MECHANISM OF CORROSION
Hydrogen embrittlement - cracking - corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion - fretting damage and microbes
induced corrosion - corrosion mechanism on steel, iron, zinc and copper metal surfaces - thick layer and
thin layer scale formation - in situ corrosion scale analysis.
UNIT IV 10 Hours
CORROSION RATE AND ITS ESTIMATION
Rate of corrosion: factors affecting corrosion - electrochemical methods of polarization - Tafel
extrapolation polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques - weight loss method - susceptibility
test - testing for intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion. Visual testing - liquid penetrant testing -
magnetic particle testing - eddy current testing.
UNIT V 10 Hours
CORROSION CONTROL METHODS
Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection. Stray current corrosion problems and
its prevention. Protective coatings: anodic and cathodic coatings - metal coatings: hot dipping (galvanizing,
tinning and metal cladding) - natural inhibitors. Selection of sacrificial anode for corrosion control.
FOR FURTHER READING

Corrosion issues in supercritical water reactor (SCWR) systems.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Mouafak A. Zaher, Introduction to Corrosion Engineering, CreateSpace Independent Publishing
Platform, 2016.
2. E.McCafferty, Introduction to Corrosion Science, Springer; 2010 Edition, January 2010.
3. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to
Corrosion Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Science, 2008.
4. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
5. David E.J. Talbot (Author), James D.R. Talbot, Corrosion Science and Technology, Second Edition
(Materials Science & Technology), CRC Press; 2nd Edition, 2007.
6. http://corrosion-doctors.org/Corrosion-History/Eight.htm
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 20
2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 16
3 2 1 1 4 1 3 2 2 2 2 20
4 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 22
5 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Corrosion
2. Mention the five types of corrosion
3. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.
4. What are corrosion inhibitors? Give two examples.
5. What are corrosion inhibitors? Give two examples.
6. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.
7. How polarization and impedance techniques are used to measure the corrosion products?
8. Define cathodic protection.
9. ellaborate non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and monitoring.
10. What is Tafel linear polarization?
11. What is Tafel linear polarization?
Understand
1. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.
2. Identify the relation between the two units used to measure corrosion rate.
3. Illustrate the Pourbaix digrams of Mg/Al/Fe and their limitations.
4. List the eight forms of corrosion. Explain each type with an example.
5. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.
6. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule.
7. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.
8. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.
9. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio?
10. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.
Apply
1. Area relationship between the anodic and cathodic part in galvanic corrosion. Discuss.
2. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.
3. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
Analyse
1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air?
2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.
3. Compare the effects of corrosion products.
4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.
5. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?
15GE0C2 ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL

3003
CELLS
Course Objectives
Understand the concept, working of different types of batteries and analyze batteries used in electric
vehicles.
Identify the types of fuel cells and to relate the factors of energy and environment.
Analyze various energy storage devices and fuel cells.

1. Understand the knowledge of various energy storing devices.
2. Acquire the knowledge to analyze the working of different types of primary and secondary
batteries.
3. Differentiate the types of fuel cells and recognize the utility of hydrogen as a fuel.
4. Realize the importance of using green fuel for sustainable development.
UNIT I 6 Hours
BASICS OF CELLS AND BATTERIES
Components - classification - operation of a cell - theoretical cell voltage - capacity - specific energy -
energy density of practical batteries - charge efficiency- charge rate - charge retention - closed circuit
voltage, open circuit voltage current density - cycle life - discharge rate-over charge-over discharge.
UNIT II 10 Hours
BATTERIES FOR PORTABLE DEVICES AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES
Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide, mercuric oxide, silver oxide
batteries - recycling/safe disposal of used cells. Secondary batteries - introduction, cell reactions, cell
representations and applications - lead acid, nickel-cadmium and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc
alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide, lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells. Battery
specifications for cars and automobiles.
UNIT III 10 Hours

TYPES OF FUEL CELLS
Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications and
environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide,
molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.
UNIT IV 10 Hours
HYDROGEN AS A FUEL
Sources and production of hydrogen - electrolysis - photocatalytic water splitting - biomass pyrolysis -gas
clean up - methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas - liquid hydrogen type - metal hydride -
hydrogen as engine fuel - features, application of hydrogen technologies in the future - limitations.
UNIT V 9 Hours
ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Future prospects of renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels - economy of hydrogen energy -
life cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and
photoelectrochemical cells - photobiochemical conversion cell.
FOR FURTHER READING

Energy conservation, Over utilization, Energy demanding activities.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press,
India, 2009.
2. F. Barbir,PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, Academic Press, 2013.
3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.
4. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2012.
5. Shripad T. Revankar, Pradip Majumdar, Fuel Cells: Principles, Design, and Analysis, CRC Press,
2016.
6. Thomas B. Reddy, Linden's Handbook of Batteries, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Professional, 2010
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 1 15
2 4 1 4 5 2 2 1 2 1 22
3 3 4 6 2 1 3 1 1 1 22
4 1 2 4 4 1 4 2 4 22
5 2 2 2 5 3 2 3 19
Total 100
Remember
1. How galvanic cell is differing from electrolytic cell?
2. How is the potential of an electrochemical cell calculated?
3. List any four characteristics of primary batteries.
4. Mention any two characteristics and applications of zinc-carbon battery.
5. Recognize any two applications and characteristics of primary magnesium batteries.
6. Identify the applications and characteristics of Zn/HgO primary batteries.
7. Indicate any two applications of Zn/alkaline/MnO2 battery.
8. Mentioned any two applications of Zn/Ag2O primary battery.
9. Define capacity of a cell
10. Define discharge rate of a battery.
11. Describe the construction, cell reaction and applications of zinc-carbon battery.
12. Explain the construction, chemistry, advantages and uses of mercuric oxide battery.
13. Explain the major components and reaction of direct methanol fuel cell. List two applications.
14. Explain the working principle, components and applications of alkaline fuel cells
15. Discus the conversion of sunlight into electrical power in photoelectrochemical cells.
Understand
1. Mention the five different types of energy storage devices
2. Define the term battery
3. List any two differences between battery and cell.
4. Mention the three major components of cell.
5. Classify the batteries based on their cell reversibility.

6. Define cycle Life of a cell.
7. Explain the construction, cell reaction and applications of silver oxide batteries.
8. With a neat sketch explain the construction and working of phosphoric acid fuel cell.
9. Explain the major components and reactions of direct methanol fuel cell
10. Explain the production of hydrogen photobiochemical conversion cell.
Apply
1. Specific gravity is an indicator of charge in lead acid battery Justify.
2. Illustrate the process of water electrolysis for the production of hydrogen.
Analyse
1. In the mid-winter car battery is not working reason out.
2. Discuss the hydrogen energy strategies for sustainable development.
3. How galvanic cell is differing from electrolytic cell?
4. How batteries are rated?
5. Differentiate between primary and secondary batteries.
15GE0C3 POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND

3003
PROCESSING
Course Objectives
Impart knowledge on the basic concepts of polymers and its mechanism
Use the appropriate polymerization techniques to synthesize the polymers and its processing
Select the suitable polymers for various applications

1. Understand the basic concepts of polymer chemistry and mechanism of polymerization reactions
2. Acquire knowledge of polymerization techniques
3. Identify the structural, mechanical and electrical features of polymers
4. Apply the polymer processing techniques to design polymer products
5. Realize the applications of specialty polymers
UNIT I 10 Hours
POLYMERS AND ELASTOMERS
Classification of polymers - Mechanism: Addition polymerization - free radical polymerization - cationic,
anionic and co-ordination (Ziegler-Natta) polymerization, copolymerization, condensation polymerization
(nylon-6,6) ring opening polymerization (nylon-6). Elastomers: Natural rubber - vulcanization - synthetic
rubber: styrene -butadiene rubber (SBR), butyl, neoprene, thiocol rubbers. High performance polymers:
polyethers, polyether ether ketone(PEEK), polysulphones, polyimides.
UNIT II 8 Hours
POLYMERIZATION TECHNIQUES
Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization - bulk polymerization (PMMA, PVC) solution
polymerization - polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerization (ion-exchange resins) - emulsion
polymerization (SBR) - advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization. Melt solution
and interfacial poly-condensation.
UNIT III 8 Hours

CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING
Characterization of polymers by Infrared Spectroscopy (IR) and Nuclear Magnetic Spectroscopy (NMR) -
Thermal properties by TGA and DSC, Testing tensile strength, Izod impact, Compressive strength,
Rockwell hardness, Vicot softening point. Test for electrical resistance, dielectric constant, dissipation
factor, arc resistance and dielectric strength - water absorption.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
POLYMER PROCESSING
Moulding: Compression - injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering.
Thermoforming and vacuum formed polystyrene - foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning: melt, dry and wet
spinning. Fibre reinforced plactics fabrication: hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.
UNIT V 10 Hours
SPECIALITY POLYMERS
Preparation and properties of heat resistant and flame retardant polymers. Polymers for electronic
applications: liquid crystalline, conducting and photosensitive polymers. Polymer for biomedical
applications: artificial organs, controlled drug delivery, hemodialysis and hemofiltration.
FOR FURTHER READING

Biodegradable polymers
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age
International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2014
3. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007
4. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008
5. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004
6. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, CRC Press, New York, 2011
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 22
2 1 1 4 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 18
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 4 18
4 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 20
5 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 22
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall two factors that govern termination of cationic polymerization.
2. Identify the monomers used in styrene -butadiene rubber.
3. Give an examples for the thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers.
4. What is copolymerization? Give an example
5. Name two synthetic polymers which are used for making textile fibres.
6. Define the role of Ziegler Natta catalysts
7. List the examples of Ziegler Natta catalysts.
8. Identify the four types of polymerization technique.
9. List any two disadvantages of suspension polymerization.
10. Point out the advantages of bulk polymerization technique.
11. Why does natural rubber need compounding?
12. List any four applications of injection moulding process.
13. List the various additives in processing of plastics.
14. List the two properties of heat resistant polymers .
15. Mention the application of flame retardant polymers.
Understand
1. Classify the polymers based on source
2. Discuss the addition and chain growth polymerization with example
3. Compare addition and condensation polymerization reaction with example for each type .
4. Explain homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization.
5. Explain the mechanism involved in addition polymerization of vinylChloride
6. Explain the condensation polymerization method taking nylon 6,6,nylon synthesis as a
representative example.
7. Discuss the preparation method and any three properties of Polysulphone.
8. Summaries the salient features, advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization
techniques.
9. Compare the homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization method.
10. With a neat sketch, discuss the functioning of melt, dry and wet spinning process.
11. Illustrate the compression and extrusion moulding of plastics with diagram neat diagram.
12. Explain the coordination polymerization mechanism using a sutable example.
Apply
1. Relate the various steps involved in anionic and cationic polymerisation using suitable examples.
2. Select the suitable polymerization techniques for synthesis of PMMA and SBR
3. Assess the characterisation techniques used to find the structure of polymer.
4. Find the method to process the composite materials with example.
5. Execute the filament winding Technique for manufacturing of rocket motor bodies.
Analyse
1. Distinguish between addition and condensation polymerisation.
2. Natural rubber need vulcanization Justify.
3. Compare the salient features, advantages and disadvantages of solution and suspension
polymerization techniques.
4. Bring out the differences between thermoforming and vacuum-forming process.
5. Outline the applications of polymer in controlled drug delivery and artificial organs.
Evaluate
1. Judge the biomedical applications of polymers in Hemo dialysis and hemo filtration.
2. Choose the suitable moulding Technique for polyvinyl chloride.
OPEN ELECTIVES
15EI0YA BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
3003
Course Objectives
To Understand the role of instrumentation in bio medical engineering field
To get ample knowledge on Electro-physiological and non-electric parameter measurement
To Understand principles of medical imaging - CT, MRI

1. Analyze about human physiology and bio potential electrodes
2. Comprehend the electro - physiological, blood flow and non - electrical parameter measurements
3. Understand the concepts of medical imaging, assisting and therapeutic devices.
UNIT I 10 Hours
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO POTENTIAL ELECTRODES
Cell and their structures - action and resting potential - nervous system: functional organisation of the
nervous system, structure of nervous system, neurons, synapse -transmitters and neural communication -
cardiovascular system- Physiology of heart and lungs - Circulation and respiration - Transducers - Different
types - Piezo-electric, ultrasonic, resistive, capacitive, inductive transducers - Selection criteria
UNIT II 9 Hours
ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGICAL AND BLOOD FLOW MEASUREMENT
Basic components of a biomedical system - Electrodes - Micro, needle and surface electrodes - Amplifiers
- Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper amplifiers - Isolation amplifier. ECG - EEG - Lead systems
and recording methods - Typical waveforms
UNIT III 9 Hours

NON - ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT
Measurement of blood pressure - Sphygmomanometer and cardiac catheterization - Heart rate- Heart sound
Body Plethysmography -pH of blood - pulse oximeter
UNIT IV 9 Hours
MEDICAL IMAGING PARAMETER MEASUREMENTS
X- RAY machine - Computer Tomography - Magnetic Resonance Imaging system - ultra sonography -
Endoscopy - bio-telemetry
UNIT V 8 Hours
ASSISTING AND THERAPEUTIC DEVICES
Cardiac pacemakers - defibrillators - ventilators- heart lung machine - dialysers - elements of audio and
visual aids
FOR FURTHER READING

Biosensors - glucose and drug detection, biomechanics - limb prosthetics - orthotics
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. R.S.Khandpur, Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill publishing
company Ltd., 2014.
2. J.G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
2010.
3. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
4. G. Well, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 4 4 5 5 20
2 4 4 6 6 20
3 2 2 4 6 6 20
4 2 4 6 8 20
5 2 4 6 2 6 20
Total 100
Remember
1. Recall the principle ions responsible for action potential.
2. State the principle fluid medium in cell.
3. Define depolarization of a cell
4. Recall the instrument that is used to find epilepsy.
5. List the ranges of frequency and voltage related to EEG
6. List the lead configurations used in ECG
7. List out the important parts of an ECG recorder.
8. List the characteristics of ECG preamplifier.
Understand
1. Explain the depolarization and repolarization of heart muscle with reference to ECG wave form
2. Summarize the cardio pulmonary blood circulation system
3. Explain the origin of different heart sounds
4. Summarize the characteristics of resting potential and action potential in the cell
5. Explain the principle of a Computer Tomography system with a schematic sketch.
6. Illustrate the operation of ultrasonic imaging systems.
7. Explain the working of X-ray machine.
8. Abstract the principle and working of electromagnetic blood flow meters.
9. Explain the analysis of EEG signal.
10. Illustrate 10-20 electrode systems used in EEG with a schematic sketch.
11. Illustrate two types of audio aids with diagram
12. Illustrate a heart lung machine with a schematic sketch.
Apply
1. Construct with a schematic sketch an EEG measuring system
2. Demostrate how many electrodes are required to be attached to a human subject for recording any
one of the unipolar chest lead signals? In the standard 12-lead ECG recording system.
3. Find the differences in the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular
synchronous pacemaker.
4. Implement the M mode for the ultrasonic imaging system with a suitable diagram.
5. Execute the working of an 12 lead ECG machine with a neat block diagram
6. Asses the working of the ultrasonic imaging system (M-mode) with a suitable diagram.
7. Compute the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular synchronous
pacemaker.
8. Implement a biotelemetry with suitable applications with a neat sketch.
9. Find out the merits of medical thermography.
Analyse
1. Outline the different types of heart sounds for different condition with specific schematic wave
forms.
2. Compare between metallic microelectrode and non-metallic microelectrode.
3. Differentiate the types of electrodes that are used to record EEG
4. Outline the medical name of low blood pressure
5. Justify: A certain patient monitoring unit has an input amplifier with a CMRR of 1, 00,000:1 at 60
Hz. At other frequencies, CMRR is 1000:1. Do you consider these ratios adequate for the
monitoring the ECG?
6. Justify the essential use of a coupling medium like olive oil or special jelly are essential in ultrasonic
imaging system?
7. Outline the various electro surgery techniques used in diathermy unit.
8. Conclude on what parameters does the free running frequency of VCO depend on?
Evaluate
1. Choose type of electrode the hydrogen ion concentration of the blood is easily determined?
2. Critiq the following statement: MRI is superior to other imaging systems
3. For perfect lock,Determine the phase relation between the incoming signal and VCO output signal?
Create
1. List the electrodes that have high input impedance.
2. Produce a biotelemetry system with necessary components with its schematic sketch.
3. Relate a CT imaging to a MRI scan. Justify the same with principles and diagrams
15EI0YB VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 3003

Course Objectives
To provide an overview of Virtual instruments
To bring out the overview of the software
To know about the programming structure of the software
To familiarize the student with the Applications

1. Summarize the basics of Virtual Instrumentation (VI).
2. Write simple programs using LabVIEW.
3. Analyze operating systems and hardware aspects of the VI
4. Develop VI for simple applications.
UNIT I 9 Hours
INTRODUCTION
General functional description of digital instrument - Block diagram of a Virtual Instrument - Advantages
of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments - Architecture of a Virtual Instrument and a its relation
to the operating system. Advantages of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments
UNIT II 10 Hours
SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
VI - Graphical user interfaces - Controls and indicators - 'G' programming - Labels and Text - Shape, size
and color - Owned and free labels -Data type, Format, Precision and representation - Data types - Data flow
programming -Editing - Debugging and Running a Virtual Instrument - Graphical programming palettes
and tools - Front panel objects - Data type
UNIT III 10 Hours

PROGRAMMING STRUCTURE
FOR Loops, WHILE Loops, CASE Structure, Formula nodes, Sequence structures - Arrays and Clusters -
Array Operations - Bundle - Bundle/Unbundle by name, graphs and charts - String and file I/O - High level
and Low level file I/O's - Attribute modes Local and Global variables. Bundle/Unbundle by name
UNIT IV 7 Hours
OPERATING SYSTEM AND HARDWARE ASPECTS
Current trends Operating system requirements - Data Acquisition Card(DAQ) : DAQ hardware, Grounding
methods, Resolution, Analog I/O, Digital I/O - DAQ Software Architecture - Configuring the DAQ
hardware/software for temperature measurement.
UNIT V 9 Hours
APPLICATIONS
IMAQ Motion Control: components of a motion control system, configuration, prototyping and
development - Interfacing Servomotor and Stepper motor in LabVIEW. Machine Vision: Edge
Detection,Dimensional Measurements,Color Inspection, Optical Character Recognition.
FOR FURTHER READING

PCI bus : Architecture, function, configuring PCI bus in LabVIEW - GPIB : Architecture, function,
configuring GPIB in LabVIEW - VISA communication.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Garry M Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2012
2. Jeffrey Travis and Jim Kring, LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming made Easy and
Fun, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2011
3. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, Bangalore, 2011
4. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, Introduction to Opto Electronics, Prentice Hall of India, 2009.
5. Donald J. Sterling, Technicians Guide to Fiber Optics, Delmar publisher, 2009.
6. M. Arumugam, Optical Fiber Communication and Sensors, Anuradha Agencies, 2010.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 8 4 4 20
2 12 2 4 18
3 4 2 2 12 2 22
4 10 10 2 22
5 2 8 8 18
Total 100
Remember
1. Define Virtual Instrumentation
2. State graphical system design.
3. List three main components of a virtual instrument
4. Define modular programming.
5. State Sub VI
6. List the different types of loops used in VI
7. State multidimensional array
8. Define auto-indexing
9. List out the different types of 3D graphs
10. Recall the basic difference between a waveform chart and a graph
Understand
1. Illustrate the virtual instrumentation model and graphical system design model in detail
2. Compare text-based programming and graphical programming
3. Explain the block diagram of a typical embedded system software and hardware design flow and
compare with stream-lined development flow with graphical system design
4. Illustrate how to create, modify and debug VIs using floating tool palettes?
5. Explain the importance of the toolbar buttons that appear on the block diagram
6. Classify the difference between a shift register and a feedback node
7. Explain, how a stand-alone application be created?
8. Compare while loop with a For loop
9. Explain the methods of changing the value of an element in an existing cluster
10. Interpret the importance of the basic elements of a graph
Apply
1. Use two numeric inputs ad perform add, multiply, subtract and divide operation
2. Construct a program to divide two numbers and find the remainder and quotient
3. Design NOT, AND and OR gates using NAND gate and verify their truth table
4. Find the equivalent gray code for a given BCD.
5. Construct a sub VI to convert radians to degrees
6. Construct a program to find the sum of first 100 natural numbers
7. Show a VI that generates two 1D arrays and create another array which consists all the elements of
the first two arrays
8. Execute a VI to generate a sine wave using Simulate Signal Express VI.
9. Use the Scan from string function to find a part of the string in the prescribed format. Also display
the remaining string and offset after the scan
10. Use the IMAQ Wind Draw function to acquire a selected portion of the image
Analyse
1. Differentiate the portion of the string available before the match and after the match, and the offset
of the string after the match
2. Justify that, it is advisable to use two event structures inside a loop?
3. Outline DAQ Software Architecture
4. Integrate the concept of interfacing Servomotor and Stepper motor in LabVIEW
5. Structure the Edge detection method in Labview programming using IMAQ tools
Evaluate
1. check whether the given number is odd or even.
2. Judge a VI that split an input string into two outputs with reference to a separating character and
find the length of the input string and reverse the string
3. Check a program in VI that finds whether the given number is a prime number or not using (a) a
For Loop and (b) a While Loop
4. Choose the match pattern function check whether the given expression is available in the input
string
5. Check a VI to plot a circle in the XY graph using a For Loop
Create
1. Generate a 2D numeric array (5X5) containing random numbers and find it transpose
2. Relate a VI to produce four lines of digital outputs and to control the digital I/O lines on the DAQ
device
3. Derive a VI which consists of a numeric array with even and odd elements and separate the odd
and even elements in two different arrays
15EI0YC INSTRUMENTATION IN AEROSPACE AND

3003
NAVIGATION
Course Objectives
To understand the concept of instruments used in the aircraft and aerospace.
To analyze the different types of flight control system and navigation.
To identify the sensor and controls used in satellite and space vehicle.

1. Explain the principle of measuring instruments and indicators used in aircraft and aerospace.
2. Differentiate the various types of navigation system and flight control schemes.
3. Illustrate the working principle of the sensors and controls used in satellite and space vehicle.
UNIT I 9 Hours
AIR CRAFT AND AEROSPACE VEHICLE INSTRUMENTATION
Basic T instruments - types of air speeds - Air data instruments: altimeter, air speed indicator, altitude
indicator, Mach meter - gyroscopic instruments - turn and back indicator - artificial horizon - Electronic
flight instrument unit - Accelerometers - sensors and actuators.
UNIT II 10 Hours
RADIO NAVIGATION AIDS
Navigation and its types - Automatic direction finder - distance measuring equipments - non directional
beacons - course deviation indicator - instruments landing system - microwave landing system - very high
frequency omni directional range instrument - Tactical Air Navigation - radar basic terminology - primary
and secondary surveillance radar.
UNIT III 8 Hours

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Principles of flight control, flight control surfaces, flight control linkage systems, Autopilot system , trim
and feel, flight control actuation, fly by wire system, fly by light fcs, Airbus and Boeing implementations,
interrelationship of flight control, guidance and vehicle management systems.
9 Hours
UNIT IV
SATELLITE AND SPACE VEHICLE INSTRUMENTATION
Global Positioning System (GPS) - propulsion controls - propulsion unit - Sun sensors - Horizon sensors -
star tracker - Stabilisation controls - GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation (GAGAN) and Indian
Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS) - Local Area Augmentation System (LASS), Wide Area
Augmentation System (WAAS).
UNIT V 9 Hours
AIR CRAFT FLIGHT SIMULATION INSTRUMENTATION
Basic description of a flight simulator - Solution of Aerodynamics equations - various types of aircraft
engine instruments - Vibration measurements - Tachometers -Temperature gauges - Pressure gauges -
Operation and Principles - Horizontal Situation Indicator - Simulation of autopilot system - Doppler and
Inertial Navigation instruments
FOR FURTHER READING

Hydraulic systems troubles - landing gear troubles - cabin conditioning troubles - indication of unsafe
canopy - Boeing condition - Radio troubles - Separate generator - System troubles - Trouble indicator light
- Advantages of instrumentated flight - Black box and its use.
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. John G. Webster and Halit Eren, "Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook", CRC
Press, Taylor & Francis Group, New York, 2014.
2. Nagaraja N.S., "Elements of Electronic Navigation", Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Ltd., New Delhi,
2006.
3. Keyton.M and Walker.R, Fried,"Avionics navigation systems",John Wiley, 1997.
4. Pallett E.G.H., "Aircraft Instrumentation and Integrated Systems", Longman Scientific and
Technical, 1992.
5. Ching-Fang Lin, "Modern guidance, navigation and control processing", Prentice hall, Englewood
cliffs, New Jersy, 1991.
6. John.H. Blakelock, "Automatic control of aircraft and missiles", John wiley and sons.inc, 1991.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 2 2 12 4 20
2 2 2 16 20
3 1 1 2 2 14 20
4 2 4 14 20
5 2 14 4 20
Total 100
Remember
1. State the most stable configuration of an airplane in roll.
2. Reproduce the flight instruments used on an aircraft to determine its attitude in flight.
3. Define frequency in radio terms.
4. List the three characteristics of Distance Measuring Equipments (DME).
5. List the four types of flight control systems
6. Define fly by wire system
7. Define Global Positioning System (GPS)
8. State the use of sun sensors in satellites
9. Define Flight simulator
10. List any two types of aircraft engine instruments.
Understand
1. Explain the principle of operation of Altimeter.
2. Explain the working of Distance Measuring Equipments (DME).
3. Classify the navigation system based on their functions.
4. Illustrate the air speed indicator with neat diagram
5. Identify the air data instruments
6. Interpret the imporatnce of flight control system
7. Explain the hydro mechanical flight control system with suitable diagram
8. Summarize the functioning of GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation (GAGAN).
9. Explain the uses of satellites involved in Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS)
10. Explain the principle and operation of Horizontal Situation Indicator.
11. Identify the applications of flight simulator
Apply
1. Show the uses of loop areial theory in ground direction finding station.
2. Find the factors affecting range and accuracy of ground direction finding station.
3. Show the construction and principle of working of altimeter
4. Find the application of flight instruments in aircraft
5. Show the control surfaces in primary flight control system
6. Find the applications of autopilot system in radio controlled models
7. Predict how the satellite is separated from the final stage of the launcher.
8. Assess the imporatnce of stabilization and attitude control in satellite
9. Find the solution of Aerodynamics equations.
10. Show the four basic functions of GPS with neat diagram
Analyse
1. Compare the two types of modulation caharcteristics of non directional beacons
2. Outline the functions of non directional beacons
3. Compare the aircraft instruments systems based on their applications
4. Differenciate fly by wire and fly by light flight control systems
5. Outline the six steps which are required to use an autopilot function
6. Compare the three segments of GPS based on their functions
7. Differenciate Local Area Augmentation System (LASS) and Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS).
8. Outline the uses of selective availability (S/A) in GPS
9. Compare any four basic schemes Inertial Navigation instruments
Evaluate
1. Criticise any five air speed limitations
Create
1. Generate an autopilot simulation system for landing an aircraft using controllers based on Model
Free Adaptive (MFA) neural network architecture
2. Plan a navigation route for a Global Positioning System
15EI0YD OPTOELECTRONICS AND LASER

3003
INSTRUMENTATION
Course objective(s)
To acquire basic concepts of optical fibers and their properties
To provide adequate knowledge about industrial applications of Lasers
To provide adequate knowledge about holography and medical applications of Lasers

1. Summarize the properties and industrial applications of optical fibers
2. Understand the fundamentals, industrial and medical applications of Laser
3. Explain the concepts of Opto -Electronic Components.
UNIT I 9 Hours
OPTICAL FIBERS AND THEIR PROPERTIES
Introduction to optical fibers - Light guidance - Numerical aperture - Dispersion - Different types of fibers
and their properties - Light Sources for fiber optics, Photo detectors, source coupling, splicing and
connectors.
UNIT II 10 Hours
LASER FUNDAMENTALS AND FIBER OPTIC SENSORS
Laser configuration Q-Switching - Mode locking - Different types of Lasers - Ruby, Nd-Yag, He-Ne,
CO2, Argon ion - IR sources and detectors - Interferometer method of measurement of length - Moire fringes
- Measurement of pressure, Temperature, Current, Voltage, Liquid level and strain - fiber optic Gyroscope
- Polarization maintaining fibers.
UNIT III 9 Hours

LASER INSTRUMENTATION
Industrial applications of lasers - Bio-medical application - Laser Doppler velocity meter - Laser heating.
Holography: Principle, Methods, Holographic Interferometers and applications.
UNIT IV 9 Hours
MEDICAL APPLICATIONS
Lasers and tissue interaction, Laser instruments for surgery, removal tumours of vocal cords, plastic
surgery, Dermatology.
UNIT V 8 Hours
OPTO-ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
Light Emitting Diode(LED) - Laser Diode - PIN Diode & Avalanche Photo Diode - Electro-
optic - Magneto optic - Acousto-optic Modulators
FOR FURTHER READING

Applications of Laser in Medical Field
Total:45 hours
Reference(s)
1. John M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communications principles and practice, Pearson Education
ltd.India, 2010.
2. Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communication, Mc Graw Hill, New York, 2013.
3. S.C. Gupta, Textbook on Fiber Optics Communications and its application, Prentice Hall of India,
2012.
4. John Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, Introduction to Opto Electronics, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
5. Ghatak A.K. and Thyagarajan K, Optical Electronics, Cambridge University press, 1990.
6. R. P. Khare, Fiber Optics and Optoelectronics, Oxford University Press, 2011.
Assessment Pattern
Unit/RBT Total
1 4 4 4 4 16
2 2 2 4 6 2 2 2 20
3 2 2 4 6 2 3 2 21
4 2 2 6 6 2 3 21
5 2 6 6 6 2 22
Total 100
Remember
1. List out the major measurement instruments used in the fiber optic and optoelectronic fields.
2. List out the functional requirements of a LASER.
3. Define critical angle and numerical aperture as related to fibers.
4. List out the general areas where energy or information can be lost in a fiber optic data link.
5. Mention the advantages of LASER over LED.
6. Infer the principle used in the working of fibers as light guide.
7. Define holography.
8. Define hologram.
9. Recognize optoelectronic devices.
10. Define photodiode.
Understand
1. Describe the characteristics and importance of total internal reflection to fiber optics.
2. Explain the characteristics of LASER light.
3. Summarize and compute the major dB and power losses in a fiber optic communication system.
4. Explain the operation, characteristics and relative merits of major light emitter and detector types.
5. Draw and explain the different types of fiber splicing techniques.
6. Explain the material processing steps.
7. Draw and explain different configurations of optical fiber.
8. Explain the basic principle of electro-optic modulators.
9. Summarize the properties of photodiodes.
Apply
1. Estimate the number of photons emitted per second from a laser that puts out one watt of power
and also state clearly the assumptions made.
2. Explain the applications of Holographic interferometry.
3. Find the core radius for a single mode fiber at an operating wavelength=1300nm with n (core)
=1.505 and n(cladding)=1.502.
4. Find the cut-off wavelength for a SI fiber to exhibit SM operation when the core refractive index
and radius are 1.46 and 4.5 m respectively with the relative index difference being 0.25%.
5. Calculate the waveguide dispersion at 1320nm for single mode fiber with core and cladding of 9nm
and125nm, n1=1.48 and n2=0.22.
6. Given silicon Avalanche Photo Diode has a quantum efficiency of 65% at a wavelength of 900nm.If
0.5 MW of optical power produces a multiplied photocurrent 10 A, find the multiplication factor
M.
7. Derive the expression for Signal to Noise Ratio of a photo detector.
8. Calculate the responsivity of a detector with quantum efficiency of 10% at 800 nm.
9. Calculate the transit time for a silicon photodiode of saturation velocity of 105ms-1 and of 5m
depletion layer thickness.
10. Two multimode step index fibers have Numerical Aperture of 0.2 and 0.4 respectively and both
have the same core refractive index which is 1.48. Estimate the insertion loss at a joint in each fiber
caused by a 50 angular misalignment of the fiber core axes. It may be assumed that the medium
between the fibers in air.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Identify and describe the major fiber optic data network systems.
2. Contrast and compare repeaters, regenerators and optical amplifiers.
3. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of each type of fiber for given applications.
4. Differentiate radiometric and photometric systems for measuring light.
5. Classify the optical fiber sensors.
6. A single mode fiber has beat length of 8 cm at 1300nm.Find the modal birefringence.
7. Differentiate between LED and LASER diode.
8. Why does the attenuation limit curve slope downwards to the right?
9. Differentiate index mode laser and guided mode laser.
10. The specifications of the light sources are converted to equivalent rise time in rise time budget.
Why?
11. Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.
12. Describe electro-optic amplitude modulation with neat sketch.
Create
1. Predict the reaction of light rays to the following optical components: Mirrors, lenses, and prisms.
2. Determine the instruments which are used when taking fiber optic and optoelectronic
measurements.
3. Calculate the power requirements of laser for material processing.
4. Compute the range of quantum efficiency of an InGa. As PIN diode in the wavelength range
between 1200 nm and 1600 nm if the responsivity of the diode is specified to be more than 0.6
A/W in the required wavelength region. Use the necessary physical constants listed. Speed of light
in vacuum =3 108 m/s, Electron charge =1.602 10-19, C Plancks constant =6.6256 10-34 J-
S, Boltzmanns constant =1.38 10-23 J/K and Band gap energy of Gas = 1.15 eV at 300K
5. Estimate the losses encountered while coupling power from a source to a fiber due to mismatch in
their numerical apertures and surface areas.
ONE CREDIT COURSES
15EI0XA INDUSTRIAL SAFETY STANDARDS FOR - --1

INSTRUMENTATION PRODUCTS
Course Objectives
To acquire basic concepts of instrumentation in food, petro chemical and continuous process
industries.
To provide an awareness on the different safety standards.

1. To acquire basic concepts of instrumentation in food, petro chemical and continuous process
industries.
2. To provide an awareness on the different safety standards.
15 Hours
Introduction to instrumentation involved in food industry / petrochemical industry /continuous process
industry - Different standard requirements for safety products - Hazardous environment and instrumentation
- Protection methods for instrumentation electronics - Wiring and installation best practices
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff, Practical Guide To Industrial Safety, Marcel Dekker, Inc, 2006
2. Walt Boyes, Instrumentation Reference Book, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2008
15EI0XB EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

USING PIC MICROCONTROLLERS
- --1
Course Objectives
To impart necessary knowledge in Embedded systems and PIC.
To understand the concepts of PIC Microcontrollers and its Industrial applications.

1. To impart necessary knowledge in Embedded systems and PIC.
2. To understand the concepts of PIC Microcontrollers and its Industrial applications.
20 Hours
Introduction to PIC Microcontrollers - C Programming for PIC - PIC Development Tools - LED and LCD
Interface and programs - Serial communication - Analog interfacing - Sensor interfacing - Advanced PIC
Project - Working with SD card - USB bus interface and programming - CAN bus interface and
programming - Multi-tasking and Real-Time Operating Systems
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Martin Bates, "Interfacing PIC Microcontrollers", Elsevier 2010
2. Martin Bates, PIC Microcontrollers An Introduction to Microelectronics, Elsevier 2012
3. http://www.microchip.com/pagehandler/en-us/products/wireless/applications/homeindustrial.html
15EI0XC DETAILED INSTRUMENTATION

- --1
ENGINEERING
Course Objectives
To acquire basic knowledge in understanding the piping and instrumentation diagrams.
To understand the standards used in industry for different applications.

1. To acquire basic knowledge in understanding the piping and instrumentation diagrams.
2. To understand the standards used in industry for different applications.
20 Hours
Process flow diagrams - P&ID concepts - Standards and symbols - Indications on P&ID - Conventions in
P&ID - Instrumentation standards - API - IEC - ISA - Selection and sizing of instruments - Selection and
sizing of valves - Project management
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Instrumentation symbols and identification - ISA 5.1, International Society of Automation
2. Process Measurement Instrumentation - API RP 551, International Society of Automation
15EI0XD EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN

- --1
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Course Objectives
To understand the relationship between basic electronic components and embedded system
To analyse the digital system design

1. To understand the relationship between basic electronic components and embedded system
2. To analyse the digital system design.
20 Hours
Basic Electrical Components: Resistors, Inductors and Capacitors - Basic Electronic Components: Diode,
Transistor, ICs - Common Electric and Electronic Components: Transformers, Voltage regulators,
Optocoupler, MOSFET and IGBT - Foundations: Basics - Sketch: Microcontrollers: Digital pins - Analog
input pins - PWM - Programming technique - FPGA controller: Introduction, I/O configurations and PC
interfacing - VHDL an overview - Programming methods - Interface with MATLAB - An overview of DSP
controller - An overview of dSPACE controller
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw Hill book
Co, New Delhi, 2008.
2004.
3. David E Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2003.
15EI0XE ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS IN

INDUSTRIES - --1
Course Objectives
To understand the role of an instrumentation engineers in energy conservation.
To acquire an awareness on EMS 14000 / EMS 50000 standards.

1. To understand the role of an instrumentation engineers in energy conservation.
2. To acquire an awareness on EMS 14000 / EMS 50000 standards.
20 Hours
Need for energy conservation in manufacturing / process industries - Role of instrumentation engineer in
energy conservation programme - Practical case studies on development of instrumentation and control for
energy management programme - Energy measurement - Data logging methods - Modbus, Can Bus &
Ethernet protocols - Hands on training in development of an energy management system with LabVIEW
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Richard A. Panke, Energy Management Systems and Direct Digital Control, 2011.
2. Dr. ParagDiwan& Mohammed, Energy Management, Pentagon Energy Earth, 2012.
15EI0XF DESIGN OF LOW COST AUTOMATION

- --1
FOR INDUSTRIES
Course Objectives
To impart necessary knowledge in designing and building a Low cost automation controls in
manufacturing and process industries

1. To impart necessary knowledge in designing and building a Low cost automation controls in
manufacturing and process industries
20 Hours
Introduction to manufacturing and process industries - Need for automation - Need for low cost automation
- Automation system development methodologies - Interoperability in automation products - OLE / OPC
Standards - Testing and validation of automation systems - Introduction to factory acceptance test - Hands
on Designing an low cost SCADA with LABVIEW
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. John Park, Steve Mackay, Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems,
Elsevier, 2010.
2. Terry Bartelt, Industrial Automated Systems: Instrumentation and Motion Control, CENGAGE
Learning, 2011.
15EI0XG MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF

- --1
INSTRUMENTATION
Course Objectives
To analyse the solutions for instrumentation problems.

1. To analyse the solutions for instrumentation problems
20 Hours
Working with the MATLAB User Interface - Variables and Expressions - Automating Commands with
Scripts - Analysis and Visualization with Matrices - Analysing Data from Files - Flow Control - Writing
Functions - Creating and Simulating a Model - Modeling Programming Constructs - Modeling Discrete
Systems - Modeling Continuous Systems - Instrumentation linear and nonlinear system examples with
MATLAB/Simulink
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. KristerAhlersten, An Introduction to Matlab, BookBoon , 2012.
2. Fornetti Francesco, Instrumentation Control, Data Acquisition and Processing with MATLAB,
Explore RF Ltd, 2013.
15EI0XH DESIGN OF LINEAR WEIGHING

- --1
MACHINE
Course Objectives
To understand the function of packaging machine.
To introduce elements of automation - Sensing, Actuation and Control.

1. To understand the function of packaging machine.
2. To introduce elements of automation - Sensing, Actuation and Control.
20 Hours
Introduction to Packaging Machinery - Need for Packaging Machines - Types of Packaging Machines -
Basic components of a Linear Weighing Machine - Hook-up Diagram of a Linear Weighing Machine -
Selection of Load Cell and its Interface circuitry (Pre-amp, ADC) -Introduction to Electromagnetic Vibrator
and its Control (TRIAC, Firing Angle Control) PLC or Microcontroller based Control - Control Algorithm
Basics and its Implementation HMI, Recipe settings and Calibration - Customer Requirements : Speed,
Accuracy, Reliability, Repeatability
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. George Crispe Whiteley,The Law Relating to Weights, Measures, and Weighing Machines,Knight
and Company,2011.
2. Shimon Y. Nof,Springer Handbook of Automation,Springer Science & Business Media,2010
15EI0XI HIGH TEMPERATURE

- --1
INSTRUMENTATION
Course Objectives
The course is intended to build up necessary background for understand principles of heat flux
measurements and their applications
To import knowledge on high temperature measurements
To learn the knowledge on various types of sensors for high temperatures for use in propulsion and
other applications

1. The course is intended to build up necessary background for understand principles of heat flux
measurements and their applications in aerospace
2. To import knowledge on high temperature measurements
3. To learn the knowledge on various types of sensors for high temperatures for use in propulsion and
other applications
20 Hours
Introduction - importance of high temperature measurements in Aerospace industry - Heat flux measureme
nt - Types of heat flux sensors - slug gauge, Gordon gauge, Thermopile and thin film gauges - calorimetric
methods - calibration of heat flux sensors using black bodyfurnace - Types of thermocouples and their
calibration, combustion chamber temperature measurements using refractory thermocouples - surface
temperature measurement techniques using thermo couples and pyrometers - optical, radiation, two colour
and infrared pyrometers - spectroscopic methods for flame temperature measurement - Sodium line reversal
method, LDA etc. Total temperature measurements - recovery factor calibration - major errors associated
with high temperature measurements and estimation of accuracies
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. J.P Hartnett et al, Recent Advances in Heat and Mass Transfer, Literary Licensing, LLC, 2012.
2. R.P. Benedict, Fundamentals of temperature, pressure and flow measurements, Third Edition,1984.
3. ASTM committee on E20, Manual on the use of thermocouples in temperature measurement,
ASTM publication,1981.
15EI0XJ CALIBRATION TECHNIQUES - --1

Course Objectives
To impart necessary knowledge in calibration techniques and its applications
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understand the calibration techniques in field instruments.
15 Hours
Calibration: Introduction - Industry Protection Standards - Temperature Calibration - Resistance
Temperature Detectors (RTD) - Thermocouple - Thermostat - Calibration ofPressure Transmitter - Pressure
switches with Documenting Process Calibrators (DPC)- Calibration of Control Valve Positioner - Loop
Calibration and Maintenance- Calibrating Highway Addressable Remote Transducer (HART)
communication protocol based transmitters- Calibration of non-contact type transmitters
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Mike Cable, Calibration A Technicians Guide, The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation
Society, 2014.
15EI0XK HOOKUP DIAGRAM

- --1
Course Objectives
To give basic knowledge in obtaining the Hookup diagram for different transmitters
Course Outcome(COs)
1. Design and implement the hookup diagram concepts for different applications
15 Hours
Design and implementation of hookup diagram concepts for different applications -Material selection for
Installation - Hookup diagram for pressure transmitters: steam, gas and liquid pressure transmitters -
Hookup diagram for Level transmitter, calculation for level and pressure transmitters - Hookup diagram for
flow transmitters: steam, gas and liquid flow transmitters- Installation of vortex and magnetic flow meter -
Hookup diagram for Temperature Transmitter
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Hook-up Designs for Steam & Fluid Systems, Spirax Sacro, Inc., 2014
15EI0XL INTERNET OF THINGS (IOT) WITH

- --1
SENSOR DATA ACQUISITION IN CLOUD
Course Objectives
To impart fundamental knowledge in Internet of Things and its applications
To understand the concepts of logging sensor data into the Cloud
Course Outcome (COs)

1. To understand the concepts of Internet of Things, Data Acquisition and working with Cloud
15 Hours
Introduction to Internet of Things (IoT) - Understanding of CC3200 ARM+ WiFi Controllers - Code
Composer Studio (CCS) Development Tools - Working with Access Point (AP) and Station Modes of WiFi
- Working with GPIO and ADC to enable sensors for analog and digital input and actuators - Serial
Connectivity with Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) - Data Acquisition of Sensors
and Logging into the Cloud - Understanding of Web Dash board with TI Exosite Cloud Services
Total:15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Arshdeep Bagha& Vijay Madisetti, Internet of Things A Hands-On Approach, VPT, 2014.
2. www.ti.com/product/cc3200
ADDITIONAL ONE CREDIT COURSES (I to III Semesters)
15GE0XA HEALTH AND FITNESS

---1
Course Objectives
To understand the fundamental concepts about physical fitness & its types, training and
assessment of physical fitness

1. Acquire the knowledge and training of the individual physical, mental and social concepts.
2. Understand the fundamental concepts of yogic practice and physical fitness.
3. To acquire the knowledge about nutrition and health consciousness.
FITNESS: Meaning & Definition - Need & importance of Physical fitness - Types Physical fitness -
Exercise, Training and Conditioning and it is important.
YOGA: Meaning and definition - Principles of practicing - Basic Asana and it important - Pranayama and
Meditation - Relaxation Techniques.
NUTRITION AND BALANCE DIET: Needs and Important - Significant of Nutritional Food - Tips for balance
diet. Common Diseases for IT professionals: Common diseases - cause - prevention - First aid for common
sports injuries.
Total: 15 hours
Reference(s)
1. Anderson, Bob., Pearl, Bill.,&Burke, Edmund R., (2001). Getting in Shape Workout Programs for
Men&Women. Mumbai: Jaico Publishing House.
2. Baechle, Thomas. R, & Earle, Roger. W., (2000). Essentials of Strength Training and
Conditioning. Champaign: Human Kinetics.
3. Iyengar, BKS., (2003). The Art of Yoga. New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers.
4. Singh, Hardayal, (1995). Science of Sports training. New Delhi: D.V.S. Publications.
5. Begum, Raheena. M., (2002). A Textbook of Foods, Nutrition and Dietetics. New Delhi: Sterling
Publishers Private Limited.
15GE0XB FOUNDATION COURSE IN COMMUNITY RADIO TECHNOLOGY

- - - 1
Course Objective
The course focuses on community radio technology and various program productions techniques
for radio broadcasting
1. Understand the hardware required for field recording and setting up a studio and carry out studio
and field recording
2. Examine the available options for telephony interfaces for radio
3. Demonstrate proper techniques of wiring, fixing of connectors, soldering and use of tools and
equipment for studio work.
INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNITY RADIO

Evolution of Community Radio (CR) in India- principles behind setting up of CR- policy guidelines and
their impact on technology and content of a CR station- fundamental principles behind deciding the
technology for a CR station.
STUDIO TECHNOLOGY
Properties and components of sound-difference between analogue and digital audio-hardware required for
field recording and setting up a studio-fundamental principles for setting up an audio studio
AUDIO PRODUCTION
Concept of recording and storing audio-hardware related to audio recording-open source software solutions
for audio production- telephony interfaces for radio- audio Post Production
STUDIO OPERATIONS
Wiring, fixing of connectors, soldering and use of tools and equipment- preventive and corrective
maintenance of studio and equipment.
RADIO TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGY

Components of the FM transmission chain- FM transmitter-different types of FM antenna - coaxial cable-
propagation and coverage of RF signals-FM transmitter setup
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. UNESCO (2001). Community Radio Handbook.

2. Vinod Pavarala, Kanchan K Malik, Other Voices: The Struggle for Community Radio in India,
SAGE Publications India,2007.
3. Steve Buckley, Mark Raboy, Toby Mendel, Kreszentia Duer, Monroe E. Price, Sen Siochr,
Broadcasting, Voice, and Accountability: A Public Interest Approach to Policy, Law, and
Regulation, University of Michigan Press, 2008.
4. www.floridasound.com
5. www.mediacollege.com
6. www.procosound.com
15GE0XC VEDIC MATHEMATICS

---1
Course Objectives
To improve their calculation speed, analytical thinking and numerical skills.
Course outcome (CO)

1. Solve problems creatively in mathematics and its applications.
VEDIC MATHEMATICS
Addition- Subtraction- System of Multiplication- Squaring numbers- Cube roots- Square roots- Solution of
simultaneous equations- Solutions of Quadratic equations
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Dhaval Bathia, Vedic Mathematics, JAICO Publishing House, 29th Edition, Mumbai, 2014.
2. Jagadguru Swami Sri Bharathi Krsna Tirthaji Maharaja, Vedic Mathematics, Motilal Banarsidass
Publishers Private Limited, New Delhi, 1997.
15GE0XD INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHMS

--- 1
Course Objectives
Analyze the asymptotic performance of algorithms, Divide and conquer and Dynamic Problems.
Use Sorting and Searching algorithms for arranging the data.
Apply important algorithmic techniques to solve the real world Problems.
1. Apply Divide and conquer and Dynamic Programming Algorithm techniques to Provide the
solutions for simple Problems.
2. Design algorithms for Performing Sorting and Searching of data.
3. Construct the Graph, Heap and BST for the given Data information.
Algorithm Design Techniques: Divide and Conquer, Dynamic Programming, Sorting and Searching, Basic
graph algorithms - Simple Data Structures: Heaps, Balanced Search Trees.
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Mark Allen Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.
2. Thomas H. Cormen. Charles E. Leiserson. Ronald L. Rivest. Clifford Stein, Introduction to
Algorithms, Second Edition, MIT Press, 2014.
3. J.P.Tremblay and P.G.Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Application II Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
15GE0XE ETYMOLOGY
- --1
Course Objectives
To increase vocabulary and enhance use, knowledge, and understanding of the English language.
To stimulate an appreciation for the English language, including how it developed, how new
wordsenter the language, and how it continues to be dynamic.
To demonstrate the importance of a broad-based vocabulary for effective oral and written
communication.
1. Examine prefixes, roots, and suffixes of Latin, Greek, Germanic, and Anglo-Saxon origin.
2. Explore the historical aspects of language, including the infusion of Indo-European languages,
semantic changes, and the influence of world events.
CONVENTIONS &VOCABULARY
Acronyms - Abbreviations - Initialisms - Jargon - Neologisms - Idiomatic Expressions - Euphemisms -
Spoonerisms - Malapropisms - Mondegreens - Words Derived from Latin - Words Derived from Greek -
Words Derived from - Germanic/Anglo-Saxon - Abstract word Acronym - Affix Analogy - Antonym -
Apheresis - Blend word Assimilation - Colloquial language Clipped word
WORD ANALYSIS
Concrete word Derivative - Dialect Diminutive suffix - Dissimilation Doublet - Etymology Euphemism -
Figurative word Homonym - Hybrid word Inflection - Informal language Infusion - Jargon Linguistics -
Loan words Metathesis - Modify - Philology Onomatopoeia - Romance language Prefix - Semantics - Root
-base word - Suffix Slang - Word component Synonym
Total : 15 hours
Reference(s)
1. Norman, Lewis. Word Power Made Easy,Goyal Publisher. Edition 2.2014.

2. C T Onions. The Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology.Volume 11, Issue 1.70, Wynford Drive,
Don Mills, Ont.Oxford University Press.1965.
3. Nurnberg W, Maxwell and Rosenblum, Morris, How to build a better Vocabulary, Completely
Revised and Updated, Popular Library, 1961.
15GE0XF HINDUSTANI MUSIC

---1
Course Objectives
To have an awareness on aesthetic and therapeutic aspects of Hindustani music

To identify and differentiate the various styles and nuances of Hindustani music
To apply the knowledge accumulated throughout the duration of the course by way of
improvisation, composition and presentation
Course Outcome (CO)

1. Have Basic knowledge of aesthetic and therapeutic value of Hindustani Music
AESTHETICS
Introduction to music - Aesthetics of Hindustani Music - Classification (Raga, instruments, style as per the
presentation and the gharaanaas) - Folk music, Dhamaar, Dhrupad
COMPOSITION AND THERAPEUTIC VALUE

Taal and Raga - Bandeesh, Taraanaa - Madhya and drut laya, Vilambit khyaal as demonstration -
Therapeutic benefits of Hindustani music - Stage performance
Total : 20 hours
Reference(s):
1. Devdhar B.R., Raga bodh (Part 1 & 2), Devdhar School of Indian Music, Mumbai, 2012.
2. Vasant, Sangeet Vishaarad , Hathras, Uttar Pradesh, 2015.
Websites:
1. raag-hindustani.com/
2. play.raaga.com/Hindustani
3. raag-hindustani.com/Scales3.html
4. www.poshmaal.com/ragas.html
5. www.soundofindia.com/raagas.asp
6. https://www.quora.com/Which-is-the-toughest-raga-in-Indian-classical-music
7. www.likhati.com/2010/10/20/popular-ragas-for-the-beginner-ear-durga
15GE0XG CONCEPT, METHODOLOGY AND

---1
APPLICATIONS OF VERMICOMPOSTING
Course Objectives
To understand the importance of safe methods of treating solid wastes generated through various
human activities
To appreciate the skills / devices / practices associated with the compact proceedures of
biodegradation of unwanted solid residues
1. Understand the role of recycling of garbage leading to the sustenance of our health and
environment.
2. Recognize the organic farming practices and production of healthy food products.
3. Prepare and maintain tips for small scale compost units and thereby becoming more
environmentally conscious.
15 Hours
VERMICOMPOSTING TECHNOLOGY
Ecological roles and economic importance of earthworms - need for earthworm culture scope and
importance of vermiculture limiting factors - types of worm culturing and the relative benefits Small
scale and commercial methods: process & advantages Vermicomposting equipments, devices Design
and maintenance of vermi bed - Products from vermiculture (matter & humus cycle) vermicastings in
organic farming/horticulture - Marketing the products of vermiculture quality control, market research,
marketing techniques Applied vermiculture: use of urban solids & farm/ industrial residues for
vermicomposting - Constraints of vermiculture and its future perspectives Artificial Earthworm as a
standalone biodegradation assembly.
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Sultan Ahmed Ismail, 2005. The Earthworm Book, Second Revised Edition. Other India Press,
Goa, India.4
2. Vermiculture Technology; Earthworms, Organic Wastes and Environmental Management, 2011,
Edited by Clive A Edwards, Norman Q Arancon & Rhonda Sherman, CRC Press
3. www.organicgrowingwithworms.com.au
4. New York Times Scientists Hope to Cultivate and Immune System for Crops
15GE0XH AGRICULTURE FOR ENGINEERS

---1
Course Objectives
1. To impart the basic knowledge of agricultural and horticultural crops, cropping systems
2. To study the weed and nutrient management, irrigation water requirement and its quality

1. Understand the science of Agriculture
2. Summarize and apply the methodologies needed in agriculture based on the field conditions
3. Develop enough confidence to identify the crop patterns in real world and offer appropriate
solutions
AGRONOMICAL PRACTICES AND CROPS 5 hours

Definition and scope of agronomy , Classification of Crops, agricultural and horticultural crops Effect of
Different Weather Parameters on Crop Growth and Development , Principal of Tillage, Tilth and Its
Characteristics, Role of Water in Plant and Its Absorption, Conduction and Transpiration of Water and
Plant Processes, Soil Water Extraction Pattern and Plant Response. Introduction to weeds, Weeds Control.
CROP ROTATION, CROPPING SYSTEMS, RELAY AND MIXED CROPPING 5 hours

Crop Rotation, Different Cropping Systems I, Different Cropping Systems II, Scope of Horticultural
Crops, Soil Requirement for Fruits, Vegetables and Flowers Crops, Climatic Requirement for Fruits,
Vegetables and Flowers Crops.
PLANT NUTRIENTS 5 hours

Essential Plant Nutrients, Nutrient Deficiency, Toxicity and Control Measures. Chemical fertilizers,
fertilizer Reaction in Soil and Use Efficiency
QUALITY OF IRRIGATION WATER AND IRRIGATION METHODS 5 hours

Quality of Irrigation Water, Poor Quality of Irrigation Water and Management Practices. Surface Irrigation
methods, and micro irrigation methods
Total : 20 hours
Reference(s)
1. SP. Palaniappan, and S. Sivaraman, Cropping systems in the tropics- Principles and Management,
New Age international publishers, New Delhi, (2nd edition), 1998.
2. S.Sankaran and V.T Subbaiah Mudaliar, Principles of Agronomy, The Bangalore Printing and Pubg
Co, Bangalore, 1993.
3. P.Balasubramain and SP. Palniappan, Principles and Practices of Agronomy, Agrobios publishers,
Ludhiana, 2001.
4. T.Yellamanda Reddy and G.H. Sankara Reddi, Principles of Agronomy, Kalyani publishers,
Ludhiana, 2005
5. B.Chandrasekaran, B. , K. Annadurai and E. Somasundaram, A Text book of Agronomy, Scientific
publishers, Jodhpur, 2007
6. George Acquaah, Horticulture-principles and practices, Prentice-Half of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2002.
15GE0XI INTRODUCTION TO DATA ANALYSIS USING SOFTWARE

---1
Course Objectives
To familiarize students on the features of MS Excel.

To enable the students to use Excel in the area of critical evaluation.
Facilitate the student to construct graphs.
1. Create versatile Excel document.

2. Apply built in functions for data analysis.
3. Prepare dynamic Charts.
EXCEL FUNDAMENTALS AND EDITING 4 Hours

Starting and Navigating a Worksheet - Entering Information - Hyperlinks - Saving - Editing Techniques -
Entering a Series of Labels, Numbers and Dates - Checking Errors.
FORMATTING 4 Hours
Formatting Cells Changing Column Widths and Row Heights Creating Conditional Formatting Using
Styles Creating and Modifying Templates - Changing Page Breaks.
POWER ORGANIZING AND CUSTOMIZING EXCEL 4 Hours

Managing Worksheets - Referencing Cells in Other Worksheets - Using More than One Work Book -
Managing Shared Work Books - Protecting Worksheets and Workbooks.Adjusting Views - Setting Printing
Options - Using Multiple Panes - Customizing Excel Using the Options Dialog Box.
CRUNCHING NUMBERS 5 Hours

Building a Formula Using Basic Built-in Functions Using Functions to Analyze Data Using Names
in Functions Array Functions
WORK SHEET CHARTS 3 Hours

Planning a Chart Creating Chart Formatting a Chart Adding Labels and Arrows.
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Michael J. Young, Michael Halvorson, Office System 2007 Edition, Prentice-Hall of India (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2007
2. John Walkenbach, Microsoft Office Excel 2007, Wiley Publishing, Inc. 2007
3. Curtis D. Frye, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Step by Step, Microsoft Press, 2007
4. Mark Dodgeand Craig Stinson, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Inside Out, Microsoft Press, 2007
15GE0XJ ANALYSIS USING PIVOT TABLE

---1
Course Objectives
To familiarize students on the features of Pivot Table

To enable the students to use Pivot Table in the area of data analysis
Facilitate the student to construct the charts for visualization of data
1. Able to construct the Pivot Table and Group, Sort, Filter the Data to do the analysis.
2. Able to do the Calculation with in Pivot Table for advance analysis.
3. Capable of Constructing Pivot Charts to make visual presentation.
PIVOT TABLE FUNDAMENTALS 4 Hours

Introduction about Pivot Table, Why and When to use the Pivot Table, Anatomy of the Pivot Table,
Limitations, Preparing the Source Data, Creating the Pivot Table.
GROUPING PIVOT TABLE DATA 4 Hours

Grouping the Items in a Report Filter, Grouping Text Items, Grouping Dates by Month, Grouping Dates
Using the Starting Date, Grouping Dates by Fiscal Quarter, Grouping Dates by Week, Grouping Dates by
Months and Weeks, Grouping Dates in One Pivot Table Affects Another Pivot Table, Grouping Dates
Outside the Range.
SORTING AND FILTERING PIVOT TABLE DATA 4 Hours

Sorting a Pivot Field: Sorting Value Items, Sorting Text Items, Sorting Items in a Custom Order. Filtering
a Pivot Field: Manual Filter, Label Filter, Value Filter, Multiple Filters.
CALCULATIONS WITHIN THE PIVOT TABLES 5 Hours

Using Formulae: Creating a Calculated Field with and without IF Condition, Calculated Item, Using
Custom Calculations: % of Column, % of Row, % of Total, % Of, Running Total, Difference From, %
Difference From, Index.
PIVOT CHARTS 3 Hours

Creating a Normal Chart from Pivot Table Data, Filtering the Pivot Chart, Changing the Series Order,
Changing Pivot Chart Layout Affects Pivot Table, Changing Number Format in Pivot Table Affects Pivot
Chart, Converting a Pivot Chart to a Static Chart, Refreshing the Pivot Chart, Creating Multiple Series for
Years
Total: 20 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Debra Dalgleish, Excel 2007 - PivotTables Recipes A Problem-Solution Approach, Apress,

2007, (ISBN-13 (pbk): 978-1-59059-920-4)
2. Bill Felen and Michael Alexander, Pivot Table Data Crunching for Microsoft Office 2007,
Pearson Education, Inc., QUE Series.
3. Wayne L. Winston, Microsoft Office Excel 2007: Data Analysis and Business Modeling,
Microsoft Press, 2007
4. John Walkenbach, Microsoft Office Excel 2007, Wiley Publishing, Inc. 2007
5. Mark Dodgeand Craig Stinson, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Inside Out, Microsoft Press, 2007
6. Curtis D. Frye, Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Step by Step, Microsoft Press, 2007
BRIDGE COURSES
15EIB01 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL AND

ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
Course Objectives
To understand the basic concepts of electric circuits and magnetic circuits.
To analyze the difference between DC and AC circuits.
To Learn the fundamentals of semiconductors and BJT.

1. Understand the basic concepts of DC and AC circuits
2. Acquire knowledge in electrical machines.
3. Learn the fundamentals of semiconductor diode and its applications.
4. Analyze the characteristics of BJT.
UNIT I 6 Hours
DC CIRCUITS
Definition of Voltage, Current, Power, Energy, Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor-Ohm's law-statement,
Illustration and limitation - Kirchoff's Laws statement and Illustration-Resistance in series and voltage
division technique - Resistance in parallel and current division technique
UNIT II 6 Hours
AC CIRCUITS
Generation of single phase alternating emf - RMS value, average value, peak factor and form factor -
Analysis of Pure Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive circuits - J operator - Representation of alternating
quantities in rectangular and polar forms
UNIT III 6 Hours

ELECTRICAL MACHINES
Constructional details of DC Machines - Principle of operation of D.C. generator - Methods of excitation -
Self and separately excited generators - Principle of operation of D.C. motor - Transformer Constructional
details - Principle of operation
UNIT IV 6 Hours
SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Semiconductor theory - Theory of P-N junction diode - Volt-Ampere Characteristics - Half wave and full
wave rectifier - Average value - RMS value - Form factor - Peak factor - Ripple factor - Efficiency - Peak
inverse voltage - Transformer utilization factor
UNIT V 6 Hours
Structure and working of Bipolar Junction Transistor - Input and output characteristics of CE, CB and CC
configurations
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. T. K. Nagsarkar and M. S. Sukhija, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford University
Press, 2014
2. Smarjith Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2012
3. Sudhakar, Shyammohan S Palli, Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hill,
2010
4. William H.Hayt Jr, Jack E.Kemmerly, and Steven M.Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata
McGrawHill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
5. Jacob. Millman, Christos C.Halkias, Satyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2011
6. R. S. Sedha, A Textbook of Applied Electronics, S.Chand & Company Ltd, 2013
15EIB02 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

Course Objectives
To formulate the solution for basic electric circuit problems.
To compute electrical parameters like current, voltage and power using network theorems for AC
and DC circuits.
To differentiate single phase and three phase circuits.
To analyze R, L, C components for resonance, coupling and transient response.

1. Find solution for electric circuit problems using mesh and node analysis.
2. Use network theorems to find solutions for AC and DC circuits.
3. Classify three phase circuits based on the loads in each phase.
4. Identify the behavior of circuits like resonance, coupling and transients.
UNIT I 6 Hours
GRAPH THEORY AND BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
The graph of a Network, definitions of tree, co-tree, link, basic loop - Concepts of Impedance and
Admittance - Mesh and Nodal analysis
UNIT II 7 Hours
NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS
Superposition theorem - Thevenin's and Norton's theorem - Maximum power transfer theorem- Reciprocity
theorem
UNIT III 5 Hours

THREE PHASE CIRCUITS
Three Phase balanced and unbalanced systems - Analysis of 3 wire and 4 wire circuit with star and delta
connected loads - Phasor diagram
6 Hour
UNIT IV
RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS
Series and parallel resonance - Q factor and bandwidth - Resonant frequency of a tank circuit - Coupled
circuits - Self and mutual inductances - Coefficient of Coupling - Analysis of coupled circuits
UNIT V 6 Hours
TRANSIENTS
Introduction - Transient Response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits with step and sinusoidal inputs - Time
Constant Analysis.
Total: 30 Hours
Reference(s)
1. William H. Hayt, Jack E. Kemmerly, and Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Eighth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Fifth Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.
3. Charles K.Alexander, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd, 2013.

Be Eie 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Be Eie 2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Be Eie 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.E.

(Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering)

BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Mapping of PEOs and POs xxv

Connectivity Chart xxvi

Syllabi (I VIII Semesters) 9

1.2 Lateral Entry Admission

3. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME

of the Controller of Examinations. However one credit courses completed during I

4. VALUE ADDED COURSES / ADD-ON COURSES

5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

6. COURSE ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION

6.4 Flexibility to Add or Drop courses

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR THE END SEMESTER

of the members as the Course Coordinator, nominated by the Head of the

10. SYSTEM OF EXAMINATION

11. PASSING REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS

12. ASSESSMENT AND AWARD OF LETTER GRADES

Range of Total Marks (as

RA ---Reappearance registration is required for that particular course

gi : Grade Point secured corresponding to the course.

13. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED

14. WITHDRAWAL FROM THE EXAMINATION

15. AUTHORIZED BREAK OF STUDY FROM A PROGRAMME

middle of programme of study, for reasons such as personal accident or

16. SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT

II THEORY COURSES WITH LAB COMPONENT Marks

III LABORATORY COURSES Marks

IV TECHNICAL SEMINAR Marks

VI LANGUAGE ELECTIVE Marks

VII ONE-CREDIT COURSE Marks

VIII MINI-PROJECT Marks

IX LIFE SKILLS Marks

X VALUE ADDED / CERTIFICATE COURSES Marks

XI ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Marks

17. FIELD / INDUSTRIAL VISIT / INTERNSHIP

18. PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT

20. REVISION OF REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVIES (PEOs)

After few years (3 to 5 years) of graduation, our graduates are expected to

I Work in multidisciplinary engineering automation domain, allied industries, software

II Pursue their higher studies/research at the reputed institution in India /abroad

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

(a) Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

(b) Problem analysis: Design/conduct of experiments by analyzing the problems in

(c) Design/development of solutions: an ability to design a system, component, or

(d) Conduct investigations of complex problems: To involve in research / industry

(g) Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of automation on global,

(i) Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual or as a

(j) Communication: To communicate effectively in verbal and non-verbal forms

(k) Project management and finance: Apply engineering management principles,

Programme Specific Outcomes (PSOs)

(n) Apply instrumentation systems and advanced controllers for automation

MAPPING OF PEOs AND POs

Design Mini Project V

Industrial Microprocessor Control

Electron Digital Logic Fluid mechanics &

Basics of Civil C Engineering

General Electives (I to IX) are the courses offered by the department.